ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide

ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide
ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
[email protected]
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Release 14.5
October 2012
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.
Copyright and Trademark Information

2012 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.
U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... xxi
1. About this Manual ............................................................................................................................ xxi
2. Document Conventions ................................................................................................................... xxii
2.1. Spelling Conventions .............................................................................................................. xxiii
3. Accessing Help ................................................................................................................................ xxiv
4. Contact Information ......................................................................................................................... xxv
1. Overview of CFD-Post ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. CFD-Post Features and Functionality ................................................................................................. 1
1.2. Advanced Features ........................................................................................................................... 2
1.3. Next Steps... ...................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Starting CFD-Post .................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1. Starting CFD-Post with the ANSYS CFX Launcher ............................................................................... 3
2.1.1. Valid Syntax in CFD-Post ........................................................................................................... 4
2.2. Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line ....................................................................................... 4
2.2.1. Optional Command Line Arguments ........................................................................................ 4
2.3. Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables ............................................................. 6
2.4. Running in Batch Mode ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.1. Example: Pressure Calculation on Multiple Files using Batch Mode ............................................ 9
3. CFD-Post Graphical Interface ................................................................................................................ 13
3.1. Graphical Objects ........................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.1. Creating and Editing New Objects .......................................................................................... 14
3.1.2. Selecting Objects ................................................................................................................... 15
3.1.3. Object Visibility ...................................................................................................................... 15
3.2. Common Outline View Shortcuts .................................................................................................... 16
3.3. Details Views .................................................................................................................................. 16
3.4. Outline Workspace .......................................................................................................................... 17
3.4.1. Outline Tree View Shortcuts .................................................................................................... 18
3.4.2. Outline Details View ............................................................................................................... 19
3.4.2.1. Geometry Details Tab .................................................................................................... 19
3.4.2.1.1. Selecting Domains ................................................................................................ 19
3.4.2.2. Color Details Tab ............................................................................................................ 19
3.4.2.2.1. Mode: Constant ..................................................................................................... 19
3.4.2.2.2. Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable ..................................................................... 20
3.4.2.2.3. Range ................................................................................................................... 20
3.4.2.2.4. Hybrid/Conservative ............................................................................................. 20
3.4.2.2.5. Color Scale ............................................................................................................ 20
3.4.2.2.6. Color Map ............................................................................................................. 20
3.4.2.2.6.1. Accessing the CFD-Post Color Map Editor ...................................................... 21
3.4.2.2.7. Undefined Color ................................................................................................... 21
3.4.2.3. Symbol Details Tab ........................................................................................................ 21
3.4.2.3.1. Symbol ................................................................................................................. 21
3.4.2.3.2. Symbol size .......................................................................................................... 21
3.4.2.4. Render Details Tab ......................................................................................................... 21
3.4.2.4.1. Show Faces ........................................................................................................... 22
3.4.2.4.2. Show Faces: Transparency ..................................................................................... 22
3.4.2.4.3. Show Faces: Draw Mode ........................................................................................ 22
3.4.2.4.4. Show Faces: Face Culling ....................................................................................... 22
3.4.2.4.5. Show Faces: Lighting ............................................................................................. 24
3.4.2.4.6. Show Faces: Specular Lighting ............................................................................... 24
3.4.2.4.7. Show Mesh Lines .................................................................................................. 24
Release 14.5 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
iii
User's Guide
3.4.2.4.8. Show Mesh Lines: Edge Angle ............................................................................... 24
3.4.2.4.9. Show Mesh Lines: Line Width ................................................................................. 24
3.4.2.4.10. Show Mesh Lines: Color Mode ............................................................................. 24
3.4.2.4.11. Show Mesh Lines: Line Color ................................................................................ 24
3.4.2.4.12. Apply Texture ...................................................................................................... 24
3.4.2.4.13. Apply Texture: Predefined Textures ...................................................................... 24
3.4.2.4.14. Apply Texture: Custom Textures ........................................................................... 25
3.4.2.4.15. Apply Texture: Texture Examples .......................................................................... 25
3.4.2.5. View Details Tab ............................................................................................................ 26
3.4.2.5.1. Apply Rotation Check Box ..................................................................................... 26
3.4.2.5.1.1. Method, Axis, From, To .................................................................................. 26
3.4.2.5.1.2. Angle ........................................................................................................... 26
3.4.2.5.2. Apply Translation Check Box ................................................................................. 26
3.4.2.5.3. Apply Reflection/Mirroring Check Box ................................................................... 26
3.4.2.5.4. Apply Scale Check Box .......................................................................................... 26
3.4.2.5.5. Apply Instancing Transform Check Box .................................................................. 26
3.4.3. Case Branch ........................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.3.1. Domain Details View ...................................................................................................... 27
3.4.3.1.1. Instancing Details Tab ........................................................................................... 27
3.4.3.1.2. Info Details Tab ..................................................................................................... 27
3.4.3.2. Boundary and Subdomain ............................................................................................. 27
3.4.3.3. Mesh Regions ................................................................................................................ 28
3.4.4. User Locations and Plots ......................................................................................................... 28
3.4.4.1. Wireframe ..................................................................................................................... 28
3.4.4.1.1. Wireframe: Definition Tab ...................................................................................... 28
3.4.4.1.2. Wireframe: View Tab .............................................................................................. 29
3.4.5. Report ................................................................................................................................... 29
3.4.5.1. Omitting Default Report Sections .................................................................................. 32
3.4.5.2. Changing the Default Report Sections ........................................................................... 32
3.4.5.3. Adding New Sections to a Report ................................................................................... 33
3.4.5.4. Report Templates .......................................................................................................... 34
3.4.5.4.1. Turbo Report Templates ........................................................................................ 35
3.4.5.4.1.1. Procedures for Using Turbo Reports when Turbomachinery Data is Missing ............................................................................................................................... 37
3.4.5.4.2. Choosing a Turbo Report ....................................................................................... 38
3.4.5.5. Creating, Viewing, and Publishing Reports ...................................................................... 40
3.4.5.5.1. Report Object ....................................................................................................... 40
3.4.5.5.1.1. Figures: File Type .......................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.1.2. Figures: Figure Size ....................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.1.3. Figures: Width and Height ............................................................................. 41
3.4.5.5.1.4. Figures: Fit All Figures in the Viewport Before Generation Check Box .............. 41
3.4.5.5.1.5. Charts: File Type ........................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.1.6. Charts: Chart Size ......................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.1.7. Charts: Width and Height .............................................................................. 41
3.4.5.5.2. Title Page Object ................................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.2.1. Custom Logo Check Box ............................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.2.2. Custom Logo ............................................................................................... 41
3.4.5.5.2.3. ANSYS Logo Check Box ................................................................................. 41
3.4.5.5.2.4. Title ............................................................................................................. 41
3.4.5.5.2.5. Author ......................................................................................................... 42
3.4.5.5.2.6. Current Date Check Box ................................................................................ 42
3.4.5.5.2.7. Table of Contents Check Box ......................................................................... 42
iv
User's Guide
3.4.5.5.2.8.Table of Contents Check Box: Captions in Table of Contents Check Box ........... 42
3.4.5.5.3. File Report Object ................................................................................................. 42
3.4.5.5.4. Mesh Report Object .............................................................................................. 42
3.4.5.5.5. Physics Report Object ........................................................................................... 42
3.4.5.5.6. Solution Report Object ......................................................................................... 42
3.4.5.5.7. Adding Objects to the Report ................................................................................ 43
3.4.5.5.8. Controlling the Content in the Report .................................................................... 43
3.4.5.5.9. Refreshing the Report ........................................................................................... 43
3.4.5.5.10. Viewing the Report ............................................................................................. 44
3.4.5.5.11. Publishing the Report ......................................................................................... 44
3.4.5.5.11.1. Format ....................................................................................................... 44
3.4.5.5.11.2. File ............................................................................................................. 44
3.4.5.5.11.3. Save Images in Separate Directory Check Box .............................................. 44
3.4.5.5.11.4. Generate CFD Viewer files (CVF) for Figures Check Box ................................ 44
3.4.5.5.11.5. More Options Button .................................................................................. 45
3.4.6. Display Properties and Defaults .............................................................................................. 45
3.5. Variables Workspace ....................................................................................................................... 45
3.5.1. Variables Tree View ................................................................................................................. 45
3.5.2. Variables Details View ............................................................................................................. 46
3.5.2.1. Fundamental Variables .................................................................................................. 47
3.5.2.1.1. Saving Variables Back to the Results File ................................................................ 47
3.5.2.2. Radius and Theta ........................................................................................................... 48
3.5.2.3. Boundary-Value-Only Variables ...................................................................................... 48
3.5.2.4. User Variables ................................................................................................................ 48
3.5.3. Variables: Example .................................................................................................................. 50
3.6. Expressions Workspace ................................................................................................................... 51
3.6.1. Expressions Tree View ............................................................................................................. 52
3.6.2. Expressions Workspace: Expressions Details View .................................................................... 52
3.6.2.1. Expression Definition Tab ............................................................................................... 52
3.6.2.2. Plot Expression Tab ........................................................................................................ 53
3.6.2.3. Evaluate Expression Tab ................................................................................................. 53
3.6.3. Expressions Workspace: Example ............................................................................................ 53
3.6.3.1. Further Expressions ....................................................................................................... 54
3.7. Calculators Workspace .................................................................................................................... 54
3.8. Turbo Workspace ............................................................................................................................ 55
4. CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench ............................................................................................................. 57
4.1. The ANSYS Workbench Interface ..................................................................................................... 57
4.1.1. Toolbox .................................................................................................................................. 58
4.1.2. Project Schematic: Introduction .............................................................................................. 59
4.1.3. View Bar ................................................................................................................................. 60
4.1.4. Properties View ...................................................................................................................... 60
4.1.5. Files View ............................................................................................................................... 61
4.1.6. Sidebar Help .......................................................................................................................... 62
4.1.7. Shortcuts (Context Menu Options) .......................................................................................... 62
4.2. File Operation Differences ............................................................................................................... 62
4.3. An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench .............................................. 63
4.4. Using ANSYS Workbench Journaling and Scripting with CFD-Post .................................................... 66
4.4.1. Acquiring a Journal File with CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench ................................................... 66
4.4.1.1. Journal of an Operation That Creates a Plane in CFD-Post ............................................... 66
4.4.2. Scripting ................................................................................................................................ 68
4.4.2.1. Example: Using a Script to Change an Existing Locator .................................................... 68
4.5. Tips on Using ANSYS Workbench ..................................................................................................... 68
User's Guide
4.5.1. General Tips ........................................................................................................................... 68
4.5.1.1. ANSYS Workbench Interface .......................................................................................... 68
4.5.1.2. Setting Units ................................................................................................................. 69
4.5.1.3. Files View ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.5.1.4. ANSYS Workbench Connections ..................................................................................... 69
4.5.2. Tips for Results Systems .......................................................................................................... 69
4.5.2.1. Changes in Behavior ...................................................................................................... 69
4.5.2.2. Duplicating Systems ...................................................................................................... 69
4.5.2.3. Renaming Systems ........................................................................................................ 69
4.5.2.4. Results Cell .................................................................................................................... 70
4.5.2.5. Recovering After Deleting Files ...................................................................................... 70
4.5.2.6. License Sharing ............................................................................................................. 70
5. CFD-Post 3D Viewer .............................................................................................................................. 71
5.1. Object Visibility ............................................................................................................................... 72
5.2. 3D Viewer Modes and Commands ................................................................................................... 73
5.2.1. 3D Viewer Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 73
5.2.2. CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus ...................................................................................... 75
5.2.2.1. Shortcuts for CFD-Post (Viewer Background) .................................................................. 75
5.2.2.2. Shortcuts for CFD-Post (Viewer Object) .......................................................................... 76
5.2.3. Viewer Hotkeys ...................................................................................................................... 77
5.2.4. Mouse Button Mapping .......................................................................................................... 78
5.2.5. Picking Mode ......................................................................................................................... 79
5.2.5.1. Selecting Objects .......................................................................................................... 80
5.2.5.2. Moving Objects ............................................................................................................. 80
5.3. Views and Figures ........................................................................................................................... 80
5.3.1. Creating a Figure .................................................................................................................... 81
5.3.1.1. Copying Objects for Figures ........................................................................................... 81
5.3.2. Switching to a View or Figure .................................................................................................. 81
5.3.3. Changing the Definition of a View or Figure ............................................................................ 81
5.3.4. Deleting a Figure .................................................................................................................... 81
5.3.5. Views ..................................................................................................................................... 82
5.3.5.1. Object Visibility ............................................................................................................. 82
5.3.5.2. Legends ........................................................................................................................ 83
5.4. Stereo Viewer ................................................................................................................................. 83
6. CFD-Post Workflow ............................................................................................................................... 85
6.1. Loading and Viewing the Solver Results ........................................................................................... 85
6.2. Qualitative Displays of Variables ...................................................................................................... 85
6.3. Analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 86
6.4. Quantitative Analysis of Results ....................................................................................................... 86
6.5. Sharing the Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 86
6.6. Typical Workflow ............................................................................................................................. 87
7. CFD-Post File Menu ............................................................................................................................... 89
7.1. Load Results Command .................................................................................................................. 89
7.2. Close Command ............................................................................................................................. 92
7.3. Load State Command ..................................................................................................................... 92
7.4. Save State Command and Save State As Command ......................................................................... 93
7.5. Save Project Command ................................................................................................................... 93
7.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only) ................................................................................... 93
7.7. Import Commands .......................................................................................................................... 93
7.7.1. Import Surface or Line Data .................................................................................................... 94
7.7.2. Import FLUENT Particle Track File ............................................................................................ 95
7.7.3. Import Mechanical CDB Surface ............................................................................................. 95
vi
User's Guide
7.7.3.1. File ................................................................................................................................ 95
7.7.3.2. Length Units .................................................................................................................. 95
7.7.3.3. Specify Associated Boundary Check Box ......................................................................... 95
7.7.3.3.1. Boundary .............................................................................................................. 95
7.7.3.4. Maintain Conservative Heat Flows Check Box ................................................................. 96
7.7.3.5. Read Mid-Side Nodes Check Box .................................................................................... 96
7.7.3.6. Mapping Success Label .................................................................................................. 96
7.8. Export Commands .......................................................................................................................... 96
7.8.1. Export .................................................................................................................................... 96
7.8.1.1. Export: Options Tab ....................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.1. File ....................................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.2. Type ..................................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.3. Locations .............................................................................................................. 97
7.8.1.1.4. Name Aliases ........................................................................................................ 97
7.8.1.1.5. Coord Frame ......................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.6. Unit System .......................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.7. Boundary Vals ....................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1.1.8. Export Geometry Information Check Box ............................................................... 98
7.8.1.1.8.1. Line and Face Connectivity Check Box .......................................................... 98
7.8.1.1.8.2. Node Numbers Check Box ............................................................................ 98
7.8.1.1.9. Profile Type ........................................................................................................... 98
7.8.1.1.10. Spatial Fields List Box .......................................................................................... 98
7.8.1.1.11. Select Variable(s) List Box .................................................................................... 98
7.8.1.2. Export: Formatting Tab ................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1.2.1. Vector Variables .................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1.2.1.1. Vector Display Options ................................................................................. 99
7.8.1.2.1.2. Brackets ....................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1.2.2. Include Nodes With Undefined Variable Check Box ................................................ 99
7.8.1.2.2.1. Null Token .................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1.2.3. Precision ............................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1.2.4. Separator .............................................................................................................. 99
7.8.1.2.5. Include File Info Header Check Box ........................................................................ 99
7.8.1.2.6. Include Header Check Box ................................................................................... 100
7.8.1.3. Exporting Polyline Data ............................................................................................... 100
7.8.1.3.1. POLYLINE Data Format ........................................................................................ 100
7.8.1.4. Exporting Boundary Profile / Surface Data .................................................................... 101
7.8.1.4.1. USER SURFACE Data Format ................................................................................ 101
7.8.2. Export External Data File ....................................................................................................... 101
7.8.2.1. Options Tab ................................................................................................................. 102
7.8.2.1.1. File ..................................................................................................................... 102
7.8.2.1.2. Location ............................................................................................................. 102
7.8.2.1.3. Unit System ........................................................................................................ 102
7.8.2.1.4. Boundary Data .................................................................................................... 102
7.8.2.1.5. Select Recommended Variables ........................................................................... 102
7.8.2.1.6. Select Additional Variables .................................................................................. 104
7.8.2.2. Formatting Tab ............................................................................................................ 104
7.8.3. Export Mechanical Load File ................................................................................................. 104
7.8.3.1. Options Tab ................................................................................................................. 105
7.8.3.1.1. File ..................................................................................................................... 105
7.8.3.1.2. Location ............................................................................................................. 105
7.8.3.1.3. Unit System ........................................................................................................ 105
7.8.3.1.4. Boundary Vals ..................................................................................................... 105
vii
User's Guide
7.8.3.1.5. Export Data ......................................................................................................... 105
7.8.3.1.6. Fluids .................................................................................................................. 106
7.8.3.1.7. Specify Reference Temperature ........................................................................... 106
7.8.3.2. Formatting Tab ............................................................................................................ 106
7.9. Mechanical Import/Export Commands .......................................................................................... 106
7.9.1. Mechanical Import/Export Example: One-Way FSI Data Transfer ............................................. 106
7.10. FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping .................................................... 107
7.11. Report Command ....................................................................................................................... 108
7.12. Save Picture Command ............................................................................................................... 109
7.13. Loading Recently Accessed Files .................................................................................................. 111
7.14. Quit Command ........................................................................................................................... 111
7.15. File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post .................................................................................. 111
7.15.1. Transient Blade Row Postprocessing ................................................................................... 111
7.15.2. ANSYS CFX Files .................................................................................................................. 112
7.15.3. ANSYS Meshing Files .......................................................................................................... 114
7.15.4. CFX-4 Dump Files ............................................................................................................... 114
7.15.4.1. Limitation with CFX-4 Files ......................................................................................... 114
7.15.4.2. Interpolation of Results .............................................................................................. 114
7.15.5. CFX-TASCflow Results Files ................................................................................................. 115
7.15.5.1. Limitations with CFX-TASCflow Files ........................................................................... 115
7.15.5.2. Variable Translation .................................................................................................... 116
7.15.6. ANSYS Files ........................................................................................................................ 117
7.15.6.1. Limitations with ANSYS Files ...................................................................................... 117
7.15.7. ANSYS Icepak Files .............................................................................................................. 119
7.15.8. CGNS Files .......................................................................................................................... 120
7.15.9. FLUENT Files ....................................................................................................................... 120
7.15.10. Limitations with FLUENT Files ........................................................................................... 121
7.15.10.1. Quantitative Differences Between FLUENT and CFD-Post .......................................... 126
8. CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences) .................................................................................. 129
8.1. Undo and Redo ............................................................................................................................. 129
8.2. Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog .................................................................................. 130
8.2.1. CFD-Post Options ................................................................................................................. 130
8.2.1.1. Interpolation Tolerance ................................................................................................ 131
8.2.1.2. Angular Shift for Transient Rotating Domains ............................................................... 131
8.2.1.3. Enable Beta Features .................................................................................................... 131
8.2.1.4. Files ............................................................................................................................. 131
8.2.1.5. CFD-Post Solution Units ............................................................................................... 133
8.2.1.6. Turbo .......................................................................................................................... 133
8.2.1.7. Viewer ......................................................................................................................... 133
8.2.1.7.1. Object Highlighting ............................................................................................ 134
8.2.1.7.2. Background ........................................................................................................ 134
8.2.1.7.2.1. Color .......................................................................................................... 134
8.2.1.7.2.2. Image ........................................................................................................ 134
8.2.1.7.3. Other Viewer Options .......................................................................................... 134
8.2.1.7.3.1. Text/Edge Color .......................................................................................... 134
8.2.1.7.3.2. Axis/Ruler Visibility ..................................................................................... 135
8.2.1.7.3.3. Hide ANSYS Logo ....................................................................................... 135
8.2.1.7.4. Stereo ................................................................................................................. 135
8.2.1.8. Advanced .................................................................................................................... 135
8.2.1.9. ANSYS Import: Read 3D elements when CDB file has both 2D and 3D types ................... 135
8.2.2. Common Options ................................................................................................................. 135
8.2.2.1. Appearance ................................................................................................................. 135
viii
User's Guide
8.2.2.2. Viewer Setup ............................................................................................................... 136
8.2.2.2.1. Double Buffering ................................................................................................ 136
8.2.2.2.2. Unlimited Zoom .................................................................................................. 136
8.2.2.3. Mouse Mapping .......................................................................................................... 136
8.2.2.4. Setting the Display Units .............................................................................................. 136
9. CFD-Post Session Menu ....................................................................................................................... 139
9.1. New Session Command ................................................................................................................ 139
9.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands ............................................................................ 140
9.3. Play Session Command ................................................................................................................. 140
10. CFD-Post Insert Menu ....................................................................................................................... 141
10.1. Location Submenu ...................................................................................................................... 142
10.1.1. Point Command ................................................................................................................. 142
10.1.1.1. Point: Geometry ......................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1.1.2.1. Method .................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1.1.2.2. Point ........................................................................................................ 144
10.1.1.1.2.3. Node Number .......................................................................................... 144
10.1.1.1.2.4. Location ................................................................................................... 144
10.1.1.1.2.5. Variable .................................................................................................... 144
10.1.1.1.3. Nearest Node Value ........................................................................................... 144
10.1.1.2. Point: Color ................................................................................................................ 145
10.1.1.3. Point: Symbol ............................................................................................................. 145
10.1.1.3.1. Symbol ............................................................................................................. 145
10.1.1.3.2. Symbol Size ...................................................................................................... 145
10.1.1.4. Point: Render ............................................................................................................. 145
10.1.1.5. Point: View ................................................................................................................. 145
10.1.2. Point Cloud Command ....................................................................................................... 145
10.1.2.1. Point Cloud: Geometry ............................................................................................... 146
10.1.2.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 146
10.1.2.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 146
10.1.2.1.2.1. Locations ................................................................................................. 146
10.1.2.1.2.2. Sampling .................................................................................................. 146
10.1.2.1.2.3. # of Points ................................................................................................ 147
10.1.2.1.2.4. Spacing .................................................................................................... 147
10.1.2.1.2.5. Aspect Ratio ............................................................................................. 147
10.1.2.1.2.6. Grid Angle ................................................................................................ 147
10.1.2.1.2.7. Reduction ................................................................................................ 147
10.1.2.1.2.8. Max Points ............................................................................................... 147
10.1.2.1.2.9. Factor ....................................................................................................... 147
10.1.2.1.2.10. Seed ....................................................................................................... 147
10.1.2.2. Point Cloud: Color ...................................................................................................... 148
10.1.2.3. Point Cloud: Symbol ................................................................................................... 148
10.1.2.4. Point Cloud: Render ................................................................................................... 148
10.1.2.5. Point Cloud: View ....................................................................................................... 148
10.1.3. Line Command ................................................................................................................... 148
10.1.3.1. Line: Geometry .......................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.2.1. Method .................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.2.2. Point 1 ..................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.2.3. Point 2 ..................................................................................................... 149
ix
User's Guide
10.1.3.1.3. Line Type .......................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.3.1. Cut/Sample Options ................................................................................. 149
10.1.3.1.3.2. Samples ................................................................................................... 149
10.1.3.1.4. Line Translation Using Picking Mode .................................................................. 149
10.1.3.2. Line: Color ................................................................................................................. 150
10.1.3.3. Line: Render ............................................................................................................... 150
10.1.3.4. Line: View .................................................................................................................. 150
10.1.4. Plane Command ................................................................................................................. 150
10.1.4.1. Plane: Geometry ........................................................................................................ 150
10.1.4.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 150
10.1.4.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 150
10.1.4.1.2.1. Method .................................................................................................... 150
10.1.4.1.2.2. X .............................................................................................................. 151
10.1.4.1.2.3. Y .............................................................................................................. 151
10.1.4.1.2.4. Z .............................................................................................................. 151
10.1.4.1.2.5. Point ........................................................................................................ 151
10.1.4.1.2.6. Normal ..................................................................................................... 151
10.1.4.1.2.7. Point 1, Point 2, and Point 3 ....................................................................... 151
10.1.4.1.3. Plane Bounds .................................................................................................... 152
10.1.4.1.3.1. Type ......................................................................................................... 152
10.1.4.1.3.2. Radius ...................................................................................................... 152
10.1.4.1.3.3. X/Y/Z Size ................................................................................................. 152
10.1.4.1.3.4. X/Y/Z Angle .............................................................................................. 153
10.1.4.1.3.5. Invert Plane Bound Check Box .................................................................. 153
10.1.4.1.4. Plane Type ........................................................................................................ 153
10.1.4.1.4.1. Slice Option .............................................................................................. 153
10.1.4.1.4.2. Sample Option ......................................................................................... 153
10.1.4.1.5. Plane Translation using Picking Mode ................................................................ 153
10.1.4.2. Plane: Color ............................................................................................................... 153
10.1.4.3. Plane: Render ............................................................................................................. 154
10.1.4.4. Plane: View ................................................................................................................ 154
10.1.5. Volume Command .............................................................................................................. 154
10.1.5.1. Volume: Geometry ..................................................................................................... 154
10.1.5.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 154
10.1.5.1.2. Element Types ................................................................................................... 154
10.1.5.1.3. Definition ......................................................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.1. Method .................................................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.2. Point ........................................................................................................ 155
10.1.5.1.3.3. Radius ...................................................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.4. Location ................................................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.5. Variable .................................................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.6. Hybrid/Conservative Options .................................................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.7. Mode (for the Sphere and From Surface options) ....................................... 155
10.1.5.1.3.8. Mode (for the Isovolume option) ............................................................... 156
10.1.5.1.3.9. Value Text Boxes ....................................................................................... 156
10.1.5.1.4. Inclusive Check Box ........................................................................................... 156
10.1.5.1.5. How CFD-Post Calculates Isovolumes ................................................................. 156
10.1.5.2. Volume: Color ............................................................................................................ 158
10.1.5.3. Volume: Render .......................................................................................................... 158
10.1.5.4. Volume: View ............................................................................................................. 158
10.1.6. Isosurface Command .......................................................................................................... 158
10.1.6.1. Isosurface: Geometry ................................................................................................. 159
User's Guide
10.1.6.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 159
10.1.6.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 159
10.1.6.1.2.1. Variable .................................................................................................... 159
10.1.6.1.2.2. Hybrid/Conservative Option ..................................................................... 159
10.1.6.1.2.3. Value ........................................................................................................ 159
10.1.6.2. Isosurface: Color ........................................................................................................ 159
10.1.6.3. Isosurface: Render ...................................................................................................... 159
10.1.6.4. Isosurface: View ......................................................................................................... 159
10.1.7. Iso Clip Command .............................................................................................................. 160
10.1.7.1. Iso Clip: Geometry ...................................................................................................... 160
10.1.7.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 160
10.1.7.1.2. Location ............................................................................................................ 161
10.1.7.1.3. Visibility Parameters .......................................................................................... 161
10.1.7.2. Iso Clip: Color ............................................................................................................. 161
10.1.7.3. Iso Clip: Render .......................................................................................................... 161
10.1.7.4. Iso Clip: View .............................................................................................................. 161
10.1.8. Vortex Core Region ............................................................................................................. 161
10.1.8.1. Vortex Core Region: Geometry ................................................................................... 162
10.1.8.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 162
10.1.8.1.2. Definition Area .................................................................................................. 162
10.1.8.1.2.1. Method .................................................................................................... 162
10.1.8.1.2.1.1. Vortex Core Mathematics ................................................................. 163
10.1.8.1.2.1.2. Vortex Core References .................................................................... 167
10.1.8.1.2.2. Level ........................................................................................................ 168
10.1.8.1.2.3. Actual Value ............................................................................................. 168
10.1.8.2. Vortex Core Region: Color ........................................................................................... 168
10.1.8.3. Vortex Core Region: Render ........................................................................................ 168
10.1.8.4. Vortex Core Region: View ........................................................................................... 168
10.1.9. Surface of Revolution Command ......................................................................................... 168
10.1.9.1. Surface of Revolution: Geometry ................................................................................ 169
10.1.9.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 169
10.1.9.1.2. Definition ......................................................................................................... 169
10.1.9.1.2.1. Method .................................................................................................... 169
10.1.9.1.2.2. Point 1 (a,r) and Point 2 (a,r) ...................................................................... 169
10.1.9.1.2.3. Line .......................................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.2.4. # of Samples ............................................................................................. 170
10.1.9.1.2.5. Theta Samples .......................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.2.6. Project to AR Plane Check Box ................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.3. Rotation Axis ..................................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.3.1. Method .................................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.3.2. Axis .......................................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.3.3. From/To Text Boxes ................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.4. Angle Range Check Box ..................................................................................... 170
10.1.9.1.4.1. Min./Max. Angle ....................................................................................... 171
10.1.9.1.5. Axial/Radial Offset ............................................................................................. 171
10.1.9.1.5.1. Start/End A ............................................................................................... 171
10.1.9.1.5.2. Start/End R ............................................................................................... 171
10.1.9.2. Surface of Revolution: Color ....................................................................................... 171
10.1.9.3. Surface of Revolution: Render .................................................................................... 171
10.1.9.4. Surface of Revolution: View ........................................................................................ 171
10.1.10. Polyline Command ........................................................................................................... 172
10.1.10.1. Polyline: Geometry ................................................................................................... 172
xi
User's Guide
10.1.10.1.1. Method ........................................................................................................... 172
10.1.10.1.2. File .................................................................................................................. 173
10.1.10.1.3. Domains ......................................................................................................... 173
10.1.10.1.4. Boundary List .................................................................................................. 173
10.1.10.1.5. Intersect With .................................................................................................. 173
10.1.10.1.6. Contour Name ................................................................................................ 173
10.1.10.1.7. Contour Level .................................................................................................. 173
10.1.10.2. Polyline: Color .......................................................................................................... 174
10.1.10.3. Polyline: Render ....................................................................................................... 174
10.1.10.4. Polyline: View ........................................................................................................... 174
10.1.11. User Surface Command .................................................................................................... 174
10.1.11.1. User Surface: Geometry ............................................................................................ 175
10.1.11.1.1. Method ........................................................................................................... 175
10.1.11.1.2. File .................................................................................................................. 175
10.1.11.1.3. Domains/Boundary List/Intersect With ............................................................. 176
10.1.11.1.4. Contour Name/Contour Level .......................................................................... 176
10.1.11.1.5. Surface Name .................................................................................................. 176
10.1.11.1.6. Rotation Check Box ......................................................................................... 176
10.1.11.1.7. Translation Check Box ...................................................................................... 176
10.1.11.1.8. Scale Check Box .............................................................................................. 176
10.1.11.1.9. Type ................................................................................................................ 176
10.1.11.1.10. Mode ............................................................................................................ 176
10.1.11.1.11. Distance ........................................................................................................ 177
10.1.11.1.12. Variable ......................................................................................................... 177
10.1.11.1.13. Direction ....................................................................................................... 177
10.1.11.1.14. Specify Associated Boundary Check Box ........................................................ 178
10.1.11.2. User Surface: Color ................................................................................................... 178
10.1.11.3. User Surface: Render ................................................................................................ 178
10.1.11.4. User Surface: View .................................................................................................... 178
10.1.12. Surface Group Command ................................................................................................. 178
10.1.12.1. Surface Group: Geometry ......................................................................................... 178
10.1.12.1.1. Domains ......................................................................................................... 178
10.1.12.1.2. Locations ........................................................................................................ 179
10.1.12.2. Surface Group: Color ................................................................................................ 179
10.1.12.3. Surface Group: Render ............................................................................................. 179
10.1.12.4. Surface Group: View ................................................................................................. 179
10.1.13. Turbo Surface Command .................................................................................................. 179
10.1.14. Turbo Line Command ....................................................................................................... 179
10.2. Vector Command ........................................................................................................................ 180
10.2.1. Vector: Geometry ................................................................................................................ 180
10.2.1.1. Domains .................................................................................................................... 180
10.2.1.2. Definition .................................................................................................................. 180
10.2.1.2.1. Locations .......................................................................................................... 180
10.2.1.2.2. Sampling .......................................................................................................... 180
10.2.1.2.3. Variable ............................................................................................................. 181
10.2.1.2.4. Hybrid/Conservative Options ............................................................................ 181
10.2.1.2.5. Projection ......................................................................................................... 181
10.2.1.2.6. Direction ........................................................................................................... 181
10.2.2. Vector: Color ....................................................................................................................... 181
10.2.3. Vector: Symbol ................................................................................................................... 182
10.2.3.1. Symbol ...................................................................................................................... 182
10.2.3.2. Symbol Size ............................................................................................................... 182
xii
User's Guide
10.2.3.3. Normalize Symbols Check Box ................................................................................... 182
10.2.4. Vector: Render .................................................................................................................... 182
10.2.5. Vector: View ........................................................................................................................ 182
10.3. Contour Command ..................................................................................................................... 183
10.3.1. Contour: Geometry ............................................................................................................. 183
10.3.1.1. Domains .................................................................................................................... 183
10.3.1.2. Locations ................................................................................................................... 183
10.3.1.3. Variable ..................................................................................................................... 183
10.3.1.4. Range ........................................................................................................................ 183
10.3.1.5. Hybrid / Conservative Options ................................................................................... 183
10.3.1.6. Color Scale ................................................................................................................ 184
10.3.1.7. Color Map .................................................................................................................. 184
10.3.1.8. # of Contours ............................................................................................................. 184
10.3.1.9. Clip to Range Check Box ............................................................................................ 184
10.3.2. Contour: Labels .................................................................................................................. 184
10.3.2.1. Show Numbers Check Box ......................................................................................... 184
10.3.2.1.1. Text Height ....................................................................................................... 184
10.3.2.1.2. Text Font ........................................................................................................... 184
10.3.2.1.3. Color Mode ....................................................................................................... 184
10.3.2.1.4. Text Color .......................................................................................................... 185
10.3.3. Contour: Render ................................................................................................................. 185
10.3.4. Contour: View ..................................................................................................................... 185
10.4. Streamline Command ................................................................................................................. 185
10.4.1. Streamline: Geometry ......................................................................................................... 186
10.4.1.1. Type .......................................................................................................................... 186
10.4.1.2. Definition .................................................................................................................. 186
10.4.1.2.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 186
10.4.1.2.2. Start From (3D Streamline) ................................................................................ 186
10.4.1.2.3. Surfaces ............................................................................................................ 186
10.4.1.2.4. Start From (Surface Streamline) ......................................................................... 187
10.4.1.2.5. Locations .......................................................................................................... 187
10.4.1.2.6. Sampling .......................................................................................................... 187
10.4.1.2.7. Preview Seeds Button ........................................................................................ 187
10.4.1.2.8. Variable ............................................................................................................. 187
10.4.1.2.9. Hybrid/Conservative Options ............................................................................ 187
10.4.1.2.10. Direction ......................................................................................................... 187
10.4.1.3. Cross Periodics Check Box .......................................................................................... 187
10.4.1.4. Simplify Streamline Geometry Check Box ................................................................... 188
10.4.2. Streamline: Color ................................................................................................................ 188
10.4.3. Streamline: Symbol ............................................................................................................. 188
10.4.3.1. Show Symbols Check Box ........................................................................................... 188
10.4.3.1.1. Min Time ........................................................................................................... 188
10.4.3.1.2. Max Time .......................................................................................................... 188
10.4.3.1.3. Interval ............................................................................................................. 188
10.4.3.1.4. Symbol ............................................................................................................. 189
10.4.3.1.5. Symbol Size ...................................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.2. Show Streams Check Box ........................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.2.1. Stream Type ...................................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.2.2. Line Width/Tube Width/Ribbon Width ............................................................... 189
10.4.3.2.3. # of Sides .......................................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.2.4. Initial Direction ................................................................................................. 189
10.4.4. Streamline: Limits ............................................................................................................... 189
xiii
User's Guide
10.4.4.1. Step Tolerance ........................................................................................................... 189
10.4.4.1.1. Mode ................................................................................................................ 189
10.4.4.1.2. Tolerance .......................................................................................................... 190
10.4.4.2. Upper Limits .............................................................................................................. 190
10.4.4.2.1. Max Segments .................................................................................................. 190
10.4.4.2.2. Max Time .......................................................................................................... 190
10.4.4.2.3. Max Periods ...................................................................................................... 190
10.4.5. Streamline: Render ............................................................................................................. 190
10.4.6. Streamline: View ................................................................................................................. 190
10.5. Particle Track Command .............................................................................................................. 190
10.5.1. Particle Track: Geometry ..................................................................................................... 191
10.5.1.1. Method ..................................................................................................................... 191
10.5.1.1.1. Domains ........................................................................................................... 192
10.5.1.1.2. Material ............................................................................................................ 192
10.5.1.2. File ............................................................................................................................ 192
10.5.1.3. Injections .................................................................................................................. 192
10.5.1.4. Reduction Type .......................................................................................................... 192
10.5.1.4.1. Reduction ......................................................................................................... 192
10.5.1.4.2. Max Tracks ........................................................................................................ 192
10.5.1.5. Limits Option ............................................................................................................. 193
10.5.1.5.1. Limit Type and Start/End <variable> .................................................................. 193
10.5.1.6. Filter Check Box ......................................................................................................... 193
10.5.1.6.1. Start/End Region Check Boxes ........................................................................... 193
10.5.1.6.2. Diameter Check Box .......................................................................................... 193
10.5.1.6.3. Track Check Box ................................................................................................ 194
10.5.1.6.4. Match ALL/Match ANY Options ......................................................................... 194
10.5.2. Particle Track: Color ............................................................................................................. 194
10.5.3. Particle Track: Symbol ......................................................................................................... 194
10.5.3.1. Show Symbols Check Box ........................................................................................... 194
10.5.3.1.1. Max Time is ....................................................................................................... 195
10.5.3.2. Show Tracks Check Box .............................................................................................. 195
10.5.3.3. Show Track Numbers Check Box ................................................................................. 195
10.5.4. Particle Track: Render .......................................................................................................... 195
10.5.5. Particle Track: View ............................................................................................................. 195
10.5.6. Particle Track: Info ............................................................................................................... 195
10.6. Volume Rendering Command ...................................................................................................... 196
10.6.1. Volume Rendering: Geometry ............................................................................................. 197
10.6.2. Volume Rendering: Color .................................................................................................... 197
10.6.3. Volume Rendering: Render ................................................................................................. 198
10.6.4. Volume Rendering: View ..................................................................................................... 198
10.7. Text Command ............................................................................................................................ 198
10.7.1. Text: Definition ................................................................................................................... 198
10.7.1.1. Text String ................................................................................................................. 198
10.7.1.2. Embed Auto Annotation Check Box ............................................................................ 198
10.7.1.2.1. Type .................................................................................................................. 199
10.7.1.2.2. Expression ........................................................................................................ 199
10.7.1.2.3. Format (for Filename option) ............................................................................. 199
10.7.1.2.4. Format (for the File Date and File Time options) ................................................. 199
10.7.1.3. More/Fewer Buttons .................................................................................................. 199
10.7.2. Text: Location ..................................................................................................................... 199
10.7.2.1. Location .................................................................................................................... 199
10.7.2.1.1. Position Mode ................................................................................................... 199
xiv
User's Guide
10.7.2.1.2. X Justification ................................................................................................... 199
10.7.2.1.3. Y Justification .................................................................................................... 200
10.7.2.1.4. Position (for Two Coords option) ........................................................................ 200
10.7.2.1.5. Position (for Three Coords option) ..................................................................... 200
10.7.2.1.6. Rotation ............................................................................................................ 200
10.7.3. Text: Appearance ................................................................................................................ 200
10.7.3.1. Height ....................................................................................................................... 200
10.7.3.2. Color Mode ................................................................................................................ 200
10.7.3.3. Font .......................................................................................................................... 200
10.8. Coordinate Frame Command ...................................................................................................... 200
10.8.1. Coordinate Frame: Definition .............................................................................................. 201
10.8.1.1. Type .......................................................................................................................... 201
10.8.1.2. Origin ........................................................................................................................ 201
10.8.1.3. Z Axis Point ................................................................................................................ 201
10.8.1.4. X-Z Plane Pt ............................................................................................................... 201
10.8.1.5. Symbol Size ............................................................................................................... 201
10.8.1.6. Coordinate Frame Details ........................................................................................... 201
10.9. Legend Command ...................................................................................................................... 202
10.9.1. Default Legends ................................................................................................................. 203
10.9.2. User-defined Legends ......................................................................................................... 203
10.9.3. Legend: Definition Tab ........................................................................................................ 203
10.9.3.1. Plot ........................................................................................................................... 203
10.9.3.2. Title Mode ................................................................................................................. 203
10.9.3.3. Title ........................................................................................................................... 203
10.9.3.4. Show Legend Units Check Box ................................................................................... 204
10.9.3.5. Vertical / Horizontal Options ...................................................................................... 204
10.9.3.6. Location .................................................................................................................... 204
10.9.3.6.1. X Justification ................................................................................................... 204
10.9.3.6.2. Y Justification .................................................................................................... 204
10.9.3.6.3. Position ............................................................................................................ 204
10.9.4. Legend: Appearance Tab ..................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.1. Sizing Parameters ...................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.1.1. Size ................................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.1.2. Aspect .............................................................................................................. 205
10.9.4.2. Text Parameters ......................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.2.1. Precision ........................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.2.2. Value Ticks ........................................................................................................ 205
10.9.4.2.3. Font .................................................................................................................. 205
10.9.4.2.4. Color Mode ....................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.2.5. Color ................................................................................................................. 205
10.9.4.2.6. Text Rotation ..................................................................................................... 205
10.9.4.2.7. Text Height ....................................................................................................... 205
10.10. Instance Transform Command ................................................................................................... 206
10.10.1. Default Transform Object .................................................................................................. 206
10.10.2. Instance Transform: Definition Tab ..................................................................................... 206
10.10.2.1. Instancing Info From Domain Check Box ................................................................... 206
10.10.2.2. Number of Graphical Instances ................................................................................. 206
10.10.2.3. Apply Rotation Check Box ........................................................................................ 207
10.10.2.3.1. Method ........................................................................................................... 207
10.10.2.3.2. Axis ................................................................................................................. 207
10.10.2.3.3. From/To Text Boxes ......................................................................................... 207
10.10.2.3.4. Full Circle Check Box ........................................................................................ 207
xv
User's Guide
10.10.2.3.5. Angle From ..................................................................................................... 207
10.10.2.3.6. Number of Passages ........................................................................................ 207
10.10.2.3.7. Passages per Component ................................................................................ 207
10.10.2.3.8. Angle .............................................................................................................. 208
10.10.2.4. Apply Translation Check Box .................................................................................... 208
10.10.2.4.1. Translation ...................................................................................................... 208
10.10.2.5. Apply Reflection/Mirroring Check Box ...................................................................... 208
10.10.2.5.1. Method ........................................................................................................... 208
10.10.2.5.2. X/Y/Z .............................................................................................................. 208
10.10.2.5.3. Plane .............................................................................................................. 208
10.10.3. Instance Transform: Example ............................................................................................. 208
10.11. Clip Plane Command ................................................................................................................. 210
10.11.1. Clip Plane: Geometry ........................................................................................................ 211
10.11.1.1. Definition ................................................................................................................ 211
10.11.1.1.1. Method ........................................................................................................... 211
10.11.1.1.2. Slice Plane ....................................................................................................... 211
10.11.1.2. Flip Normal Check Box ............................................................................................. 211
10.12. Color Map Command ................................................................................................................ 211
10.13. Variable Command .................................................................................................................... 213
10.14. Expression Command ............................................................................................................... 213
10.15. Table Command ........................................................................................................................ 213
10.15.1. Editing in the Table Viewer ................................................................................................ 214
10.15.1.1. Shortcut Menu ......................................................................................................... 214
10.15.1.2. Expressions .............................................................................................................. 216
10.16. Chart Command ....................................................................................................................... 218
10.16.1. Creating a Chart Object .................................................................................................... 218
10.16.1.1. Chart Details: General Tab ......................................................................................... 219
10.16.1.1.1. Type ................................................................................................................ 219
10.16.1.1.2. Display Title: Title ............................................................................................. 220
10.16.1.1.3. Report: Caption ............................................................................................... 220
10.16.1.1.4. Fast Fourier Transform ..................................................................................... 220
10.16.1.1.4.1. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Theory ......................................................... 220
10.16.1.1.4.1.1. Windowing in Fast Fourier Transforms ............................................ 221
10.16.1.1.4.1.2. Using Fast Fourier Transforms ......................................................... 222
10.16.1.1.5. Refresh Settings .............................................................................................. 223
10.16.1.2. Chart Details: Data Series Tab ................................................................................... 223
10.16.1.2.1. Name Controls ................................................................................................ 223
10.16.1.2.2. Data Source .................................................................................................... 224
10.16.1.2.2.1. Data Source File Format .......................................................................... 224
10.16.1.2.3. Custom Data Selection Controls ....................................................................... 225
10.16.1.3. Chart Details: X Axis Tab ........................................................................................... 225
10.16.1.3.1. X Axis Data Selection ....................................................................................... 225
10.16.1.3.1.1. Specifying an X Function ........................................................................ 226
10.16.1.3.2. Category Divisions .......................................................................................... 227
10.16.1.3.3. Axis Range ...................................................................................................... 227
10.16.1.3.4. Axis Number Formatting ................................................................................. 227
10.16.1.3.5. Axis Labels ...................................................................................................... 228
10.16.1.4. Chart Details: Y Axis Tab ............................................................................................ 228
10.16.1.4.1.Y Axis: Data Selection ....................................................................................... 228
10.16.1.5. Chart Details: Line Display Tab .................................................................................. 229
10.16.1.5.1. Fill Area Controls ............................................................................................. 229
10.16.1.6. Chart Details: Chart Display Tab ................................................................................ 230
xvi
User's Guide
10.16.1.6.1. Display Legend Area ........................................................................................ 230
10.16.1.6.2. Sizes Area ........................................................................................................ 230
10.16.1.6.3. Fonts Area ....................................................................................................... 230
10.16.1.6.4. Grid Area ......................................................................................................... 230
10.16.2. Viewing a Chart ................................................................................................................ 231
10.16.3. Example: Charting a Velocity Profile ................................................................................... 231
10.16.4. Example: Comparing Differences Between Two Files .......................................................... 232
10.17. Comment Command ................................................................................................................. 233
10.18. Figure Command ...................................................................................................................... 233
11. CFD-Post Tools Menu ......................................................................................................................... 235
11.1. Timestep Selector ....................................................................................................................... 235
11.1.1. Adding Timesteps .............................................................................................................. 237
11.1.2. Using the Timestep Selector with Transient Blade Row Cases ............................................... 237
11.1.3. Multiple Files ...................................................................................................................... 239
11.2. Animation ................................................................................................................................... 239
11.2.1. Quick Animation ................................................................................................................ 240
11.2.1.1. Animating Planes ....................................................................................................... 240
11.2.1.2. Animating Isosurfaces ................................................................................................ 241
11.2.1.3. Animating Turbo Surfaces .......................................................................................... 241
11.2.1.4. Animating Streamlines and Particle Tracks .................................................................. 241
11.2.1.5. Animating Timesteps ................................................................................................. 241
11.2.1.6. Animating Mesh Deformation Scaling ........................................................................ 241
11.2.2. Keyframe Animation ........................................................................................................... 242
11.2.2.1. Creating an Animation ............................................................................................... 242
11.2.2.2. Animating Expressions ............................................................................................... 243
11.2.3. Animation Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 243
11.2.3.1. Animation Options Dialog Box ................................................................................... 244
11.2.3.1.1. Animation Speed .............................................................................................. 244
11.2.3.1.2. Transient Case ................................................................................................... 244
11.2.3.1.3. Print Options ..................................................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.3.1. Image Format ........................................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.3.2. Use Screen Capture .................................................................................. 245
11.2.3.1.3.3. White Background .................................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.3.4. Enhanced Output (Smooth Edges) ............................................................ 245
11.2.3.1.3.5. Image Size ................................................................................................ 245
11.2.3.1.3.6. Tolerance ................................................................................................. 245
11.2.3.1.4. Advanced Tab ................................................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.4.1. Save Frames As Image Files ....................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.4.2. Output To User Directory .......................................................................... 245
11.2.3.1.4.3. Frame Rate ............................................................................................... 246
11.2.3.1.4.4. Quality ..................................................................................................... 246
11.2.3.1.4.5. Don't Encode Last MPEG Frame ................................................................ 246
11.2.3.2. Saving an Animation .................................................................................................. 246
11.2.3.3. Saving the Animation State (*.can file) ........................................................................ 246
11.3. Quick Editor ................................................................................................................................ 247
11.4. Probe .......................................................................................................................................... 247
11.5. Function Calculator ..................................................................................................................... 248
11.5.1. Function Selection .............................................................................................................. 249
11.6. Macro Calculator ......................................................................................................................... 250
11.6.1. Predefined Macros .............................................................................................................. 251
11.6.1.1. Comfort Factors Macro ............................................................................................... 251
11.6.1.2. Cp Polar Plot Macro .................................................................................................... 252
xvii
User's Guide
11.6.1.3. Gas Compressor Performance Macro .......................................................................... 252
11.6.1.4. Gas Turbine Performance Macro ................................................................................. 253
11.6.1.5. Liquid Pump Performance Macro ............................................................................... 253
11.6.1.6. Liquid Turbine Performance Macro ............................................................................. 254
11.6.1.7. Fan Noise Macro ........................................................................................................ 254
11.6.2. User-defined Macros .......................................................................................................... 256
11.6.2.1. Macro Example: Output Path ...................................................................................... 258
11.6.3. Using the Fan Noise Macro ................................................................................................. 258
11.6.3.1. Fan Noise Theory in Brief ............................................................................................ 258
11.6.3.2. Fan Noise Macro Input ............................................................................................... 262
11.6.3.3. Fan Noise Output (Reports) ........................................................................................ 262
11.6.3.4. Fan Noise Examples ................................................................................................... 263
11.7. Mesh Calculator .......................................................................................................................... 265
11.7.1. Mesh Visualization Advice ................................................................................................... 266
11.8. Case Comparison ........................................................................................................................ 267
11.8.1. Calculating Difference Variables .......................................................................................... 270
11.9. Command Editor ......................................................................................................................... 271
12. Turbo Workspace ............................................................................................................................... 273
12.1. Visual Representation of Initialization Status ................................................................................ 274
12.2. Define/Modify Global Rotation Axis ............................................................................................. 274
12.3. Turbo Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 274
12.3.1. Requirements for Initialization ............................................................................................ 275
12.3.2. Initialize All Components .................................................................................................... 275
12.3.3. Uninitializing Components ................................................................................................. 276
12.3.4. Individual Component Initialization (Advanced Feature) ...................................................... 276
12.3.5. Details View for Individual Component Initialization ............................................................ 276
12.3.5.1. Definition Tab ............................................................................................................ 276
12.3.5.1.1. Turbo Regions Frame ......................................................................................... 277
12.3.5.1.2. Background Mesh Frame ................................................................................... 277
12.3.5.1.2.1. Purpose of Background Mesh ................................................................... 277
12.3.5.1.2.2. Requirements for Setting Up a Background Mesh ...................................... 277
12.3.5.1.2.3. Types of Background Mesh ....................................................................... 278
12.3.5.1.2.4. Density of the Background Mesh .............................................................. 279
12.3.5.2. Instancing Tab ........................................................................................................... 279
12.4. Turbo View Shortcuts .................................................................................................................. 280
12.5. Turbo Surface .............................................................................................................................. 280
12.5.1. Turbo Surface: Geometry .................................................................................................... 280
12.5.1.1. Domains .................................................................................................................... 281
12.5.1.2. Definition .................................................................................................................. 281
12.5.1.3. Bounds ...................................................................................................................... 282
12.5.1.4. Type .......................................................................................................................... 282
12.5.2. Turbo Surface: Common Tabs .............................................................................................. 283
12.5.2.1. Turbo Surface: Color ................................................................................................... 283
12.5.2.2. Turbo Surface: Render ................................................................................................ 283
12.5.2.3. Turbo Surface: View .................................................................................................... 283
12.6. Turbo Line ................................................................................................................................... 283
12.6.1. Turbo Line: Geometry ......................................................................................................... 283
12.6.2. Turbo Line: Common Tabs ................................................................................................... 284
12.6.2.1. Turbo Line: Color ........................................................................................................ 284
12.6.2.2. Turbo Line: Render ..................................................................................................... 284
12.6.2.3. Turbo Line: View ......................................................................................................... 284
12.7. Turbo Plots .................................................................................................................................. 284
xviii
User's Guide
12.7.1. Introduction to Turbo Plots ................................................................................................. 285
12.7.1.1. Show Faces/Show Mesh Lines .................................................................................... 285
12.7.1.2. Instancing ................................................................................................................. 285
12.7.1.3. Turbo Measurements ................................................................................................. 285
12.7.1.3.1. Span ................................................................................................................. 285
12.7.1.3.2. Span Direction .................................................................................................. 285
12.7.1.3.3. Span Normalized ............................................................................................... 285
12.7.1.3.4. Streamwise Location ......................................................................................... 285
12.7.1.3.5. Theta ................................................................................................................ 285
12.7.1.3.6. Advanced: Position of Zero Theta ....................................................................... 286
12.7.2. Initialization Three Views .................................................................................................... 286
12.7.3. Blade-to-Blade Object ........................................................................................................ 286
12.7.3.1. Span .......................................................................................................................... 287
12.7.3.2. Angular Shift ............................................................................................................. 287
12.7.3.3. Plot Type ................................................................................................................... 287
12.7.3.3.1. Color ................................................................................................................. 287
12.7.3.3.2. Contour ............................................................................................................ 287
12.7.3.3.3. Vector ............................................................................................................... 287
12.7.3.3.4. Stream .............................................................................................................. 287
12.7.4. Meridional Object .............................................................................................................. 287
12.7.5. 3D View Object ................................................................................................................... 288
12.7.6.Turbo Charts ....................................................................................................................... 288
12.7.6.1. Type .......................................................................................................................... 289
12.7.6.1.1. Hub to Shroud .................................................................................................. 289
12.7.6.1.1.1. Single Line vs. Two Lines ........................................................................... 289
12.7.6.1.1.2. Display ..................................................................................................... 289
12.7.6.1.1.3. Mode ....................................................................................................... 289
12.7.6.1.1.4. Point Type ................................................................................................ 290
12.7.6.1.1.5. Theta ........................................................................................................ 291
12.7.6.1.1.6. Samples ................................................................................................... 291
12.7.6.1.1.7. Streamwise .............................................................................................. 291
12.7.6.1.1.8. Distribution .............................................................................................. 291
12.7.6.1.1.9. X/Y Variable .............................................................................................. 294
12.7.6.1.1.10. Circumferential Averaging by Length ...................................................... 294
12.7.6.1.1.11. Circumferential Averaging by Area: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart ................ 295
12.7.6.1.1.12. Circumferential Averaging by Mass Flow: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart ....... 295
12.7.6.1.1.13. Linear BA Streamwise Location Coordinates ............................................ 295
12.7.6.1.1.14. BA Streamwise Location Coordinates ...................................................... 296
12.7.6.1.2. Inlet to Outlet ................................................................................................... 296
12.7.6.1.2.1. Circumferential Averaging by Length: Inlet to Outlet Turbo Chart ............... 297
12.7.6.1.2.2. Circumferential Averaging by Area or Mass: Inlet to Outlet Turbo Chart ...... 297
12.7.6.1.3. Theta ................................................................................................................ 297
12.7.6.1.4. Blade Loading ................................................................................................... 297
12.7.6.1.5. Circumferential ................................................................................................. 298
12.8. Turbo Macros .............................................................................................................................. 298
12.9. Calculate Velocity Components ................................................................................................... 298
12.9.1. Calculating Cylindrical Velocity Components for Non-turbo Cases ....................................... 304
13. CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post ..................................................................................... 307
13.1. Object Creation and Deletion ...................................................................................................... 307
14. CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post .................................................................................... 309
14.1. Variables Created by CFD-Post ..................................................................................................... 310
15. Command Actions ............................................................................................................................. 311
xix
User's Guide
15.1. Overview of Command Actions ................................................................................................... 311
15.2. File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box .................................................................. 312
15.2.1. Loading a Results File ......................................................................................................... 312
15.2.1.1. load Command Examples .......................................................................................... 312
15.2.2. Reading Session Files .......................................................................................................... 313
15.2.2.1. readsession Command Examples ............................................................................... 313
15.2.3. Saving State Files ................................................................................................................ 313
15.2.3.1. savestate Command Examples ................................................................................... 314
15.2.4. Reading State Files ............................................................................................................. 314
15.2.4.1. readstate Option Actions ........................................................................................... 315
15.2.4.2. readstate Command Examples ................................................................................... 316
15.2.5. Creating a Hardcopy ........................................................................................................... 317
15.2.6. Importing External File Formats .......................................................................................... 317
15.2.7. Exporting Data ................................................................................................................... 318
15.2.8. Controlling the Viewer ........................................................................................................ 318
15.3. Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor Dialog Box ....................................................... 319
15.4. Other Commands ....................................................................................................................... 319
15.4.1. Deleting Objects ................................................................................................................ 319
15.4.2. Viewing a Chart .................................................................................................................. 319
15.4.3. Turbo Post CCL Command Actions ...................................................................................... 320
15.4.3.1. Calculating Velocity Components ............................................................................... 320
15.4.3.2. Initializing all Turbo Components ............................................................................... 320
16. Line Interface Mode .......................................................................................................................... 321
16.1. Features Available in Line Interface Mode .................................................................................... 322
17. FLUENT Field Variables Listed by Category ...................................................................................... 323
Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 337
xx
Preface
This preface discusses how to use this manual:
About this Manual (p. xxi)
Document Conventions (p. xxii)
how to access the online help system:
Accessing Help (p. xxiv)
and how to obtain support for your software:
Contact Information (p. xxv)
1. About this Manual

This manual contain the following chapters:
Overview of CFD-Post (p. 1) describes CFD-Post functionality and advanced features.
Starting CFD-Post (p. 3) describes how to start CFD-Post and the environment variables that affect how
CFD-Post operates.
CFD-Post Graphical Interface (p. 13) describes the CFD-Post interface.
CFD-Post 3D Viewer (p. 71) describes how to use the CFD-Post 3D Viewer.
CFD-Post Workflow (p. 85) describes common ways to use CFD-Post.
CFD-Post File Menu (p. 89) describes the functionality available from the File menu and the file types
that CFD-Post supports.
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences) (p. 129) describes the functionality available from the Edit
menu, such as customizing CFD-Post by setting your preferences on the Options dialog box.
CFD-Post Session Menu (p. 139) describes how to record and replay session files. (Session files contain a
record of the commands issued during a CFD-Post session.)
CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141) describes how to create new objects (such as locators, tables, charts, and
so on), variables, and expressions by using the Insert menu.
CFD-Post Tools Menu (p. 235) describes how to use the CFD-Post Tools menu, which offers access to
quantitative analysis utilities, the animation editor and the timestep selector.
Turbo Workspace (p. 273) describes how to use the CFD-Post Turbo workspace, which improves and speeds
up post-processing for turbomachinery simulations.
CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post (p. 307) describes how to use the CFX Command Language
(CCL) and the CFX Expression Language (CEL).
CFX Expression Language (CEL) describes the CFX Expression Language (CEL) in detail.
xxi
Preface
Line Interface Mode describes running CFD-Post in line-interface mode (that is, without using a user interface, but with a viewer that shows objects you create on the command line) and in batch mode (where
a viewer is not provided and you cannot enter commands at a command prompt).
FLUENT Field Variables Listed by Category describes how to convert variable names in a FLUENT file to
CFX variable names for use in CFD-Post.
2. Document Conventions
This section describes the conventions used in this document to distinguish between text, file names,
system messages, and input that you need to type.
File and Directory Names
File names and directory names appear in a plain fixed-width font (for example, /usr/lib). On Linux,
directory names are separated by forward slashes (/), but on Windows, back slashes are used (\). For
example, a directory name on Linux might be /CFX/bin whereas on a Windows system, the same directory would be named \CFX\bin.
User Input
Input to be typed verbatim is shown using the following convention:
mkdir /usr/local/cfx
Input Substitution
Input substitution is shown using the following convention:
cfx5post -batch <batch_file>
you should actually type cfx5post -batch and substitute a batch file name for <batch_file>.
Optional Arguments
Optional arguments are shown using square brackets:
cfx5export -cgns [-verbose] <file>
Here the argument -verbose is optional, but you must specify a suitable file name.
Long Commands
Commands that are too long to display on a printed page are shown with \ characters at the ends of
intermediate lines:
cfx5export -cgns [-boundary] [-corrected] [-C] \
[-domain <number>] [-geometry] [-help] [-name <file>] \
[-summary] [-timestep <number>] [-user <level>] [-norotate] \
[-boundaries-as-nodes|-boundaries-as-faces] [-verbose] <file>
On a Linux system, you may type the \ characters, pressing Enter after each. However, on a Windows
machine you must enter the whole command without the \ characters; continue typing if the
command is too long to fit in the command prompt window and press Enter only at the end of
the complete command.
<CFDPOSTROOT>
The installation directory for CFD-Post, which differs depending on whether it installed with ANSYS CFX.
The default installation directory for CFD-Post without ANSYS CFX is:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v145\CFD-Post
xxii
Document Conventions
Operating System Names
When we refer to objects that depend on the type of system being used, we will use one of the following
symbols in the text:
<os> refers to the short form of the name which CFX uses to identify the operating system in
question. <os> will generally be used for directory names where the contents of the directory depend
on the operating system but do not depend on the release of the operating system or on the processor type. Wherever you see <os> in the text you should substitute with the operating system
name. The correct value can be determined by running:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfx5info -os
<arch> refers to the long form of the name that CFX uses to identify the system architecture in
question. <arch> will generally be used for directory names where the contents of the directory
depend on the operating system and on the release of the operating system or the processor type.
Wherever you see <arch> in the text you should substitute the appropriate value for your system,
which can be determined by running the command:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfx5info -arch
2.1. Spelling Conventions

ANSYS CFX documentation uses American spelling:
atomization rather than atomisation
color rather than colour
customization rather than customisation
discretization rather than discretisation
initialization rather than initialisation
meter rather than metre
normalization rather than normalisation
vapor rather than vapour
vaporization rather than vaporisation
When searching, use American spellings:
For:
Search for:
Colour Map
Color Map (or try Color Map Command (p. 211))
Colour Mode
Color Mode (or try Color Mode (p. 184))
Colour Scale
Color Scale (or try Color Scale (p. 20))
Colour Tab
Color Tab (or try Color Details Tab (p. 19))
Turbo Initialisation
Turbo Initialization (or try Turbo Initialization (p. 274))
Auto-initialise
Auto-initialize (or try Requirements for Initialization (p. 275))
Uninitialise
Uninitialize (or try Uninitializing Components (p. 276))

xxiii
Preface
For:
Search for:
Initialise All Components
Initialize All Components (or try Initialize All Components (p. 275))
Undefined Colour
Undefined Color (or try Undefined Color (p. 21))
Synchronise Camera
Synchronize Camera (or try Case Comparison (p. 267))
3. Accessing Help
You can access the ANSYS CFX help in the following ways:
Select the appropriate command from the Help menu of the ANSYS CFX Launcher or CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver
Manager, or CFD-Post.
Depending on the command you select, you will see help in either online format or PDF format. A
PDF file will be opened in Adobe Reader if possible, otherwise it may (with uncertain results) be
opened in Xpdf, Gpdf, KPDF, or Evince, depending on which of these viewers have been installed.
To access help in PDF format, you must first download and install the PDF files.
Click a feature of the ANSYS CFX interface to make it active and, with the mouse pointer over the feature,
press the F1 key for online help opened to the appropriate page for the feature under the mouse pointer).
Not every area of the interface supports context-sensitive help.
To access documentation files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/documentation.
For further information about tutorials and documentation on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://
support.ansys.com/docinfo.
For information on using the ANSYS Help Viewer, see Using Help in the Using Help.
The help in PDF format is not installed by default. To access the help in PDF format, you must first
download and install the PDF files.
You can download the PDF documentation from the ANSYS Customer Portal (support.ansys.com/docdownloads). These files must be downloaded and extracted to the following location so you can launch
them from within your ANSYS product Help menu.
On Windows:
path\ANSYS Inc\v145\commonfiles\help\en-us\pdf\
where path is the folder where you installed your ANSYS product (by default, the path is C:\Program
Files).
On Linux:
path/ansys_inc/v145/commonfiles/help/en-us/pdf/
where path is the directory where you installed your ANSYS product.
The following table lists the pdf files for ANSYS CFD-Post:
xxiv
Contact Information
Book
Description
PDF
Name
Tutorials
A set of tutorials that demonstrate the workflow
cfd_posttutr.pdf
ANSYS CFD-Post Users

Guide
How to post-process a results file
cfd_post.pdf
Reference Guides
Best-practices guides and complete details for APIs,

CFX Command Language, CFX Expression Language,
functions, and variables
cfx_ref.pdf
4. Contact Information
Technical Support for ANSYS, Inc. products is provided either by ANSYS, Inc. directly or by one of our
certified ANSYS Support Providers. Please check with the ANSYS Support Coordinator (ASC) at your
company to determine who provides support for your company, or go to www.ansys.com and select
About ANSYS> Contacts and Locations.
If your support is provided by ANSYS, Inc. directly, Technical Support can be accessed quickly and efficiently from the ANSYS Customer Portal, which is available from the ANSYS Website (www.ansys.com)
under Support> Technical Support where the Customer Portal is located. The direct URL is: support.ansys.com.
One of the many useful features of the Customer Portal is the Knowledge Resources Search, which can
be found on the Home page of the Customer Portal.
Systems and installation Knowledge Resources are easily accessible via the Customer Portal by using
the following keywords in the search box: Systems/Installation. These Knowledge Resources
provide solutions and guidance on how to resolve installation and licensing issues quickly.
NORTH AMERICA
All ANSYS, Inc. Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://www.ansys.com/customerportal) and select the appropriate
option.
Toll-Free Telephone: 1.800.711.7199
Fax: 1.724.514.5096
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
GERMANY
ANSYS Mechanical Products
Telephone: +49 (0) 8092 7005-55 (CADFEM)
Email: [email protected]
All ANSYS Products
option.
National Toll-Free Telephone:
German language: 0800 181 8499
English language: 0800 181 1565
xxv
Preface
Austria: 0800 297 835
Switzerland: 0800 546 318
International Telephone:
German language: +49 6151 152 9981
English language: +49 6151 152 9982
UNITED KINGDOM
option.
Telephone: Please have your Customer or Contact ID ready.
UK: 0800 048 0462
Republic of Ireland: 1800 065 6642
Outside UK: +44 1235 420130
JAPAN
CFX , ICEM CFD and Mechanical Products
Telephone: +81-3-5324-8333
Fax: +81-3-5324-7308
Email:
CFX: [email protected];
Mechanical: [email protected]
FLUENT Products
Telephone: +81-3-5324-7305
Email:
FLUENT: [email protected];
POLYFLOW: [email protected];
FfC: [email protected];
FloWizard: [email protected]
Icepak
Telephone: +81-3-5324-7444
Licensing and Installation
INDIA
xxvi
Contact Information
option.
Telephone: +91 1 800 209 3475 (toll free) or +91 20 6654 3000 (toll)
Fax: +91 80 6772 2600
Email:
FEA products: [email protected];
CFD products: [email protected];
Ansoft products: [email protected];
Installation: [email protected]
FRANCE
option.
Toll-Free Telephone: +33 (0) 800 919 225 Toll Number: +33 (0) 170 489 087
BELGIUM
All ANSYS Products
option.
Telephone: +32 (0) 10 45 28 61
SWEDEN
All ANSYS Products
option.
Telephone: +44 (0) 870 142 0300
SPAIN and PORTUGAL
All ANSYS Products
option.
Telephone: +34 900 933 407 (Spain), +351 800 880 513 (Portugal)
Email: [email protected], [email protected]
xxvii
Preface
ITALY
All ANSYS Products
option.
Telephone: +39 02 89013378
xxviii
Chapter 1: Overview of CFD-Post

CFD-Post is a flexible, state-of-the-art post-processor. It is designed to allow easy visualization and
quantitative analysis of the results of CFD simulations.
This chapter describes:
CFD-Post Features and Functionality (p. 1)
Advanced Features (p. 2)
Next Steps... (p. 2)
1.1. CFD-Post Features and Functionality

CFD-Post has the following features:
A graphical user interface that includes a viewer pane in which all graphical output from CFD-Post is
plotted. For details, see CFD-Post Graphical Interface (p. 13) and CFD-Post 3D Viewer (p. 71).
Support for a variety of graphical and geometric objects used to create post-processing plots, to visualize
the mesh, and to define locations for quantitative calculation. For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141).
You can perform a variety of exact quantitative calculations over objects; for details, see Quantitative
Calculations in the Command Editor Dialog Box.
Scalar and vector user-defined variables.
Variable freezing (for comparison with other files).
Post-processing capability for turbomachinery applications. For details, see Turbo Workspace (p. 273).
Standard interactive viewer controls (rotate, zoom, pan, zoom box), multiple viewports, stored views/figures.
Extensive reports, including charting (XY, time plots). For details, see Report (p. 29).
CFD-Post includes the following functionality:
Reads CFX-Solver results files (*.res), CFX-Solver input files (*.def), CFX-Mesh files (*.gtm), CFX-Solver
Backup results files (*.bak), CFX-Solver Error results files (*.res, *.err), ANSYS files (*.rst, *.rth,
*.rmg, *.rfl, *.inn, *.brfl, *.brmg, *.brst, *.brth), ANSYS Meshing files (*.cmdb, *.dsdb),
CFX-4 dump files (*.d*mp*), CFX-TASCflow files (*.lun, *.grd, *.rso), CGNS files (*.cgns, *.cgs),
and FLUENT files (*.cas, *.dat, *.msh, *.cdat).
Overview of CFD-Post
The supported file types are described in File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post (p. 111).
Note
CFX-Solver results files are necessary to access some of the quantitative functionality that
CFD-Post can provide.
Supports transient data, including moving mesh. Node locations are repositioned based on the position
for the current timestep.
Imports/exports ANSYS data, generic data, and generic geometry.
Supports macros through an embedded user interface (see Macro Calculator (p. 250)).
Outputs to PostScript, JPEG, PNG, various bitmap formats, and VRM, as well as animation (keyframe) and
MPEG file output. For details, see Quick Animation (p. 240).
1.2. Advanced Features

CFD-Post also contains advanced features:
CFX Command Language (CCL)
CCL is the internal command language used within CFD-Post. CCL is used to create objects or perform
actions. CFD-Post enables command line, session file, or state file input through the CFX Command
Language (CCL). For details, see CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post (p. 307).
CFX Expression Language (CEL)
CEL is a powerful expression language used to create user-defined variables, expressions, etc. For details,
see CFX Expression Language (CEL).
Power Syntax
Power Syntax provides integration of the Perl programming language with CCL to allow creation of advanced subroutines. For details, see Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
Batch Mode
CFD-Post can be run in batch mode (often using a session file as the basis for a series of actions which
will be executed). For details, see Running in Batch Mode (p. 9).
1.3. Next Steps...

Now that you have an overview of the capabilities of CFD-Post, you may want to explore:
Starting CFD-Post (p. 3)
CFD-Post Graphical Interface (p. 13).
Chapter 2: Starting CFD-Post

This chapter describes how to start CFD-Post and the environment variables that affect how CFD-Post
operates:
2.1. Starting CFD-Post with the ANSYS CFX Launcher
2.2. Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line
2.3. Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables
2.4. Running in Batch Mode
Note
You can also start CFD-Post from other ANSYS products; for details, refer to the documentation
that comes with those products.
2.1. Starting CFD-Post with the ANSYS CFX Launcher

CFD-Post is installed with the ANSYS CFX Launcher, which makes it easy to run CFD-Post. The launcher
enables you to:
Set the working directory for your project.
Launch CFD-Post and, if available, other ANSYS products.
Access various other tools, including a command window that enables you to run ANSYS CFX utilities
without having to type the path to the executable.
Access the online help and other useful information.
Customize the behavior of the launcher to start your own applications.
You can run the launcher in any of the following ways:
On Windows:
From the Start menu, select All Programs > ANSYS 14.5 > Fluid Dynamics > CFX 14.5.
In a DOS window that has its path set up correctly to run ANSYS CFX, enter: cfx5
If the path has not been set, you need to type the full path to the cfx5 command; typically this
is:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v145\CFX\bin\cfx5.exe
On Linux, open a terminal window that has its path set up to run ANSYS CFX and enter: cfx5
If the path has not been set, you need to type the full path to the cfx5 command; typically this is:
/usr/ansys_inc/v145/CFX/bin/cfx5.exe
Starting CFD-Post
When the launcher starts, set your working directory and click the CFD-Post icon.
Note
The launcher automatically searches for CFD-Post and other ANSYS products, including the
license manager.
2.1.1. Valid Syntax in CFD-Post

Valid Syntax for Named Objects
The names of objects must be no more than 80 characters in length. Any of the following characters
are allowed to name new objects: A-Z a-z 0-9 <space> (however, the first character must be AZ or a-z). Multiple spaces are treated as single space characters, and spaces at the end of a name are
ignored. In general, object names must be unique within the physics setup.
Valid Decimal Separator
In CFD-Post, only a period is allowed to be used decimal delimiters in fields that accept floating-point
input. If your system is set to a European locale that uses a comma separator (such as Germany), fields
that accept numeric input will accept a comma, but an error will be returned. If your system is set to a
non-European locale, numeric fields will not accept a comma at all.
ANSYS Workbench accepts commas as decimal delimiters, but translates these to periods when
passing data to CFD-Post.
2.2. Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line

You may want to start CFD-Post from the command line rather than by clicking the appropriate button
on the ANSYS CFX Launcher for the following reasons:
You may want to specify certain command-line arguments so that CFD-Post starts up in a particular configuration. For details, see Optional Command Line Arguments (p. 4).
CFX contains some utilities (for example, a parameter editor) that can be run only from the command
line.
If you are having problems with CFD-Post, you may be able to get a more detailed error message by
starting it from the command line than you would get if you started it from the launcher. When you start
CFD-Post from the command line, any error messages produced are written to the command-line window.
To start CFD-Post from the command line, enter:
Windows
<CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost
Linux
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost
2.2.1. Optional Command Line Arguments

The table that follows summarizes the most common of the optional command line arguments:
Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line

Argument
Description
-batch <filename.cse>
[<results file
1>] [<results
file 2> ...]
Starts CFD-Post in batch mode, running the session file you enter as an
argument.
-gui
Starts CFD-Post in graphical user interface (GUI) mode (the default).
-line
Starts CFD-Post in line interface (CFD-Post command line) mode. This

interface will start a command line prompt where you can type CCL
commands. Typically you would create a session file using the user interface mode, then make modifications to that file as required.
To start a CCL section, type e When done typing CCL commands, type
.
.e to process the CCL.
The ability to write and execute CCL is also available in user interface
mode through the Command Editor. For details, see Overview of Command Actions.
-remote <host>
-port <number>
-viewerport
<number>
-remote specifies a remote host to run on.

-port specifies the port number for user interface-engine communication.
-viewerport specifies the port for the viewer.
This option also requires the host machine to be running CFD-Post with
the -server option.
-report <template> [-name

<report name>]
[-outdir <dirname>] [<results file 1>]
[<results file
2> ...]
Starts CFD-Post in batch mode, loads the results files, then produces a
report and exits.
Here, <template> may be one of the following:
The word auto If you use the word auto for a template, then CFD-Post
.
will attempt to find the most suitable built-in template.
The name of a registered template, wrapped in quotes. Register a template
by running CFD-Post in user interface mode. For details, see Report Templates (p. 34).
The name of a state or session file. If you provide a state file as a template,
the results file indicated in the state file, if there is one, will be used when
no results file name is provided on the command line.
-graphics
For Linux only: specify the graphics system (options are ogl and mesa).
Alternative form:
-gr
-local-root
<path>
Specify the file path of the CFD-Post installation.
-t <file.cst>
Start CFD-Post and load the state file <file.cst>.
Starting CFD-Post
Argument
Description
Alternative form:
-state
<file.cst>
-results
<file.res>
Start CFD-Post and load the results file <file.res>.
Alternative
form:-res
<file.res>
-multiconfig
single|separate|last
Alternative form:-m
single|separate|last
Select a multi-configuration load option to control how you load a multiconfiguration (.mres) file or a results file (.res) that contains a run
history (that is, a file that was produced from a definition file that had
its initial values specified from a results file from a previous run and saved
to the results file that you are loading). Choose:
Single Case to load all configurations of a multi-configuration run as a
single case, or all of the results history from a results file that contains a
run history. In either case, only one set of results will appear in the viewer,
but you can use the timestep selector to move between results. This option
is not fully supported.
Separate Cases to load all configurations from a multi-configuration run
into separate cases. If a results file with run history is loaded, CFD-Post
loads the results from this file and the results for any results file in its run
history as separate cases. Each result appears as a separate entry in the
tree.
Last Case to load only the last configuration of a multi-configuration results
file, or only the last results from a results file that contains a run history.
-s <file.cse>
Start CFD-Post and load the session file <file.cse>.
Alternative
form:-session
<file.cse>
-v
Display a summary of the currently set environment variables.
Alternative
form:-verbose
-h
Display a full list of all the possible arguments with short descriptions.
Alternative
form:-help
2.3. Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables

There are a number of environment variables that can be used to change how CFD-Post behaves:
Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables

Environment
Variable
Description/Usage
CFXPOST_USER_MACROS
Allows user-defined macros to load at start-up.

CFXPOST_USER_MACROS='macro1, macro2, '
If the macros contain user interface commands, the appropriate panels will
be added to the Macro Evaluator user interface.
Example:
CFXPOST_USER_MACROS='myMacro1.cse, /home/bob/macros/myMacro3.cse'
CFXEnables adjusting the zero-theta location in single-domain cases.

POST_ZERO_THETA
Linux: CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA='x,y,z'
Windows: CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA=x,y,z
(where x,y,z is a point not on the rotation axis)
This will be used in turbo cases to determine at which position the Theta
variable will be equal to zero. By default, CFD-Post will set Theta such that
the Theta values in the first encountered domain range from zero to some
positive value.
Example for Linux:
CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA='1,0,0.5'
Example for Windows (no quotes):
CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA=1,0,0.5
CFX_USER_IMAGE_DATA
Enables you to display a custom logo image in the viewer.

CFX_USER_IMAGE_DATA='filepath
xLoc yLoc xAttach yAttach scale
alphaR alphaG alphaB transparency'
filepath: path to the image file

Only ppm, png, jpeg, and 24-bit bmp files are currently supported.
xLoc, yLoc: horizontal and vertical location of the image in the viewer (0-1)
xAttach: left, center, right or none.
If set to none, xLoc is used.
yAttach: top, center, bottom or none.
If set to none, yLoc is used.
scale: image size relative to viewer size (0-1)
If set to 0, original pixels are shown regardless of the viewer size.
Starting CFD-Post
Environment
Variable
Description/Usage
alphaR, alphaG, alphaB: red/green/blue components (normalized to 0255) of alpha (the color that will represent 100% transparency)
transparency: overall bitmap transparency (0-1)
Example:
To display image myImage.ppm in the right-bottom corner, occupying 12%
of the viewer size, making the pure green color represent 100% transparent,
and setting the overall transparency to 60%, use:
CFX_USER_IMAGE_DATA=
'/logos/myImage.ppm 0 0 right bottom 0.12 0 255 0 0.6'
VIEWER_EYE_POINT
Allows placing the viewer camera to left/right eye position.

It can be used for composing stereo images and movies
VIEWER_EYE_POINT='cameraZ eyeDist mode'
cameraZ: Z location of the camera (must be less than 1.0; 5.0 is optimum)
Smaller numbers bring the camera closer to the scene (and also widen the
camera angle), larger numbers move it further.
eyeDist: distance between the eyes (0.1 is optimum)
mode: 0 = normal, 1 = left eye, 2 = right eye, 3 = left/right eye (two viewports),
4 = right/left (two viewports), 5 = stereo
Example:
VIEWER_EYE_POINT='5.0 0.1 0'
CFX_BACKGROUND_ROTATE
Applicable to spherical backgrounds only.

CFX_BACKGROUND_ROTATE='x y z angle'
x,y,z: specifies a direction vector (in the global coordinate system) about
which to apply a rotation to the background image
angle: specifies the rotation angle, in degrees, of the background image
The rotation angle is clockwise looking in the direction of the specified direction vector.
Example:
If you start CFD-Post with the mountain scenery background, the background
will appear upright when the Y axis is up You may find that the geometry
.
of your CFD mesh has its top side pointing in the X axis direction. You can
rotate the background image so that it appears upright when the X axis is
up by rotating the image about the Z axis by -90 degrees, as follows:
Running in Batch Mode

Environment
Variable
Description/Usage
CFX_BACKGROUND_ROTATE='0 0 1 -90'
2.4. Running in Batch Mode

All of the functionality of CFD-Post can be accessed when running in batch mode.
When running in batch mode, a Viewer is not provided and you cannot enter commands at a command
prompt. Instead, commands are issued via a CFD-Post session file (*.cse), the name of which is specified
when executing the command to start batch mode. The session file can be created using a text editor,
or, more easily, by recording a session while running in line interface or user interface mode. You can
leave a session file recording while you quit from user interface or line interface mode to write the
>quit command to a session file. Alternatively, you can use a text editor to add this command to the
end of the session file.
When launching CFD-Post on a remote Linux machine (though X, Exceed, and so on), the DISPLAY
variable must be set to a valid X display before running in batch mode. The display will typically be
your local Windows, or Linux machine. The remote machine must have permission to connect to the
display (for example, by use of the xhost command if the X display is on a Linux machine).
To run in batch mode, execute one of the following commands at the command prompt:
Windows
<CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost -batch <filename.cse>
Linux
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch <filename.cse>
You can include the name of a results file in your session file, which is described in the example below.
However, you can also pass the name of a results file and a session to CFD-Post from the command
line. This allows you to apply a generic session file to a series of different results files. To launch CFDPost in batch file mode, load a results file and execute the statements in a session file using one of the
following commands:
Windows
<CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res>
Linux
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res>
To load multiple files, you may list the filenames at the end. For example, fluid.res solid.rst fluid1.res
2.4.1. Example: Pressure Calculation on Multiple Files using Batch Mode

This example calculates the value of pressure at a point in each of three results files.
The purpose of this example is for demonstration only. You will deal with only three results files in this
case, and it would be faster to produce the output by using the graphical user interface. However, these
features can be useful in situations where a large number of results files need to be processed at once.
In order to carry out this procedure, you will make use of session files, power syntax and the Command
Editor dialog box. You could use the results from any file by making the appropriate substitutions in
the following example.
Starting CFD-Post
1.
Place three results files (<resfile1>, <resfile2>, <resfile3>) in your working directory. For
this example, in all three results files the location 0, 0, 0 must be in the solution domain.
2.
Create a session file based on a results file.

a.
Start CFD-Post and select File > Load Results. Select the results file and click Open.
b.
Select Session > New Session from the main menu.

For details, see New Session Command (p. 139).
c.
Enter batchtest.cse as the session file name and click Save.
d.
Select Session > Start Recording from the main menu to begin recording the session file commands.
e.
Select Insert > Location > Point and accept the default name Point 1.
f.
Click Apply to create the point at location 0, 0, 0.

You will now use Power Syntax to find the value of pressure at Point 1, and print it to the
command line. In addition to printing the value of pressure, it would be useful to know the
name of the results file. You will make use of the DATA READER object to find the name of
the current results file.
g.
Select Tools > Command Editor.
h.
Enter the following into the command window:

! $filePath = getValue("DATA READER","Current Results File");
! $pressureVal = probe("Pressure","Point 1");
! print "\nFor $filePath, Pressure at Point 1 is $pressureVal\n";
Note
If you copy the text above into the Command Editor, ensure that the exclamation
points are at the beginning of lines.
i.
Click Process to process the commands.
j.
Check the terminal window to make sure the command worked as desired.
k.
Select Session > Stop Recording from the main menu to stop recording the session file.
3.
This completes the first part of the example. You may want to close down CFD-Post at this time.
4.
You can now run the session file on any number of results files using the following command:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse <resfile>
where <resfile> is the name of your results file.

To load multiple files, you can list the filenames at the end of the command. For example:
cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse <resfile1> <resfile2> <resfile3>
10
Running in Batch Mode

For a very large number of results files, a simple script can be used to pass filenames as command line
arguments. As an example, this C shell script would pass arguments as results file names to the CFDPost command line:
#!/bin/csh
foreach file ($argv)
<CFDPOSTROOT>/cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse $file
end
11
12
Chapter 3: CFD-Post Graphical Interface

The CFD-Post interface contains the following areas: the menu bar, the toolbar, the workspace area,
and the viewer area.
Figure 3.1: Sample CFD-Post Interface
When CFD-Post starts, the Outline workspace area and the 3D Viewer are displayed. The top area of
the Outline workspace is the tree view and the bottom area is the details view (the details view is populated only after you edit an item, as described in Details Views (p. 16)).
The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. In addition to the mouse,
you can use icons from the viewer toolbar (along the top of the viewer) to manipulate the view.
13
CFD-Post Graphical Interface

The width of the workspace can be adjusted by dragging its right border to the left or right. The width
of the viewer is updated to accommodate the new size of the workspace. The dividing line between
the tree view and details view can be dragged vertically to re-size the windows. You may want to do
this if the details view contains a large amount of information.
The remainder of this chapter describes:
3.1. Graphical Objects
3.2. Common Outline View Shortcuts
3.3. Details Views
3.4. Outline Workspace
3.5. Variables Workspace
3.6. Expressions Workspace
3.7. Calculators Workspace
3.8.Turbo Workspace
3.1. Graphical Objects

CFD-Post supports a variety of graphical objects and locator objects that are used to create post-processing
plots and to define locations for quantitative calculation. In Figure 3.1: Sample CFD-Post Interface (p. 13)
a plane has been inserted and configured to display temperature.
The details of all the possible objects and associated parameters that can be defined in CFD-Post are
described in the CFD-Post .ccl file available with the installation.
3.1.1. Creating and Editing New Objects

New objects can be created and edited by:
Right-clicking an object in the tree view area.
14
Graphical Objects
Selecting a command from the Insert menu
For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141).
Right-clicking in the viewer (not applicable for all object types). In many cases, this is the most convenient
way to create locators (such as planes). For details, see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 75).
3.1.2. Selecting Objects

You can select multiple objects by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key as you select each object. Subsequently right-clicking any of the selected objects allows you to perform commands that apply to all
of the selected objects (such as Show and Hide).
3.1.3. Object Visibility

In the Outline and Turbo workspaces, some objects have a visibility check box beside them. In the
graphic that follows, the Wireframe, Plane, and Streamline objects are set to be visible in the viewer.
You can change the visibility settings for a group of objects by first selecting a subgroup of objects
(using mouse clicks while holding down Ctrl (for multiple, independent selections) or Shift (to drag
over a range of selections)), and then right-clicking on the group and using the appropriate shortcut
menu command (for example, Hide or Show). For details, see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 75).
15

When multiple viewports are used, the state of each check box is maintained separately for each
viewport.
Tip
You control the number and layout of viewports with the viewport icon in the
viewer's toolbar.
3.2. Common Outline View Shortcuts

The common Outline view shortcuts, accessible by right-clicking an object in the tree, are listed in the
table below. Outline Tree View Shortcuts (p. 18) has a more complete list.
Command
Description
New (or Insert)
Inserts an object.
Edit
Edits the selected object in a details view.a
Edit in Command
Editor
Edits the selected object in the Command Editor dialoga. For details, see Command
Editor (p. 271).
Duplicate
Creates a new object of the same type, with the same settings, as the selected
object.
Delete
Deletes the selected objects.
Replace results file
Replaces the selected results file with another results file while keeping the state.
This is the recommended procedure; reloading the results file through the Load
Results panel may not recover the state completely, in particular when Turbo Post
is initialized. Note that the Replace results file function will keep the original case
name even though the results file has changed.
a
An expression that is set as an input parameter in ANSYS Workbench cannot be edited in CFX-Pre or CFD-Post (as the results of such
edits are not passed to ANSYS Workbench) and will be grayed out. However, the expression can be declared to no longer be an input
parameter or it can be deleted.
3.3. Details Views

Details view is a generic term used to describe an editor for the settings of a CCL object. A details view
for a particular kind of object (such as a plane object) may be referenced by the name of the type of
object being edited, followed by the word details view (for example, for the Wireframe object, the
Wireframe details view).
A details view appears after any of the following actions:
Double-clicking an object in the tree view
Right-clicking an object in the tree view and selecting Edit from the shortcut menu
16
Outline Workspace
Highlighting an object in the tree view and clicking Edit
from the shortcut menu
Clicking OK on a dialog box used to begin the creation of a new object

Clicking an object in the Viewer when in pick mode
Right-clicking on an object in the Viewer and selecting Edit from the shortcut menu
You use the Details view to define the properties of an object. The Details view contains one or more
tabs, depending on the type of object being defined.
Many properties can be set via a CEL expression. To enter an expression:
1.
Click in the field for a property.
2.
Click the Enter Expression icon that appears beside the field. This enables the field to accept an expression
name.
3.
Either enter an expression definition directly, or type the name of an existing expression. You must
ensure that the expression evaluates to a value having appropriate units for the property that uses the
expression.
For details on CEL expressions, see Expressions Workspace (p. 51).

For CFX components in ANSYS Workbench, any CEL expression can be made into a parameterized CEL
expression by defining it as a Workbench input parameter. You can do this by creating an expression
and parameterize it by right-clicking it in the Expression editor. You can then use that expression as
the value of a property.
You can change a property from being specified by a Workbench input parameter. However, the corresponding CEL expression persists and can be managed by the Expression editor.
Details View Controls

Details views contain the following buttons:
Apply applies the information contained within all the tabs of an editor.
OK is the same as Apply, except that the editor automatically closes.
Cancel and Close both close the editor without applying or saving any changes.
Reset returns the settings for the object to those stored in the database for all the tabs. The settings are
stored in the database each time the Apply button is clicked.
Defaults restores the system default settings for all the tabs of the edited object.
3.4. Outline Workspace

The Outline workspace consists of objects in a tree view and a Details view where you can edit those
objects; the tree view appears in the top half of that pane. The Details view appears beneath the tree
view. For details, see Details Views (p. 16).
You access the Outline workspace by clicking the Outline tab.
17

After starting CFD-Post and loading a results file, several special objects will exist in the Outline workspace. All of these special objects can have some of their properties edited, but the objects themselves
cannot be created or deleted using CFD-Post (without using CCL commands). These objects are described
in the following sections:
Case Branch (p. 26)
User Locations and Plots (p. 28)
Report (p. 29)
Objects that do not exist after loading a results file are described in CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141).
Shortcuts available to the tree view are described in Outline Tree View Shortcuts (p. 18).
Some of the settings and buttons in a details view of the Outline workspace are common for different
object types; these are described in Outline Details View (p. 19).
3.4.1. Outline Tree View Shortcuts

Shortcuts for editing and manipulating objects are accessible by right-clicking an object in the tree
view. The following table shows commands that are specific to the tree view.
Command
Description
New (or Insert)
Inserts an object.
Edit
Edits the selected object in a details view.
Edit in Command
Editor
Edits the selected object in the Command Editor dialog

box.
Duplicate
Creates a new object of the same type, with the same settings, as the selected object.
Delete
Deletes the selected objects.
Show
Makes the selected objects visible in the viewer.
Hide
Makes the selected objects invisible in the viewer.
Hide All
Makes all objects, except the wireframe object, invisible in

the viewer.
Refresh Preview
Refreshes the report. For details, see Refreshing the Report (p. 43).
Load <template>
template
Loads the registered template having the name indicated

by <template>. For details, see Report Templates (p. 34).
Report Templates
Allows you to select a report template. For details, see Report Templates (p. 34).
Add to Report
Sets the selected report objects to appear in the report the

next time the report is generated.
Remove from Report Sets the selected report objects to not appear in the report
the next time the report is generated.
Add All to Report
18
Sets all report objects to appear in the report the next time
the report is generated.
Outline Workspace
Command
Description
Move Up
Moves the selected objects up one level in the report so

as to appear closer to the beginning of the report in relation
to the other report objects.
Move Down
Moves the selected objects down one level in the report

so as to appear closer to the end of the report in relation
to the other report objects.
Show in Separate
Window
Displays the selected chart in its own window.
3.4.2. Outline Details View

A details view appears at the bottom of the Outline workspace when you open an object in the tree
view for editing (which is described in Details Views (p. 16)). Some Outline details views have tabs in
common.
3.4.2.1. Geometry Details Tab

The definition of geometry is unique for each graphic object. The basic procedure for geometry setup
involves defining the size and location of the object, with most other properties being object specific.
For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141).
3.4.2.1.1. Selecting Domains

For many objects you can select the Domains in which the object should exist.
To select the domain, pick a domain name from the drop-down Domains menu. To define the object
in more than one domain, you can type in the names of the domains separated by commas or click
the Location editor
icon.
When more than one domain has been used, most plotting functions can be applied to the entire
computational domain, or to a specific named domain.
3.4.2.2. Color Details Tab

The Color details tab controls the color of graphic objects in the Viewer. The coloring can be either
constant or based on a variable, and can be selected from the Mode pull-down menu.
The Color details tab enables you to view and/or edit the properties of the tree view's Display
Properties and Defaults > Color Maps definitions; System colors are view-only but Custom
colors can be edited.
The default color map appears in bold text.
3.4.2.2.1. Mode: Constant

To specify a single color for an object, select the Constant option from the Mode pull-down menu.
To choose a color, click the Color selector
icon to the right of the Color option and select one of
the available colors. Alternatively, click on the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors
quickly. Use the left and right mouse buttons to cycle in opposite directions.
19
3.4.2.2.2. Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable

You may want to plot a variable on an object, such as temperature on a plane. To do this, you should
select the Variable option from the Mode pull-down menu. This displays additional options, including
the Variable pull-down menu where you can choose the variable you want to plot.
The list of variables contains User Level 1 variables. For a full list of variables, click More variables
.
For isosurface and vector plots, the Use Plot Variable option is also available. This sets the variable
used to color your plot to the same as that used to define it.
3.4.2.2.3. Range
Range allows you to plot using the Global, Local or User Specified range of a variable. This
affects the variation of color used when plotting the object in the Viewer. The lowest values of a variable
in the selected range are shown in blue in the Viewer; the highest values are shown in red.
The Global range option uses the variable values from the results in all domains (regardless of the domains
selected on the Geometry tab) and all timesteps (when applicable) to determine the minimum and
maximum values.
The Local range option uses only the variable values on the current object at the current timestep to
set the maximum and minimum range values. This option is useful to use the full color range on an object.
The User Specified range option allows you to specify your own maximum and minimum range
values. You can use this to concentrate the full color range into a specific variable range.
3.4.2.2.4. Hybrid/Conservative
Select whether the object you want to plot will be based on hybrid or conservative values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
3.4.2.2.5. Color Scale

The color scale can be mapped using a linear or logarithmic scale. For a linear scale, the color map is
divided evenly over the whole variable range. For a logarithmic scale, the color scale is plotted against
a log scale of the variable values.
3.4.2.2.6. Color Map

The colors along the color bar in the legend are specified by this option.
Rainbow uses a standard mapping from blue (minimum) to red (maximum).
Rainbow 6 uses an extension of the standard Rainbow map from blue (minimum) to magenta (maximum).
Zebra creates six contours over the specified range of values. Between each pair of contour lines, the
color scale varies from white (minimum) to black and through to white (maximum) again. The Zebra
map can be used to show areas where the gradient of a variable changes most rapidly with a higher resolution (five times greater) than the standard Greyscale color map
Greyscale changes in color from black (minimum) to white (maximum).
20
Outline Workspace
3.4.2.2.6.1. Accessing the CFD-Post Color Map Editor

The CFD-Post Color Map editor enables you to define and name a set of colors (a color map) that you
can then apply to an object by using that object's Color tab.
To access the Color Map editor, you can:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Color Map.
From an object's Color tab (when the Mode is set to Variable), click the
field and select Insert, Edit, or Duplicate.
icon beside the Color Map
From the Outline view under Display Properties and Defaults > Color Maps, select a System or Custom
color map, right-click, and select either Insert, Edit, or Duplicate.
A System color map can be set as the default, but otherwise cannot be edited directly. However,
you can duplicate a System color map and use that as a basis for a Custom color map (which will
be completely editable).
Depending on how you access the Color Map editor, it may appear as a dialog box or as a details view.
To learn how to use the Color Map editor, see Color Map Command (p. 211).
3.4.2.2.7. Undefined Color

Undef. Color is the color that is used in areas where the results cannot be plotted because the variable
is not defined or variable values do not exist.
For example, a section of an object that lies outside the computational domain will not have any variable
value.
icon to the right of this box allows you to change the undefined color.
Clicking the Color selector
Alternatively, click on the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors quickly. Values written
to the results file as zeros are colored as such and will not be undefined. For example, consider results
files containing Yplus/Wall Shear values away from a wall boundary.
3.4.2.3. Symbol Details Tab

Enables you to configure the appearance of a symbol.
3.4.2.3.1. Symbol
Selects the style of the symbol to be displayed.
3.4.2.3.2. Symbol size

Specifies the size of the symbol where 0 is the smallest and 10 is the largest.
3.4.2.4. Render Details Tab

The appearance of the Render tab depends on what type of object is plotted in the viewer.
21
3.4.2.4.1. Show Faces

The top half of the tab controls the Show Faces options. This toggle is selected by default and draws
the faces of the elements that make up an object. The faces are colored using the settings on the Color
tab. When Show Faces is selected, the following options can be set:
3.4.2.4.2. Show Faces: Transparency

Set the Transparency value for the faces of the object by entering a value between 0 (opaque) and 1
(transparent), or use the embedded slider.
Note
For volume rendering objects, transparency is set on the Geometry tab.
3.4.2.4.3. Show Faces: Draw Mode

Shading properties can be None, Flat Shading, or Smooth Shading.
Flat Shading: Each element is colored a constant color. Color interpolation is not used across or between
elements.
Smooth Shading: Color interpolation is applied that results in color variation across an element based
on the color of surrounding elements.
Draw as Lines: This option draws lines but uses the color settings defined on the Color tab. The color
settings that are applied to the lines use Smooth Shading. You must use the Screen Capture feature to
print an image or create an animation containing lines drawn using this option. (See Animation Options
Dialog Box (p. 244) for details on the Screen Capture feature.)
Note
Optionally, you can edit the face you want to show as lines to disable Show Faces and to
enable Show Mesh Lines. The resulting display will be similar to Draw as Lines, but in
constant-color mode only.
Draw as Points: This option draws points at the intersection of each line, using the color scheme defined
on the Color tab. You must use the Screen Capture feature to print an image containing this option.
3.4.2.4.4. Show Faces: Face Culling

Note
Face Culling affects only printouts performed using use Screen Capture method.
Toggle Face Culling (removal) of the front or back faces of the polygons that form the graphic object.
This allows you to clear visibility for element faces of objects that either face outwards (front) or inwards
(back). Domain boundaries always have a normal vector that points outwards from the domain. The
two sides of a thin surface therefore have normal vectors that point towards each other.
22
Outline Workspace
Selecting Front clears visibility for all outward-facing element faces. This would, for example, clear visibility for one side of a plane or the outward facing elements of a cylinder locator. When applied to a volume
object, the first layer of element faces that point outwards are rendered invisible. You will also generally
need to use face culling when viewing values on thin surface boundaries, which are defined using a wall
boundary on two 2D regions that occupy the same spatial location.
If you want to plot a variable on a thin surface, you will need to select Front Face culling for both
2D regions that make up the thin surface to view the plot correctly. As shown by the two previous
diagrams, viewing only the back faces means that the data for the inward facing surfaces is always
visible.
Selecting Back clears visibility for inward-facing element faces (the faces on the opposite side to the
normal vector). When applied to volume objects, the effect of back culling is not always visible in the
viewer because the object elements that face outward obscure the culled faces. It can, however, reduce
the render time when further actions are performed on the object. The effect of this would be most noticeable for large volume objects. In the same way as for Front Face culling, it clears visibility of one side
of surface locators.
No culling shows element faces when viewed from either side.
23
3.4.2.4.5. Show Faces: Lighting

When selected, surfaces appear realistically shaded to emphasize shape. Clear this check box when you
want to see variable colors that match the legend colors.
3.4.2.4.6. Show Faces: Specular Lighting

When selected, objects appear shiny.
3.4.2.4.7. Show Mesh Lines

Show Mesh Lines can be selected to show the edge lines of the mesh elements in an object. When
selected, the following options are available:
3.4.2.4.8. Show Mesh Lines: Edge Angle

This can be altered to enable the same editing features on each object as for the whole wireframe. For
details, see Wireframe (p. 28).
3.4.2.4.9. Show Mesh Lines: Line Width

Set the line width by entering the width of the line in pixels. Set the value between 1 and 11; you can
use the graduated arrows, the embedded slider, or type in a value.
3.4.2.4.10. Show Mesh Lines: Color Mode

The line color can be set as Default or User Specified.
Default sets the line to CFD-Post default color scheme (set using Options dialog box in Edit menu).
User Specified allows you to pick the color. For details, see Show Mesh Lines: Line Color (p. 24).
3.4.2.4.11. Show Mesh Lines: Line Color

icon to the right of the Color box and seLine color can be changed by clicking the Color selector
lecting a color. Alternatively, click on the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors quickly.
Use the left and right mouse buttons to cycle in opposite directions.
3.4.2.4.12. Apply Texture

Textures are images that are pasted (mapped) onto the faces of an object. They are used to make an
object look like it is made of a certain type of material, or to add special labels, logos, or other custom
markings on an object.
3.4.2.4.13. Apply Texture: Predefined Textures

To use a predefined texture map, set Type to Predefined and set Texture to the desired material
type using the drop-down menu. Options include brick and various types of metal.
Enable Blend to blend the texture with the object color specified from the Color tab.
Blend allows the colors of the texture to combine with the basic color of the object. For example, if a
white object is given the texture Metal, the object looks like silver. If the basic color of the object is
24
Outline Workspace
orange, the object looks like copper. With the Blend feature turned off, the basic color of the object
has no effect and colors depends only on the texture.
3.4.2.4.14. Apply Texture: Custom Textures

To use a custom texture map, set Type to Custom.
An Image File (either a bitmap or ppm file) must be specified. The dimensions of the image, in pixels,
should be powers of two. If the texture image has a number of rows not equal to a power of two, some
rows are removed (with an even distribution) until the number remaining is a power of two. The same
is true for the number of columns. For example, an image with dimensions 65 by 130 is reduced to an
image 64 by 128 before it is applied (the file will not be changed, though).
There are two basic kinds of texture mapping available; textures can either move with the object, as if
painted on, or textures can slide across objects, producing a shiny metal effect. The latter kind of
texture mapping is activated by turning on the Sphere-Map feature.
When Sphere-Map is not used, the following additional features apply:
Tile: Causes the texture image to be repeated.
Position: Controls the position of the mapped image relative to the object.
Direction: Controls the direction in which the texture is stamped on the object.
The texture appears undistorted when the object is viewed in this direction.
Scale: Controls the size of the mapped texture relative to the object.
Angle: Controls the texture image orientation about the axis specified by Direction.
3.4.2.4.15. Apply Texture: Texture Examples

The next two figures show an object with a gold texture map and an object with a brick texture map.
Note that the brick pattern was applied in the direction of the Y axis, which is roughly going from the
lower-left corner to the upper-right corner of the figure. The texture is applied to all faces of the object
25

(locator) ignoring the Y coordinate. This results in the texture becoming smeared in the specified Direction.
To avoid this, textures can be applied to smaller locators (that is, ones that cover only a portion of the
whole object). The Direction setting can then be specified using a direction approximately perpendicular to each of the smaller surfaces. Smaller locators can be found in the tree view (for example, under
Regions).
3.4.2.5. View Details Tab

The View tab is used for creating or applying predefined Instance Transforms for a wide variety of objects.
For details on Instance Transforms, see Instance Transform Command (p. 206).
3.4.2.5.1. Apply Rotation Check Box

3.4.2.5.1.1. Method, Axis, From, To
These settings specify an axis of rotation. For details, see Method (p. 207).
3.4.2.5.1.2. Angle
The Angle setting specifies the angle of rotation about the axis. For details, see Angle (p. 208).
3.4.2.5.2. Apply Translation Check Box

Select the Apply Translation check box to move the object in the Viewer. For details, see Apply
Translation Check Box (p. 208).
3.4.2.5.3. Apply Reflection/Mirroring Check Box

Select the Apply Reflection/Mirroring check box to mirror an object in the Viewer. For details, see
Apply Reflection/Mirroring Check Box (p. 208).
3.4.2.5.4. Apply Scale Check Box

Select the Scale check box to set values in the X, Y, and Z directions to scale the object about the origin.
For example, entering [2,1,1] would stretch the object to double its size in the X axis direction.
3.4.2.5.5. Apply Instancing Transform Check Box

The Transform setting specifies a predefined Instancing Transform.
3.4.3. Case Branch

The tree view contains one case branch for each loaded results file or mesh file. The case name is the
name of the results file, less the extension.
Tip
To see the full path to the case file, hover the mouse pointer over the case name.
A case branch contains all domains, subdomains, boundaries, and Mesh Regions contained in the
corresponding results file.
26
Outline Workspace
Double-clicking on the case branch name displays the View tab in the details view. Select the Apply
Translation check box to move the object in the Viewer. For details, see Apply Translation Check
Box (p. 208).
Double-clicking a domain name displays the domain details view.
3.4.3.1. Domain Details View

A domain object represents each domain loaded from the results file. You can edit the properties of
domains by right-clicking on them in the tree view and selecting Edit.
3.4.3.1.1. Instancing Details Tab

Instancing affects the display of objects; it allows multiple copies of objects to be displayed with a
specified geometric transformation describing the relative positions. For example, a row of turbine
blades can be visualized by applying instancing to an object that shows a single blade.
The Instancing tab for a domain is the same as the Instancing tab for a turbo component. For details,
see:
Instancing Tab (p. 279)
Instance Transform Command (p. 206).
Instancing information for a domain applies to any instance transform that has the Instancing Info
From Domain option selected. This applies to the default transform; therefore, any object associated
with a domain is affected by a change to the domain's instancing information.
3.4.3.1.2. Info Details Tab

Certain information that CFD-Post reads from the results file is displayed on the Info panel. The units
that are shown beside some quantities are the default CFD-Post units, which you can change by selecting
Edit > Options from the main menu bar.
3.4.3.2. Boundary and Subdomain

All boundaries and subdomains associated with a domain are listed under the domain.
The Boundary and Subdomain object types are defined during pre-processing and created in CFDPost when a file is loaded. You cannot create additional boundary or subdomain objects during postprocessing, or delete the existing ones.
A boundary object exists for each boundary condition defined in the results file. Any mesh regions that
were not specifically assigned a boundary condition appear in a default boundary object for each domain.
If you have a complex geometry where many mesh regions are assigned to the default boundary conditions, it may be worth defining named boundary conditions for some of the regions when they are
created, even though you still apply the default wall boundary condition to these named regions. You
will then have convenient boundary objects created in CFD-Post upon which you can view variables
when you come to view the results.
Subdomain objects exist only if Subdomains are defined during pre-processing.
You can edit both the Color and Render properties of Boundary and Subdomain objects. For details,
see
27

Color Details Tab (p. 19)
Render Details Tab (p. 21).
3.4.3.3. Mesh Regions

All of the primitive and composite region names are listed under Mesh Regions.
3.4.4. User Locations and Plots

The following objects appear under User Locations and Plots:
User-defined locators
You can define a variety of locators, such as points, lines, planes, and volumes; for details, see Location
Submenu (p. 142).
Transforms
Instance transforms are used to specify how an object should be drawn multiple times. CFD-Post can
create instance transforms using rotation, translation, and reflection; for details, see Instance Transform
Command (p. 206).
Legends
Legends can be displayed in the viewer to show the relationship between colors and values for the
locators you insert; for details, see Legend Command (p. 202).
Wireframe
The Wireframe object contains the surface mesh for your geometry; for details, see Wireframe (p. 28).
3.4.4.1. Wireframe
The Wireframe object contains the surface mesh for your geometry and is created as a default object
when you load a file into CFD-Post. You can change how much of the surface mesh you want to see
by altering the Edge Angle (see the following section), as well as the line thickness and color.
You toggle the visibility of the wireframe on and off by clicking on the Wireframe check box in the
Outline tree view. To change the way the wireframe displays, double-click Wireframe.
Note
You cannot create additional Wireframe objects.
3.4.4.1.1. Wireframe: Definition Tab

The Definition tab contains the settings listed below. After making changes, click Apply to make those
changes visible.
Domains controls on which domains the wireframe is displayed. For a case with immersed solids, the
setting All Domains refers to all domains except immersed solids; for Wireframe, the default setting is
All Domains, All Immersed Solids.
28
Outline Workspace
Show Surface Mesh controls whether you see edges and surfaces, or only edges, when the wireframe is
visible.
Edge Angle determines how much of the wireframe is drawn. The edge angle is the angle between one
edge of a mesh face and its neighboring face. Setting an edge angle in CFD-Post defines a minimum angle
for drawing parts of the surface mesh. For example, if an edge angle of 30 degrees is chosen, any edges
shared by faces with an angle between them of 30 degrees or more is drawn. 30 degrees is the default
edge angle; if you want to see more of the wireframe, reduce the edge angle. To change the wireframes
edge angle, set Edge Angle to a new value.
Color Mode determines the color of the lines in the wireframe. To change the wireframes line color, set
Color Mode to User Specified and click on the color bar to select a new color.
Line Width determines the thickness of the lines in the wireframe. To change the wireframes line width,
set Line Width to a new value.
3.4.4.1.2. Wireframe: View Tab

For details on changing the view settings, see View Details Tab (p. 26).
3.4.5. Report
CFD-Post automatically makes available a report of the output of your simulation. You can control the
contents of the report in the Outline workspace, see the available sections of the report in the Report
Viewer, add new sections in the Comment Viewer, and publish the report in HTML or in plain text
form.
Here is an example of a report that uses the generic template; if you have a RES file loaded in CFD-Post,
you can see a similar report by clicking on the Report Viewer tab at the bottom of the Viewer area.
Note
The sample report shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 30), Figure 3.3: A Sample
Report, Part 2 (p. 31), and Figure 3.4: A Sample Report, Part 3 (p. 32) is taken from a Report.html file, much like the one that you generate when you click the Publish button
.
29

Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1
30
Outline Workspace
31

A report is defined by the Report object and the objects stored under it. The Report object, like
other objects, can be saved to, and restored from, a state file. For details, see File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post (p. 111). Only one Report object exists in a CFD-Post session.
3.4.5.1. Omitting Default Report Sections

You can remove major sections of the report by expanding the Report section in the Outline tree view
and clearing the check box beside the section to be omitted. To see the results of such operations,
right-click Report and select Refresh Preview.
Note
The Title Page option controls the inclusion of the logo, title, dates, and Table of Contents
sections.
3.4.5.2. Changing the Default Report Sections

To change a default section, click on the section name in the Outline tree view and click Edit.
32
Outline Workspace
For the Title Page, you can:
Add a new logo (JPG or PNG only)
Remove the ANSYS logo
Change the report's title
Add the author's name
Control the display of the date and the table of contents.
After making changes, click Apply and Refresh Preview to see the results in the Report Viewer.
The other report pages control detailed information about the mesh, physics, and solution. Again, after
making changes, click Apply and Refresh Preview to see the results in the Report Viewer.
3.4.5.3. Adding New Sections to a Report

You can add new sections by using the Comment Viewer tab (at the bottom of the viewer pane):
to ready the Comment Viewer for editing.
1.
In the Comment Viewer toolbar, click New Comment
2.
Add a title for your new section in the Heading field.
3.
Set the level of the heading in the Level field (use "1" for new sections; "2" for subsections, and so on).
4.
Type your text in the large, white text-entry field (HTML code is not accepted as it is generated automatically).
5.
When your new section is complete, select its name in the Outline tree view under Report, then press
Ctrl+Up Arrow (or Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move the new section in the report hierarchy.
6.
To see how the report will look, right-click Report and select Refresh Preview. The updated report
appears in the Report Viewer. To publish the report (that is, to make the report available in a file that
others can see), right-click Report and select Publish.
7.
In the Publish Reports dialog box, you can choose where to save the report, or to add a CVF file that
can be seen by readers who have a stand-alone ANSYS CFD Viewer installed for use in a Microsoft Explorer
browser that has ActiveX enabled.
Note
If you see the error "3D Viewer Not Supported", go to the http://www.ansys.com/ site
(under Home > Products Overview > Fluid Dynamics > ANSYS CFD-Post ) to download
the CFD Viewer.
If you click More Options, you can change the type of graphics files and charts used and their
size.
8.
To save the report, click OK. The report is written to the file you specified.
33
3.4.5.4. Report Templates

Report templates are available for rapidly setting up application-specific reports. Depending on the information contained in a results file, a report template will be selected automatically, and made available
as a command in the following places:
The File > Report menu
The shortcut menu that appears when you right-click the Report object.
In the same places, there is a Report Templates command that invokes the Report Templates dialog
box. This dialog box allows you to:
Browse the list of existing templates.
Add (register) a template.
To do this:
1.
Click Add template

dialog box.
2.
Select a state or session file that contains a report; alternatively, you can choose to use the current
state of CFD-Post, and provide a file name to which to save the template.
3.
Provide a name and description for the template. You cannot use the name of an existing template.
4.
If you are loading a state or session file, and the file name does not end in .cst or .cse, set the
Execution setting to either State or Session, as applicable.
on the Report Templates dialog box to invoke the Template Properties
View and/or edit the properties of a template.

To do this:
1.
Click Edit Properties

dialog box.
2.
View and/or edit the name, description, and path to the template file, as applicable. You can edit the
properties for templates that were added, but not the standard templates.
on the Report Templates dialog box to invoke the Template Properties
Delete templates from the set of available templates.

You can delete only the templates that were added. To do this:
1.
2.
34
Select a user template in the Report Templates dialog box.

Click Delete
Outline Workspace
3.4.5.4.1. Turbo Report Templates

Post-processing within CFD-Post is fully automated using the turbomachinery report templates. The
turbo reports are designed for single-bladerow, single-phase fluid analyses. The turbo reports can be
used for individual bladerows of a multi-bladerow analysis by loading each bladerow domain separately
into CFD-Post using the domain selector. (To enable the domain selector, click on the Edit > Options
menu, select Files and checkmark the Show domain selector before load option.)
Important
Turbo reports attempt to auto-initialize Turbo mode. However if auto-initialization fails, you
must initialize Turbo mode manually and re-run the turbo report.
CFD-Post cannot automatically detect a solution that is "360 Case Without Periodics", so you
need to set this manually.
Turbo report templates are not designed for multifile usage or comparison mode. In these
cases:
User charts that contain local variables will not have plots showing the differences in comparison mode.
Tables will not show differences in comparison mode.
There will be only one picture of the meridional view of the blades (corresponding to the
first loaded results file).
Because transient blade row results are different in each passage, Turbo Reports are not designed
for transient blade row cases, and results may not be what is expected. Plots in Turbo reports
that appear to show multiple passages actually show copies of the first passage and not expanded passages. In other words, the turbo report tool follows the same behavior of any other
solution method; that is, it makes an instanced copy of the first passage and plots the variables
there.
These are the variables required for all Release 14.5 turbo reports:
CFX Variables Required for all Release 14.5 Turbo Reports
Density
Force X
Force Y
Force Z
Pressure
Total Pressure
Total Pressure in Stn Frame
Rotation Velocity
35

Velocity
Velocity in Stn Frame u
Velocity in Stn Frame v
Velocity in Stn Frame w
Velocity in Stn Frame
Velocity in Stn Frame Flow Angle
Velocity Flow Angle
Velocity in Stn Frame Circumferential
Velocity Circumferential
Velocity Meridional
Note
If all of the turbo components in the results file are 'stationary', then variables having names
ending with 'in Stn Frame' are not required.
FLUENT Variables Required for all Release 14.5 Turbo Reports
Density
Static Pressure
Total Pressure
X Velocity
Y Velocity
Z Velocity
In addition to the variables mentioned above, the following variables are required for compressible
flow reports:
CFX Variables Required for all Release 14.5 Compressible Flow Turbo Reports
Temperature
Total Temperature
Total Temperature in Stn Frame
Static Enthalpy
Total Enthalpy
Total Enthalpy in Stn Frame
36
Outline Workspace
Isentropic Total Enthalpy
Polytropic Total Enthalpy
Total Density in Stn Frame
Total Density
Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Pressure
Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Volume
Rothalpy
Static Entropy
Mach Number
Mach Number in Stn Frame
Isentropic Compression Efficiency
Isentropic Expansion Efficiency
FLUENT Variables Required for all Release 14.5 Compressible Flow Turbo Reports
Static Temperature
Total Temperature
Enthalpy
Total Enthalpy
Specific Heat (Cp)
Rothalpy
Entropy
Mach Number
When variables are missing, lines in the turbo report tables that depend on these variables will be
missing.
3.4.5.4.1.1. Procedures for Using Turbo Reports when Turbomachinery Data is Missing
Results files from FLUENT (and from some other sources) will not have all the turbomachinery data that
CFD-Post requires. For turbo results files that lack data about the number of passages, you must do the
following:
1.
For FLUENT files, prior to loading a turbo report template, create a new variable that the report expects
(but which is not available from FLUENT files):
a.
From the toolbar, click Variable
. The Insert Variable dialog box appears.
37

b.
c.
2.
In the Name field, type Rotation Velocity and click OK. The Details view for Rotation Velocity
appears.
In the Expression field, type Radius * abs(omega) / 1 [rad] and click Apply. This expression calculates the angular speed (in units of length per unit time) as a product of the local
radius and the rotational speed.
When you load a turbo report for a case that is missing some variables, an error dialog box appears
that describes warnings and errors. Generally this means that some rows in the turbo report will not
appear.
Turbo reports for FLUENT files will not display information about absolute Mach number. This
causes charts of Mach number to display only the relative Mach number.
3.
For any results file that is missing the number of passages (such as FLUENT files and CFX results files
not set up using the Turbo Mode in CFX-Pre), after you load the turbo report template, do the following
for each domain:
a.
b.
4.
A <domain_name> Instance Transform appears in the Outline view under User Locations and
Plots. Prior to viewing the report, double-click this name to edit the instance transform. In the #
of Passages field, ensure that the number of passages matches the number of passages in the
domain. If you enter a new number, click Apply.
On the Expressions tab, double-click on the expression domain_name Components in 360 to
edit it. Match the definition to the number of components in the domain. If you enter a new
number, click Apply.
In the Report Viewer, click Refresh to ensure that the contents are updated.
3.4.5.4.2. Choosing a Turbo Report

If the model was set up using CFX-Pre Turbo Mode, then CFD-Post will automatically be able to determine
which report to load based on the machine type and flow type selected, and will prompt you to load
it. The report can also be loaded manually by right-clicking on the Report item in CFD-Post. To avoid
conflicts with the current CFD-Post state, you should load the report in a clean session.
In the Computed Results table, any values that are shown as N/A means that the necessary scalar
variables for computing these values were missing from the results file. This might happen if the solution
was run using an older version of CFX, or if some of the scalar variables were manually disabled.
The report templates are CFD-Post session files located in the CFX install under the etc/PostReports
directory. You can edit these reports or make new versions to add to the list of report templates. The
following table shows the correspondence between the machine type, the flow type settings, and the
report selection.
Machine Type
Fluid Type
Domain Motion
(Single Domains
Only)
Report Template
Pump
Any
Rotating
Pump Impeller
Stationary
Stator
Rotating
Fan
Fan
38
Any
Outline Workspace
Machine Type
Fluid Type
Domain Motion
(Single Domains
Only)
Report Template
Stationary
Stator
Fan
Any
Rotating
Fan Noise
Axial Compressor
Compressible
Rotating
Axial Compressor Rotor
Stationary
Stator
Rotating
Centrifugal Compressor Rotor
Stationary
Stator
Rotating
Turbine Rotor
Stationary
Turbine Stator
Rotating
Turbine Rotor
Stationary
Turbine Stator
Rotating
Hydraulic Turbine Rotor
Stationary
Stator
Rotating
Pump Rotor
Stationary
Stator
Centrifugal Compressor
Axial Turbine
Radial Turbine
Hydraulic Turbine
Other
Compressible
Compressible
Compressible
Incompressible
Any
Several new report templates have been added to CFD-Post for Release 12.0. These reports support
post-processing of results that have multiple components/blade rows. The components can be any
combination of stationary or rotating types in one or more domains.
The reports attempt to group the components into stages; you can control how the stages are formed
by editing the report session file. The new reports include:
AxialCompressorReport.cse
Report template for axial compressors
CentrifugalCompressorReport.cse
Report template for centrifugal compressors
CompressibleTurbineReport.cse
Report template for compressible flow turbines.
HydraulicTurbineReport.cse
Report template for incompressible flow turbines.
PumpReport.cse
Report template for incompressible flow pumps.
Machine Type
Fluid Type
Report Template
Pump
Any
Pump
Axial Compressor
Compressible
Axial Compressor
Compressible
39

Machine Type
Fluid Type
Report Template
Axial Turbine
Compressible
Turbine
Radial Turbine
Compressible
Turbine
Hydraulic Turbine
Incompressible
Hydraulic Turbine
3.4.5.5. Creating, Viewing, and Publishing Reports

To create or modify a report, do the following:
1.
Specify the settings for the report that are contained in the Report object.
For details, see Report Object (p. 40).
2.
Specify the settings for the title page that are contained in the Title Page object.
For details, see Title Page Object (p. 41).
3.
Decide which predefined tables to use.

For details, see:
File Report Object (p. 42)
Mesh Report Object (p. 42)
Physics Report Object (p. 42)
Solution Report Object (p. 42)
4.
Optionally, create objects that give additional content to the report.

For details, see Adding Objects to the Report (p. 43).
5.
Control which objects get included in the report, and the order in which they are included.
For details, see Controlling the Content in the Report (p. 43).
6.
Refresh the report.

For details, see Refreshing the Report (p. 43).
You may refresh the report at any time to see the effect of changes you make to the report settings
and content. The report appears on the Report Viewer tab.
You can publish a report so that it can be loaded into a third-party browser or editor. For details, see
Publishing the Report (p. 44).
3.4.5.5.1. Report Object

The settings on the Appearance tab of the Report object are described next.
40
Outline Workspace
3.4.5.5.1.1. Figures: File Type

Choose the image format in which you want the image files to be saved.
3.4.5.5.1.2. Figures: Figure Size

Choose the size for figures that appear in the report. There are preset sizes, and an option for setting
a custom size.
3.4.5.5.1.3. Figures: Width and Height

If you set Figure Size to Custom, set the figure width and height in pixels.
3.4.5.5.1.4. Figures: Fit All Figures in the Viewport Before Generation Check Box
When this option is selected, each figure is produced with the view centered and the zoom level set
automatically.
3.4.5.5.1.5. Charts: File Type

Choose the image format in which you want the chart files to be saved.
3.4.5.5.1.6. Charts: Chart Size

Choose the size for charts that are saved as part of the report. There are options that specify preset
sizes, an option for using the same size as figures, and an option for setting a custom size.
3.4.5.5.1.7. Charts: Width and Height

If you set Chart Size to Custom, set the chart width and height in pixels.
3.4.5.5.2. Title Page Object

The Title Page object is automatically generated and listed under the Report object. The settings
of this object determine the content of the title page, and are described next.
3.4.5.5.2.1. Custom Logo Check Box

The Custom Logo check box determines whether or not a custom logo is included in the title page.
The logo must be available in a file of compatible format.
3.4.5.5.2.2. Custom Logo

The Custom Logo setting indicates the image file to use for the custom logo.
3.4.5.5.2.3. ANSYS Logo Check Box

The ANSYS Logo check box determines whether or not the ANSYS logo is included in the title page.
The ANSYS logo is shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 30).
3.4.5.5.2.4. Title
The Title setting holds the title of the report.
41
3.4.5.5.2.5. Author
The Author setting holds the name of the author of the report.
3.4.5.5.2.6. Current Date Check Box

The Current Date check box determines whether or not the date and time are included in the title
page.
3.4.5.5.2.7. Table of Contents Check Box

The Table of Contents check box determines whether or not a table of contents is included in the title
page. An example is shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 30).
Each entry in the table of contents is an active link to the corresponding section of the report. To follow
a link, click the link using the left mouse button.
3.4.5.5.2.8. Table of Contents Check Box: Captions in Table of Contents Check Box
The Captions in Table of Contents check box controls the level of detail in the entries in the table of
contents. When this check box is selected, the entries in the table of contents that link to objects in
the report contain the titles of the objects.
3.4.5.5.3. File Report Object

A File Report object containing a file information table, is automatically generated for each loaded
results file, and listed under the Report object. There are no user-adjustable settings except the check
box in the tree view, which controls whether or not the file information is included in the report. An
example of the file information table is shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 30).
3.4.5.5.4. Mesh Report Object

A Mesh Report object is automatically generated and listed under the Report object. The Mesh
Report object contains settings for a mesh information table and a mesh statistics table. Examples of
the mesh information table and mesh statistics tables are shown in Figure 3.3: A Sample Report, Part
2 (p. 31). The data in these tables are the same as given by the mesh calculator. For details, see Mesh
Calculator (p. 265).
3.4.5.5.5. Physics Report Object

A Physics Report object is automatically generated and listed under the Report object only when
you load a CFX-Solver Results type of file. The Physics Report object allows you to control the
output of physics summary data for domains and boundaries. Examples of the physics summary tables
are shown in Figure 3.3: A Sample Report, Part 2 (p. 31).
3.4.5.5.6. Solution Report Object

A Solution Report object is automatically generated and listed under the Report object only
when you load a CFX-Solver Results type of file. The Solution Report object allows you to control
42
Outline Workspace
the output of boundary flow, force, and torque summaries in the report. CFD-Post uses the summary
data contained in the results files.
Note
A results file from a multi-configuration run contains the monitor data for the initial values
case as well as for the case for which the RES file applies. When the case is read, the data
from the entire dataset is amalgamated, and the force, torque, massflow, and momentum
data is extracted. This may cause the list of boundary conditions in the Outline tree view to
differ from the lists in the Solution Report > Boundary Flow and Force and Torque tables.
However, any such differences will not lead to incorrect results.
3.4.5.5.7. Adding Objects to the Report

You can create objects of the following types to add additional content to the report:
Tables
For details, see Table Command (p. 213).
Charts
For details, see Chart Command (p. 218).
Comments
For details, see Comment Command (p. 233).
Figures
For details, see Figure Command (p. 233).
Such objects are listed beneath the Report object in the tree view.
3.4.5.5.8. Controlling the Content in the Report

Report objects can be shown or hidden in the report by setting the check box next to them in the
Outline tree view. The changes take effect the next time the report is refreshed or published.
You can control the order of Report objects by selecting one or more, then right-clicking on the selection and using the Move Up and Move Down shortcut menu commands as necessary. You can also
press Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow to move selected items.
3.4.5.5.9. Refreshing the Report

To refresh the report, you can do any of the following:
Right-click the Report object, or any of the report objects under it, then select Refresh Preview from
the shortcut menu.
Click the Refresh Preview button in the details view for the Report object, or any of the report objects
under it that have this button.
Click the Refresh button in the Report Viewer tab.
43

Select File > Report > Refresh Preview.
Note
The first time you visit the Report Viewer tab after loading a results file, the report will be
refreshed automatically.
3.4.5.5.10. Viewing the Report

After the report preview has been generated, you can view it in the Report Viewer tab.
3.4.5.5.11. Publishing the Report

You can publish a report so that it can be loaded into a third-party browser or editor. To publish a report,
click the Publish button in the Report Viewer toolbar to access the Publish Report dialog box, adjust
settings as appropriate, and click OK. You can also access the same dialog box by doing any of the
following:
Right-click the Report object, or any of the report objects under it, then select Publish.
Select File > Report > Publish.
3.4.5.5.11.1. Format
Set Format to one of:
HTML
The HTML option causes the report to be written in an HTML format.
Text
The Text option causes the report to be written in a plain text format.
3.4.5.5.11.2. File
Set File to the file name to use for saving the report.
3.4.5.5.11.3. Save Images in Separate Directory Check Box

Selecting the Save images in separate directory check box causes all image files to be put in a directory
that is beside the main output file.
3.4.5.5.11.4. Generate CFD Viewer files (CVF) for Figures Check Box
When this option is selected, each figure is saved to a 3D image file in addition to the 2D image file
that is normally saved. The 3D image file has an extension of cvf, and can be viewed in the report
using Microsoft Internet Explorer with the CFD Viewer plug-in installed.
You can download the CFD Viewer plug-in from http://www.ansys.com/Products/Simulation+Technology/
Fluid+Dynamics/ANSYS+CFD-Post/Features/3-D+ANSYS+CFD+Viewer.
Browsers other than Microsoft Internet Explorer display the 2D image file associated with each figure.
44
Variables Workspace
3.4.5.5.11.5. More Options Button

The More Options button opens the Publish Options dialog box. The Publish Options dialog box offers
the same settings as the Report object, and overrides the latter for the purpose of publishing the report.
Note
The Publish Options dialog box settings will be overwritten with the settings of the Report
object if you change or otherwise apply the settings of the latter.
3.4.6. Display Properties and Defaults

The Display Properties and Defaults branch of the Outline tree contains a Color Maps area that is
divided into Custom and System area. Initially, only the System area has entries; these are the default
color map names. You can use any of the default color maps as the basis for color maps that you define,
which are stored in the Custom color map area.
To learn how customize color maps, see Color Map Command (p. 211).
3.5. Variables Workspace

The Variables workspace is used to create new user variables and modify existing variables.
The following topics will be discussed:
Variables Tree View (p. 45)
Variables Details View (p. 46)
Variables: Example (p. 50).
3.5.1. Variables Tree View

The Variables Tree View displays the variables created from the loaded results file.
When the results file from a transient blade row case is loaded, CFD-Post creates all the variables with
available Fourier Coefficients. The timestep selector defaults to the last time step in the simulation.
Fourier Coefficients variables, as well as transient statistics such as average, RMS and standard deviation;
are listed in their own folder under the Solution node.
Note
Vector Fourier Coefficients variables are only available for the master geometry. Even for the
master geometry, the variables will not be oriented correctly.
45
Variables Tree View Shortcuts

The following table shows shortcuts that are specific to the Variables tree view. For a description of
how to access these shortcuts, and a list of commands that appear in most tree views, see Common
Outline View Shortcuts (p. 16).
Command
Description
All to Conservative
Makes all variables assume conservative values. For details,

All to Hybrid
Makes all variables assume hybrid values. For details, see

Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
Calculate Velocity
Components
Calculates velocity components using the global rotation

axis. This can also be done in the Turbo workspace. For
details, see Calculate Velocity Components (p. 298).
3.5.2. Variables Details View

The Variable details view is used to change the definition of fundamental (system) variables, and to
create and edit user variables.
To edit an existing variable, either:
Double-click the variable in the tree view
Right-click the variable, then choose Edit from the shortcut menu.
The above actions cause the Variables details view to appear.
46
Variables Workspace
3.5.2.1. Fundamental Variables

Fundamental variables (variables provided by the solver) can have their units changed. This would allow
you to create a legend that uses alternative temperature units (such as degrees Celsius).
Note
These settings override the global units setting (defined in the Options dialog box, accessible
from the Edit menu).
1.
Toggle between Hybrid and Conservative values.

This affects any dependent variables and expressions as well. For details, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
2.
Select the units.
3.
Click Reset to restore the variable settings stored in the database.

Use this to undo changes if you have not yet clicked Apply.
3.5.2.1.1. Saving Variables Back to the Results File

In cases other than transient blade row cases, fundamental variables can be redefined using expressions
and then saved back into the results file for later use. To do this, select the Replace with expression
(write to results) check box, enter one or more expressions, then click Apply. To change a vector
variable, you must write three expressions: one expression for each direction (X, Y, and Z). The result
file is updated when you click Apply. To restore a fundamental variable to its original state, clear the
Replace with expression (write to results) check box and click Apply.
One reason for modifying the variables in a results file is to modify the initial conditions for a new
solver run. In this case, you must modify the principal variable for each affected equation.
In CFX-Pre, in most cases, the principal variable for a given equation is the same as the variable used
to specify initial conditions, but there are some exceptions, as shown in the table below:
Equation
CFX-Pre Variable
Principal Variable
Thermal Energy
Temperature
Static Enthalpy
Total Energy
Temperature
Total Enthalpy
Mass Fractions
Mass Fraction
Conservative Mass Fraction
Volume Fractions
Mass Fraction
Conservative Volume Fraction
Continuity (with cavitation activated)
Pressure
Solver Pressure
47

For example, to initialize the mass fractions equation in CFX-Pre, you would set Mass Fraction. In
order to modify the initial conditions for the same equation in a results file, you would set Conservative Mass Fraction instead.
Note
For the thermal energy and total energy equations, you must set Temperature as well as
the principal variable.
When overwriting the mesh Total Mesh Displacement, the locations of the mesh nodes
in CFD-Post will not be affected, only the variable values.
For transient blade row cases, solution variables will not be overwritten because the variables
displayed in CFD-Post are not directly loaded from the results file, but are reconstructed from
the available Fourier coefficients stored in the results file.
3.5.2.2. Radius and Theta

The variables Radius and Theta are available only when the rotational axis has been defined. The
rotational axis can either be defined in the results file or in CFD-Post through the Initialization panel
in the Turbo workspace.
3.5.2.3. Boundary-Value-Only Variables

Some variables in the CFX results file take meaningful values only on the boundaries of the geometry.
Examples of this sort of variable are Yplus, Wall Shear, Heat Transfer Coefficient, and
Wall Heat Flux. For detail, refer to the CFX Output File section in the CFX-Solver Manager User's
Guide.
To obtain sensible plots when using these variables, use them to color only boundary objects. If, for
example, you try to color a slice plane through the center of the geometry with one of these variables,
you will see a large area of color that is meaningless; only at the very edges of the geometry will there
be useful coloration.
For boundary-value-only variables, only hybrid values exist (as they are undefined away from a boundary).
3.5.2.4. User Variables

User variables can be defined in any of the following ways:
As a scalar by defining one expression
As a vector by defining three expressions
As a scalar or vector by copying an existing scalar or vector variable (Frozen Copy).
Note
When creating a Frozen Copy, you must use the Conservative setting, not Hybrid.
48
Variables Workspace
To preserve Frozen Copies between sessions, you can use the New Session Command (p. 139)
to record your current session in a session file. Note that state files will not preserve your
Frozen Copies.
To create a new User Variable, click

on the right side of the details view, or right-click a variable
in the tree view, then select New from the shortcut menu.
Method is set to Expression.
Select Scalar or Vector.
Enter an expression or select from the drop-down menu. For vectors, three expressions are required. For
details, see Expressions Workspace (p. 51).
Select Calculate Global Range to have range data calculated. It displays after clicking Apply.
Method is set to Frozen Copy.
For Copy From select scalar variable to copy. Both the hybrid and conservative values copy. Subsequent
changes to the original variable will not affect the copied variable (such as changing timestep).
Note
You cannot create a variable with the same name as an existing expression or object.
The details view of an existing User Variable looks different than that for a new User Variable. In
particular:
The ability to control the type of User Variable is no longer available.
If Calculate Global Range was selected, you will see the range limits.
A variable created as a frozen copy allows you to select Hybrid or Conservative values. This affects all
objects and expressions that depend on the variable.
The expression is still adjustable.
Units are shown.
Range information is shown if Calculate Global Range was selected.
The scalar variable to Copy From is still an option. If a different variable is selected, a new copy is made
upon clicking Apply.
Toggling Hybrid/Conservative selects within the copy. It does not cause data to be copied again from
the Copy From variable.
49
3.5.3. Variables: Example

In this example, you will use an expression to create an Isosurface that is a fixed radial distance from
an axis or point. For details, see Expressions Workspace: Example (p. 53). Before trying this example,
you must first create the expression in the aforementioned example.
1.
Copy the <CFX_install_dir>/examples/StaticMixer_001.res file to your working directory

and load it into CFD-Post.
2.
Click the Variables tab.
3.
Click
4.
When the New Object window appears, type the name Radial Distance, and then click OK.
5.
In the variable details view, set Expression to radial (which is the expression you created earlier).
6.
Click Apply to create the new variable.
in the Variables details view to create a new variable.
This variable appears in the tree view and can be used like any other variable. Notice that the variable
is listed as User Defined.
You can now create an Isosurface using this variable as follows:
1.
Select Insert > Location > Isosurface.
2.
In the New Isosurface dialog box, enter a name and then click OK.
3.
On the Geometry tab for the Isosurface:

a.
Set Variable to Radial Distance.
b.
Set Value to 1 [m].

This is a suitable value for results from the StaticMixer_001.res file. You may need to
alter this value to something sensible depending on the results you are viewing.
4.
Click the Color tab and set the Mode option to Variable. Select a sensible variable (such as, Temperature or Velocity) with which to color the isosurface.
5.
Set the Range option to Local so that the full color range is used on the Isosurface.
6.
Click Apply to create the isosurface.
You should now see a cylindrical Isosurface centered about the Z-axis. All points on the Isosurface are
a distance of 1 m (or the value you used in the Value box) from the Z-axis. Note that a cylinder can
also be created as a surface of revolution. For details, see Surface of Revolution Command (p. 168). Additional information on expressions is available; for details, see Further Expressions (p. 54).
50
Expressions Workspace
3.6. Expressions Workspace

The Expressions workspace is used to select and generate expressions using the CFX Expression Language (CEL), which you can then use in CFD-Post in place of almost any numeric value (as long as the
correct units are returned by the expression).
Note
When a setting is defined by an expression, and the latter evaluates to a quantity that has no
units, the software internally applies the default units for that setting.
In an expression, a term that has no units can be added to a term that has angular units, in
which case the software internally applies radians to the term that has no units.
When using expressions in multifile and case-comparison situations, the expression syntax is:
When multiple files are loaded:
function()@CASE:case name.location
For example, area()@CASE:newcase.myplane
For file comparisons:
function()@CASE:[1|2].location
For example, area()@CASE:2.myplane
Expressions Tree View (p. 52)
Expressions Workspace: Expressions Details View (p. 52)
Expressions Workspace: Example (p. 53)
You should be aware of the guidelines regarding expressions:
You cannot create an expression with the same name as an object or variable.
Within the CFX Expression Language, some variables are known by short names to save typing the full
variable name. For example, p refers to Pressure. Although it is possible to create an expression with
the same name as an abbreviated variable, it is ignored. For example, if you define an expression named
p with the definition 5 [K], an expression defined as 2*p represents 2*Pressure, not 10 [K].
You must always provide units inside square brackets for constant values typed into an expression.
Note
CFD-Post and the CFX-Solver evaluate expressions differently:
CFD-Post evaluates expressions on slice planes by first interpolating the variables in the expression to the "plane points" (that is, the places where the plane is cut by mesh edges), and then
evaluates the expression.
51

The CFX-Solver evaluates expressions on the vertices and then interpolates to the plane points.
The results given by these two approaches (evaluate and then interpolate vs. interpolate
and then evaluate) will differ most significantly where the variable gradients are large.
3.6.1. Expressions Tree View

The following table shows shortcuts that are specific to the Expressions tree view and are accessed by
right-clicking an expression in the tree view. For a list of shortcuts that appear in most tree views, see
Common Outline View Shortcuts (p. 16).
Command
Description
Use as Workbench Input Parameter
Specifies the expressions that are to be used as parameters

in a Design Exploration session. These parameterized expressions are saved to the CFD-Post state file. To parameterize
an expression, right-click the expression and select Use as
Workbench Input Parameter or Use as Workbench Output
Parameter. The icon next to the expression changes to help
identify it as a parameterized expression.
Use as Workbench Output Parameter
3.6.2. Expressions Workspace: Expressions Details View

The Expressions details view contains the following tabs:
Expression Definition Tab (p. 52)
Plot Expression Tab (p. 53)
Evaluate Expression Tab (p. 53)
3.6.2.1. Expression Definition Tab

You can access lists of variables, expressions, locators, functions and constants by right-clicking in the
definition window when defining an expression. Although valid values can be chosen from each of the
various lists, the validity of the expression itself is not checked until you click Apply. For details, see
CEL Operators, Constants, and Expressions and CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post (p. 309).
Any expressions not containing variables are evaluated when you click Apply.
1.
Enter the definition of a new expression or edit the definition of an existing expression in the Definition
text field.
For details, see CFX Expression Language (CEL).
2.
The value of the expression is shown in the Value field.
3.
Click Reset to restore the expression to the definition stored in the database.
Use this to undo changes that have not yet been applied.
4.
52
Click Apply to commit any changes or entries made in the Definition box.
Expressions Workspace
After you have defined an expression, you can right-click it to make it a parameter for use in a Design
Exploration:
You may choose Use as Workbench output parameter.
If the expression will not influence CFX-Pre, you may choose Use as Workbench input parameter. Note
that this is not a common situation.
If the expression will influence CFX-Pre, you must use the Expression shortcut menu in CFX-Pre to make
the expression an ANSYS Workbench input parameter.
3.6.2.2. Plot Expression Tab

The Plot tab enables you to plot an expression for a range of one of its variables with the other variables
(if there are any others) held constant.
1.
If you have multiple cases loaded and an expression that applies to only one case highlighted, specify
the Case.
2.
Choose the number of sample data points (# of Points) of the expression that you would like plotted.
3.
Select the independent variable (X) of the expression for use in the plot.
4.
Specify a Range for this variable in the plot.

All other values are constant (their check boxes cannot also be checked). Enter fixed values for
them.
5.
Click Plot Expression to view the plot.
After viewing the chart, you may click Define Plot to return the Plot tab to its previous state (which
shows the plot settings).
3.6.2.3. Evaluate Expression Tab

The Evaluate tab is provided to help you verify that the expression highlighted in the Expression tree
view is set up correctly. To evaluate an expression:
1.
If you have multiple cases loaded and a locator-based function (such as "areaAve(Pressure)@outlet")
highlighted, specify the Case in which you want the expression evaluated.
2.
If the expression requires that you provide values, type them in.
3.
Click Evaluate Expression.

The value of the expression is displayed in the Value field.
3.6.3. Expressions Workspace: Example

In this example, you will create an expression that you can use to define a new User Variable. For details,
see Variables: Example (p. 50).
1.
Select Insert > Expression to create a new expression.

The Insert Expression dialog box appears.
53

2.
In the Insert Expression dialog box, type a name for the expression and click OK.
3.
In the Definition area of the Expression details view, enter the expression: sqrt(X^2+Y^2)
This expression gives the distance of a point from the Z-axis.
4.
Click Apply to create the expression.

Note that the Value field shows that the variable has units of meters. The value is variable so a
single number cannot be shown, as indicated by the placeholder: <variable>.
5.
Click the Plot tab.

Here, you can define a simple 2D plot. Because the function has two independent variables1, you
must select a constant value for one of the variables.
6.
Check the check box beside X.

This selects X as the variable that varies. All other variables requires a fixed value (for plotting).
7.
Leave Start of Range and End of Range at their default values.
8.
For Y, set Fixed Value to 3 [m].
9.
Click Plot Expression.

A plot shows the variation in the expression with values of X ranging from 0 to 1 [m] and the
value of Y held constant at 3 [m].
10. Click the Evaluate tab.

11. Set X to 0.55 [m] and Y to 3 [m].
12. Click Evaluate Expression.
The value 3.05 [m] appears in the Value field. This is consistent with the plot and can easily be
verified.
3.6.3.1. Further Expressions

After completing the variable editor example, you can try modifying this expression. You may want to
try sqrt(X^2+Z^2) to define a distance from the Y-axis or sqrt(X^2+Y^2+Z^2) to define a sphere.
Try moving the location of the sphere by adding values to the X, Y, or Z components; for example,
sqrt(X^2+Y^2+(Z-0.5[m])^2) moves the sphere a distance of 0.5 m in the positive Z direction.
3.7. Calculators Workspace

The Calculators workspace offers access to the function, macro, and mesh calculators. To access the
Calculators workspace, click the Calculators tab.
For details on the functions available from the Calculators workspace, see:
Function Calculator (p. 248)
1
CFD-Post automatically finds the variables associated with an expression, even if the expression depends on another expression.
54
Turbo Workspace
Macro Calculator (p. 250)
Mesh Calculator (p. 265).
3.8. Turbo Workspace

The Turbo workspace improves and speeds up post-processing for turbomachinery simulations. To access
the Turbo workspace, click the Turbo tab.
For details about using the Turbo workspace, see Turbo Workspace (p. 273).
55
56
Chapter 4: CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench

CFD-Post can be run in two modes:
As a stand-alone application started from the ANSYS CFX Launcher and independent of the ANSYS
Workbench software
As a component launched from ANSYS Workbench.
This chapter describes using CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench:
4.1.The ANSYS Workbench Interface
4.2. File Operation Differences
4.3. An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench
4.4. Using ANSYS Workbench Journaling and Scripting with CFD-Post
4.5.Tips on Using ANSYS Workbench
Note
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with using CFD-Post in stand-alone mode. You
should consult the ANSYS Workbench help for more detailed information on ANSYS Workbench.
4.1. The ANSYS Workbench Interface

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
14.5 > Workbench 14.5.
To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface, type the path to runwb2 (for
example, ~/ansys_inc/v145/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then press Enter.
The ANSYS Workbench interface is organized to make it easy to choose the tool set that will enable
you to solve particular types of problems. Once you have chosen a system from the Toolbox and moved
it into the Project Schematic, supporting features such as Properties and Messages provide orienting
information. These features and the status indicators in the system cells guide you through the completion
of the System steps.
57
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
The following sections describe the main ANSYS Workbench features.
4.1.1. Toolbox
The Toolbox shows the systems available to you:
Analysis Systems
Systems that match the workflow required to solve particular types of problems. For example, the Fluid
Flow (CFX) system contains tools for creating the geometry, performing the meshing, setting up the
solver, using the solver to derive the solution, and viewing the results.
Component Systems
Systems based on software or software sets. For example, the CFX component system contains Setup
(CFX-Pre), Solution (CFX-Solver Manager), and Results (CFD-Post). The Results component system contains
only Results (CFD-Post).
Custom Systems
Systems that combine separate analysis systems. For example, the FSI: Fluid Flow (CFX) > Static
Structural system combines ANSYS CFX and the Mechanical application to perform a unidirectional (that
is, one-way) Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI) analysis.
58
The ANSYS Workbench Interface

Design Exploration
Systems that enable you to see how changes to parameters affect the performance of the system.
Note
Which systems are shown in the Toolbox depends on the licenses that exist on your system.
You can hide systems by enabling View > Toolbox Customization and clearing the check
box beside the name of the system you want to hide.
To begin using a system, drag it into the Project Schematic area.
4.1.2. Project Schematic: Introduction

The Project Schematic enables you to manage the process of solving your CFD problem. It keeps track
of your files and shows the actions available as you work on a project. At each step you can select the
operations that process or modify the case you are solving.
When you move a system from the Component Systems toolbox to the Project Schematic, you will
see a system similar to the following:
Each white cell represents a step in solving a problem. Right-click the cell to see what options are
available for you to complete a step.
Selecting Edit in the example above launches CFD-Post.
59
4.1.3. View Bar

You control which views are displayed by opening the View menu and setting a check mark beside
the view you want to display. If you minimize that view, it appears as a tab in the View Bar and the
check box is cleared from the View menu.
4.1.4. Properties View

The Properties view is a table whose entries describe the status of a system. These entries vary between
system cells and are affected by the status of the cell. Some entries in the Properties area are writable;
others are for information only.
To display the Properties for a particular cell, right-click the cell and select Properties. Once the
Properties view is open, simply selecting a cell in the Project Schematic will display its properties.
General
Update Options
Multi-configuration
Post Processor
Load Options
Clear State
This is a display-only value.

The way that multi-configuration files and
transient files open in CFD-Post must be
set beforehand in CFD-Post or in the
Properties settings for each Solution cell;
you cannot configure these settings from
the Properties view of a Results cell.
When you select this checkbox, CFD-Post
clears the existing state when the Results
cell is updated or modified.
When you update the Results cell, when
CFD-Post is already open, the existing
state is cleared before CFD-Post reloads
the upstream data and performs any
postprocessing.
Load Report
Loads either a predefined report template

or a custom template after CFD-Post reloads the upstream data.
The None option has no effect when the
Results cell is updated or edited.
Custom Report
Template
Publish Report
Select this check box to automatically

publish a HTML report. The location of
the report is displayed in the Files view.
Report Output Filename
Sets the name of the report being published when you select the Publish Report option. The default name is set to
Report.html.
Report Location
60
Sets the name of the report template

when you select Custom under Load
Report.
Sets the directory where the report is

published, when you select the Publish
Report option.
The ANSYS Workbench Interface

If you leave this field undefined, the report is saved in the directory associated
with the Results cell.
4.1.5. Files View

The Files view shows the files that are in the current project. The project files are updated constantly,
and any save operation from a component will save all files associated with the project.
Important
Although the Files View reveals the data files that make up a project, you should not attempt
to manipulate these files directly, as project data management will proceed unaware of your
changes and with unpredictable results.
ANSYS Workbench associates data with system cells. This data may be stored in different ways, including
as part of the ANSYS Workbench project file or as separate files. When files are generated, they appear
in the Files view. This view can be used to identify which files are associated with each cell.
The table that follows associates cell types with file types and gives typical extensions for those file
types.
System
Cell
File Type
Results
CFD-Post State File

CFD-Post Output Files
File Extension Examples

.cst
a
AnsysReportLogo.pngb
Report.htmlb
Does not include animation files or the output of Save Picture commands.
Generated file (Generated files are not copied when you duplicate a system and are removed when you run the Clear Generated
Data command.)
61
4.1.6. Sidebar Help

In addition to having a visual layout that guides you through completing your project, you can also access Sidebar Help by pressing
F1 while the mouse focus is anywhere on ANSYS Workbench. Sidebar
Help is a dynamically generated set of links to information appropriate
for helping you with questions you have about any of the tools and
systems you currently have open.
4.1.7. Shortcuts (Context Menu Options)

You can access commonly used commands by right-clicking in most areas of ANSYS Workbench. These
commands are described in Context Menu Options in the Workbench User Guide.
4.2. File Operation Differences

CFD-Post launched from ANSYS Workbench has default locations for file operations that are appropriate
for ANSYS Workbench:
Save operations default to the user_files directory. The user_files directory appears under the
directory that holds the Project file (projectfile_name/user_files/).
Open operations default to the permanent files directory. The permanent files directory holds the Project
file.
Export operations initially default to the user_files directory, but change to the last directory used
for an export operation during a session.
In addition, there is an icon in the directory tree that takes you to the user_files, and all recent
directory selections are available from the directory path drop-down selector.
62
An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench
4.3. An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench

This section walks through an example of using ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench to perform a fluidflow analysis. This walkthrough assumes familiarity with the basic ANSYS Workbench and ANSYS CFX
applications and does not discuss the details of the steps within each application.
Note
Although this example uses a Fluid Flow (CFX) analysis system to show workflow, CFD-Post
is the results viewing program for a variety of Analysis and Custom systems such as the Fluid
Flow (FLUENT) analysis system. CFD-Post can also be launched from a Results component
system.
1.
You begin by launching ANSYS Workbench, which opens as an unsaved project and displays the available
analysis systems.
2.
In your file system you create a directory in which to store your project files. You then select File >
Save As and save your new project to that directory. This automatically sets your working directory for
this project.
3.
In the Analysis Systems toolbox, double-click Fluid Flow (CFX) to create a fluid-analysis system in the
Project Schematic. (Notice that if you hover over systems in the Toolbox, a tool tip appears.)
63
The fluid-analysis system in the Project Schematic shows the steps in performing a fluid analysis:
1. Create or import a geometry.
2. Create a mesh for the geometry.
3. Set up the analysis that will be sent to the solver.
4. Control and monitor the solver to achieve a solution.
5. Visualize the results in a post-processor and create a report.
4.
64
In addition to showing those steps in appropriately named cells, each cell can launch a tool that will
enable you to perform the task it names. Right-click the Geometry cell to see your options for adding
a geometry to your project:
An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench
5.
As you move through the cells from Geometry to Results, you can choose to launch the tool that will
enable you to complete the cell's step: create a new geometry with ANSYS DesignModeler, create a
new mesh with ANSYS Meshing, edit the case with ANSYS CFX-Pre, control the solver's solution with
ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager, and control the display of the results with CFD-Post.
Note
You could open a Fluid Flow (CFX) system and go immediately to the Setup cell to import
an existing case. When the case is loaded, the now-unnecessary Geometry and Mesh
cells disappear.
6.
When the analysis is complete and the project is finished, you save the project (and therefore the associated files). Once a project has been saved, it can be re-opened at a later date for review or modification
of any aspect of the simulation.
Important
Saving a project enables you to re-open the project on the machine that originally created
it. To make the project available on another machine, you need to use File > Archive to
create a project archive. To open the project on a different machine, run File > Restore
Archive on that machine.
65
4.4. Using ANSYS Workbench Journaling and Scripting with CFD-Post

Journaling is the capturing of ANSYS Workbench actions (creating a project, opening a system, and so
on) to a file. For ANSYS CFX applications, CCL and command actions are embedded within ANSYS
Workbench actions. Scripting refers to the processes of editing and running a journal file in ANSYS
Workbench. With scripting, you could, for example, implement a prescribed workflow.
This section describes how to acquire, edit, and run script files that have commands that affect CFDPost. For more general information on journal files as well as scripting, refer to the ANSYS Workbench
online help.
Note
Journal actions such as a CFD-Post Export or the loading of a static .res file record the path
of the file. You may need to manually adjust this file path before attempting to rerun the
journal, particularly if you have created the journal using an unsaved project. More generally,
when you create a project, you should save the project immediately to set file paths that ANSYS
Workbench uses (rather than require ANSYS Workbench to use file paths that have temporary
directories, as happens before the project is saved).
The handling of file paths described in File Path Handling in ANSYS Workbench in the Workbench
Scripting Guide applies to file references that are made outside of CCL and command actions.
Journal files must not contain an Undo command from CFD-Post.
4.4.1. Acquiring a Journal File with CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench

The basic workflow for acquiring a journal file with CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench is as follows:
1.
Start ANSYS Workbench.
2.
Start journaling: Select File > Scripting > Record Session and set a name for the journal file.
3.
From Toolbox panel, open a system that has a Results cell with an available solution.
4.
Edit the Results cell. The actions you perform are captured by the journaling process and written to a
.wbjn file.
5.
Stop journaling: File > Scripting > Stop Recording Session.
6.
Optionally, edit the journal file (this is the process of scripting).
7.
Run File > Scripting > Run Script File and select a .wbjn file.
4.4.1.1. Journal of an Operation That Creates a Plane in CFD-Post

In the following incomplete snippet, a user has created a Results system, edited the Results cell, loaded
a CFX-Solver Results file (StaticMixer_001.res) and then created a plane named "Plane 1":
Create the Results system
template1 = GetTemplate(TemplateName="Results")
system1 = template1.CreateSystem(Position="Default")
66
Using ANSYS Workbench Journaling and Scripting with CFD-Post

Edit the Results cell and load the Results file (StaticMixer_001.res)
results1 = system1.GetContainer(ComponentName="Results")
results1.Edit()
results1.SendCommand(Command=r"""DATA READER:
Clear All Objects = false
Append Results = true
Edit Case Names = false
Open to Compare = false
Multi Configuration File Load Option = Separate Cases
Open in New View = true
Keep Camera Position = true
Load Particle Tracks = true
Files to Compare =
END
DATA READER:
Domains to Load=
END
> load filename=C:\StaticMixer_001.res, multifile=append""")
Set the camera and define a plane colored with a constant color
CFX.SendCommand(
Container="Results",
Command="""VIEW:View 1
Camera Mode = User Specified
CAMERA:
Option = Pivot Point and Quaternion
Pivot Point = 0, 0, 0
Scale = 0.226146
Pan = 0, 0
Rotation Quaternion = 0.279848, -0.364705, -0.115917, 0.880476
Send To Viewer = False
END
END
> autolegend plot=/PLANE:Plane 1, view=VIEW:View 1""")
CFX.SendCommand(
Command="""PLANE:Plane 1
Apply Instancing Transform = On
Apply Texture = Off
Blend Texture = On
Bound Radius = 0.5 [m]
Colour = 0.75, 0.75, 0.75
Colour Map = Default Colour Map
Colour Mode = Constant
Colour Scale = Linear
Colour Variable = Pressure
# ...
# (Lines omitted for brevity)
# ...
END""")
results1.SendCommand(Command="""# Sending visibility action from View...
>show /PLANE:Plane 1, view=/VIEW:View 1""")
Save the project

Save(
FilePath=r"C:\SaveJou.wbpj",
Overwrite=True)
The commands in the script above are the default values for a plane.
67
4.4.2. Scripting
Scripting refers to the processes of editing and running a journal file in ANSYS Workbench. You can
create your own scripts and include the power of Python to implement high-level programming constructs for input, output, variables, and logic. The example that follows illustrates this for CFD-Post.
4.4.2.1. Example: Using a Script to Change an Existing Locator

If you have an ANSYS Workbench project currently open, you can run a script to change how the results
of the simulation are post-processed. For example, if you have opened CFD-Post from an ANSYS Workbench system and CFD-Post is displaying a plane named "Plane 1", you can run the following script to
change the plane to be colored by the variable Velocity or Pressure.
Before running this script, you would have to first open the Command Window dialog box (by selecting
File > Scripting > Open Command Window from the ANSYS Workbench main menu). To run the
script, you would select File > Scripting > Run Script File from the ANSYS Workbench main menu and
then use the browser to open the file containing the script.
x = int(raw_input("Enter an integer: 1=Velocity, 2=Pressure: "))
if x == 1:
print 'Velocity'
CFX.SendCommand(
Colour Mode = Variable
Colour Variable = Velocity
END""")
elif x == 2:
print 'Pressure'
CFX.SendCommand(
Colour Mode = Variable
Colour Variable = Pressure
END""")
Depending on the value of x you input in the Command Window, the script includes the CCL in the
appropriate CFX.SendCommand argument to set the values for Colour Mode and Colour Variable in the PLANE:Plane 1 object for either the Velocity or Pressure variable.
4.5. Tips on Using ANSYS Workbench

This section highlights helpful tips on using ANSYS Workbench.
4.5.1. General Tips
4.5.2.Tips for Results Systems
4.5.1. General Tips

The following are useful tips for the general use of ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench:
4.5.1.1. ANSYS Workbench Interface

A lot of important functionality is available in the right-click menu (cells, parameter bar, and so on).
Also, you should enable the View > Properties view and investigate options for each cell.
68
Tips on Using ANSYS Workbench

Compact Mode is very useful. It turns the schematic into a small non-intrusive button that is always on
top, effectively replacing the need for the toolbar navigation.
4.5.1.2. Setting Units

ANSYS Workbench units and options are not passed to CFD-Post; this could require you to set units
twice.
4.5.1.3. Files View

Use the Files view to determine which files were created for each cell/system. This can be very useful
if you need to do some runs or change some settings outside of ANSYS Workbench, or if you want to
manually delete some but not all files associated with a particular cell. It is easiest to find files associated
with a specific cell by sorting the view by Cell ID. This will sort the list by system and then by cell.
4.5.1.4. ANSYS Workbench Connections

When selecting a system in the toolbox, ANSYS Workbench will highlight the cells in any systems already
in the Project Schematic to which a valid connection can be made.
4.5.2. Tips for Results Systems

The following are useful tips for the use of Results systems in ANSYS Workbench:
4.5.2.1. Changes in Behavior

The ability to play session files is missing in ANSYS Workbench for CFD-Post.
The undo stack is cleared in CFD-Post after the application receives commands from ANSYS Workbench.
You cannot launch ANSYS CFX products from one another in ANSYS Workbench; you must use the
system cells.
ANSYS Workbench "remembers" previous locations of imported files / projects. CFD-Post, however,
displays different behavior for loading or saving any files, always using the directory specified in the
Tools > Options > Default Folder for Permanent Files in ANSYS Workbench.
4.5.2.2. Duplicating Systems

Duplication normally involves only user files (files for which you have specified settings). For CFD-Post,
this would include the .cst file. Other files, which are considered to be "generated" (for instance, the
.html files), are not duplicated.
4.5.2.3. Renaming Systems

Rename all your CFX and Fluid Flow (CFX) systems to something unique and meaningful that reflects
the contents of the system, especially if there are multiple systems. The names of the files associated
with the system cells will incorporate this system name when the files are first created, making it easier
for you to identify the files in the Files view. In particular, CFD-Post will take the system name (by default
"Fluid Flow" for a Fluid Flow system) as the case name of the results in CFD-Post. Note that it is best to
rename the systems as soon as they are placed on the Project Schematic, as the generated file names
and/or the CFD-Post case names will not necessarily be updated if a system is renamed after the appropriate cells already have associated data (for example, a .cfx file with the Setup cell). It may be useful
69

to reset the Results cell to update the CFD-Post case name if the system is renamed, but you will lose
any existing CFD-Post settings and objects by doing this.
4.5.2.4. Results Cell

CFX-Solver Results files (in particular the .res files) are associated with the Solution cell, not the Results
cell. This means that a CFX-Solver Results file cannot be imported onto a Results cell; it can be imported
onto a Solution cell of a Fluid Flow or CFX system. Similarly, resetting the Results cell will not remove
the CFX-Solver Results file.
In ANSYS Workbench, the state of CFD-Post is associated with the Results cell. To maintain multiple
states, you must generate multiple Results systems. For your convenience, you can provide a unique
name for each system.
To perform a file comparison in CFD-Post, drag a solution cell from another system to the Results cell.
You can have CFD-Post generate report output at every update (by setting Generate Reports in Results
cell Properties view). The .html file is visible in the Files view: right-click it, select Open containing
folder, and double-click the file in the explorer to see the report in a browser.
When updating existing Results cell data (with CFD-Post open) where a turbo chart with an averaged
variable was used (for example, turbo reports), a warning dialog box may appear reporting that "No
data exists for variable " This warning can be ignored.
You can change the CFD-Post multi-configuration load options (available on the Load Results File
dialog box of CFD-Post when in stand-alone mode) by editing the properties of the Solution cell. This
is a property of the Solution cell, rather than the Results cell.
4.5.2.5. Recovering After Deleting Files

If you accidentally delete the current .def, .res or .out files for a CFX system and the Solution cell
status is up-to-date, you may get errors when trying to display the solution monitor or edit the Results
cell. In this case you will need to replace the files in the File Manager, or Reset the Solution cell, and
update the system. If the .def file is missing, you may also need to Clear Generated Data for the
Setup cell before updating the system.
4.5.2.6. License Sharing

If you are using license sharing in ANSYS Workbench, you can use only one license for CFX-Pre/CFDPost even if you have more available. This has implications if, for example, you want to run a long animation in CFD-Post and use CFX-Pre at the same time. If you know you are going to be working with
CFX-Pre and CFD-Post at the same time, you need to change the license-sharing setting before starting
your project.
70
Chapter 5: CFD-Post 3D Viewer

In CFD-Post, the 3D Viewer is accessible by clicking the 3D Viewer tab at the bottom of the panel on
the right side of the interface.
After loading a results file into CFD-Post, you can see a visual representation of the geometry in the 3D
Viewer. You can create various other objects that can be viewed in the 3D Viewer. For details, see CFDPost Insert Menu (p. 141).
Descriptions of the various viewing modes and 3D Viewer commands, including toolbars, shortcut
menus, and hotkeys, are given in 3D Viewer Modes and Commands (p. 73).
You can switch between four adjustable views that each remember the camera angle and state of
visibility of all objects. CFD-Post has figures which are similar to views except that they can be included
,
in reports. For details, see Views and Figures (p. 80).
Note
In order to see correct colors and accurately displayed objects in the 3D Viewer, some combinations of ATI video cards and ATI graphics drivers on Windows XP require that you set
the environment variable VIEWER_CACHE_COLORS to 0:
1.
Right-click on My Computer and select Properties. The System Properties dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Advanced tab.
3.
Click Environment Variables.
4.
Under System variables, click New.
5.
In the Variable name field, type: VIEWER_CACHE_COLORS
6.
In the Variable value field, type the number: 0
7.
Click OK.
8.
To verify the setting, open a command window and enter: set

The results should include the line:
VIEWER_CACHE_COLORS=0
This setting will fix problems such as:

Boundary condition markers placed incorrectly or rendered in white.
Regions around the circles are incorrect (rendered as yellow areas marked with blue)
71
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Mesh lines not displayed properly and with dark patches showing.
5.1. Object Visibility

The visibility of each object can be turned on and off using the check boxes in the tree view, as described
in Object Visibility (p. 15). However, you can also hide objects by right-clicking on them and selecting
Hide. The right-click menu has a title that indicates the object that will be acted upon (Wireframe in
the figure that follows) so that you do not accidentally hide the wrong object.
Once an object has been hidden, you can show it again by right-clicking on the background of the
Viewer and selecting Show Object:
72
3D Viewer Modes and Commands
5.2. 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

This section describes:
3D Viewer Toolbar (p. 73)
CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 75)
Viewer Hotkeys (p. 77)
Mouse Button Mapping (p. 78)
Picking Mode (p. 79)
5.2.1. 3D Viewer Toolbar

The 3D Viewer toolbar has the following tools:
Tool
Description
Activates one of the three picking tools (shown below).
Selects objects. You can use this tool to drag line, point, plane, and isosurface objects to new
locations.
Selects objects using a box. Drag a box around the objects you want to select.
73
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Tool
Description
Selects objects using an enclosed polygon. Click to drop points around the objects. Double-click
to complete the selection.
Note
Polygon Select mode will not allow you to create an invalid region, such as would
occur if you attempted to move a point such that the resulting line would cross
an existing line in the polygon.
Rotates the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, hold down the middle mouse button
to rotate the view.
Pans the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, you can pan the view by holding down
Ctrl and the middle mouse button.
Adjusts the zoom level as you drag with the mouse vertically. Alternatively, you can zoom the
view by holding down Shift and the middle mouse button.
Zooms to the area enclosed in a box that you create by dragging with the mouse. Alternatively,
you can drag and zoom the view by holding down the right mouse button.
Centers all visible objects in the viewer.
When enabled, clicking on an object in the tree view causes that object to be highlighted in the
3D Viewer. The style of highlighting is controlled by Edit > Options > CFD-Post > Viewer >
Object Highlighting > Type.
Selects the viewport arrangement. You can perform Independent zoom, rotation and translate
options in each viewport.
Toggles between locking and unlocking the views of all viewports. When the views are locked,
the camera orientation and zoom level of the non-selected viewports are continuously synchronized with the selected viewport. Locking the view for the viewports in this way can be a useful
technique for comparing different sets of visible objects between the viewports. This tool is
available only when all viewports are using the Cartesian (X-Y-Z) transformation.
Toggles between synchronizing the visibility of objects in all viewports. When active, any subsequent action to hide or display an object affects all viewports; activating this feature does not
affect any existing show/hide states.
Note
This toggle will not synchronize the visibility of objects in different cases that
have the same name. However, in file comparison mode CFD-Post does synchronize the visibility of objects that have the same name.
74

Tool
Description
Displays the Viewer Key Mapping dialog box. See Viewer Hotkeys (p. 77) for details.
5.2.2. CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus

You can access the shortcut menu by right-clicking anywhere on the viewer. The shortcut menu is different depending on where you right-click.
5.2.2.1. Shortcuts for CFD-Post (Viewer Background)

The following commands are available in CFD-Post when you right-click the viewer background:
Command
Description
Deformation
Specifies the deformation scale to be viewed. This option is only available when
the Total Mesh Displacement variable exists. When an option is selected,
it will be applied to all objects in every view and figure. Select from the following:
Undeformed
Shows all objects as if they were not deformed
True Scale
Displays all objects with their regular deformation values
0.5x Auto
Shows all objects with half of the optimal (Auto) scale
Auto
Adjusts the deformation scaling for optimal viewing. Internally, the deformation is scaled so that the maximum deformation results in a viewable displacement of a percentage of the domain extents, regardless of the problem
size.
2x Auto
Adjusts the deformation to be double that of regular deformation
5x Auto
Shows all objects with 5 times their regular deformation value.
Custom...
Opens the Deformation Scale dialog box and displays the currently applied
scale value for the deformation. Specify a new value to change the scale.
Animate...
Opens the Animation dialog box in Quick Animation mode. For details,
see Animating Mesh Deformation Scaling (p. 241).
75
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Command
Description
Copy to New Figure
Creates a new figure based on the current camera position, zoom level, and object
visibility settings. For details, see Views and Figures (p. 80). The figure appears
under the Report object, and can be used in a report. For details, see Report (p. 29). The Make copies of objects check box controls how the new figure
is made:
When the check box is selected, visible objects are copied for the new figure.
Use this option if you want the figure to retain its appearance when the original
objects are modified.
When the check box is cleared, only the camera position, zoom level, and the
object visibility settings are stored in the definition of the figure. Use this option
if you want the figure to automatically update with changes to the original objects.
Show Object
Shows hidden objects, boundaries, and regions. See Object Visibility (p. 72).
Copy Camera From
If you have set a Predefined Camera angle in another view, selecting Copy Camera
From > view name will apply that angle to the current view.
Predefined Camera
Displays different views by changing the camera angle to a preset direction.
Fit View
Centers all visible objects in the viewer. This is equivalent to clicking the
icon.
Auto-Fit View
Automatically fits the view while you rotate the camera or resize the 3D Viewer.
This disables the manual resizing actions otherwise available from the tool bar or
mouse.
Projection
Switches between perspective and orthographic camera angles.
Clip Scene
Controls scene clipping via clip planes. For details, see Clip Plane Command (p. 210).
Default Legend
Shows or hides the default legend object.
Axis
Shows or hides the axis orientation indicator (known as the triad) in the bottomright corner of the viewer.
Ruler
Shows or hides the ruler on the bottom of the viewer.
Save Picture
Same as selecting File > Save Picture. For details, see Save Picture Command (p. 109).
Viewer Options
Opens the Options dialog box with the viewer options displayed. For details, see
Viewer (p. 133).
5.2.2.2. Shortcuts for CFD-Post (Viewer Object)

The following commands are available in CFD-Post when you right-click an object in the viewer:
Command
Description
Edit
Opens the object for editing.
Hide
Hides the selected object in the 3D Viewer.
Animate
Brings up the Animation dialog box and animates the selected object
automatically. For details, see Quick Animation (p. 240).
Color
Enables you to change the selected objects color.
76

Command
Description
Render
Enables you to change some of the selected objects render options (such
as lighting and face visibility). To change other render options, select Edit
and make your changes on the object's Render tab.
Insert
Opens another menu with options to insert planes, contours, streamlines,

etc. For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 141).
Set Plane Center
For planes defined using the Point and Normal method, this action
moves the point that defines the plane. This changes the focus for plane
bounding operations. See Plane Bounds (p. 152).
Reflect/Mirror
Applies a reflection to the selected domain. To use this command, rightclick the corresponding wireframe in the viewer.
Probe Variable
Opens a toolbar at the bottom of the viewer allowing the specification of

coordinate points and variable type. After each field is changed, the solution
automatically generates to the right of the variable type setting. For details,
see Probe (p. 247).
5.2.3. Viewer Hotkeys

A number of shortcut keys are available to carry out common viewer tasks. These can be carried out
by clicking in the viewer window and pressing the associated key.
Key
Action
space
Toggles between picking and viewing mode.
arrow keys
Rotates about horizontal and vertical axes.
Ctrl + up/down arrow keys
Rotates about an axis normal to the screen.
Shift + arrow keys
Moves the light source.
Switches to one viewport.
Switches to two viewports.
Switches to three viewports.
Switches to four viewports.
Centers the graphic object in the viewer window.
Toggles the projection between orthographic

and perspective.
Resets the view to the initial orientation.
Toggles the level of detail between auto, off, and

on.
Undoes transformation.
Shift+U
Redoes transformation.
Sets view from +X axis.
Shift+X
Sets view from -X axis.
Sets view from +Y axis.
Shift+Y
Sets view from -Y axis.
Sets view from +Z axis.

77
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Key
Action
Shift+Z
Sets view from -Z axis.
The information in this table is accessible by clicking the Show Help Dialog
Viewer toolbar.
toolbar icon in the 3D
5.2.4. Mouse Button Mapping

The mouse mapping options enable you to assign viewer actions to mouse clicks and keyboard/mouse
combined clicks. To adjust or view the mouse mapping options, select Edit > Options, then Viewer
Setup > Mouse Mapping.
Figure 5.1: Mouse Mapping using Workbench Defaults
Table 5.1: Mouse Operations and Shortcuts

Operation
Description
Workbench Mode
Shortcuts
CFX Mode Shortcuts
Zoom
To zoom out, drag the pointer up; to

zoom in, drag the pointer down.
Shift + middle mouse

button
Middle mouse
button
Object
Zoom
Camera
Zoom
Shift + middle
mouse button
zooms in a step.
Shift + right
mouse button
78

Operation
Description
Workbench Mode
Shortcuts
CFX Mode Shortcuts

zooms out a
step.
Translate
Drag the object across the viewer.
Ctrl + middle mouse

button
Right mouse button
Zoom Box
Draw a rectangle around the area of

interest, starting from one corner and
ending at the opposite corner. The selected area fills the viewer when the
mouse button is released.
Right mouse button
Shift + left mouse

button
Shift + left
mouse button
Shift + right
mouse button
Rotate
Rotate the view about the pivot point Middle mouse button
(if no pivot point is visible, the rotation
point will be the center of the object).
Set Pivot
Point
Set the point about which the Rotate

actions pivot. The point selected must
be on an object in the 3D Viewer.
When you set the pivot point, it appears as a small red sphere that moves
(along with the point on the image
where you clicked) to the center of the
3D Viewer. To hide the red dot that
represents the pivot point, click on a
blank area in the 3D Viewer.
Left mouse button

when in rotate, pan,
zoom, or zoom box
mode (as set by the
icons in the viewer's
tool bar).
Ctrl + middle mouse

button
Move Light
Move the lighting angle for the 3D

Viewer. Drag the mouse left or right
to move the horizontal lighting source
and up or down to move the vertical
lighting source. The light angle hold
two angular values between 0 - 180.
Ctrl + right mouse

button
Ctrl + right mouse

button
Picking Mode
Select an object in the viewer.
Ctrl + Shift + left

mouse button
Ctrl + Shift + left

mouse button
5.2.5. Picking Mode

Picking mode is used to select and drag objects in the viewer. The mesh faces must be visible on an
object or region to allow it to be picked. Enter picking mode by selecting the Single Select
a pull-down menu of the viewer toolbar. If the Single Select
click the New Selection
tool in
icon is already visible, you can simply
icon.
You can also pick objects while still in viewing mode by holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys as you
click in the viewer.
79
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
5.2.5.1. Selecting Objects

Use the mouse to select objects (for example, points and boundaries) from the viewer. When a number
of objects overlap, the one closest to the camera is picked.
You can change the picking mode by selecting one of the toolbar icons:
Single Select
Box Select
Polygon Select
For details, see 3D Viewer Modes and Commands (p. 73).
5.2.5.2. Moving Objects

Point, plane and line objects can be moved in the viewer by dragging and dropping the object to a
new location. When an object is moved, its definition is updated in the details view. Any other plots
that are located on these movable objects are automatically updated.
5.3. Views and Figures

The 3D Viewer opens with a single viewport; you can increase the number of viewports to four by using
the viewport icon:
Figure 5.2: Viewport Control
The contents of a viewport are a view, which is a CCL object that contains the camera angle, zoom level,
lighting, and visibility setting of each object in the tree view.
Each viewport contains a different, independent view. By default, four views exist: View 1, View 2, View
3, View 4.
When you select an object in the tree view, its information is applied to the active viewport. When you
manipulate an object in the viewport, the view's CCL is updated immediately. However if the focus is
on that viewport, you can press u to revert your change.
In CFD-Post, you can create figures, which are the same as views, except that they are usable in reports.
For details, see Report (p. 29).
80
Views and Figures
5.3.1. Creating a Figure

In CFD-Post, figures can be created by selecting Insert > Figure, or by selecting Copy to New Figure
from the viewer shortcut menu (after right-clicking a blank area in the 3D Viewer). The names of views
that you create are of the form Figure m by default, where m is an integer that results in a unique
name.
A new figure gets its definition from the currently existing view or figure. The latter remains active so
that subsequent view manipulations do not affect the new figure.
5.3.1.1. Copying Objects for Figures

A change made to an object will affect all figures that show that object. This can result in an unwanted
change to a figure after it has been created. In order to avoid this problem, you may select the Make
copies of objects option that is available when creating a new figure. This causes all visible objects to
be copied, and the new figure to use the copied objects rather than the original ones.
Any copied objects for a figure will appear in the tree view under User Locations and Plots >
Local Objects for FigureName, where FigureName is the name of the figure.
5.3.2. Switching to a View or Figure

To switch to a view or figure, do one of the following:
Use the drop-down menu in the upper-left corner of the viewport.
For figures only: Double-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object).
For figures only: Right-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object), then select Edit from
the shortcut menu.
5.3.3. Changing the Definition of a View or Figure

To change a view or figure:
1.
Switch to the view or figure that you want to change.

For details, see Switching to a View or Figure (p. 81).
2.
Change the view or figure (for example, rotate the view) either directly, or, in CFD-Post only, select one
of the Copy Camera From commands from the viewer shortcut menu after right-clicking a blank area
of the viewer.
View and figure objects are saved automatically when you switch to a different view or figure.
5.3.4. Deleting a Figure

The figure objects that you have created can be deleted using the tree view or the viewer shortcut
menu. To use the viewer shortcut menu:
1.
Switch to the figure that you want to delete.
2.
Select the Delete Figure command from the viewer shortcut menu after right-clicking a blank area of
the viewer.
81
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
5.3.5. Views
There are four default views that are handled specially. These are named: View 1, View 2, View 3, and
View 4. These views will not be included in CFD-Post reports. However, any of these views can be viewed
in any of the viewports, and you can create new views or figures that will be shown in reports.
5.3.5.1. Object Visibility

The visibility of an object is specified by the VIEW that should display the object, rather than the object
specifying whether it is visible. That is, the object is made visible in a certain view--it is no longer a
property of the object.
The VIEW object has a parameter named Object Visibility List that is set to a comma-separated
list of object paths that should be visible in the VIEW object.
Here is an example of the VIEW object CCL to define the visibility for the view:
VIEW: View 1 Object Visibility List=/PLANE:Plane 1, /VECTOR:Vector 4END
Note
The Object Visibility List parameter should contain only object paths, and not
object names.
Setting the Visibility parameter on an object has no effect.
For session files, there are command actions that enable you to change the visibility of objects:
>show
>hide
>toggle
Each of these actions take an object name, path, or list of names and paths for which to show, hide, or
toggle the visibility. Also, the actions optionally take a parameter that specifies the view to show the
object. The visibility action parameters can alternatively take names or entire paths to specify the objects
and the views.
Example 1: The following action will show the object /PLANE:Plane 1 in all existing views, including
user figures.
>show Plane 1
Example 2: The following action will hide both /PLANE:Plane 1 and /PLANE:Plane 2 in view
/VIEW:View 1.
>hide Plane 1, /PLANE:Plane 2, view=View 1
Example 3: If Plane 1 is visible, and Plane 2 is not visible in /VIEW:View 2, the following action
will make /PLANE:Plane 1 not visible, and /PLANE:Plane 2 visible in view /VIEW:View 2:
>toggle Plane 1, Plane 2, view=/VIEW:View 2
82
Stereo Viewer
5.3.5.2. Legends
There is a default legend for each VIEW object. The default legend is automatically created and deleted
along with the view. By default, the default legend is made visible in the view it is associated with.
5.4. Stereo Viewer

If you:
1. Have a standard stereo display
2. Have a graphics card that supports quad buffering OpenGL output
3. Have set your graphics card to "Stereo"
4. Have set your view to Perspective mode (right-click in the Viewer and select Projection > Perspective)
...you can view output in stereo1. To enable this functionality:
1.
Select Edit > Options.
2.
In the Options dialog box, select CFD-Post > Viewer.
3.
On the Viewer panel:

a.
b.
4.
Set the Stereo Mode to Stereo.

Set the Stereo Effect. The value of the "stereo effect" that is required is related to the distance
between the observer and the display. If the stereo effect is too strong, either move away from
the display, or move the slider towards Weaker.
Click OK to save the settings.
The stereo viewer feature has been tested on:
XP-64 and Vista-64 with an NVidia graphics card and a Planar Stereo Monitor
XP-64 with an ATI card and a Zalman Stereo Monitor.
83
84
Chapter 6: CFD-Post Workflow

CFD-Post enables you to qualitatively visualize and quantitatively analyze the processes taking place in
a simulation; thus, the general workflow is:
1. Planning steps:
a. Decide which variables you want to study (your options are constrained by the variables that were
solved in the process of creating the solver results file).
b. Determine where in the simulation you want to view those variables.
c. Decide how you want to display those variables, either qualitative displays (such as contour plots
and charts) or quantitative analysis and displays (tables, etc.).
2. Production steps:
a. Load the solver results file for the simulation into CFD-Post.
b. Create any locations, variables, expressions, or functions required.
c. Optionally, publish the report, picture, or animation that shows the findings of the study to best advantage.
6.1. Loading and Viewing the Solver Results

When you load a solver results file into CFD-Post, the 3D Viewer displays the wireframe of the geometry,
the mesh, the boundaries, and the domains. You can immediately display on any of the walls or
boundaries the values of the variables that were imported with the geometry. You can also use the
functions and macros that are supplied.
If those elements do not provide enough resolution, you can make use of CFD-Post's features to add:
Locations where you can display or analyze variable values (points, point clouds, lines, planes, volumes,
isosurfaces, vortex core regions, surfaces of revolution, polylines, user surfaces, and surface groups).
Using selected locations, generate vectors, contours, streamlines and particle tracks to generate qualitative
displays of the results.
Expressions or macros that you can use to make new variables or to perform quantitative evaluation, integration, and averaging.
6.2. Qualitative Displays of Variables

The display of graphic objects (locations and qualitative displays) occurs in the 3D Viewer and the Chart
Viewer.
CFD-Post provides a wide range of control over the 3D Viewer, such as:
85
CFD-Post Workflow
How the graphical object is to be colored; either prescribed color or by variable. If colored by variable,
how the color is mapped over the range of the selected variable.
Rendering, including transparency, shading, lighting, specularity, and texture.
Display of lines and faces as well as geometric transformations including rotation, translation, scaling, reflection and instancing.
Up to four viewports where the orientation of the objects in these miniature viewers can be controlled
independently.
The Chart Viewer can display data as lines or as symbols.
6.3. Analysis
The quantitative analysis of variables can be displayed in the Table Viewer to enable you to display
data and expressions.
6.4. Quantitative Analysis of Results

There are a variety of ways you can perform quantitative analysis of results loaded into CFD-Post:
Use the Expressions workspace to make new variables and to numerically process results using a variety
of mathematical operations, such as averaging and integration.
Use the Calculators workspace to:
Invoke analysis macros supplied for various applications including fan noise, turbomachinery performance,
and so on
Calculate various measures of mesh quality
Probe the value of a function at a given location.
Use the Variables workspace to make new variables.
Use the Turbo workspace to initialize settings for turbomachinery applications.
6.5. Sharing the Analysis

There are a variety of ways to output the results of your analysis:
Save a picture of the contents of the 3D Viewer in a variety of formats, including PNG, PostScript, and
VRML.
Publish a report, an HTML publication that includes information about the solver results file, the mesh,
and the physics (as well as any other qualitative information, quantitative information, or comments you
want to add).
Produce an animation showing the changes in a variable over a range in the domain.
86
Typical Workflow
6.6. Typical Workflow

The following is a typical workflow, which you can simplify, reorganize, or extend suit your work patterns
and objectives:
1.
Start CFD-Post. (Starting CFD-Post (p. 3))
2.
Load one or more results files. (Load Results Command (p. 89))
3.
Create expressions (Expressions Workspace (p. 51)) and/or invoke macros (Predefined Macros (p. 251))
to perform the desired numerical processing of results.
4.
Create any new variables that will be used for qualitative display. (Variables Workspace (p. 45))
5.
Examine the existing locations (wireframe and surface boundaries) and create any additional locators
required. (Location Submenu (p. 142))
6.
For each locator, select visibility, method of coloring, rendering, and transformation.
7.
Create any additional objects (such as lines, vectors, or contours) for quantitative display. (CFD-Post Insert
Menu (p. 141))
8.
For each object, select visibility, method of coloring, rendering, and transformation.
9.
Use the 3D Viewer to explore the graphic objects and produce animations as required. (CFD-Post 3D
Viewer (p. 71))
10. Create tables of data as required and display in the Table Viewer. (Table Command (p. 213))
11. Create any desired charts and display in the Chart Viewer. (Chart Command (p. 218))
12. Generate or edit any required titles, legends, or labels (Legend Command (p. 202) and Text Command (p. 198))
13. If required, save a picture of the contents in the 3D Viewer. (Save Picture Command (p. 109))
14. Display the report in the Report Viewer and/or modify the report as required. (Report Command (p. 108))
15. Optionally, publish the report to an HTML file. (Report (p. 29))
16. Optionally, save animations. (Quick Animation (p. 240))
For a more detailed illustration of the use of CFD-Post, see the CFD-Post Tutorials.
87
88
Chapter 7: CFD-Post File Menu

This chapter describes the commands that are available from the File menu:
7.1. Load Results Command
7.2. Close Command
7.3. Load State Command
7.4. Save State Command and Save State As Command
7.5. Save Project Command
7.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only)
7.7. Import Commands
7.8. Export Commands
7.9. Mechanical Import/Export Commands
7.10. FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping
7.11. Report Command
7.12. Save Picture Command
7.13. Loading Recently Accessed Files
7.14. Quit Command
7.15. File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
The file types that you can load and display are described in File Types Used and Produced by CFDPost (p. 111).
7.1. Load Results Command

To load a results file (or files), select File > Load Results and browse to the file you want to load. CFX
results files and CFX-Solver input files can be loaded from the Load Results File dialog box. For information on valid results and CFX-Solver input files, see File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post (p. 111).
The Load Results File dialog box presents you with the following options:
Edit case names
Enables you to change the case name as it appears in the Outline tree. The default case name is the filename (without the file type extension). Changing the case name does not affect the filename in the
file system.
Keep current cases loaded
Controls whether to add to or replace the results that are currently in memory.
If Keep current cases loaded is selected, you can choose Open in new view to see the two cases
side-by-side. If you choose to open the new case the same view, the two cases overlap and the title
bar of the view displays All cases. However, you can use the Viewer's toolbar to manually display
two views, then manually display change All cases to Case 1 in View 1 and Case 2 in View 2. If
89
CFD-Post File Menu

you have loaded two cases and you select Tools > Compare cases, each case appears in a separate
view, with the differences displayed in a third view.
Note
The Keep current cases loaded option is particularly useful to perform simultaneous
postprocessing of both fluid (CFX) and solid (ANSYS) results when a two-way FluidStructure simulation has been performed.
Clear user state before loading
Loading a results file causes all domain, boundary, and variable objects associated with the results file
to automatically be created or updated by default. This would typically include the wireframe model of
the geometry and all the boundary conditions created in CFX-Pre. The data associated with a variable
is not loaded until the variable is actually used. Any existing objects (such as planes, vector plots) are
plotted using the most recently loaded results, if possible. You can disable this behavior by selecting
the Clear user state before loading check box.
Failing to clear the user state will cause CFD-Post to apply the state of the current file to the results
file being loaded. For Turbo cases, it is important to ensure that settings such as the number of instances in 360 degrees is correct (or to adjust the setting to be correct after the file is loaded) as
CFD-Post does not automatically check to see if the user settings match between files.
Maintain camera position
Controls the loading behavior when you replace one case with another. When selected, the new case
loads in the same orientation and size as the initial case; when cleared, the new case opens to fit into
the view.
Load particle track data
Controls the loading of the particle tracks that exist in the case.
CFX run history and multi-configuration options
Controls how you load a multi-configuration (.mres) file or a results file (.res) that contains a run
history (that is, a file that was produced from a definition file that had its initial values specified from a
results file from a previous run and saved to the results file that you are loading).
Choose Load only the last results to load only the last configuration of a multi-configuration results
file, or only the last results from a results file that contains a run history.
Choose Load complete history as: a single case to load all configurations of a multi-configuration
run as a single case, or all of the results history from a results file that contains a run history. In either
case, only one set of results will appear in the viewer, but you can use the timestep selector to move
between results. This option is not fully supported.
Note
When multi-configuration files are loaded as a single sequence, the solution expressions
(Reference Pressure, and so on) represent the last configuration, no matter which
configuration is currently viewed.
Choose Load complete history as: separate cases to load all configurations from a multi-configuration
run into separate cases. If a results file with run history is loaded, CFD-Post loads the results from this
90
Load Results Command

file and the results for any results file in its run history as separate cases. Each result appears as a
separate entry in the tree.
Note
When loading multiple configurations, the final results file determines whether all configurations have particle tracks (as this is how transient particle tracks are determined). If
the physics for each configuration differs significantly, do not use this method of loading
files.
Note
To unload a set of results, right-click the case name in the tree view and select Unload.
When a case is unloaded, global variable ranges are not updated.
To replace the selected results file with another results file while keeping the state, right-click
the case name and select Replace results file. (Reloading the results file through the Load
Results panel may not recover the state completely, in particular when Turbo Post is initialized.)
Note that the Replace results file function will keep the original case name even though the
results file has changed.
Domain Selector Dialog

If the results file being loaded contains multiple domains, the Domain Selector dialog box appears
and you are prompted to specify which domains to load. Choosing to load only the domains you require
will reduce memory usage and can speed processing time.
If you select the Don't show this panel again option, all domains will be loaded automatically on
subsequent uses of the Load Results command. Note that you can always re-enable this dialog box
from the Edit > Options > Files panel (select Show domain selector before load).
Solution Units Dialog Box

When you load CFX files into CFD-Post, the solution units that were used by the CFX-Solver are automatically read from the file. When you load a file that does not store solution units (such as CFX-4 dump
files, CFX-TASC files, FLUENT files, or ANSYS results files), by default the Solution Units dialog box appears
and you are prompted to specify the solution units. However, you can enable the Dont prompt for
Solution Units before loading results toggle to suppress this prompt, in which case the default units
of kilograms, meters, seconds, Kelvin, and radians will be used.
Once you have specified the units that were used in the results file, CFD-Post can convert those units
to your preferred display units.
91
CFD-Post File Menu

You set your preferred display units by selecting Edit > Options, then Common > Units from the menu
bar; for details, see Setting the Display Units (p. 136).
Note
In CFD-Post, the temperature solution units must be an absolute scale (for example, Kelvin
[K] or Rankine [R]); you cannot use Celsius and Fahrenheit. Temperature quantities elsewhere
in ANSYS CFX can be set in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Partial Results Files

When a partial results file is loaded, CFD-Post makes available the variables that exist in the full results
file, but do not necessarily exist in the partial results file. Variables that do not exist in partial results
files are not applicable to the currently loaded time step and are undefined.
You can optionally choose to use variable values that apply to the nearest full results file by changing
an option in the Options dialog box. For details, see Turbo (p. 133).
7.2. Close Command

The Close command closes the currently loaded file, prompting you to save if necessary. CFD-Post remains
open. To exit CFD-Post, use the Quit Command (p. 111).
7.3. Load State Command

Selecting Load State opens an existing state file.
Note
Timestep and phase information are not stored in the state file, so loading a state file does
not change the timestep or phase.
Overwrite and Append

You can choose to either replace or append to the current state in CFD-Post. You can also choose to
load the results file from which the state file was created. The results of these combinations are outlined
below.
Replace current state selected and Load results selected: The results file used to create the state file is
opened, all existing objects are deleted, and new objects that are defined in the state file are created. The
results are plotted on the new objects.
Replace current state selected and Load results cleared: All existing objects are deleted and new objects
that are defined in the state file are created. The results are plotted on the new objects using the existing
results.
Add to current state selected and Load results selected: The results file used to create the state file is
opened. All objects defined in the state file and all existing objects are plotted with the new results. If
objects in the state file have the same name as existing objects, the existing objects are replaced by those
in the state file.
92
Import Commands
Add to current state selected and Load results cleared: All objects defined in the state file are created
and plotted using the current results. Existing objects are not removed unless they have the same name
as an object in the state file, in which case they are replaced.
Results files may contain CEL expressions. If you have one or more results files already loaded and you
are about to load a state file, you can prevent overwriting these expressions by clearing the Load results
check box, then selecting the Preserve current results expressions check box.
7.4. Save State Command and Save State As Command

When CFD-Post is started from the ANSYS CFX Launcher, the Save State command produces a CCL file
with a .cst file extension. All objects that currently exist in the system are saved to the state file.
Important
A state file is linked to the results file from which it was created by an absolute path. Therefore,
do not change the location of the results file. The state file does not contain the geometry,
mesh, or any results; these are loaded from the results file into CFD-Post.
If you have not saved a state file during your current CFD-Post session, selecting Save State opens the
Save State dialog box where you can enter a file name.
If you have already saved a previous state, selecting Save State overwrites that file. To save a state to
a different file name, you should select Save State As from the File menu.
When CFD-Post is started from ANSYS Workbench, the Save Project command writes the current state
of the project.
7.5. Save Project Command

When CFD-Post is started from ANSYS Workbench, the Save Project command writes the current state
of the project.
7.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only)

Reads the upstream data, but does not perform any long-running operation.
7.7. Import Commands

The Import menu enables you to import data for:
A polyline or surface (see Import Surface or Line Data (p. 94))
A FLUENT particle track file (see Import FLUENT Particle Track File (p. 95))
A Mechanical CDB Surface (see Import Mechanical CDB Surface (p. 95))
Note
Only CFX-4 and FLUENT particle track formats are supported for CFD-Post import.
93
CFD-Post File Menu
7.7.1. Import Surface or Line Data

Using the Import Surface or Line Data dialog box, you can read in data for a polyline or surface.
Click Browse
to browse to the file to read the data from, or enter the file name.
Note
Importing of polylines from a file is not supported in Case Comparison mode.
Locator Names
If you import a generic file, the locator that is created is named using the locator name stored in the
file, with the prefix Imported. If a locator with the same name already exists, the lowest integer
greater than 1 that creates a unique name is appended. For example, if the imported file specifies a
locator called Line 1, the locator that is created is called Imported Line 1, unless such a locator
already exists, in which case the locator is called Imported Line 1 1. If the latter were the case,
then importing another file with a locator called Line 1 would cause the creation of a locator called
Imported Line 1 2.
Importing Experimental Data in a Customized File

You can import experimental data in a customized file; typically this data will be for a user surface
boundary profile or a polyline. The file structures are similar, except that the user surface description
requires more information to define the boundary. Refer to USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 101) or
POLYLINE Data Format (p. 100) as appropriate.
The example that follows shows experimental data that can be imported into CFD-Post.
Example 7.1: A Surface Data File for CFD-Post
[Name]
Experimental Data Set 1
[Data]
Node No., X[m], Y[m], Z[m], Press.[Pa], Vel.[m/s], Temp.[R],
...
0,
-0.3, -0.3, -1.0,
0.0,
1.0,
0.224,
1,
-1.0, -1.0, 1.0,
1.0,
2.0,
1.35987,
2,
-1.0, 1.0, 1.0,
1.0,
3.0,
-0.45,
3,
-0.3, 0.3, -1.0,
0.0,
4.0,
-5.82,
4,
0.3, -0.3, -1.0,
2.0,
5.0,
9.6323,
5,
1.0, -1.0, 1.0,
3.0,
6.0,
7.1859,
6,
1.0, 1.0, 1.0,
3.0,
7.0,
-4.656234,
7,
0.3, 0.3, -1.0,
2.0,
8.0,
2.1237,
8,
0.0, 0.0, 2.0,
5.0,
9.0,
6.456,
[Faces]
# Faces are defined by their points, represented by the point IDs:
#
3 points for a tri-face and 4 points for a quad-face.
# The face normal is defined by the order of the points, so define
# all points in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction
# to obtain a uniform face normal
0
#
7
4
#
4
6
6
0
94
- 3
The face above is created from points 0 through 3
- 4
1 0
Tri- and quad-faces may be combined
5 1
3 2
7 3
3 7 4
Import Commands
2
6
5
1
1
2
6
5
8
8
8
8
7.7.2. Import FLUENT Particle Track File

The Import FLUENT Particle Track File option enables you to import the particle track file associated
with the .cas/.dat/.cdat file currently loaded in CFD-Post. The Import FLUENT Particle Track
File dialog box enables you to browse for the appropriate FLUENT Particle Track XML file.
For details on creating a particle track file in ANSYS FLUENT, see Particle Tracks Dialog Box in the FLUENT
User's Guide. For limitations associated with FLUENT particle tracks, see Limitations with FLUENT
Files (p. 121). For details on configuring the display of a particle track file in ANSYS CFD-Post, see Particle
Track Command (p. 190).
7.7.3. Import Mechanical CDB Surface

The Import Mechanical CDB Surface feature is fully supported when initiated from the Mechanical side.
The main purpose of the Mechanical import/export facility in CFD-Post is to allow fluid-structure interaction (FSI). The facility enables a mapping of boundary data stored in a CFX results file to a surface
stored in an ANSYS Mesh (.cdb) file.
Note
In the volumetric transfer, the temperature at the unmapped nodes will be set to the average
temperature of all mapped nodes.
For an example of using this option, see Mechanical Import/Export Commands (p. 106).
The Import Mechanical CDB Surface dialog box has the following options:
7.7.3.1. File
The File setting specifies the filename of the file to import. You can type the file path of the file, or click
the Browse
icon to search for the file to import.
7.7.3.2. Length Units

The Length Units setting specifies what units the imported file will be in.
7.7.3.3. Specify Associated Boundary Check Box

Select the Specify Associated Boundary check box to specify an existing boundary to associate with
the data in the *.cdb (ANSYS mesh) file. When importing ANSYS files, you should specify an associated
existing boundary. If an export of ANSYS data is subsequently performed using the locator from the
ANSYS file, data from the associated locator is mapped to, and exported with, the ANSYS file locator.
7.7.3.3.1. Boundary
The Boundary setting specifies the associated boundary for the imported file.
95
CFD-Post File Menu
7.7.3.4. Maintain Conservative Heat Flows Check Box

Select the Maintain Conservative Heat Flows check box to ensure that the total heat flow for the
boundary is equal to that of the imported ANSYS surface.
7.7.3.5. Read Mid-Side Nodes Check Box

Select the Read Mid-Side Nodes check box to map the ANSYS classic geometry for side nodes to CFX
geometry. Using this feature can greatly extend the time it takes to load a file as reading the mid-side
nodes increases the number of nodes that need to be mapped. Mid-Side nodes are only useful when
you perform nodal exports, like Nodal Temperature Export. The mapped mid-side nodes are not used
for surface export data calculations
7.7.3.6. Mapping Success Label

The Mapping Success label indicates the percentage of the ANSYS surface (.cdb) nodes that have been
directly mapped to the CFX boundary surface.
The mapping success is determined in the following order:
1. An ANSYS surface node is considered equivalent to the nearest boundary surface node if the node is
within a certain tolerance of each other.
2. An ANSYS surface node is mapped to the closest face if it is closer to a node than the closest edge.
3. An ANSYS surface node is mapped to the closest edge if it is less than a certain tolerance.
Nodes are considered unmapped if none of the above conditions are met, or if the distance from the
node to the closest edge is greater than the allowable tolerance. In this case the ANSYS surface node
is mapped to the nearest boundary surface node regardless of the distance.
Note
This label only appears in the corresponding User Surface panel, after the ANSYS surface
(.cdb) nodes that have been mapped to the CFX boundary surface.
7.8. Export Commands

The Export option has the following sub-options:
7.8.1. Export
7.8.2. Export External Data File
7.8.3. Export Mechanical Load File
7.8.1. Export
The Export action enables you to export your results to a data file. You may export results for any
available variable in CFD-Post on any defined locator. In the export file, data is written in blocks on a
per locator basis in the order given by the locator list. Each block starts with lines listing the values of
the selected variables at the locator points (one line corresponds to one point).
The following two examples on how to export data are given at the end of this section:
Exporting Polyline Data (p. 100)
96
Export Commands
Exporting Boundary Profile / Surface Data (p. 101)
7.8.1.1. Export: Options Tab

7.8.1.1.1. File
The File setting specifies a file for the data to be exported to. You may type a filename or click Browse
to search for a file to export the results to, or enter a new file name.
7.8.1.1.2. Type
The Type setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Generic
Exports data to a file, writing the data in blocks for every locator. Each block starts
with listing the values of the selected variables at the locator points. The Generic
option displays the Export Geometry Information check box. For details, see
Export Geometry Information Check Box (p. 98).
BC Profile
Creates a boundary condition profile to be exported. The BC Profile option

enables you to select a Profile Type.
Case
Summary
Provides a short summary of the results file in xml format.
7.8.1.1.3. Locations
Locations is available only if either the Generic or BC Profile option is selected. The Locations
setting specifies the locators for which the results of your variable is written. You can hold down the
Ctrl key to select more than one locator and the Shift key to select a block of locators.
7.8.1.1.4. Name Aliases

Name Aliases is available only if either the Generic or BC Profile option is selected. The Name
Aliases setting specifies custom naming of locators. To change the names of locators that will appear
in the output file, insert a comma-separated list of names in the same order as locators.
7.8.1.1.5. Coord Frame

Coord Frame is available only if either the Generic or BC Profile option is selected. The Coord
Frame setting specifies the coordinate frame relative to which the data will be exported. Information
on creating a custom coordinate frame is available. For details, see Coordinate Frame Command (p. 200).
7.8.1.1.6. Unit System

The Unit System setting determines the units in which the data will be exported. By default, this will
use the global units system selected in Edit > Options. For details, see Setting the Display Units (p. 136).
7.8.1.1.7. Boundary Vals

Boundary Vals is available only if either the Generic or the BC Profile option is selected. The
Boundary Vals setting enables you to select Hybrid or Conservative boundary values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values. Setting Boundary Vals to Current will select Hybrid/ConRelease 14.5 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
97
CFD-Post File Menu

servative for each variable depending on the current setting. For details, see Variables Details
View (p. 46).
7.8.1.1.8. Export Geometry Information Check Box

Export Geometry Information is available only if the Generic option is selected. Select this check
box to export the x, y, z coordinate information of the locator at the beginning of the block.
7.8.1.1.8.1. Line and Face Connectivity Check Box

Line and Face Connectivity is available only if the Generic option is selected. Select this check box
to export the connectivity information after the coordinate information in the file.
7.8.1.1.8.2. Node Numbers Check Box

Node Numbers is available only if the Generic option is selected. Select this check box to export the
node numbers after the coordinate information in the file.
7.8.1.1.9. Profile Type

Profile Type is available only if the BC Profile option is selected. The Profile Type setting has the
following options:
Option
Description
Inlet Velocity
Exports the Velocity Vector variable.
Inlet Total
Pressure
Exports the Total Pressure, Total Temperature, and Velocity Direction variables.
Inlet Direction
Exports the Velocity Direction variable.
Inlet Supersonic
Exports the Velocity Vector, Pressure, and

Temperature variables.
Outlet
Pressure
Exports the Pressure variable.
Wall
Exports the Velocity Vector and Temperature

variables.
Custom
Enables you to select custom variables to export from the

Select Variable(s) list box.
7.8.1.1.10. Spatial Fields List Box

Spatial Fields is available only if the BC Profile option is selected. The Spatial Fields list box specifies
the coordinate plane axes for the file being exported.
7.8.1.1.11. Select Variable(s) List Box

Select Variable(s) is available only if either the Generic or BC Profile options are selected. This
list box is displayed for the BC Profile option only if the Custom option is selected for the Profile
Type setting. This list box selects the variables to export. You can hold down the Ctrl key to select
more than one variable or use the Shift key to select a block of variables.
98
Export Commands
7.8.1.2. Export: Formatting Tab

7.8.1.2.1. Vector Variables
Vector Variables is available only if either the Generic or Case Summary options are selected for
the Type setting in the Options tab.
7.8.1.2.1.1. Vector Display Options

The Vector Display options enable you to select either Components or Scalar. The Components setting
writes each component of a vector to the data file. The components appear inside the selected brackets.
The Scalar option writes only the magnitude of a vector quantity.
7.8.1.2.1.2. Brackets
Brackets is available only if the Components option is selected. The Brackets setting selects the type
of brackets to wrap around the components.
7.8.1.2.2. Include Nodes With Undefined Variable Check Box

Select the Include Nodes With Undefined Variable check box to write Null Tokens to the output file.
Select the symbol used to denote undefined variable values. For details, see Null Token (p. 99).
7.8.1.2.2.1. Null Token

Null Token is available only if the Include Nodes With Undefined Variable check box is selected. The
Null Token setting specifies the token to be displayed in the place of an undefined variable value. You
may select the item used as a null token from a predefined list. Examples of a variables with undefined
values include Velocity in a Solid Domain and a variable value at a point outside the solution domain,
which can be created using a polyline, sampling plane or surface locator.
Some variables, including Yplus and Wall Shear, are calculated only on the boundaries of the domain
and are assigned UNDEF values elsewhere.
If the Line and Face Connectivity check box is selected in the Options tab, then the Null Token is
automatically exported.
7.8.1.2.3. Precision
The Precision setting specifies the precision with which your results are exported. The data is exported
in scientific number format, and Precision sets the number of digits that appear after the decimal point.
For example, 13490 set to a precision of 2 outputs 1.35e+04. The same number set to a precision of
7 yields 1.3490000e+04.
7.8.1.2.4. Separator
The Separator setting specifies the character to separate the numbers in each row.
7.8.1.2.5. Include File Info Header Check Box

Select the Include File Info Header check box to export comments at the top of the export file displaying
the build date, date and time, and results file from which it is generated.
99
CFD-Post File Menu
7.8.1.2.6. Include Header Check Box

Select the Include Header check box to include the list locators and a list of variables with their corresponding units. The header should be included for most export applications to ensure successful import
into ANSYS CFX products.
7.8.1.3. Exporting Polyline Data

To save a polyline or line to a file:
1.
Select File > Export.

The Export dialog box appears.
2.
On the Options tab:

a.
b.
3.
Set Type to Generic.

Select Export Geometry Information and Export Connectivity.
On the Formatting tab, under Vector Variables, ensure that the Vector Display option is set to
Scalar.
Note that, on the Formatting tab, there is a Null Token field. This is used to indicate the string that
should be written to represent values that are undefined.
If you want to make your own polyline file with a text editor, follow the format specified below.
For details, see Polyline Command (p. 172).
7.8.1.3.1. POLYLINE Data Format

The following is an abbreviated polyline file:
[Name]
Polyline 1
[Data]
X [ m ], Y [ m ], Z [ m ], Area [ m^2 ], Density [ kg m^-3 ]
-1.04539007e-01, 1.68649014e-02, 5.99999987e-02, 0.00000000e+00,
-9.89871025e-02, 3.27597000e-02, 5.99999987e-02, 0.00000000e+00,
.
.
.
[Lines]
0, 1
1, 2
.
.
.
[Name]
Polyline 2
.
.
.
...
The name of each locator is listed under the Name heading. Point coordinates and the corresponding
variable values are stored in the Data section. Line connectivity data is listed in the Lines section,
and references the points in the Data section, where the latter are implicitly numbered, starting with
0.
100
Export Commands
Comments in the file are preceded by # (or ## for the CFX-5.6 polyline format) and can appear anywhere
in the file.
Blank lines are ignored and can appear anywhere in the file (except between the [<data>] and first
data line, where <data> is one of the key words in square brackets).
7.8.1.4. Exporting Boundary Profile / Surface Data

Surfaces can be exported and then read into CFX-Pre as a boundary profile (or into CFD-Post as a User
Surface).
7.8.1.4.1. USER SURFACE Data Format

An abbreviated user surface file, that could be read back into CFD-Post, is shown below:
[Name]
Plane 1
[Data]
X [ m ], Y [ m ], Z [ m ], Area [ m^2 ], Density [ kg m^-3 ]
-1.77312009e-02, -5.38203605e-02, 6.00000024e-02, 7.12153496e-06, ...
-1.77312009e-02, -5.79627529e-02, 5.99999949e-02, 5.06326614e-06,
.
.
.
[Faces]
369, 370, 376, 367, 375
350, 374, 367, 368, 351
.
.
.
[Name]
Plane 2
.
.
.
This is similar to the polyline data format described earlier (POLYLINE Data Format (p. 100)), except for
the connectivity information. Instead of defining lines, this file defines faces (small surfaces), each by 3
(triangle) to 6 (hexagon) points. The points must be ordered to trace a path going around the face. For
proper rendering, the faces should have consistent point ordering, either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Each face is automatically closed by connecting the last point to the first point. Face connectivity data
is listed in the Faces section and references the points in the Data section, where the latter are implicitly
numbered, starting with 0.
7.8.2. Export External Data File

The Export External Data File action enables you to export your results as an ANSYS External Data
File (.axdt). This file can be imported into the External Data system, which can be read into a Mechanical application or System Coupling component system.
The file format for an ANSYS External Data File (.axdt) is described in ANSYS External Data File Format
in the Workbench User Guide.
101
CFD-Post File Menu
7.8.2.1. Options Tab

7.8.2.1.1. File
The File setting specifies a file for the data to be exported to. You may type a filename or Browse
to search for a file to export the results to. The default filename is export.axdt and the default file
path is your current working directory.
7.8.2.1.2. Location
The Location setting specifies the locators for which the results of your variables are written.
Note
For conjugate heat transfer cases, you should make sure that the selected location corresponds
to the fluid/solid side of the interface, as intended.

The Unit System setting specifies the units for the exported data. By default, this uses the global units
system selected in Edit > Options. For details, see Setting the Display Units (p. 136).
Note
The following unit systems in CFD-Post are not supported in the External Data system:
English Engineering
British Technical
US Customary
Custom
In such cases, the External Data system cannot determine the unit system used in the file. If
any of the above systems is selected in CFD-Post, a warning is issued, and the data will be
exported in SI units.
7.8.2.1.4. Boundary Data

The Boundary Data setting specifies Hybrid or Conservative boundary values. If Boundary Data
is set to Current, this setting is picked up from each variable. For details, see Variables Details
View (p. 46).
7.8.2.1.5. Select Recommended Variables

The Select Recommended Variables list box allows you to select the variables to export. You can select
from the following options:
102
Export Commands
Heat Flow
Note
For FLUENT results, Heat Flow is not always defined at the CHT interface boundaries. You
should ensure that heat fluxes are available at the boundaries you export.
HTC and Wall Adjacent Temperature

This option allows you to export the Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient and Wall Adjacent Temperature
variables to the external data file.
This option is not available for inviscid flows and Eulerian multiphase cases. For Eulerian multiphase
cases, you can select phase-specific temperatures from the Additional Variables list. For a list of
FLUENT field variables and their equivalent in CFD-Post, see FLUENT Field Variables Listed by Category.
Note
For cases where you have specifically solved for conjugate heat transfer, it is recommended
that you export the solid-side Temperature, instead of HTC and Wall Adjacent Temperature.
The HTC and Wall Adjacent Temperature variable is not calculated for laminar flow and
will not appear in the Export External Data File window for such cases.
Temperature
For multiphase cases, CFD-Post will calculate and output the Bulk Temperature, which is the temperature weighted by the volume fraction of the individual phases. You can select phase-specific
temperatures from the Additional Variables list.
Note
For cases where you have specifically solved for conjugate heat transfer, it is recommended
that you export the solid-side temperature instead of the fluid-side temperature.
For multiphase cases that include a combined temperature variable instead of phasespecific temperatures, CFD-Post will not calculate the Bulk Temperature. However, the
combined temperature variable will be written to the output file under Bulk Temperature.
Note
User defined variables named Temperature or Heat Flow will be ignored and a warning
message will be issued.
103
CFD-Post File Menu
7.8.2.1.6. Select Additional Variables

In addition to the variables listed in the Select Recommended Variables list box you can select other
field variables you have set to output in FLUENT. You can hold down the Ctrl key to select more than
one variable or use the Shift key to select a block of variables.
Note
User defined variables named Temperature or Heat Flow will be ignored and a warning
message will be issued.
7.8.2.2. Formatting Tab

The Formatting tab enables you to specify only a precision value. This setting is the same for the Export
command. For details, see Export (p. 96)
7.8.3. Export Mechanical Load File

The selected CFX data that is exported by CFD-Post is interpolated onto the ANSYS surface from the
associated CFX boundary. The interpolated data is then exported to an ANSYS load file. For details on
how to associate a boundary with an ANSYS surface, see Specify Associated Boundary Check Box (p. 95).
When verifying the load applied to the ANSYS surface, note that the Pressure variable available in
CFD-Post is not the same as the element stress representing the static structural load; the element stress
variables, Normal Stress, Shear Stress, and Stress (the latter being combination of Normal
Stress and Shear Stress) are vector quantities, whereas the Pressure variable is a scalar
quantity. The element stress variables are computed upon importing the ANSYS surface into CFD-Post,
and can be used in plots.
For an example of using this option, see Mechanical Import/Export Commands (p. 106).
Note
One-way FSI cases with porosity transfer only the fluid quantities for 2D Temperature, 3D
Temperature, Heat Transfer Coefficient, and Heat Flux.
Note
Transfer of data between FLUENT and Mechanical through CFD-Post is based on nodal data.
Values that are visualized in CFD-Post may differ from values that are exported. For example
in cases where Wall Heat Flux values are zero on the mapped surface, you would see zero
total flux on the surface, as this calculation is based on face data. However, nodal data may
have non-zero values on surface edge nodes, as it is interpolated from all faces that touch
those nodes, including the ones from the neighboring surface (which may have non-zero
flux). This is the data that will be mapped to Mechanical.
104
Export Commands
7.8.3.1. Options Tab

7.8.3.1.1. File
The File setting specifies the file path and filename of the file to be exported. You may click the Browse
icon to select the name and location of the file to be exported. The default name is export.sfe
or export.xml (depending on which File Format is chosen) and the default file path is your current
working directory.
7.8.3.1.2. Location
The Location setting selects the Mechanical surface object to export, which is generated by importing
a .cdb file. For details, see Import Mechanical CDB Surface (p. 95).
Note
The Mechanical load file does not contain mesh coordinate data, and must be interpreted
along with the .cdb file originally imported into CFD-Post.

The Unit System setting specifies the units for the exported data. By default, this uses the global units
system selected in Edit > Options. For details, see Setting the Display Units (p. 136).
7.8.3.1.4. Boundary Vals

The Boundary Vals setting specifies Hybrid or Conservative boundary values. If Boundary Vals
is set to Current, this setting is picked up from each variable. For details, see Variables Details
View (p. 46).
7.8.3.1.5. Export Data

The Export Data setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Normal Stress Vector
Exports Normal Stress variable data onto imported

surf154 surfaces. Normal Stress is a vector variable calculated from the normal component of Force.
Tangential Stress
Vector
Exports Shear Stress variable data onto imported surf154

surfaces. Shear stress data is calculated from the tangential
component of Force.
Stress Vector
Exports Stress variable data onto imported surf154 surfaces. Stress data is calculated by vector summing the normal
stress and shear data.
Heat Transfer Coefficient
Exports convection variable data onto imported surf152

surfaces. When selected, the Specify Reference Temperature
check box will appear.
See Specify Reference Temperature (p. 106), below.
105
CFD-Post File Menu

Option
Description
Heat Flux
Exports the Heat Flux variable data onto the surf152

surfaces.
Temperature
Exports the Temperature variable data on the nodes of the

imported surface.
7.8.3.1.6. Fluids
Fluids is available only if either the Tangential Stress Vector or Stress Vector options
are selected. The Fluids setting specifies which fluids, or All Fluids, that will affect the elements
shear or stress values.
7.8.3.1.7. Specify Reference Temperature

Specify Reference Temperature is available only if the Heat Transfer Coefficient option is selected.
Select this check box to enable you to specify a fixed reference temperature value or expression.
1. If you specify a reference temperature, then the exported heat transfer coefficient is calculated based
on Heat Flux and Temperature data.
Note that the variable Surface Heat Transfer Coef is not recognized by CFD-Post for one-way FSI.
2. If you do not specify a reference temperature, the exported data is based on the Wall Heat Transfer
Coefficient and Wall Adjacent Temperature.
For FLUENT Cases: To transfer HTC from FLUENT cases without specifying a reference temperature
(method 2 above), the following variables have to be exported to the DAT/CDAT file:
Wall Func. Heat Tran. Coef (which will be converted to the CFX variable Wall Heat
Transfer Coefficient)
Temperature. In FLUENT, the wall adjacent temperature is calculated by averaging the adjacent cell
temperatures to the wall nodes.
7.8.3.2. Formatting Tab

The Formatting tab enables you to specify only a precision value. This setting is the same for the Export
command. For details, see Export (p. 96).
7.9. Mechanical Import/Export Commands

The main purpose of the Mechanical import/export facility in CFD-Post is to allow fluid-structure interaction (FSI). The facility enables a mapping of boundary data stored in a CFX results file to a surface
stored in an ANSYS mesh (.cdb) file.
For more information, see the Reference Guide for Mesh Deformation and Fluid-Structure Interaction
in the CFX Reference Guide.
7.9.1. Mechanical Import/Export Example: One-Way FSI Data Transfer

You can perform one-way FSI operations manually (by exporting CDB files from Mechanical APDL, importing the surface in CFD-Post, and exporting the SFE commands).
106
FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping

To create an ANSYS load file using CFD-Post to transfer FSI data:
1.
Load the fluids results file, from which you want to transfer results, into CFD-Post
2.
Select File > Import > Import Mechanical CDB Surface. The Import ANSYS CDB Surface dialog box
appears.
3.
In the Import Mechanical CDB Surface dialog box, either:

Select the CDB file that specifies the surface mesh of the solid object to which to transfer data. Also
select the Associated Boundary for the surface to map onto, and make other selections as appropriate.
Select the XML document that provides all transfer information. Click OK, and the surface data is
loaded.
4.
Select File > Export > Export Mechanical Load File. The Export Mechanical Load File dialog box
appears.
5.
In the Export Mechanical Load File dialog box, select a filename to which to save the data. For the
Location parameter value, select the imported ANSYS mesh object. Under File Format select ANSYS
Load Commands (FSE or D). (Alternatively, you can select WB Simulation Input (XML) to get XML
output.) Also select the appropriate data to export: Normal Stress Vector, Tangential Stress Vector, Stress
Vector, Heat Transfer Coefficient, Heat Flux, or Temperature. Click Save, and the data file is created.
The one-way FSI data transfer described above is performed automatically when using the FSI: Fluid
Flow (CFX) > Static Structural custom system in ANSYS Workbench. For details, see the FSI: Fluid Flow
(CFX) > Static Structural in the Workbench User Guide section in the ANSYS documentation.
7.10. FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping
You can use CFD-Post to manually generate a load file for Mechanical APDL:
1.
Write out a .cdb file that contains the surface or volume mesh by using the CDWRITE command in
Mechanical APDL.
For surface load mapping, create a layer of SURF154 elements (pressure) or SURF152 elements
(thermal) on the boundary of interest and write out only these elements to the .cdb file.
Note
If you write out a .cdb file for Temperature surface mapping, there is no need to create
surface-effect elements because Temperature will be the Degrees Of Freedom and is
set directly. Instead, select the nodes on the surface of interest and write these to the
.cdb file.
2.
Load the.cdb file into CFD-Post using File > Import > Import Mechanical CDB Surface.
107
CFD-Post File Menu

Select the associated CFD boundary (disable for body import).
Note
Pick the solid side of a CHT interface.
Upon importing the .cdb file, a User Surface object is created in CFD-Post.
For surface mapping, you can enable the visibility and view the mesh using the usual Render options.
For volume mapping, enabling the visibility will not display the Mechanical volume mesh.
To see the node locations, create a Point Cloud object scoped to the User Surface with Sampling
= Vertex and a Reduction Factor of 1.
3.
Export the load file from CFD-Post using File > Export > Export Mechanical Load File.
For Stress, Heat Flux, and HTC, the load file will contain SFE commands to apply loads via the
SURF152/SURF154 elements.
For Temperature:
A surface load file will contain D commands to set the Degrees of Freedom.
A body load file will contain BF commands.
You must export in Celsius.
A structural analysis reads BF loads in Celsius regardless of the units selection in Workbench.
You can open the exported file in a text editor to make sure the values look reasonable.
4.
Read the load file into Mechanical APDL using the /input command.
Make sure your solution units are consistent with the values exported from CFD-Post. In particular,
note that Mechanical is Celsius by default, while CFX is Kelvin.
5.
After solving, check the Solution Information and the .err file to make sure the /input command
was successful. If the file was not read, the solution will still proceed without the load applied.
7.11. Report Command

The File > Report menu item has the following options:
Report Templates
Invokes the Report Templates dialog box, where you can browse the list of existing templates or add
(register) a new template. The existing templates are for turbomachinery simulations.
To learn how to use templates, see Report Templates (p. 34).
Load 'Generic Report' Template
Reloads the default template.
108
Save Picture Command

Refresh Preview
Updates the report that is displayed on the Report Viewer. You need to do this after making changes
to your report.
This command is equivalent to clicking on the Refresh icon at the top of the Report Viewer.
Publish
Displays the Publish Report dialog box, where you can configure the format and name of your report.
See Publishing the Report (p. 44) for details.
This command is equivalent to clicking on the Publish icon at the top of the Report Viewer.
To learn more about publishing a report, see Report (p. 29).
7.12. Save Picture Command

Select File > Save Picture to open the Save Picture dialog box, which enables you to save the current
contents of the viewer to a file.
Note
When you save a picture of the Chart Viewer, note that the font sizing and line thickness in
the chart image output are adjusted to approximately reproduce the appearance of the chart
at the initial screen size (700x700 pixels), and are independent of the output image resolution.
Options Tab
The Options tab has the following settings:
File
Enables you to specify the file name of the file. You may enter the file name and path into the File text
box, or click the Browse
icon and search for the directory in which the file is to be saved.
Format
Can be set to one of the following:
PNG
Portable Network Graphics, a file format intended to replace the GIF format. It was designed for use
on the World Wide Web and retains many of the features of GIF with new features added.
CFD Viewer State (3D)
A 3D file format that can be read back directly into a stand-alone CFD Viewer.
JPEG
A compressed file format developed for compressing raw digital information. File sizes are small and
lack detail, so this method is not recommended for line drawings.
Windows Bitmap
A file type (*.bmp) that is usually large and does not adjust well to resizing or editing. This file type
does retain all of the quality of the original image and can be easily converted to other formats.
PPM
Stands for Portable Pixel Map, a file format similar to a Windows Bitmap.
109
CFD-Post File Menu

PostScript and Encapsulated PS
PostScript (*.ps) and Encapsulated PS (*.eps) are generally recommended for output to a printer
or line drawings. However, text1, texture2, and transparency3 will cause the PS/EPS to output as a
very large bitmap file, in which case a PNG file would be a more efficient alternative. Note that the
ANSYS logo and the axis do not cause the PS/EPS output to become a bitmap.
VRML (3D)
Virtual Reality Modeling Language (*.wrl), a file format used to present interactive three-dimensional views and that can be delivered across the World-Wide Web. The only supported VRML viewer
is Cortona from Parallel Graphics (see http://www.parallelgraphics.com/products/cortona/).
Use Screen Capture Check Box
Select the Use Screen Capture check box to save a screen capture of the 3D Viewer as the output. Note
that Face Culling affects Screen Capture mode only. The Render settings Draw as Lines and Draw as
Points are not picked up in screen capture mode.
CFD-Post always attempts to capture only the viewport when this check box is selected. On some
systems with particular window systems and OpenGL installations, other objects (such as forms)
may also be captured and appear in the image. If you experience this behavior, you may move any
other forms away from the viewport before capturing the image, or disable the screen capture
method.
White Background Check Box
Select the White Background check box to color white objects black, and black objects white, in the
image file. All objects are affected by this toggle, so slightly off-white and off-black objects are also inverted. This setting does not work for VRML files.
Enhanced Output (Smooth Edges) Check Box
Smooths the edges of the image.
Use Screen Size Check Box
Select Use Screen Size to use the Viewer size for the image. Clear this check box to specify a custom
image size in pixels.
Width/Height
These settings are available only if the Use Screen Size check box is cleared. These settings specify the
width and height of the image in pixels.
Scale (%)
Specifies the size the image is to be reduced or increased from the current viewer screen size.
Image Quality
Specifies the JPEG compression number for the output image. For a better quality image, increase the
value.
The sources of text include the legend (which you can hide from the User Locations and Plots control on the Outline view), the
ruler (which you can hide from Edit > Options > CFD-Post > Viewer > Ruler Visibility), and text added by using the Insert > Text
command.
2
Controlled from an object's Render tab (when available).
Controlled from an object's Render tab.
110
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post

Tolerance
A non-dimensional tolerance value used in face sorting when generating hardcopy output. Larger values
are faster, but may cause defects in the resulting output.
Important
When a clip plane is coincident with regions, boundaries, or interfaces that are planes, the
results of a Save Picture command may not match what you see in the 3D Viewer (depending
on the orientation of the case). In this situation, set the Use Screen Capture check box.
7.13. Loading Recently Accessed Files

CFD-Post saves the file paths of the last six results files, state files, and session files. To re-open a recently
used file, select it from the Recent Results Files, Recent State Files, or Recent Session Files, as appropriate.
7.14. Quit Command

To exit from CFD-Post, select File > Quit from main menu. Objects created during your CFD-Post session
are not automatically saved. If the there is no state file in memory, the state was changed since the file
was opened, or since the last state save, a dialog box asks whether you want to save the state before
closing. For details, see Save State Command and Save State As Command (p. 93).
7.15. File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post

This section describes the file types used by CFD-Post and the software that outputs those file types:
7.15.1.Transient Blade Row Postprocessing
7.15.2. ANSYS CFX Files
7.15.3. ANSYS Meshing Files
7.15.4. CFX-4 Dump Files
7.15.5. CFX-TASCflow Results Files
7.15.6. ANSYS Files
7.15.7. ANSYS Icepak Files
7.15.8. CGNS Files
7.15.9. FLUENT Files
7.15.10. Limitations with FLUENT Files
7.15.1. Transient Blade Row Postprocessing

Transient blade row models available in ANSYS CFX (described in Transient Blade Row Modeling in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide) make it possible to obtain temporally accurate solutions of transient blade
row interaction, with vastly reduced memory requirements and computational time. There are two main
types of case where these transient blade row models can be applied:
Single-domain modeling, such as frozen gust (inlet disturbance (for one domain only, either rotor or
stator)).
Single-stage, multi-domain modeling, such as transient rotor-stator, or any multistage model.
111
CFD-Post File Menu

When a transient blade row case is loaded, CFD-Post automatically creates valid solution variables for
postprocessing (see Variables Tree View (p. 45)).
Locator Object Limitations

For Transient Blade Row cases, transient statistics for boundary-only variables (such as Force,
Mass Flow, Heat Flux) are not available on the following postprocessing locators (points, lines,
cut-planes, isosurfaces, and iso clips).
CFD-Post displays the global range for plots in transient blade row cases differently than in
other cases. In a transient blade row case, the global range is computed and extended dynamically based on the selected domain(s) and timestep. For example if you change the definition
of a plot to include another domain, or if you change the timestep, the global range in the
plot's legend will be extended automatically to cover both the original and the new plot
definitions.
Transient blade row cases also interact with the timestep selector; see Using the Timestep Selector with
Transient Blade Row Cases (p. 237) for details.
7.15.2. ANSYS CFX Files

Case Files (.cfx)
A case file is generated when you save a simulation in CFX-Pre. The case file contains the physics data,
region definitions, and mesh information for the simulation and is used by CFX-Pre as the 'database' for
the simulation setup.
A case file is a binary file and cannot be directly edited.
CFX-Mesh Files (.gtm)
GTM files (.gtm) contain mesh regions that can be used to set up a simulation in CFX-Pre or viewed in
CFD-Post.
Limitations with a GTM File in Multiple Results Files When loading a state file that loads multiple
results files including a GTM file, load the mesh file first, and then apply the state.
CFX-Solver Input Files (.def, .mdef)
A CFX-Solver input file is created by CFX-Pre. The input file for a single configuration simulation (.def)
contains all physics and mesh data; the input file for multi-configuration simulations (.mdef) contains
global physics data only (that is, Library and Simulation Control CFX Command Language specifications).
An .mdef input file is supplemented by Configuration Definition (.cfg) files that:
Are located in a subdirectory that is named according to the base name of the input file
Contain local physics and mesh data.
Note
Use the -norun command line option (described in Command-Line Options and Keywords
for cfx5solve in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide) to merge global information into
the configuration definition files, and produce a CFX-Solver Input file (.def) file that can
be run by the CFX-Solver.
112

CFX-Solver Results Files (.res, .mres, .trn, .bak)
Intermediate and final results files are created by the CFX-Solver:
Intermediate results files, which include transient and backup files (.trn and .bak, respectively) are
created while running an analysis.
Final results files for single and multi-configuration simulations (.res and .mres, respectively) are
written at the end of the simulations execution. For multi-configuration simulations, a configuration
result file (.res) is also created at the end of each configurations execution.
Each results file contains the following information as of the iteration or time step at which it is
written:
The physics data (that is, the CFX Command Language specifications)
All or a subset of the mesh and solution data.
CFX-Solver Backup Results Files (.bak)
A backup file (.bak) is created at your request, either by configuring the settings on the Backup tab
in Output Control in CFX-Pre, or by choosing to write a backup file while the run is in progress in the
CFX-Solver Manager.
CFX-Solver Transient Results Files (.trn)
A transient results file (.trn) is created at your request, by configuring the settings on the Output
Control > Trn Results tab in CFX-Pre.
CFX-Solver Error Results Files (.err)
An error results file (.err) is created when the CFX-Solver detects a failure and stops executing an
analysis. The .err file can be loaded into CFD-Post and treated the same way as a .bak file, but if the
CFX-Solver encounters another failure while writing the .err file, it may become corrupted and accurate
solutions cannot be guaranteed.
Session Files (.cse)
Session files are produced by CFD-Post and contain CCL commands. You can record the commands executed during a session to a file and then play back the file at a later date. For details, see New Session
Command (p. 139).
You can also modify session files in a text editor.
State Files (.cst)
State files are produced by CFD-Post and contain CCL commands. They differ from session files in that
only a snapshot of the current state is saved to a file. You can also write your own state files using any
text editor. For details, see Save State Command and Save State As Command (p. 93) and Load State
Command (p. 92).
113
CFD-Post File Menu
7.15.3. ANSYS Meshing Files

Both .cmdb files (created in the Meshing application) and .dsdb files (created in Simulation) behave
the same in CFD-Post as .gtm (and .def) files. For details, see File Types Used and Produced by CFDPost (p. 111).
Note
You must have ANSYS Workbench installed in order to be able to load ANSYS Meshing files
(cmdb and dsdb) into CFX-Pre or CFD-Post.
CFD-Post does not support .cmdb files generated by the Meshing application prior to Release
11.0.
7.15.4. CFX-4 Dump Files

CFD-Post can load dump files (*.d*mp*) created by CFX-4. When you load the results, you may be
prompted to provide the solution units that were used in the simulation. For details, see CFD-Post
Solution Units (p. 133).
7.15.4.1. Limitation with CFX-4 Files

There is an important limitation with CFX-4 results files that should be noted: the CFX-4 Solver does
not output minimum/maximum ranges for each of the calculated variables. These ranges are calculated
when the results file is loaded by CFD-Post. Calculating the range for a very large problem would,
however, require prohibitively large amounts of CPU time. As a result, range values are calculated for
the loaded time step only. This means that values that appear as global range, are in fact ranges that
exist for that time step only.
7.15.4.2. Interpolation of Results

The CFX-4 Solver uses a cell-based solution method, whereas CFX-Solver uses a node-based solution
method. Possible problems can be encountered at the intersection of patches, such as in the following
diagram:
114

When interpolating from cell-centered to node-centered data, the data at a given node is affected by
all surrounding cells. In order to get the correct behavior at boundary patches, a priority number is assigned to each patch by CFD-Post. This means that, for example in the above diagram, if the wall has
a higher priority number than the inlet, the value of the node is interpolated from the wall value of the
CFX solution. When considering a situation in 3D, the priority of all faces is read and interpolation occurs
from the face(s) with the highest priority. CFD-Post uses the same default values for every problem, so
there are cases in which accuracy can be compromised. These errors can be minimized by refining the
grid density in the region around problem areas.
Quantitative calculations can suffer a loss of accuracy due to the limitation described above. The results
of mass flow calculations should, therefore, be assumed to be approximations for the purposes of
quantitative analysis.
7.15.5. CFX-TASCflow Results Files

CFD-Post can import CFX-TASCflow results files for postprocessing. When you load the results, you may
be prompted to provide the solution units that were used in the simulation. For details, see CFD-Post
Solution Units (p. 133).
If TBPOST_COMP_X parameters (where X is the component number) are defined in the GCI file, either
on their own or within the TBPOST_COMP_LIST macro, they are used to obtain the list of turbo
components to load. Each defined component is treated as a separate domain inside CFD-Post, allowing
for their individual turbo initialization.
Note
If this list exists but is incomplete, only the defined components are loaded. If you cannot
load a turbo file, it may be due to an incompatibility in the component definition. As a
workaround, remove TBPOST related parameter and macro definitions from the GCI file.
7.15.5.1. Limitations with CFX-TASCflow Files

When loading rso or grd files, bcf and prm files are required.
bcf files must be complete (must contain all domain and boundary condition definitions).
When using the Turbo Post functionality, separate region names are required for the following 2D location
types:
Hub
Shroud
Blade
Inlet
Outlet
Periodic1
Periodic2
115
CFD-Post File Menu

If these regions have not been specified separately (that is, hub and blade comprise of one region),
you will either need to recreate them in the CFX-TASCflow preprocessor or specify the turbo regions
from line locators. For details, see Initialize All Components (p. 275).
Mass flow and torque are not written to rso files by CFX-TASCflow. These values are approximated in
CFD-Post and may not be suitable for use in a formal quantitative analysis.
7.15.5.2. Variable Translation

By default, CFD-Post does not modify the variable names in the rso file. If you want to use all of the
embedded CFD-Post macros and calculation options, you need to convert variable names to CFX types.
You can convert the variable names to CFX variable names before reading the file by selecting the
Translate variable names to CFX-Solver style names check box in the Edit > Options > Files menu.
Translation is carried out according to the following:
CFX-TASCflow
Translated to CFX Variable
Temperature
TKE
Turbulent Kinetic Energy
EPSILON
Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
VISC_TURBULENT
Eddy Viscosity
VISC_MOLECULAR
Molecular Viscosity
CONDUCTIVITY
Thermal Conductivity
SPECIFIC_HEAT_P
SPECIFIC_HEAT_V
Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Volume
PTOTAL
Total Pressure
PTOTAL_REL
Total Pressure in Rel Frame
PTOTAL_ABS
Total Pressure in Stn Frame
POFF
Pressure Offset
P_CORRECTED
Pressure Corrected
TTOTAL
Total Temperature
TTOTAL_REL
Total Temperature in Rel Frame
TTOTAL_ABS
Total Temperature in Stn Frame
TOFF
Temperature Offset
T_CORRECTED
Temperature Corrected
TAU_WALL
Wall Shear
YPLUS
Solver Yplus
Q_WALL
Wall Heat Flux
Pressure
PRESSURE_STATIC
Static Pressure
PRESSURE_REL
Relative Pressure
MACH
Mach Number
MACH_ABS
Mach Number in Stn Frame
MACH_REL
Mach Number in Rel Frame
116

CFX-TASCflow
Translated to CFX Variable
HTOTAL
Total Enthalpy
HTOTAL_REL
Total Enthalpy in Rel Frame
HTOTAL_ABS
Total Enthalpy in Stn Frame
ENTHALPY
Static Enthalpy
ENTROPY
Static Entropy
FE_VOLUME
FE Volume
CONTROL_VOLUME
Volume of Finite Volumes
DIST_TURB_WALL
Wall Distance
7.15.6. ANSYS Files

ANSYS solver files are created from the ANSYS solver. CFD-Post is able to read results for temperature,
velocity, acceleration, magnetic forces, stress, strain, and mesh deformation. The ANSYS solver files may
have load-step variables and time steps; CFD-Post will represent both as time steps. The valid file types
are *.rst, *.rth, *.rmg, *.rfl, *.inn, *.brfl, *.brmg, *.brst, *.brth, *.inp, *.cdb.
When ANSYS solver files are read together with CFX-Solver files, fluid dynamics and solid mechanics
results can be analyzed simultaneously. For details on how to load multiple files, see Load Results
Command (p. 89).
The deformations due to change in temperature and stress/strain of the mesh can be amplified by using
the Deformation option available by right-clicking the viewer background. For details, see CFD-Post
3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 75).
7.15.6.1. Limitations with ANSYS Files

There are some important limitations with ANSYS results files:
If you are post-processing ANSYS harmonic-analyzed files and all of the variable values are incorrectly
displaying as zeroes, you can set the environment variable CFDPOST_RST_SKIP_LAST_DATASET=1
to plot the variables with non-zero values from the second-last dataset of the results file (which does not
contain frequency values of zero).
CFD-Post does not fully support undefined and user-defined as values for RST units. In those cases, CFDPost assumes SI units.
If you want to use CFD-Post to postprocess an ANSYS RST file outside of ANSYS Workbench and you
do not want to have CFD-Post assume SI units, you can set an environment variable (CFDPOST_RST_SHOW_UNITS_DIALOG=1) to cause the Solution Units dialog box (described in Solution
Units Dialog Box (p. 91)) to appear. Note that this will cause the Solution Units dialog box to appear
even when CFD-Post can read the units in the results file.
The ANSYS Solver does not output minimum/maximum ranges for each of the calculated variables; these
ranges are calculated when the results file is loaded by CFD-Post. Calculating the range for a very large
problem would, however, require prohibitively large amounts of CPU time. As a result, range values are
calculated for the loaded time step only. This means that values that appear as global range, are in fact
ranges that exist for that time step only, at first. As more time steps are added, the global range is extended
accordingly. If you want to enable the calculation of true global ranges (and incur the potentially large
117
CFD-Post File Menu

CPU time each time you load a non-ANSYS CFX file), you can do this by selecting Edit > Options and selecting Pre-calculate global variable ranges, under Files. For details, see Files (p. 131).
CFD-Post plots only ANSYS variables that exist in RST files; unlike ANSYS, it will not calculate other variables
automatically. Therefore, some variables that you would expect to be able to plot (as in ANSYS) either
will be missing or will have all zero values in CFD-Post.
RST files do not store data for principal stresses. There is a slight difference for principal stress calculated
in CFD-Post and ANSYS. CFD-Post calculates principal stresses on a node by averaging the stresses on
each element touching the node. However, ANSYS calculates principal stresses based on node-averaged
stresses. This difference can be minimized by the use of a finer mesh.
You can also configure ANSYS to calculate principal stresses the same way as CFD-Post by issuing
the command avprin, 1, and replotting the values.
By default, an ANSYS results file does not contain the definitions of any components that you may have
created in the simulation set up and so these will not be available as regions for plotting in CFD-Post.
However, it is possible to produce an additional "components" file that does contain these definitions. If
CFD-Post finds a file with the name filename.cm in the same directory and with the same filename
(excluding the file extension) as the ANSYS results file, then it will read component definitions from this
file. For instance, if you are post-processing the ANSYS results file OscillatingPlate.rst, CFD-Post
will look for the file OscillatingPlate.cm in the same directory to find component definitions. You
can get ANSYS to write the components file by including a command CMWRITE,<jobname>,cm in your
ANSYS input file, before the SOLVE command. If .cm files are to be loaded into CFD-Post, job names
need to be consistent across restarts, input file processing, and regular runs. If your ANSYS results file was
produced by an ANSYS Multi-field run that had its multi-field commands set up in CFX-Pre, then this
command is already added automatically into the resulting ANSYS input file as part of the input file processing.
Components files (CM files) must have been output in blocked format (which is the default output format).
Refer to the ANSYS documentation to learn how to control the ANSYS output format.
All regions from components files are read as surfaces. If a region is volumetric, CFD-Post will read
the outer surface only.
CFD-Post will read only nodal components. Components that consist of elements will be ignored.
CFD-Post can read a limited number of ANSYS results files that contain shell elements only. It depends
on the problem setup details as to whether a file can be successfully read or not. CFD-Post cannot read
any ANSYS results files that contain no 3D or shell elements.
While the ANSYS MFX solver requires nodal and element solution data to be present in the results file for
all time steps on the FSI interface, it does not require this data in other places in the geometry. Excluding
that data means that the results file size can be reduced when you use ANSYS. When you use CFD-Post,
on the other hand, all data must be available at all nodes/elements for all time steps.
When reading RST files, CFD-Post ignores mid-side nodes and duplicate nodes. The latter situation occurs
when a case has multiple bodies with matching mesh on the interfaces. The simulation picks up duplicate
nodes and plots accordingly, giving a discontinuous plot. However CFD-Post picks up only one of the
nodes, which causes one domain to appear to spill into the next.
In ANSYS, simulation characteristics such as maximum values are derived from actual local node values.
In CFD-Post values need to be presented on global nodes, therefore CFD-Post takes a simple average from
118

all shared elements' local values. When compared the two calculations will be similar, but not exactly the
same.
ANSYS files that contain mid-edge nodes will cause mesh report to be inaccurate (the Connectivity range
may be reported as zero).
When ANSYS electrical data is read in CFD-Post, units are not displayed for quantities such as Electric Potential or for Electric Flux4.
ANSYS Mechanical results file contains shell elements with data on both the top and bottom sides. CFDPost currently does not support separate data on the two sides. Only data from the top side will be read.
If you want to load results from the bottom side, you can set the environment variable CFDPOST_RST_READ_BOTTOM_SHELL_DATA.
When exporting Heat Flux to ANSYS Mechanical, you should always select the fluid side of the interface.
7.15.7. ANSYS Icepak Files

When using ANSYS Icepak with CFD-Post, a custom session file (IcepakCustomVariables.cse)
loads into CFD-Post when you load results files (.cas and .dat) or refresh the Results cell in ANSYS
Workbench. This session file creates variables required to use the ANSYS Icepak files fully within CFDPost.
Icepak exports the solution variables: Pressure, X/Y/Z velocities, and temperatures. In addition, for some
models you can select additional variables in Icepak to export to CFD-Post:
User defined memory 0/1/2
The X/Y/Z direction thermal conductivities at every node in the domain.
Heat Flux Vector
Akin to velocity vectors, you can use this variable to plot heat flux vectors at any location in the domain.
Thermal Cross
The cross product of the Heat Flux and the gradient of Temperature. You can use this to locate regions
of large heat flux vectors that are not aligned with high temperature gradients, thus implying possible
regions for shorting heat flow.
Thermal Chokepoint
The dot product of Heat Flux and the gradient of Temperature. You can use this to locate regions of
high heat flux coupled with high thermal resistances.
Electric Flux is the electric current density.

119
CFD-Post File Menu
7.15.8. CGNS Files

CFD-Post has limited support for reading meshes and solutions from CGNS (CFD General Notation System)
version 2.4 files and version 3.0 files. Extensions for such files are typically .cgns and .cgs. The following
shows the supported and unsupported features of CGNS.
Note
By default, variable names are adjusted to conform to the CFX naming style, which may not
always be desirable. To preserve the original variable names in the file, open Edit > Options
> CFD-Post > Files and clear Translate variable names to CFX-Solver style names.
Only one CGNS file can be post-processed at a time; multiple simultaneous CGNS files are not
supported.
Supported
Not supported
3D problems
1D and 2D problems
Elements of the following types:
Elements of the following types:
TRI_3, QUAD_4, TETRA_4, PENTA_6,

PYRA_5, HEXA_8 and MIXED
TRI_6, QUAD_8, QUAD_9, TETRA_10, PENTA_15,

PENTA_18, PYRA_14, HEXA_20, HEXA_27
Base #1
Base selection
Steady State solutions (solution #1)
Transient solution
Regions
Zone connections
Periodic crossings
7.15.9. FLUENT Files

CFD-Post can load FLUENT version 6 and version 12.0 or later (preferred) result files (.cas, .cas.gz,
.dat, .dat.gz, .cdat, .cdat.gz) for post-processing. For results generated using FLUENT prior to
version 12.0, load the results into FLUENT 12.0 or later, run at least one iteration, save the results, and
then load these in CFD-Post.
CFD-Post can load FLUENT particle track files.
CFD-Post does not calculate derived variables, therefore only variables available in the file can be used.
However, you can export any variable to the dat or cdat files from FLUENT 12.0 or later. For more
information about these file types, see the ANSYS FLUENT documentation.
FLUENT files store variable values at the cell centers of the mesh. CFD-Post interpolates these values to
nodes using an interpolation method similar to the interpolation of CFX-4 files. For details, see Interpolation of Results (p. 114). The valid file extensions are listed in the File type setting of the Load Results
File dialog box.
120

In CFD-Post, a wall boundary takes precedence over other boundaries, so all wall nodes will have wall
values irrespective of whether they are on any other boundary.
Note
You must select only one of the FLUENT files in the Load dialog box (normally the final
timestep's dat or cdat file); other related files are loaded automatically.
7.15.10. Limitations with FLUENT Files

FLUENT files are supported with the following limitations:
Limitations in Previous Versions
Grid interfaces from FLUENT versions 6.3 and older are not supported by CFD-Post. If your .cas file has
old grid interfaces, read the .cas and .dat file into the FLUENT Release 12.0 (or later), run at least one
iteration, and save the file to change to the new grid interfaces. This will convert grid interfaces to use
the virtual polygon method and make the file readable in CFD-Post. Attempting to read old grid interfaces
may cause CFD-Post to exit.
To post-process forces or fluxes using the DBNS solver of FLUENT for cases from versions prior to Release
12.0, you must read the case into FLUENT Release 12.0 (or later), iterate at least once, and then write out
the .cas and .dat files.
Planes and iso-surfaces created using FLUENT .msh and .cas files prior to Release 14.5 may appear as
holes for hex-core and cut-cell mesh cases.
Limitations Involving Elements and Nodes
In ANSYS FLUENT, any element can have any number of faces. The maximum number of nodes in a
polyhedron element is 256 and in a polygon face is 128 (however the contour-creation algorithm has a
limit of 64 nodes per face).
Plots created in CFD-Post are based on node values and not cell/face values. This results in undesired
smoothing of result on the edges where nodes are shared by two objects.
CFD-Post does not smooth out values across non-conformal interface boundaries; that is, there must be
a 1-1 mapping of nodes across the interface. As a result, contour and color plots as well as iso-surfaces
are discontinuous across these interfaces.
File-based Limitations
Unsteady statistic variables (such as Mean X Velocity and RMS Static Pressure) are not to be
read from the standard DAT file. If you need variables such as these, export them explicitly in a CDAT file
or append them to the DAT file.
For Fluent files, the gradients computed by CFD-Post are discontinuous across domains.
CFD-Post can read zone-motion variables (origin, axis, omega, grid-velocity) on profile boundaries from
FLUENT files only if the variables are constants. For cases where any of these values are specified as nonconstants, CFD-Post ignores the variable. In such conditions, CFD-Post cannot transform the velocity from
absolute to the relative frame or the reverse. Other dependent variables (such as Mach Number, Vorticity,
121
CFD-Post File Menu

and so on) will not be available unless explicitly exported from FLUENT using either a .cdat file or data
file options. There will be a warning message issued when these files are read.
For FLUENT files using the energy model, Heat Flux is available for all boundaries and Wall Heat Flux is
available only for walls. The values of these two variables will be same on walls.
You need to be careful when choosing geometry names in FLUENT when the file will be read in CFD-Post.
The geometry names must not contain special characters such as '-', '|', ':' and so on. All such characters
will be replaced by a space (which is allowed in names in CFD-Post).
CFD-Post can read files written from FLUENT, but the reading of mesh files written from TGrid or GAMBIT
is not supported and may cause CFD-Post to terminate abnormally.
CFD-Post reads User-Defined Materials (UDM) and User-Defined Scalars (UDS) as follows:
When .cas/.dat files are read into CFD-Post, UDM/UDS variables will appear with names as "User
Defined Memory 0"/"Scalar 0".
When .cas/.dat files are read into CFD-Post, CFD-Post will show all UDM/UDS variables that were
exported to the CDAT file.
FLUENT .cas, .dat, and .cdat files do not contain the units for user-defined scalars, user-defined
memory, or custom field functions, so these will be dimensionless in CFD-Post.
General Limitations
When reading a Fluent results file, CFD-Post may report an incorrect sign for mass flow on a conformal
internal boundary (known as an "interior" type in FLUENT) that is located at the boundary between two
domains. To determine the direction of mass flow, use a CEL expression based on the normalized dot
product of the local velocity and the face normal:
Corrected Mass Flow
= sum(abs(Mass Flow)*massFlowCorrectionNorm)@<region> massFlowCorrection
= Normal X*u + Normal Y*v + Normal Z*w massFlowCorrectionNorm
= -massFlowCorrection/abs(massFlowCorrection)
For axisymmetric cases, the point values in CFD-Post may differ from values reported in FLUENT due to
the extrusion of the 2D domain in the theta direction.
Computing the sum of any variable on any surface returns a value in CFD-Post that is the FLUENT value
divided by 2*pi.
When selecting to output additional variables in a DAT file in FLUENT (via the Data File Quantities panel),
a variable is written to the user-specified section of a DAT file. CFD-Post will check to see if the same
variable is available in the basic section of the DAT file. If so, the variable from the basic section will not
be read in CFD-Post, only the variables from the user-specified section of the DAT file will be read.
Value ranges reported by the function calculator may differ from the values shown by a contour. The
function calculator results are based on cell/face values while contours show values based on node values.
CFD-Post does not account for surface tension forces.
Certain real gas properties are not available in CFD-Post for use: gas constant, molecular viscosity, specific
heat, and sound speed.
122

The variable Boundary Heat Flux Sensible is available only for boundary types velocity-inlet, mass-flowinlet, pressure-inlet, pressure-outlet, pressure-far-field, and outflow.
For transient FLUENT cases, there is no support for adding or removing time steps in the timestep selector.
There is no support for loading of a subset of domains. All domains are always loaded.
A DBNS solver with laminar flow will have zero shear stress on all walls. Force calculations will not include
viscous component in such cases.
CFD-Post will not display any shear stress values on coupled non-conformal interfaces as shear stresses
are undefined on such interfaces.
CFD-Post cannot read FLUENT cases that have CAS and DAT files output in different directories.
You cannot use X, Y, or Z variables in expressions or plots in moving mesh transient cases. For example,
instead of an Isosurface of X, use a YZ Plane.
Surface streamlines cannot be created on wall boundaries as wall velocities are zero. The recommendation
is to create the streamline based on the Wall Shear vector. Ensure that Wall Shear is in the file; if it is not,
return to FLUENT and export that variable.
Alternatively, you can use the near wall velocity for streamlines (and other plots) by setting CFDPOST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS before running CFD-Post.
In the regions where the mesh is coarse and vector variable gradients are steep, streamlines in CFDPost may hit walls earlier than similar streamlines in FLUENT. This is due to a difference in computation
methods, and can be avoided by refining the mesh.
Molar Weight will always have units of kg/mol in CFD-Post, but units of kg/kmol in FLUENT. This will be
true for all quantities involving 'mol' or 'kmol' in units.
To learn how to control the units displayed by CFD-Post, see Setting the Display Units (p. 136).
When creating Streamlines for Dual Cell heat exchanged Fluent cases, exclude Auxiliary Fluid domains
from the Domains list as these domains can cause the streamlines to terminate too early.
Differences Between CFD-Post and FLUENT
A line in CFD-Post of type Sample gives results that match with FLUENT's 'line' if the environment variable
CFDPOST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS is set to 1. However, a line in CFD-Post of type Cut gives
results that do not match with FLUENT's 'rake' as the former in infinite and the latter is clipped.
Plots of velocity vectors on wall boundaries do not match between CFD-Post and FLUENT. FLUENT always
uses adjacent cell velocity for plotting vectors whereas CFD-Post uses node velocity (interpolated from
cell/face values).
The results of calculations by CFD-Post for FLUENT 2D cases are for a reference-depth from the FLUENT
case file. For axisymmetric cases, the reference-depth is 2*pi; that is, the results calculations are for the
complete cylindrical region, and not what is shown in the viewer (which is a sector from the complete
cylinder). This matches the behavior of FLUENT.
Results will be consistent for all quantitative calculations on all locations. For example, a slice plane
will be assumed to be cutting the full cylinder.
123
CFD-Post File Menu

CFD-Post reads Total Pressure data from the FLUENT results file if this quantity exists. If the data is not
supplied in the file, this quantity is not calculated by CFD-Post.
Averaging of vector quantities to nodes differs between CFD-Post and FLUENT. In FLUENT, vector magnitudes are averaged to nodes explicitly; in CFD-Post, only vector components are averaged to nodes,
while the magnitude is calculated from the components at the nodes. The two magnitudes will differ in
cases with sharp vector gradients or high face angles (usually due to a coarse mesh).
For example, if a node has four faces attached that have shear stresses in directions radially away
from the node, in CFD-Post the shear stress values at the node will be much smaller in magnitude
compared with the face stresses because the stresses in opposite directions cancel out. In FLUENT,
the direction is ignored and only magnitude is taken into account while calculating the stress magnitude at the node.
Plots cannot display cell or face data directly, only nodal averages. However, cell and face data will
be used in quantitative reports on volumes, boundaries, planes, and isosurfaces (averages, mass flows,
integrals). Iso-clips, lines, polyline, points will use only nodal averages for quantitative calculations.
Velocity magnitude values for FLUENT in CFD-Post are not in good agreement with FLUENT results for
cases with multiple-frame-of-reference or sliding-mesh models.
For cases solved with relative velocity:
The "Velocity in Stn Frame" plotted in CFD-Post is equivalent to "Velocity Magnitude" in FLUENT.
There is no FLUENT equivalent for the CFD-Post variable "Velocity" as this represents a relative velocity
in the local reference frame of the domain (which is not available for post-processing in FLUENT).
There is no CFD-Post equivalent for FLUENT's "Relative Velocity". In FLUENT, "Relative Velocity" is always
relative to a global frame of reference (which you can select in FLUENT Reference Values panel; if no
reference frame is selected, an Absolute Velocity is used, not a Reference Velocity).
When loading FLUENT results, CFD-Post does not calculate global ranges by default as this would be
too time-consuming (there is a warning to this effect when you load a FLUENT case). However, when
the variable is used for the first time (for example, when it is plotted), and as timesteps are loaded, the
global range should be continually updated.
For cases with 1:1 interfaces, due to a difference in the handling on nodes at these interfaces, the number
of nodes reported by CFD-Post will be different than the number reported by FLUENT. However, the
number of cells should match.
In the cavitation model in FLUENT, the minimum value for Pressure is limited by the cavitation pressure;
(this is not done in CFD-Post).
For some cases (for example, shell conduction model), the number of cells/elements reported by FLUENT
is more than that of CFD-Post. This difference is due to the additional cells FLUENT creates internally for
solving some physics; these are never written into the case file. FLUENT reports include these cells as well.
CFD-Post and FLUENT display contours differently in the vicinity of a hanging node. FLUENT takes values
from cells only on one side, causing a discontinuity of contours. In CFD-Post, the hanging node is made
to be a conformal node and takes values from cells on both sides, making a smoother contour.
A periodic surface in FLUENT is actually a pair of surfaces. In CFD-Post this pair appears as a Periodic object
and a corresponding Periodic Shadow. When looking at quantitative results in CFD-Post, you need to look
124

at a surface group that contains the periodic/periodic-shadow to see output that is in agreement with
FLUENT's results.
Turbo Limitations
CFD-Post can initialize turbo space only for domains that are enclosed with inlet, outlet, hub, and shroud
regions. For more complex geometries you must set up the problem such that the region of interest is
isolated into a separate domain that can be initialized in CFD-Post.
When choosing a report template for a FLUENT turbo report, choose Release 12 templates (which do not
have the word Rotor in the template name).
Report template that have Rotor in the template name are from Release 11 and require variables
that are not available from FLUENT turbo files.
For rotating machinery applications, identification of components and ordering, regions, rotation axis,
number of passages, and interfaces cannot be done automatically; you must supply this information on
the Turbo initialization panel. When generating turbo reports, select variables, instance transforms, and
expressions will require manual updates; for details see Procedures for Using Turbo Reports when Turbomachinery Data is Missing (p. 37).
Polyflow and FIDAP Limitations
Some Polyflow and FIDAP cases may have interior surfaces that are read into CFD-Post as boundaries.
Unlike other boundaries, these "interior boundaries" cannot be used to create Polyline objects by intersecting them with a slice plane.
CFX Results files generated by Polyflow do not contain all the necessary information required for some
automatic calculations in CFD-Post, including force and torque functions. You can manually calculate
force/torque using expressions as shown in the examples below:
Force in X-direction: areaInt_x(PRESSURE)@<surface>
Torque around Z axis: areaInt_y(PRESSURE*X)@<surface> - areaInt_x(PRESSURE*Y)@<surface>
Limitations in the Export and Display of FLUENT Particle Tracks
It is not possible to group or color transient particles by stream.
The size of exported files and the intermediate history file is limited to 2 GB on architectures that have
sizeof(long)==4 (for example: win64, ntx86, and lnx86) .
When FLUENT particle tracks cross periodic boundaries, there will be a gap between the point on one
side of the periodic boundary and the point on the other side. This is most visible if instancing is enabled,
but appears only in transient cases.
CFD-Post displays particle tracks as segments, where as ANSYS FLUENT displays particle tracks as points.
This is particularly shown by transient cases when viewing tracks for a particular timestep: CFD-Post displays
tracks as segments of the track from the previous timestep to the current timestep, while ANSYS FLUENT
shows points at the current timestep. Because of this, the range of the color variable will include data
that is not included by ANSYS FLUENT when displaying particle tracks.
125
CFD-Post File Menu
7.15.10.1. Quantitative Differences Between FLUENT and CFD-Post

On iso-clips, quantitative evaluations (for example, area averages) differ between FLUENT and CFD-Post
as the former uses face/cell variable values and the latter uses nodal values.
In a case with two domains, the nodes on the boundary in FLUENT will get their values from the domain
that has the higher priority; CFD-Post uses the average of the boundary values from both domains.
If Volume Fraction is not available in the list of variables for multiphase FLUENT cases, the phase forces
reported by CFD-Post will be same as the total force.
Wall Heat Flux values reported by CFD-Post for moving and deforming meshes cases will not match those
for FLUENT. This is because FLUENT adds pressure work to get the energy balance.
For some cases, the fluxes (Mass Flow()@<surface> or AreaInt(Boundary Heat Flux)@<surface>) from CFDPost are different from the values reported by Flux Reports panel from FLUENT. This is due to some additional physics model-based calculations done by FLUENT that are not available in CFD-Post. However,
you can use the FLUENT Surface Integral or Volume Integral panel results for comparison with CFDPost.
The Function Calculator may give variable averages on slice planes, isosurfaces, and interiors that are different from those given by FLUENT. These differences may occur when the surface is cutting through a
mesh face that joins two mesh elements. In this situation, CFD-Post may use the element-center data from
a different element than FLUENT uses. Note that as both elements are equally valid choices, both calculations are correct.
Due to differences between FLUENT and CFD-Post in the handling of vector quantities, velocity values
can be different on 'interior' zones (conformal domain interfaces).
In CFD-Post, on boundaries that have zero velocity, Total Temperature and Total Pressure will have same
values as Temperature and Pressure, respectively (as expected). In FLUENT, Total Temperature is different
from Temperature for boundaries that have zero velocity; similar differences apply between Total Pressure
and Pressure. This is a limitation in FLUENT.
If you export 'Total Pressure' from FLUENT, the CFD-Post results will be closer to what FLUENT shows.
On boundaries, CFD-Post produces more accurate quantitative results involving geometric variables (such
as X, Y, Z) than FLUENT reports. This is because FLUENT uses geometric variable data from adjacent cell
centers instead of the boundary face centers. However, you can get CFD-Post results to match FLUENT
results exactly by setting the environment variable CFDPOST_MATCH_FLUENT_RESULTS to 1 before
running CFD-Post.
There are very small differences between FLUENT and CFD-Post in the way that area is calculated for
axisymmetric cases; this area is used in quantitative functions. FLUENT calculates the area for any
, where r is centroid-y of the facet. CFD-Post extrudes the 2D geometry to create
axisymmetric case as
a 3D wedge (of wedge angle 7.5) then calculates the area by repeating the wedge to create a 360 cylinder.
This is similar to approximating the perimeter of a circle by measuring the perimeter of an inscribed uniform
polygon.
CFD-Post results match with FLUENT "Vertex" values instead of "Facet" values for Species Reaction and
VOF cases. To have results from CFD-Post match results from FLUENT, set the environment variable CFDPOST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS to 1.
Global variable ranges shown in plots are nodal (averaged) ranges.
126

The Global variable range for a Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient is incorrectly reported as zero; use the Local
variable range instead.
In cavitation cases, Pressure values are not clipped to the cavitation pressure.
127
128
Chapter 8: CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)

Undo and Redo commands are available in the Edit menu. Additionally, there are a variety of options
that can be set to customize the software.
Undo and Redo (p. 129)
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog (p. 130)
8.1. Undo and Redo

The undo and redo capability is limited by the amount of available memory.
In stand-alone mode, the undo stack is cleared whenever a New, Open, or Close action occurs. Similarly,
when using CFX-Pre/CFD-Post from within ANSYS Workbench, the undo stack is cleared in CFX-Pre/CFDPost after the application receives commands from ANSYS Workbench.
Issue the Undo command by doing any of the following:
Select Edit > Undo.
Click Undo
on the toolbar.
Press Ctrl + Z
Note
You can repeatedly issue the Undo command.
Some viewer manipulations cannot be reverted using the Undo command.
Some commands that you issue have multiple components. For example, when you create
some objects the software creates the object and sets the visibility of the object on (in two
separate operations). Thus, when you perform an undo operation in such a situation, you are
setting the visibility of the object off; you must choose undo a second time to uncreate the
object.
Undo cannot be used when recording session files.
The redo feature is used to do an action that you have just undone using the Undo command. Issue
the Redo command by doing any of the following:
Select Edit > Redo.
129
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)

Click Redo
on the toolbar.
Press Ctrl + Y
8.2. Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog

The Options dialog box enables you to set various general preferences. Settings are retained per user.
1.
Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.
2.
Set options as required. For descriptions of the available options, see:

CFD-Post Options (p. 130)
Common Options (p. 135)
If desired, you can use the CFX Defaults or the Workbench Defaults buttons at the bottom of
the dialog box to quickly set CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver Manager, and CFD-Post to have the standard
appearance and operation of CFX or Workbench respectively. The only CFD-Post settings that are
affected by these buttons are:
CFD-Post > Viewer > Background > Color Type
CFD-Post > Viewer > Background > Color
CFD-Post > Viewer > Text Color
CFD-Post > Viewer > Edge Color
Common > Viewer Setup > Mouse Mapping
3.
Click OK.
Your changes are generally implemented immediately. However, when changing the following
user preferences, it will be necessary to restart CFD-Post for the setting to take effect:
CFD-Post > Enable Beta Features
CFD-Post > Viewer > Object Highlighting
CFD-Post > Viewer > Hide ANSYS Logo
CFD-Post > Viewer > Stereo
Common > Temporary Directory
Common > Viewer Setup > Double Buffering
8.2.1. CFD-Post Options

When the Options dialog box appears, CFD-Post options can be configured under CFD-Post.
130
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog
8.2.1.1. Interpolation Tolerance

The Interpolation Tolerance sets the amount of the area outside the domain that will be treated as a
part of the domain when interpolating variables. For example, a point that is within this tolerance distance
will be given a value that is interpolated from the nearest domain boundary face.
By default the tolerance "layer" is 0.2% of the domain. You can set the value to 0 to turn the Interpolation
Tolerance off.
Note that this value should be set to a value less than half the size of the smallest openings or features
of the domain geometry. This prevents a point from being detected in two overlapping Interpolation
Tolerance regions.
If the Interpolation Tolerance setting is too high, there could be undefined nodes and malformed
elements in the virtual layer, especially around sharply-contoured regions of the domain surface.
Changes to the interpolation tolerance can affect how data is interpolated onto objects such as Sample
Planes, Polylines, User surfaces, Surfaces of Rotation, and so on. Each of these objects, depending on
how close the defined points are to the domain, may have slightly changed behavior, depending on
how close to the domain the points are defined.
8.2.1.2. Angular Shift for Transient Rotating Domains

You can set this option to:
Always rotate
CFD-Post always uses the last position of the rotated domains.
Never rotate
CFD-Post always uses the initial position of the rotated domains.
Automatic
CFD-Post works through the physics of the simulation and uses what it determines the last position of
the rotated domains to be. CFD-Post will apply rotation in a domain only if the domain touches a transient rotor-stator interface.
Because the rotating domains may be in a rotated position when they are loaded into CFD-Post for
post-processing, force calculations made on the rotating domains can have different results depending
on the setting of the option above.
This option takes effect when a new case is loaded.
8.2.1.3. Enable Beta Features

Some beta features are hidden in the user interface. You can select this option to unhide those beta
features. When selected, such Beta features will be identified by "(Beta)" in the user interface.
8.2.1.4. Files
Changes made in this panel will take effect the next time you load a file.
Warn prior to loading the same results file more than once controls whether you are warned when
you attempt to load a file that is already loaded. The warning appears when both the file name and the
file contents are the same as a currently loaded file.
131

Select Show domain selector before load to enable you to choose which domains to load when more
than one domain exists in the results file. If this option is turned off, then all domains will be loaded next
time you load a results file.
When CFX Transient: Load missing variables from nearest FULL time step is cleared, it makes all variables
that are not written to the partial results file undefined for the current timestep. When selected, CFD-Post
loads the missing variables from the nearest full results file. This option is used when partial transient
results files do not contain all of the variables calculated by the CFX-Solver. By default, these variables
will be undefined (but still visible in the variables list) for the current timestep.
Important
Take care when using this option because values that are plotted may not apply to the
current timestep.
Select CFX Turbo: Dont prompt to auto-load reports to prevent CFD-Post from automatically asking
you if you want to load a report upon loading results files.
Select CFX: Don't load mesh regions if you do not want to have region definitions loaded when you
load a file that contains them.
Select Files other than CFX: Convert region names to title case to have region names follow the CFX
convention of using title case. This option is mainly useful for backwards compatibility with scripts created
prior to Release 14.5.
Clear Files other than CFX: Pre-calculate global variable ranges to turn off the calculation of all variable
ranges.
Files other than CFX: Translate variable names to CFX-Solver style names converts variable names
from other results files into CFX variable names. (For example, the variable P in a CFX-TASCflow file will
be converted to Pressure.)
Important
By default, CFD-Post will not modify the variable names in the .rso file. If you want to use
all of the embedded CFD-Post macros and calculation options, you will need to convert
variable names to CFX types.
In order to use the Turbo Charts feature with FLUENT files, you must have Translate variable
names to CFX-Solver style names enabled.
The complete list of translated variables is given in Variable Translation (p. 116).
FLUENT:Load interior face zones controls whether or not interior face zones are displayed.
FLUENT cases contain cell zones and face zones. (Cell zones are similar to element sets in CFD-Post,
and face zones are similar to face sets.) All cell zones are read into CFD-Post and are listed as domains.
Of the face zones, by default only those that bound a cell-zone/domain are shown in CFD-Post1.
1
CFD-Post will never list:
Default interior zones.
132

However, FLUENT meshes can also contain 'interior' face zones that are useful for postprocessing.
Interior face zones are inside a domain and do not form a boundary of the domain. To see interior
face zones, enable Load interior face zones.
Note
The names of 'interior' zones in CFD-Post are kept same as that in FLUENT, except that
characters that are not allowed in CFD-Post (such as '-', ':' and so on) are replaced by space
characters.
8.2.1.5. CFD-Post Solution Units

CFD-Post has a Solution Units option that is available from the Options tab.
The solution units assumed, which are read when the file was loaded, are displayed on the right. When
files that do not store solution units (such as CFX-4 dump files, CFX-TASC files, FLUENT files, or ANSYS
results files) are loaded, you will be prompted to specify the solution units. You can enable the Don't
prompt for Solution Units before loading results toggle to suppress this prompt, in which case the
default units of kilograms, meters, seconds, Kelvin, and radians will be used.
The units shown on this dialog box are not necessarily those used by CFD-Post, but are the solution
units used in the currently loaded file. The units used by CFD-Post are set elsewhere; for details, see
Setting the Display Units (p. 136). CFD-Post needs to know the solution units used in the file so that it
can convert them to the units specified. When CFX files are loaded into CFD-Post, the solution units
that were used by the CFX-Solver are automatically read from the file. For this reason, Dont prompt
for Solution Units before loading results is ignored when loading CFX files and selected by default
for other file types.
When post-processing a results file in CFD-Post, the units used are not necessarily those used in the
results file. CFD-Post will convert to your preferred units.
Note
In CFD-Post, the temperature solution units must be an absolute scale (for example, Kelvin
[K] or Rankine [R]); you cannot use Celsius and Fahrenheit. Temperature quantities elsewhere
in ANSYS CFX can be set in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
8.2.1.6. Turbo
These settings are related to turbomachinery simulations loaded into CFD-Post, and are mostly self-explanatory.
8.2.1.7. Viewer
To configure the viewer, right-click on the viewer and select Viewer Options.
Walls created during creation of non-conformal interfaces.
Sliding interface zones.
Any other zones that cannot be displayed from FLUENT's Mesh Display panel.
133
8.2.1.7.1. Object Highlighting

Controls how an object that is generated after a change to the setting of this option is highlighted in
the viewer. Such highlighting occurs when in picking mode, when selecting a region in a list, or when
selecting items in the tree view.
Under Type, select one of the following:
Surface Mesh: Displays the surface mesh for selected regions using lines.
Wireframe: Traces objects that contain surfaces with green lines.
Bounding Box: Highlights the selected objects with a green box.
Note
When you load a state file, the highlighting is dictated by the setting that is stored in the
case, rather than by the current preferences setting.
8.2.1.7.2. Background
Set Mode to Color or Image.
8.2.1.7.2.1. Color
Use Color Type to set either a solid color or a gradient of colors; use Color to set the color (and Color
2 for gradients).
8.2.1.7.2.2. Image
Select one of a list of predefined images or a custom image.
If selecting a custom image, choose an image file and a type of mapping. Image types that are supported
include *.bmp (24-bit BMP only), *.jpg, *.png, and *.ppm. Mapping options are Flat and
Spherical. Flat maps are stationary while spherical maps surround the virtual environment and rotate
with the objects in the viewer.
Custom images have some restrictions: all background images and textures sent to the viewer must be
square and must have dimensions that are powers of 2 (for example, 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024).
If the dimensions of your background image is not a power of 2, the viewer sizes the image to be a
power of 2 by doing bicubic resampling.
To make the background image square, transparent pixels are added to the smaller dimension to make
it the same as the larger dimension. The transparent pixels enable you to see the regular viewer background, which gives you control over what fill color your background has.
8.2.1.7.3. Other Viewer Options

8.2.1.7.3.1. Text/Edge Color
Select a color by clicking in the box, or clicking the Ellipsis
134
icon.
8.2.1.7.3.2. Axis/Ruler Visibility

Select or clear Axis Visibility or Ruler Visibility to show or hide the axis indicator or ruler in the
viewer.
8.2.1.7.3.3. Hide ANSYS Logo

Controls whether or not the ANSYS logo appears in the 3D Viewer.
8.2.1.7.4. Stereo
See Stereo Viewer (p. 83).
8.2.1.8. Advanced
Under Cmd Timeout, specify the minimum time between registered mouse clicks, in milliseconds.
8.2.1.9. ANSYS Import: Read 3D elements when CDB file has both 2D and 3D types
Enable this setting to ensure that 3D elements are read when a CDB file being imported has both 2D
and 3D elements.
8.2.2. Common Options

Auto Save
Select the time between automatic saves.
To turn off automatic saves, set Auto Save to Never.
Note
This option affects more than one CFX product.
Temporary directory
To set a temporary directory, click Browse
will save state files.
to find a convenient directory where the autosave feature
8.2.2.1. Appearance
The appearance of the user interface can be controlled from the Appearance options. The default user
interface style will be set to that of your machine. For example, on Windows, the user interface has a
Windows look to it. If, for example, a Motif appearance to the user interface is preferred, select to use
this instead of the Windows style.
1.
Under GUI Style, select the user interface style to use.
2.
For Font and Formatted Font, specify the fonts to use in the application.
Note
It is important not to set the font size too high (over 24 pt. is not recommended) or the
dialog boxes may become difficult to read. Setting the font size too small may cause
135

some portions of the text to not be visible on monitors set at low resolutions. It is also
important not to set the font to a family such as Webdings, Wingdings, Symbols, or
similar type faces, or the dialog boxes become illegible.
Formatted Font has no function in CFD-Post.
8.2.2.2. Viewer Setup

1.
Select Double Buffering to use two color buffers for improved visualization.
For details, see Double Buffering (p. 136).
2.
Select or clear Unlimited Zoom.

For details, see Unlimited Zoom (p. 136).
8.2.2.2.1. Double Buffering

Double Buffering is a feature supported by most OpenGL implementations. It provides two complete
color buffers that swap between each other to animate graphics smoothly. If your implementation of
OpenGL does not support double buffering, you can clear this check box.
8.2.2.2.2. Unlimited Zoom

By default, zoom is restricted to prevent graphics problems related to depth sorting. Selecting Unlimited
Zoom allows an unrestricted zoom.
8.2.2.3. Mouse Mapping

The mouse-mapping options allow you to assign viewer actions to mouse clicks and keyboard/mouse
combinations. These options are available when running in stand-alone mode. To adjust or view the
mouse mapping options, select Edit > Options, then Viewer Setup > Mouse Mapping. For details,
see Mouse Button Mapping.
8.2.2.4. Setting the Display Units

The settings on the Edit > Options > Common > Units dialog box control the preferred units of the
CFX application. Preferred units are the units of the data that CFD-Post uses when information is displayed
to you and are the default units when you enter information (as contrasted with units of the data that
are stored in results files). For example, if your preferred units are SI and you load a results file that
contains data in British Technical units, the values you see in CFD-Post will be in SI.
To set your preferred units:
1.
Under System, select the unit system to use. Unit systems are sets of quantity types for mass, length,
time, and so on.
The options under System include SI, CGS, English Engineering, British Technical,
US Customary, US Engineering, or Custom. Only Custom enables you to redefine a
quantity type (for example, to use inches for the dimensions in a file that otherwise used SI units).
136

The most common quantity types appear in the main Options dialog box; to see all quantity types,
click More Units.
2.
Select or clear Always convert units to Preferred Units.

If Always convert units to Preferred Units is selected, the units of entered quantities are immediately converted to those set in this dialog box.
For example, if you have set Velocity to [m s^-1] in this dialog box to make that the preferred
velocity unit, and elsewhere you enter 20 [mile hr^-1] for a velocity quantity, the entered
value is immediately converted and displayed as 8.94078 [m s^-1].
The two sets of units are:

The units presented on this dialog box, which control the default units presented in the user interface,
as well as the units used for mesh transformation.
The solution units; for details, see CFD-Post Solution Units (p. 133).
137
138
Chapter 9: CFD-Post Session Menu

Session files contain a record of the commands issued during a CFD-Post session. The actions that cause
commands to be written to a session file include:
Viewer manipulation performed using the commands available by right-clicking in the viewer window.
All actions available from the File and Edit menus.
Creation of expressions.
Creation of new objects and changes to an object committed by clicking OK or Apply on any of the
panels available from the Tools and Insert menus/toolbars.
Commands issued in the Tools > Command Editor dialog box.
9.1. New Session Command
9.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands
9.3. Play Session Command
9.1. New Session Command

When a session file is not currently being recorded, you can select Session > New Session. This opens
the Set Session File dialog box where you can enter a file name for your session file. Once you have
saved the file, it becomes the current session file. Commands are not written to the file until you select
Session > Start Recording.
1.
Browse to the directory in which you want to create the session file, and then enter a name for the file
ending with a .cse (CFD-Post) extension.
2.
Click Save to create the file.

This will not start recording to the session file. To start recording, you must select Session > Start
Recording.
If you create more than one session file during a CFD-Post session, the most recently created file is the
current session file by default. You can set a different file to be the current session file by selecting an
existing file from the New Session > Set Session File window and then clicking Save. Because the file
exists, a warning dialog box appears:
If you select Overwrite, the existing session file is deleted and a new file is created in its place.
If you select Append, commands will be added to the end of the existing session file when recording
begins.
139
CFD-Post Session Menu
9.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands

The Start Recording action writes into the current session file the CCL commands you issue. A session
file must first be set before you can start recording (see New Session Command (p. 139)). Stop Recording
terminates writing of CCL commands to the current session file. You can start and stop recording to a
session file as many times as necessary.
Important
A session file cannot be played if it contains an Undo command. To run a session file that
contains an Undo command, first edit the session file to remove the command.
9.3. Play Session Command

Selecting Session > Play Session opens the Play Session File dialog box in which you can select the
session file to play. The commands listed in the selected session file are then executed.
Important
Existing objects with the same name as objects defined in the session file are replaced by
those in the session file (for example, if Plane 1 exists in this CFD-Post session file, playing
the session file will overwrite any existing object with the name Plane 1).
To play a session file:
1.
From the menu bar, select Session > Play Session.
2.
In the Play Session File dialog box, browse to the directory containing the session file and select the
file you want to play.
3.
Click Open to play the session file. The commands listed in the selected session file are executed. Existing
objects with the same name as objects defined in the session file are replaced by those in the session
file.
Note
You can play session files in stand-alone CFD-Post, but not in CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench.
140
Chapter 10: CFD-Post Insert Menu

The Insert menu in CFD-Post is used to create new objects (such as locators, tables, charts, and so on),
variables, and expressions.
A locator is a place or object that another object uses to plot or calculate values. For example, if you
were to select a plane from which to start a streamline, the plane would be a locator.
Interpolation in CFD-Post
For both plots and quantitative evaluation, iso clip and user surface locators interpolate values
using general (tri-liner) interpolation from mesh nodes to surface nodes. Planes and isosurfaces
use more accurate "edge interpolation" for plots and, in FLUENT cases, element-to-face interpolation for quantitative evaluation (such as area averages). Similarly, boundaries directly
map to mesh nodes or faces. Consequently, quantitative operations on a user surface or on
an iso clip that is based on a mesh density location (slice plane, isosurface, or boundary), are
not going to evaluate to precisely the same number as the underlying mesh density location.
Locator Object Limitation

For Transient Blade Row cases, transient statistics for boundary-only variables (such as Force,
Mass Flow, Heat Flux) are not available on the following postprocessing locators (points,
lines, cut-planes, isosurfaces, and iso clips).
10.1. Location Submenu
10.2. Vector Command
10.3. Contour Command
10.4. Streamline Command
10.5. Particle Track Command
10.6. Volume Rendering Command
10.7.Text Command
10.8. Coordinate Frame Command
10.9. Legend Command
10.10. Instance Transform Command
10.11. Clip Plane Command
10.12. Color Map Command
10.13. Variable Command
10.14. Expression Command
10.15.Table Command
10.16. Chart Command
10.17. Comment Command
10.18. Figure Command
141
CFD-Post Insert Menu
10.1. Location Submenu

When you select any of the objects from the Insert > Location submenu, an Insert Object dialog
box appears in which you can either accept the default name for the new object or enter a new one.
CFD-Post will not let you create objects that have duplicate names.
Click OK on the dialog box to open the relevant details view in the Outline workspace. A new object
will be created in the database when you click Apply in the details view of the location object.
Tip
You can also access locator objects from the Location icon
on the toolbar.
The following topics will be discussed in this section:

Point Command (p. 142)
Point Cloud Command (p. 145)
Line Command (p. 148)
Plane Command (p. 150)
Volume Command (p. 154)
Isosurface Command (p. 158)
Iso Clip Command (p. 160)
Vortex Core Region (p. 161)
Surface of Revolution Command (p. 168)
Polyline Command (p. 172)
User Surface Command (p. 174)
Surface Group Command (p. 178)
Turbo Surface Command (p. 179)
Turbo Line Command (p. 179)
10.1.1. Point Command

A point is an object in 3D space that has a set of coordinates. You can use a point to locate the position
of a variable minimum or maximum or as an object with which other objects can interact.
The following characteristics of points will be discussed:
Point: Geometry (p. 143)
Point: Color (p. 145)
142
Location Submenu
Point: Symbol (p. 145)
Point: Render (p. 145)
Point: View (p. 145)
Note
There are several ways to insert a point:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point.
From the toolbar, select Location > Point.
Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in
the tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
10.1.1.1. Point: Geometry

10.1.1.1.1. Domains
The Domains setting selects the domains in which the point will exist.
Note
For a case with immersed solids, the setting All Domains refers to all domains except the
immersed solids. To display all of the domains in a case that contains immersed solids, click
the Location Editor
icon and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting All Domains and
All Immersed Solids.
Variables used for plots or calculations on immersed solid domain boundaries are not taken
from the immersed solid domain; instead, they are interpolated from the fluid/porous domain
in which the solid is immersed. The accuracy of such interpolation is dependent on the mesh
densities of both the fluid/porous domain and the surface of the immersed solid domain.
To visualize, or perform computations with, variables that are associated with the immersed
solid domain, use slice planes, user surfaces, or other locators that are offset into the immersed
solid domain, and set the applicable Domains setting to refer to the immersed solid domain.
10.1.1.1.2. Definition
10.1.1.1.2.1. Method
The Method setting has the following options:
Option
Description
XYZ
Enables you to set a coordinate in 3D space for the

Point.
Node Number
Enables you to select a node to which to attach the

Point.
143

Option
Description
Variable
Minimum
Places the Point at the selected variables lowest value.

Select whether the object you want to plot will be
based on hybrid or conservative values. For details,
Places the Point at the selected variables greatest
value.
Variable
Maximum
Select whether the object you want to plot will be

based on hybrid or conservative values. For details,
Note
You can move only points that have been specified with the XYZ option.
When using Variable Minimum or Variable Maximum option on a point in multi-file or
comparison mode, the point is placed at the location of the overall minimum/maximum. If
you want to place the point at the minimum/maximum value for the individual cases, select
the appropriate case in the point's Domain List selector.
10.1.1.1.2.2. Point
Point is available only if the XYZ option is selected. The Point setting specifies the Cartesian coordinates
for the Point object. Once the point is created, you can use the mouse pointer to drag the point around
in the domain. For details, see Picking Mode (p. 79).
10.1.1.1.2.3. Node Number

Node Number is available only if the Node Number Method is selected. The Node Number setting
specifies at which node to place the Point object. When more than one domain is selected, a point is
created for the specified node number in each domain (if it exists). If the node number does not exist
in one domain but exists in another, you should select only the domain in which the node exists or an
error message will be displayed.
10.1.1.1.2.4. Location
Location is available only if the Variable Minimum or the Variable Maximum options are selected.
The Location setting specifies an object for the Point to be located in. When more than one domain
is selected, a point is created for the minimum or maximum value of the variable within each domain.
10.1.1.1.2.5. Variable
Variable is available only if the Variable Minimum or the Variable Maximum options are selected.
The Variable setting selects the variable to be used to find the maximum or minimum point.
10.1.1.1.3. Nearest Node Value

Nearest Node appears when any option except the Node Number option is selected. The Nearest
Node text displays the numerical value of the nearest node to the point's current position.
144
Location Submenu
10.1.1.2. Point: Color

The Color tab controls the color settings. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
10.1.1.3. Point: Symbol

10.1.1.3.1. Symbol
The Symbol setting has the following options:
Symbol
Description
Crosshair
A 3D + sign.
Octahedron
A 3D diamond that has eight faces.
Cube
A box.
Ball
A sphere.
10.1.1.3.2. Symbol Size

The Symbol Size setting specifies the size of the Point symbol. Each Symbol Size unit represents 5%
of the domain span. The domain span, which is dependent on the geometry, is equal to the largest
difference from the X, Y, and Z ranges.
10.1.1.4. Point: Render

The rendering settings can be changed by clicking the Render tab. For details, see Render Details
Tab (p. 21).
10.1.1.5. Point: View

10.1.2. Point Cloud Command

To create multiple points, select Insert > Location > Point Cloud. You can create uniform vector plots
independent of the mesh by using the Point Cloud object. You can also create streamlines that use a
Point Cloud as the locator.
The following characteristics of point clouds will be discussed:
Point Cloud: Geometry (p. 146)
Point Cloud: Color (p. 148)
Point Cloud: Symbol (p. 148)
Point Cloud: Render (p. 148)
145

Point Cloud: View (p. 148)
Note
There are two ways to insert a point cloud:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point Cloud.
From the toolbar, select Location > Point Cloud.
10.1.2.1. Point Cloud: Geometry

10.1.2.1.1. Domains
For details, see Domains (p. 143).
10.1.2.1.2.1. Locations
The Locations setting selects the location or locations in which the point cloud is created.
Tip
to open the Location Selector dialog box, which displays the
Click Location Editor
complete list of available locations.
10.1.2.1.2.2. Sampling
The Sampling setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Equally
Spaced
Generates points with roughly the same distance

between them.
Rectangular
Grid
Generates a rectangular grid of points on the surface.

This option should be used only on flat surfaces.
Vertex
Generates the points on the vertices of the mesh. The

maximum number of points is the total number of
vertices in the mesh.
Face Center
Generates the points at the center of the mesh faces.

The maximum number of points is the total number
of faces in the mesh.
Free Edge
Generates the points on the outer edge at the center

of the edge segments.
Random
Generates the points randomly. If the seed is positive,

the point distribution can be reproduced.
146
Location Submenu
10.1.2.1.2.3. # of Points
# of Points is available only when either the Equally Spaced or Random option is selected. The #
of Points setting specifies the number of equally spaced points you want generated on the surface of
the mesh.
10.1.2.1.2.4. Spacing
Spacing is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Spacing setting
specifies a value that represents a fraction of the maximum domain extent. For example, if your domain
has a maximum extent of 1 [m] and a Spacing of 0.1 was used, a rectangular grid with 0.1 [m]
spacing would be created.
10.1.2.1.2.5. Aspect Ratio

Aspect Ratio is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Aspect Ratio
setting stretches the rectangle in a direction parallel to the grid axes. If a value less than one is entered,
the grid will be stretched in one direction. If a value greater than one is entered, the grid will be stretched
in the direction perpendicular to the previous direction.
10.1.2.1.2.6. Grid Angle

Grid Angle is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Grid Angle setting
specifies the magnitude and direction of grid rotation.
10.1.2.1.2.7. Reduction
Reduction is available only when the Vertex, Face Center, or Free Edge options are selected.
The Reduction setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Max Number
of Points
Enables the option to specify the maximum number

of points allowed to be plotted.
Reduction
Factor
Enables the option to specify a reduction factor from the

full number of points.
10.1.2.1.2.8. Max Points

Max Points is available only if the Max Number of Points option is selected. The Max Points
setting specifies a value for the maximum number of points allowed. If the maximum number of vertices
is greater than that of the specified value, then the points taken will be randomly selected.
10.1.2.1.2.9. Factor
Factor is available only if the Reduction Factor option is selected. The Factor setting specifies a
value by which to decrease the total number of points in the Point Cloud object. The final number of
vectors is total/n, where total is the total number of seeds, and n is the reduction value entered into
the box.
10.1.2.1.2.10. Seed
Seed is available only if the Random option is selected. The Seed setting generates a different set of
random points for each value entered. The distribution cannot be replicated or reproduced for negative
147

seed values. For negative seed values, the random series is based on the system time. Different compilers
may generate different distributions for the same positive seed value.
Note
Similar sampling options are also available directly on Vector and Streamline objects.
10.1.2.2. Point Cloud: Color

The color settings can be changed on the Color tab. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
10.1.2.3. Point Cloud: Symbol

For details, see Point: Symbol (p. 145).
10.1.2.4. Point Cloud: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.2.5. Point Cloud: View

10.1.3. Line Command

A line locator can exist between two points anywhere inside or outside the domain.
The following characteristics of lines will be discussed:
Line: Geometry (p. 149)
Line: Color (p. 150)
Line: Render (p. 150)
Line: View (p. 150)
Note
There are several ways to insert a line:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Line.
From the tool bar, select Location > Line.
the tree view.
148
Location Submenu
10.1.3.1. Line: Geometry

10.1.3.1.1. Domains
10.1.3.1.2.1. Method
The only available option is the Two Points option.
10.1.3.1.2.2. Point 1
The Point 1 text boxes specify the start point of the line.
10.1.3.1.2.3. Point 2
The Point 2 text boxes specify the end point of the line.
10.1.3.1.3. Line Type

10.1.3.1.3.1. Cut/Sample Options
Selecting Cut will extend the line in both directions until it reaches the edge of the domain. Points on
this line exist where the line intersects with a mesh element face.
Tip
In cases with very thin elements near a boundary, a cut line normal to the boundary may
stop too early and not quite reach the boundary. To correct this, you can set the environment
variable CFX_CUT_LINE_TOLERANCE before starting CFD-Post. For example:
CFDPOST_CUT_LINE_TOLERANCE='1.0e-8 [m]'
The smaller the number, the more likely it is that the line will reach the boundary. However,
if it is too small, the line could end up with a number of coincident (repeated) points.
Selecting Sample creates a line existing between the two points entered. It is mesh-independent, and
the number of points along the line corresponds to the value you enter in the Samples box.
10.1.3.1.3.2. Samples
Samples is available only if the Sample option is selected. The Samples setting specifies a value for
the number of evenly-spaced sampling points along the line.
10.1.3.1.4. Line Translation Using Picking Mode

You can use picking mode to select or translate a line in the viewer. To move a line, select picking mode
by clicking Single Select
in the Selection Tools toolbar and drag the line to a new location. The line
properties will automatically update in the details view. For details, see Picking Mode (p. 79).
149
10.1.3.2. Line: Color

The color settings can be changed by clicking the Color tab. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
10.1.3.3. Line: Render

You can change the Line Width by entering a value corresponding to the pixel width of the line. You
can specify the value between 1 and 11 by using the graduated arrows, the embedded slider, or by
typing in the value.
10.1.3.4. Line: View

10.1.4. Plane Command

A plane is a two-dimensional area that exists only within the boundaries of the computational domain.
The following characteristics of planes will be discussed:
Plane: Geometry (p. 150)
Plane: Color (p. 153)
Plane: Render (p. 154)
Plane: View (p. 154)
Note
There are several ways to insert a plane:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane.
From the toolbar, select Location > Plane.
10.1.4.1. Plane: Geometry

10.1.4.1.1. Domains
10.1.4.1.2.1. Method
150
Location Submenu
Option
Description
YZ Plane
Defines a plane normal to the X axis.
ZX Plane
Defines a plane normal to the Y axis.
XY Plane
Defines a plane normal to the Z axis.
Point and
Normal
Enables you to specify a point on the plane and a

normal vector to the plane.
Three
Points
Enables you to define a plane by providing three points

that lie in the plane.
10.1.4.1.2.2. X
X is available only if the YZ Plane option is selected. The X setting specifies an offset value from the
X axis.
10.1.4.1.2.3. Y
Y is available only if the ZX Plane option is selected. The Y setting specifies an offset value from the
Y axis.
10.1.4.1.2.4. Z
Z is available only if the XY Plane option is selected. The Z setting specifies an offset value from the
Z axis.
10.1.4.1.2.5. Point
Point is available only if the Point and Normal option is selected. The Point setting specifies the
3D coordinates of the point that lies on the plane.
10.1.4.1.2.6. Normal
Normal is available only if the Point and Normal option is selected. The plane normal is calculated
as a vector from the origin to the specified coordinates.
10.1.4.1.2.7. Point 1, Point 2, and Point 3

These options are only available if the Three Points option is selected. The Point 1, Point 2, and
Point 3 settings specify three points that lie on the plane.
The normal vector to the plane is calculated using the right-hand rule. The first vector is from Point 1
to Point 2, and the second is from Point 1 to Point 3, as shown in the following diagram. For example,
the direction of this vector might be important if you are using the plane to define a Clip Plane.
151
10.1.4.1.3. Plane Bounds

10.1.4.1.3.1. Type
Option
Description
None
Cuts through a complete cross-section of each domain

specified in the Domains list. A slice plane is bounded
only by the limits of the domain. The Plane Type must
be set to Slice for this option (default).
Circular
Causes the boundary of the plane to be in the shape

of a circle. The circle is centered at the origin for the
YZ, ZX, and XY Planes. For the other two methods, the
circle is centered at the first point entered in the
Definition frame.
Rectangular
Causes the boundary of the plane to be a rectangular

shape. The rectangle is centered at the origin for the
YZ, ZX, and XY Planes. For the other two methods, the
rectangle is centered at the first point entered in the
Definition frame.
10.1.4.1.3.2. Radius
Radius is available only if the Circular option is selected. The Radius setting specifies a radius for
the circular boundary. You can enter a value or select the Expression
setting to specify the radius as an expression.
icon to the right of the Radius
10.1.4.1.3.3. X/Y/Z Size

These settings are available only if the Rectangular option is selected. Two of these options will be
displayed because a plane is a 2D object. These settings will specify a width and height for the rectangular boundary. The size of the rectangle is determined with reference to the planes origin (that is, the
plane is resized around its center).
152
Location Submenu
10.1.4.1.3.4. X/Y/Z Angle

This setting is available only if the Rectangular option is selected. Only one of these settings is displayed at once. This setting specifies an angle to rotate the plane counterclockwise about its normal
vector by the specified number of degrees.
10.1.4.1.3.5. Invert Plane Bound Check Box

Invert Plane Bound is available only if the Circular or the Rectangular option is selected. If this
check box is selected, the area defined by the rectangle or circle is used as a cut-out area from a slice
plane that is bounded only by the domains. The area inside the bounds of the rectangle or circle do
not form part of the plane, but everything on the slice plane outside of these bounds is included.
10.1.4.1.4. Plane Type

10.1.4.1.4.1. Slice Option
Select the Slice option to cut the plane so that it lies only inside the domain.
A slice plane differs from a sampling plane. A sampling plane is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points
that are independent of the mesh. When you create a slice plane, the sampling points are placed at
locations where the slice plane intersects an edge of the mesh, causing an uneven distribution of the
sampling points. The density of these sampling points in a slice plane is related to the length scale of
the mesh.
When you use the slice plane for Vector plots, the seeds are the points where the plane intersects a
point on the edge of three mesh elements. You can view the seeds by turning on the Show Mesh Lines
option on the Render tab for the plane.
10.1.4.1.4.2. Sample Option

Select the Sample option to specify the amount of seeds in the plane.
When creating a sampling plane, the Plane Bounds must be either Circular or Rectangular. For
the Circular option, the density of sampling points is determined by the radius of the plane specified
in the Plane Bounds tab and the number of radial and circumferential sampling points. For Rectangular bounds, you must specify the size of the bounds for your plane in each of the plane directions.
The density of sampling points depends on the size of the plane and the number of samples in each
of the two coordinate directions that describe the plane.
Certain types of plots will show small differences across GGI interfaces. This is to be expected when the
nodes of the computational grids on each side of a GGI connection do not match. For example, contour
lines or fringe lines may not match exactly across a GGI interface. This is a very minor effect and is not
an indicator of any problem.
10.1.4.1.5. Plane Translation using Picking Mode

For details, see Line Translation Using Picking Mode (p. 149).
10.1.4.2. Plane: Color

153
10.1.4.3. Plane: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.4.4. Plane: View

10.1.5. Volume Command

A Volume is a collection of mesh elements that can be used as a locator for graphic objects or calculations. Volumes will not be displayed as perfect shapes (for example, a perfect sphere) because mesh
elements are either included in or excluded from the Volume object.
The following characteristics of volumes will be discussed:
Volume: Geometry (p. 154)
Volume: Color (p. 158)
Volume: Render (p. 158)
Volume: View (p. 158)
Note
There are several ways to insert a volume:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume.
From the tool bar, select Location > Volume.
10.1.5.1. Volume: Geometry

10.1.5.1.1. Domains
10.1.5.1.2. Element Types

The Element Types setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Tet
Displays volume that is connected to a tetrahedral mesh.
Pyramid
Displays volume that is connected to a pyramid-shaped

mesh.
154
Location Submenu
Option
Description
Wedge
Displays volume that is connected to a wedge-shaped mesh.
Hex
Displays volume that is connected to a hexagonal mesh.
10.1.5.1.3.1. Method
Option
Description
Sphere
Creates a sphere-shaped volume. Enables you to specify a center point and radius for the sphere volume.
From Surface
Creates a volume on a surface. Enables you to select

a surface from the Location setting. Some surface
types may not be available.
Isovolume
Creates a volume at a specified variables value. Enables

you to specify a variable and one or two values (depending on the Mode) to create one or two isosurfaces
that bound the isovolume.
Surrounding
Node
Creates a volume at a node. Enables you to specify a

node by number.
10.1.5.1.3.2. Point
Point is available only if the Sphere option is selected. The Point setting specifies a center point for
the sphere volume. The point can be anywhere in 3D space.
10.1.5.1.3.3. Radius
Radius is available only if the Sphere option is selected. The Sphere setting specifies a radius for the
sphere volume.
10.1.5.1.3.4. Location
Location is available only if the From Surface option is selected. The Location setting selects from
a list of valid locations for the volume to exist on.
10.1.5.1.3.5. Variable
Variable is available only if the Isovolume option is selected. The Variable setting selects a variable
to plot the volume on. A Value for the variable must be selected before the volume can be defined.
10.1.5.1.3.6. Hybrid/Conservative Options

These options are available only if the Isovolume option is selected. For help on which field to select,
10.1.5.1.3.7. Mode (for the Sphere and From Surface options)

The Mode setting has the following options:
155

Option
Description
Intersection
Creates a volume at the specified radius for the

Sphere option. For the From Surface option, the
volume is created on the surface of the object.
Below Intersection
Creates a volume for all of the radii less than the specified radius for the Sphere option. For the From
Surface option, the volume is plotted for all values
less than the given value on the location object.
Above Intersection
Opposite to the Below Intersection option.
10.1.5.1.3.8. Mode (for the Isovolume option)

Option
Description
At Value
Creates a volume for all the mesh elements in the domain

equal to the entered value.
Below Value

above the entered value.
Above Value

less than the entered value.
Between
Value

in between the two entered values.
10.1.5.1.3.9. Value Text Boxes

The Value text boxes are available only if the Isovolume option is selected. The Value text boxes
specify values to compare to using the Mode options. For example, if Value is set to 2 and Mode is
set to At Value, the Volume will plot where the variable is equal to 2.
10.1.5.1.4. Inclusive Check Box

Select the Inclusive check box to add the entered values to an above or below comparison Mode. For
example, if the Inclusive check box is selected with the Below Intersection option, the volume
will include the radius entered or surface selected.
10.1.5.1.5. How CFD-Post Calculates Isovolumes

In order to see the affects of the Inclusive check box on the Minimum Face Angle variable set to the
Below Value mode, do the following:
1.
Open a results file.
2.
Create a volume, accepting the default name.
3.
Set Variable to Minimum Face Angle, Mode to Below Value, and then click Apply. Few volumes appear.
4.
Now enable Inclusive and click Apply again. Many more volumes appear.
156
Location Submenu
The differences you see are caused by how CFD-Post calculates values for a given point on a mesh
(Mode is set to At Value):
...as compared to Mode being set to Below Value
...and as compared to Mode being set to Below Value with Inclusive being enabled:
157
10.1.5.2. Volume: Color

10.1.5.3. Volume: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.5.4. Volume: View

10.1.6. Isosurface Command

An isosurface is a surface upon which a particular variable has a constant value, called the level. For instance, an Isosurface of pressure would be a surface consisting of all the points in the geometry where
the pressure took a value of 1.32e+05 Pa. In CFD-Post, isosurfaces can be defined using any variable.
You can also color the isosurface using any variable or choosing a constant color.
The following characteristics of isosurfaces will be discussed:
Isosurface: Geometry (p. 159)
Isosurface: Color (p. 159)
Isosurface: Render (p. 159)
Isosurface: View (p. 159)
Note
There are several ways to insert an isosurface:
158
Location Submenu
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Isosurface.
From the tool bar, select Location > Isosurface.
the tree view.
10.1.6.1. Isosurface: Geometry

10.1.6.1.1. Domains
10.1.6.1.2.1. Variable
The Variable setting specifies the variable that you want to plot.
Tip
Click the Location Editor
to open the Variable Selector dialog box, which displays the
complete list of available options.
10.1.6.1.2.2. Hybrid/Conservative Option

For help on which field to select, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
10.1.6.1.2.3. Value
The Value setting specifies a numerical value or expression to plot for the given variable.
10.1.6.2. Isosurface: Color

You can change the color settings by clicking the Color tab; for details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
You should not select the Local Range option when coloring an isosurface with the variable used
to define it. In this case, the Local Range would be zero by definition, and the plot would highlight
only round-off errors.
10.1.6.3. Isosurface: Render

To change the rendering settings, click the Render tab. For details, see Render Details Tab (p. 21).
10.1.6.4. Isosurface: View

159
10.1.7. Iso Clip Command

An iso clip hides the portion of one or more locators subject to one or more constraints (visibility
parameters) that you specify.
The following characteristics of iso clips will be discussed:
Iso Clip: Geometry (p. 160)
Iso Clip: Color (p. 161)
Iso Clip: Render (p. 161)
Iso Clip: View (p. 161)
Note
There are several ways to insert an iso clip:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Iso Clip.
From the tool bar, select Location > Iso Clip.
the tree view.
Important
Iso clips have the following restrictions:
1. Iso clip locators interpolate values using a method that is slightly less accurate than that used
for slice planes and isosurfaces. For details, see Interpolation in CFD-Post (p. 141).
2. Iso clips cannot clip volumes.
3. Iso clips cannot have mix of faces and lines.
4. Setting Visible when [value] to = always results in lines, never faces.
5. Setting Visible when [value] to both >= and <= produces only faces, no lines (due to restriction
3), yet clipped lines may mix with mesh lines if the latter are shown.
6. In polyhedral cases, an iso clip may show missing faces when multiple locations are selected
as the basis for the iso clip. As a workaround, use multiple iso clip objects, selecting a single
location for each.
10.1.7.1. Iso Clip: Geometry

10.1.7.1.1. Domains
160
Location Submenu
10.1.7.1.2. Location
icon to open the Location Editor dialog box, which displays the complete
list of available options. If you specify multiple locators, they must all have the same dimensionality (for
example, all must be planes, rather than a combination of lines and planes).
10.1.7.1.3. Visibility Parameters

The Visibility parameters area is where you set the variables that hide the values that fail to meet a
specified condition on a locator specified in the Locations field. For example, if the locator is an X-Y
plane and the visibility is restricted to Y>=0, Y<= .1, and X>=.15, only areas that have values within
those bounds will be displayed.
icon or by right-clicking in the Visibility paraYou create a new clip setting by clicking the New
meters area and selecting New. These actions cause the Visibility Parameter Properties settings to
appear:
Variable
Sets the variable that controls where the iso clip regions are placed. Typically you would specify geometric
variables.
Visible when [value]
Sets the display of regions (>=, <=) or a line (=).
Boundary Data
Enables you to set the boundary data to use of hybrid or conservative variable values. For details, see
Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
10.1.7.2. Iso Clip: Color

You can change the color of the locator or the variable that is colored on the locator by clicking the
Color tab. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
10.1.7.3. Iso Clip: Render

10.1.7.4. Iso Clip: View

10.1.8. Vortex Core Region

A vortex is a circular or spiral set of streamlines; a vortex core is a special type of isosurface that displays
a vortex. The CFD-Post vortex core visualization tools are designed to help you identify and understand
vortex regions.
The following characteristics of vortex cores will be discussed:
Vortex Core Region: Geometry (p. 162)
161

Vortex Core Region: Color (p. 168)
Vortex Core Region: Render (p. 168)
Vortex Core Region: View (p. 168)
Note
There are several ways to insert a vortex core region:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Vortex Core Region.
From the tool bar, select Location > Vortex Core Region.
the tree view.
10.1.8.1. Vortex Core Region: Geometry

10.1.8.1.1. Domains
The Domains setting specifies the domains where the vortex core should be found. Selected domains
do not need to be contiguous.
10.1.8.1.2. Definition Area

The Definition area is where you define the type and the strength of the vortex core.
10.1.8.1.2.1. Method
The Method setting specifies sets of equations that detect vortices as spatial regions. Click the dropdown arrow to choose a method:
Absolute Helicity
Absolute value of the dot product of velocity vector and vorticity vector.
Eigen Helicity
Dot product of vorticity and the normal of swirling plane (that is, the plane spanned
by the real and imaginary parts of complex eigen-vectors of velocity gradient tensor).
Lambda 2-Criterion
The negative values of the second eigenvalue of the symmetry square of velocity
gradient tensor. Derived through the hessian of pressure.
Q-Criterion
The second invariant of the velocity gradient tensor. For a region with positive values,
it could include regions with negative discriminants and exclude region with positive
discriminants.
Real Eigen Helicity
Dot product of vorticity and swirling vector that is the real eigen-vector of velocity
gradient tensor.
Swirling Discrim- The discriminant of velocity gradient tensor for complex eigenvalues. The positive
inant
values indicate existence of swirling local flow pattern.
162
Location Submenu
Swirling
Strength
The imaginary part of complex eigenvalues of velocity gradient tensor. It is positive if

and only if the discriminant is positive and its value represents the strength of swirling
motion around local centers.
Vorticity
Curl of velocity vector.
Note
There is no recommended vortex core method; the appropriate choice of vortex core is always
case-dependent.
10.1.8.1.2.1.1. Vortex Core Mathematics
A number of methods are based on eigen analysis in local velocity gradient tensor. The following are
the related notations and equations.
For the velocity gradient tensor

(10.1)
The eigenvalues of the gradient tensor satisfies
(10.2)

where
= =
FGDEFD FFDEGD GED GFDEGD GGDEFD FED GGDFFD FGDGFD EED

C C C BA @9 H 9
8
653563 663553
643463 443663
453543 553443
2 2 10 7 )
(
" !

''$ &&$ %%$
(10.3)
(10.4)
(10.5)
Now let
WU
(10.6)
VU
RQ
(10.7)
P I
T S
Then, if the discriminant is
163
>
(10.8)
then the tensor has one real eigenvalue
and a pair of conjugated complex eigenvalues
That is, the tensor can be decomposed as

(10.9)

We denote
(10.10)
!
and
&
(10.11)
$"
Then
(10.12)
72
( %
62
(10.13)
C9
)'
0'
&
(10.14)
B9
(%
54 1
A@ 8
The last one is called Swirling Strength, and represents the strength of the local swirling motion. In CFDPost, the magnitude of both Swirling Vector and Swirling Normal is the Swirling Strength. The direction
of the Swirling Vector is that of the real eigen-vector ( in Equation 10.19 (p. 164)) and the direction of
the Swirling Normal is that of
defined in Equation 10.26 (p. 165).
ED
GF
The following relationships are useful:

I
(10.15)
(10.16)
(10.17)
ih
d a
q
ih
pp
XR
cb a
cb a
XR
WV R
Y
XR
QH PH
= +
(10.18)
Now the real eigen-vector meets:

v u tv s
r
164
(10.19)
Location Submenu
We can calculate the real eigen-vector using one of the non-zero vectors:

(10.20)
(10.21)
(10.22)
The complex eigen-vectors' real and imaginary parts meet:
=
=
(10.23)
0)(1) &
$"!$"
1)( '0) &

#"! #"
(10.24)
%

Therefore, if
33
GFE D
= . That is, all rows of matrix A are normal to both
XVT WVT
XVT WVT
=
have all real eigen-values (
and
and
r
sq q
ih
is the vorticity vector.
u
vt t
let
, where
c eb d a
Then
This is useful to get the eigen-helicity
and
, therefore they
UT
So any non-zero row vector of matrix A can be used to calculate
On
and
(10.26)
`Y
CBA @
(10.25)
PIH
376 4
= and
then,
are all proportional to
SRQ
76
9 4
5 986 4
).
is used in the method proposed by F. Hussain. By using the eigen-values

The region with negative of
and eigen-vectors of velocity gradient tensor , we have
l n k n e j id
oo
Also, we can express the tensor
gf
m d
So, in the case the second eigenvalue is
(10.27)
hf d
m
as
165
Now when we look into the eigenvalues and vectors of , the same should apply to
Let

(10.28)

(10.29)
Its eigenvalues meet
$ !# &!" %!
where
(10.30)
I GBCB HBGBFB EBDBCB A

4363 6353 5343 2
1( 0( )( '
(10.31)
I FBEB I HBDB
@ 93 @ 83 @ 73
(10.32)
(10.33)
Then the three eigenvalues are:

= +
s xw v r q u p
c hg f b a e `
Y S X WV UR Q TP
where
is in the range of
sqsq r xq r wq
r wq tq squq
r vq uq tqsq
166
. Therefore, the second eigenvalue for a 3x3
The eigenvector corresponding to an eigenvalue
(10.37)
(10.39)
, we have
symmetry tensor is
o
k j
mn l
e
Because
(10.38)
if hf gf
(10.36)
(10.35)
u
ty
i
de
(10.34)
can be one of the non-zero vectors
(10.40)
Location Submenu

(10.41)
(10.42)
10.1.8.1.2.1.2. Vortex Core References
Bibliography
[1] M. S. Chong, A. E. Perry, and B. J. Cantwell. Copyright 1990. Phys. Fluid. A General Classification of
Three Dimensional Flow Fields. 765-777. A 2.
[2] U. Dallman, A. Hilgenstock, B. Schulte-Werning, S. Riedelbauch, and H. Vollmers. Copyright 1991.
AGARD Conf. Proc. CP-494. On the Footprints of Three-Dimensional Separated Vortex Flows Around
Blunt Bodies.
[3] R. Haimes and D. Sujudi. Copyright 1995. Dept. of Aeronautics and Astronautics, MIT, Cambridge,
MA. Identification of Swirling Flow in 3D Vector Fields. Tech. Report.
[4] J. C. R. Hunt, A. A. Wary, and P. Moin. Copyright 1988. NASA Ames / Stanford University in Oroc.
1988 Summer Program of the Center for Turbulent Research. Eddies, Streams, and Convergence
Zones in Turbulent Flows. 193-207.
[5] J. Jeong and F. Hussain. Copyright 1995. Journal of Fluid Mechanics. On the Identification of a
Vortex. 69-94. 285.
[6] M. Jiang, R. Machiraju, and D. Thompson. Copyright 2002. Eurographics IEEE VGTC Symposium
on Visualization. A Novel Approach to Vortex Core Region Detection.
[7] S. K. Robinson, S. J. Kline, and P. R. Spalart. Copyright 1988. In Proc. Zoran P. Zaric Memorial International Seminar on Near Wall Turbulence. Statistical Analysis of Near-wall Structures in Turbulent
Channel Flow.
[8] M. Roth and R. Peikert. Copyright 1998. A Higher-order Method for Finding Vortex Core Lines.
[9] J. Sahner, T. Weinkauf, and H.-C. Hege. Copyright 2005. Eurographics IEEE VGTC Symposium on
Visualization. Galilean Invariant Extraction and Iconic Representation of Vortex Core Lines.
[10] S. Zhang and D. Choudhury. Copyright 2006. Phys. Fluids 18. Eigen Helicity Density: A New Vortex
Identification Scheme and its Application in Accelerated Inhomogeneous Flows.
[11] J. Zhou, R. J. Adrian, and S. Balachander. Copyright 1996. Phys. Fluids 8. Autogeneration of Near
Wall Vertical Structure in Channel Flow. 288-291.
167

[12] J. Zhou. Copyright 1997. Ph.D. thesis, Department of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics, University
of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, Urbana, Illinois. Self-sustaining Formation of Packets of Hairpin
Vortices in a Turbulent Wall Layer.
[13] J. Zhou, R. J. Adrian, S. Balachander, and T. M. Kendall. Copyright 1999. Journal of Fluid Mechanics.
Mechanisms for Generating Coherent Packets of Hairpin Vortices in Channel Flow. 353-396. 387.
10.1.8.1.2.2. Level
The Level setting controls the strength of the vortex core that is displayed. The Level setting is normalized between Method types so that it is easy for you to compare the output of the different methods.
10.1.8.1.2.3. Actual Value

The Actual Value setting displays the isosurface value. This read-only value varies between methods.
10.1.8.2. Vortex Core Region: Color

To learn how to use color to show how a variable changes through a region or just to change the color
of the vortex core regions, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
Note
The ranges of vortex core variables are calculated by CFD-Post and will be local to the timestep
(that is, the range will not be calculated across all timesteps).
10.1.8.3. Vortex Core Region: Render

To learn how to control the display of mesh lines, textures, and vortex core faces, see Render Details
Tab (p. 21).
10.1.8.4. Vortex Core Region: View

10.1.9. Surface of Revolution Command

A Surface of Revolution is a surface created by revolving a polyline about an axis. The polyline may
be as simple as a single line segment or as complicated as a general curve.
The following characteristics of surfaces of revolution will be discussed:
Surface of Revolution: Geometry (p. 169)
Surface of Revolution: Color (p. 171)
Surface of Revolution: Render (p. 171)
168
Location Submenu
Surface of Revolution: View (p. 171)
Note
There are several ways to insert a surface of revolution:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Surface of Revolution.
From the tool bar, select Location > Surface of Revolution.
the tree view.
10.1.9.1. Surface of Revolution: Geometry

10.1.9.1.1. Domains
10.1.9.1.2.1. Method
Option
Description
Cylinder
Creates a cylinder using two axial and one radial coordinate

points.
Cone
Creates a cone using two axial and radial coordinate points.
Disc
Creates a disc using one axial and two radial coordinate

points.
Sphere
Creates a cylinder using one axial and radial coordinate

points.
From Line
Enables you to specify a line or polyline to revolve about

the axis (to be specified later).
10.1.9.1.2.2. Point 1 (a,r) and Point 2 (a,r)

These text boxes are not available for the From Line option. These text boxes specify axial and radial
coordinates to define the surface of revolution.
Only one set of coordinates are available for the Sphere option. The axial value offsets the sphere in
the direction of the rotational axis, and the radial value is used as the radius of the sphere.
169
10.1.9.1.2.3. Line
Line is available only if the From Line option is selected. The Line setting selects a valid line or
polyline to use for rotation around the axis.
Tip
icon to open the Location Selector dialog box, which displays
the complete list of available lines.
10.1.9.1.2.4. # of Samples
# of Samples is not available if the From Line option is selected. The # of Samples setting sets the
amount of sample points in the direction of the rotational axis.
10.1.9.1.2.5. Theta Samples

The Theta Samples setting specifies the amount of sample points evenly rotated around the rotational
axis. For example, increasing this setting would make a cylinder's curve around its origin more accurate
(more like a circle).
10.1.9.1.2.6. Project to AR Plane Check Box

The Project to AR Plane check box is available only if the From Line option is selected. If Project
to AR Plane is selected (it is by default), then the Theta values will be projected to the plane of constant
Theta. This produces a more refined mesh.
10.1.9.1.3. Rotation Axis

10.1.9.1.3.1. Method
Option
Description
Principal
Axis
Enables you to specify a principal axis to rotate around.
Rotation
Axis
Enables you to specify a custom axis to rotate around using

a line.
10.1.9.1.3.2. Axis
Axis is available only if the Principal Axis option is selected. The Axis setting enables you to select
from a list the X, Y, or Z axis to rotate around.
10.1.9.1.3.3. From/To Text Boxes

The From and To text boxes are available only if the Rotation Axis option is selected. These text
boxes create a line representing the axis about which the Solid of Revolution is created.
10.1.9.1.4. Angle Range Check Box

Select the Angle Range check box if you want to specify a minimum or maximum angle to rotate to.
170
Location Submenu
10.1.9.1.4.1. Min./Max. Angle

These settings specify a minimum and/or maximum angle to rotate to.
10.1.9.1.5. Axial/Radial Offset

10.1.9.1.5.1. Start/End A
These settings specify a start and end offset along the axis of rotation.
10.1.9.1.5.2. Start/End R
These settings specify a start and end offset for the radius.
The following image shows two partial cones with the same profile and theta limits. For the end profile
of one of the cones, the radial offset is positive and the axial offset is negative, causing the radius to
increase and the axial coordinate to decrease with increasing theta (as determined by the right hand
rule with reference to the axis shown). Two other surfaces of revolution were included in the figure to
help illustrate axial displacements.
10.1.9.2. Surface of Revolution: Color

10.1.9.3. Surface of Revolution: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.9.4. Surface of Revolution: View

171
10.1.10. Polyline Command

A polyline is a line connecting a series of points. The points may have local (path) variables associated
with them. The polyline can interact with CFD data and can be colored using path variables or domain
variables.
The following characteristics of polylines will be discussed:
Polyline: Geometry (p. 172)
Polyline: Color (p. 174)
Polyline: Render (p. 174)
Polyline: View (p. 174)
Note
There are several ways to insert a polyline:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Polyline.
From the tool bar, select Location > Polyline.
the tree view.
10.1.10.1. Polyline: Geometry

10.1.10.1.1. Method
Option
Description
From File
Enables you to specify a file that has the point data contained within it.
The data file format is described in POLYLINE Data
Format (p. 100).
Boundary
Intersection
Enables you to select a boundary and an object to intersect

it with. The line will then plot on the intersection.
From Contour
Enables you to plot using contour data (for example, a velocity of 5 m/s).
172
Location Submenu
10.1.10.1.2. File
File is available only if the From File option is selected. The File setting specifies the filename of a
file to insert. You can type in the filename or click Browse
to open the Import dialog box and search
for the file. The only valid file types to import are *.txt and *.csv.
Tip
This method enables you to read polylines or lines from another case (if that case has the
required geometry). First export a polyline or a line from another case, make sure to select
Export Geometry Information, then use the From File method in the other case to import
the lines along with any local data. You can also create your own file containing your data,
such as experimental data, by using the same format. For a description of the polyline file
format, see POLYLINE Data Format (p. 100).
10.1.10.1.3. Domains
Domains is available only if the Boundary Intersection option is selected. The Domains setting
selects a domain for the polyline to exist in. For details, see Domains (p. 143).
10.1.10.1.4. Boundary List

Boundary List is available only if the Boundary Intersection option is selected. The Boundary
List setting specifies a boundary.
Tip
icon to open the Location Selector dialog box, which displays
the complete list of available boundaries.
10.1.10.1.5. Intersect With

Intersect With is available only if the Boundary Intersection option is selected. The Intersect
With setting specifies a graphic object that intersects the boundary.
Note
When intersecting with a thin surface boundary, the resulting polyline will include both sides
of the boundary. To intersect only one side, pick the primitive region that defines one side
of the thin surface instead of the entire boundary.
10.1.10.1.6. Contour Name

Contour Name is available only when the From Contour option is selected. The Contour Name
setting selects a predefined contour plot. If you have not created a contour, see Contour Command (p. 183)
10.1.10.1.7. Contour Level

Contour Level is available only when the From Contour option is selected. The Contour Level setting
specifies a contour level. The amount of contour levels is predefined by the Contour Command (p. 183).
173
10.1.10.2. Polyline: Color

10.1.10.3. Polyline: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.10.4. Polyline: View

10.1.11. User Surface Command

A user surface can be defined in a number of different ways:
From a file containing data points.
From the intersection of a boundary and an existing locator.
From a contour fringe number.
By transforming an existing surface.
Offset from an existing surface. The offset can be uniform or described by a variable.
Note
User Surface locators interpolate values using a method that is slightly less accurate than
that used for slice planes and isosurfaces. For details, see Interpolation in CFD-Post (p. 141).
The following characteristics of user surfaces will be discussed:
User Surface: Geometry (p. 175)
User Surface: Color (p. 178)
User Surface: Render (p. 178)
User Surface: View (p. 178)
Note
There are several ways to insert a user surface:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > User Surface.
From the tool bar, select Location > User Surface.
174
Location Submenu
the tree view.
10.1.11.1. User Surface: Geometry

10.1.11.1.1. Method
Option
Description
From File
Same as for the polyline object. For details, see Polyline: Geometry: Method (p. 172).
The data file format is described in USER SURFACE Data
Format (p. 101).
Boundary
Intersection
From Contour
Transformed
Surface
Enables you to specify a preexisting surface to plot.

You may specify a rotation, translation, and uniform
scale for the user surface.
Offset From
Surface
Enables you to specify a preexisting surface to plot.

You may specify different methods of offset for the
user surface.
ANSYS
Similar to the From File option, except that this

option uses ANSYS files to load into the instance. You
may also specify an associated boundary for the file
to be loaded onto. For details, see Specify Associated
Boundary Check Box (p. 178).
10.1.11.1.2. File
File is the same for the polyline object. For details, see Polyline: Geometry: File (p. 173).
Tip
This method enables you to read surfaces from another case. First export a surface (such as
a plane or a boundary) from another case and make sure to select Export Geometry Information and Export Line and Face Data. Then use the From File method in the other case
to import the surface along with any local data. You can also create a file containing your
own data, such as experimental data, by using the same format. For a description of the
surface file format, see USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 101).
175
10.1.11.1.3. Domains/Boundary List/Intersect With

These settings are the same as for a polyline, except that instead of outlining the intersection, a line of
intersection is formed between the boundaries and the location. Each mesh element that the line passes
through forms part of the User Surface. For details, see Domains (p. 173).
10.1.11.1.4. Contour Name/Contour Level

These settings are the same as for a polyline, except that instead of outlining the contour, the User
Surface fills in all of the area above the contour level entered and below the contour level above. Also,
when applicable, Contour Level 1 creates a surface below the first contour line. For details, see Contour
Name (p. 173).
10.1.11.1.5. Surface Name

Surface Name is available only if either the Transformed Surface or Offset From Surface
options are selected. The Surface Name setting selects a surface on which to plot the User Surface.
10.1.11.1.6. Rotation Check Box

The Rotation check box is available only if the Transformed Surface option is selected. Select
the Rotation check box to specify a rotation for the User Surface. For details, see Apply Rotation Check
Box (p. 207).
10.1.11.1.7. Translation Check Box

The Translation check box is available only if the Transformed Surface option is selected. Select
the Translation check box to specify a translation for the User Surface. For details, see Apply Translation
Check Box (p. 208).
10.1.11.1.8. Scale Check Box

The Scale check box is available only if the Transformed Surface option is selected. Select the
Scale check box to specify a scale for the User Surface. Use the Scale text box to specify a uniform
scale factor.
10.1.11.1.9. Type
Type is available only if the Offset From Surface option is selected. The Type setting has the
following options:
Option
Description
Normal
Enables you to offset the User Surface normal to selected

surface.
Translational
Enables you to offset the User Surface from the selected

surface by moving the User Surface.
10.1.11.1.10. Mode
Mode is available only if the Offset From Surface option is selected. The Mode setting has the
following options:
176
Location Submenu
Option
Description
Uniform
Enables you to specify a uniform offset.
Variable
Enables you to select a variable to plot from the surface.
An example of a uniform normal offset of -0.1 [m] to the Default surface of the static mixer,
colored by Temperature, is shown in the diagram.
10.1.11.1.11. Distance
Distance is available only if the Uniform option is selected. The Distance setting specifies an offset
distance, whether it is translational or normal.
10.1.11.1.12. Variable
Variable is available only if the Variable option is selected. The Variable setting specifies a variable
to plot.
When the distance is described by a variable, you can also incorporate the variable into an expression.
For example, after you have chosen a variable you can click in the Distance box and amend it with
valid CFX Expression Language (CEL) (for example, 0.5 * Temperature).
10.1.11.1.13. Direction
Direction is available only if the Translational option is selected. The Direction setting selects a
direction to offset the User Surface. Increased values do not increase the translational offset, they merely
change the ratio that the offset X, Y, and Z directions are placed at. For example, [2,3,1] and [4,6,2]
would identically offset the User Surface.
177
10.1.11.1.14. Specify Associated Boundary Check Box

The Specify Associated Boundary check box is available only if the ANSYS option is selected. This
setting is also available in an import menu. For details, see Import Mechanical CDB Surface (p. 95).
10.1.11.2. User Surface: Color

10.1.11.3. User Surface: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.11.4. User Surface: View

10.1.12. Surface Group Command

A surface group enables you to create a locator consisting of multiple surface locators.
The following characteristics of user surface groups will be discussed:
Surface Group: Geometry (p. 178)
Surface Group: Color (p. 179)
Surface Group: Render (p. 179)
Surface Group: View (p. 179)
Note
There are several ways to insert a surface group:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Surface Group.
From the tool bar, select Location > Surface Group.
the tree view.
10.1.12.1. Surface Group: Geometry

10.1.12.1.1. Domains
The Domains setting selects the domains in which the surface group will exist. For details, see Domains (p. 143).
178
Location Submenu
The Locations setting specifies a location or locations on which to plot the Surface Group. For details,
see Locations (p. 146).
10.1.12.2. Surface Group: Color

10.1.12.3. Surface Group: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.1.12.4. Surface Group: View

10.1.13. Turbo Surface Command

Turbo surfaces are graphic objects that can be viewed and used as locators, just like other graphic objects.
Note
There are two ways to insert a turbo surface:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.
From the tool bar, select Location > Turbo Surface.
For details on working with turbo surfaces, see Turbo Surface (p. 280).
10.1.14. Turbo Line Command

Turbo lines are graphic objects that can be viewed and used as locators, just like other graphic objects.
Note
There are two ways to insert a turbo line:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Turbo Line.
From the tool bar, select Location > Turbo Line.
For details on working with turbo lines, see Turbo Line (p. 283).
179
10.2. Vector Command

A Vector Plot is a collection of vectors drawn to show the direction and magnitude (optional) of a
vector variable on a collection of points. These points, known as seeds, are defined by a location.
When post-processing a GGI simulation, the velocity vectors can be plotted in the local frame of reference
for each domain (Velocity Field Selection) or in the absolute frame of reference for each
domain (Velocity in a Stationary Frame). These two choices produce the same plot in all
stationary frame domains, but plot either the rotating frame or absolute frame velocity vectors in domains
that are in the rotating frame of reference.
The following characteristics of vectors will be discussed:
Vector: Geometry (p. 180)
Vector: Color (p. 181)
Vector: Symbol (p. 182)
Vector: Render (p. 182)
Vector: View (p. 182)
Note
There are several ways to insert a vector plot:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Vector.
From the toolbar, click the Vector
icon.
the 3D Viewer.
10.2.1. Vector: Geometry

10.2.1.1. Domains
10.2.1.2. Definition
Locations is the same for the Point Cloud object. For details, see Locations (p. 146).
10.2.1.2.2. Sampling
Sampling and all of the settings that correspond to it are the same for the Point Cloud object. For details,
see Sampling (p. 146).
180
Vector Command
10.2.1.2.3. Variable
The Variable setting selects a variable from the list to plot at the selected location.
Tip
icon to open the Variable Selector dialog box, which displays
the complete list of available variables.
10.2.1.2.4. Hybrid/Conservative Options

For details, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
10.2.1.2.5. Projection
The Projection setting has the following options:
Option
Description
None
Original vectors are plotted without any projection.
Coord Frame
Plots vector components aligned with a principal axis

or an axis of a custom coordinate frame.
Normal
Plots vector components normal to the location. Applicable only for surface locations.
Tangential
Plots vector components tangential to the location.

Applicable only for surface locations.
When a rotation axis is defined (set in the Turbo tab, or by reading a turbo case), the Projection setting
has the following additional options:
Option
Description
Axial
Plots vector components along the rotation axis.

Available when a rotation axis is defined.
Radial
Plots vector components radially to the rotation axis.

Available when a rotation axis is defined.
Circumferential
Plots vector components along the theta direction

about the rotation axis. Available when a rotation axis
is defined.
10.2.1.2.6. Direction
There are two drop-down list boxes for this setting. The first list represents the options for the range
of the vector. The second list box represents the available directions to plot the vector in.
10.2.2. Vector: Color

181
10.2.3. Vector: Symbol

10.2.3.1. Symbol
The Symbol setting has the following options to select a shape for the vector:
Option
Description
Line Arrow
Displays the vector as a line arrow. This option takes

the least amount of memory and is suggested for large
vector field plots.
Arrow2D
Displays a filled line arrow.
Arrow3D
Displays a 3D filled line arrow.
Arrowhead
Displays the tip of the Arrow2D option.
Arrowhead3D
Displays a 3D version of the Arrowhead option.
Fish3D
Displays a 3D fish.
Ball
Displays a sphere at every vector point. This option

does not specify a direction, only a scalar value.
Crosshair
Displays a 3D + sign. This option, through its natural

shape, displays the normal and the tangential vector
to the surface automatically. However, the crosshair
does not point to the actual direction (does not have
an arrow pointing the direction of the actual vector).
Octahedron
Displays a filled Crosshair option.
Cube
Displays a 3D box. One face of the cube lies tangent

to the surface and one of the corners points in the
direction of the vector.
10.2.3.2. Symbol Size

The Symbol Size setting specifies the scale for the vectors symbol.
10.2.3.3. Normalize Symbols Check Box

Select the Normalize Symbols check box to make all of the vectors the same size.
10.2.4. Vector: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.2.5. Vector: View

182
Contour Command
10.3. Contour Command

A contour plot is a series of lines linking points with equal values of a given variable. For example,
contours of height exist on geographical maps and give an impression of gradient and land shape.
The following characteristics of contours will be discussed:
Contour: Geometry (p. 183)
Contour: Labels (p. 184)
Contour: Render (p. 185)
Contour: View (p. 185)
Note
There are several ways to insert a contour plot:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Contour.
From the toolbar, click the Contour
icon.
10.3.1. Contour: Geometry

10.3.1.1. Domains
10.3.1.2. Locations
For details, see Locations (p. 146).
10.3.1.3. Variable
For details, see Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable (p. 20).
10.3.1.4. Range
For details, see Range (p. 20). In addition to the options specified in the link, there is the following
option. Value List is a comma-separated list that enables you to specify the actual values at which
contours should be plotted. For example, if plotting temperature in a combustor, you might try a value
list of 300, 500, 700, 900, and 1100K. It should be noted that entering a value list overrides the
number specified in the # of Contours (p. 184) text box.
10.3.1.5. Hybrid / Conservative Options

For details, see Hybrid/Conservative (p. 20).
183
10.3.1.6. Color Scale

For details, see Color Scale (p. 20).
10.3.1.7. Color Map

For details, see Color Map (p. 20).
10.3.1.8. # of Contours
The # of Contours setting specifies the number of contours in the plot. This will not increase the range,
it will increase only the number of contours within the range.
10.3.1.9. Clip to Range Check Box

Select the Clip to Range check box to plot values only within the specified Range. If selected, you
should use this setting in conjunction with the User Specified range.
10.3.2. Contour: Labels

10.3.2.1. Show Numbers Check Box
Select the Show Numbers check box to display numbers for the contour lines and edit their appearance.
The contour numbers will appear next to the contour values in the legend.
10.3.2.1.1. Text Height

The Text Height setting specifies a value for the text height. The value corresponds to a ratio of the
height of the 3D Viewer. For example, a value of 1 would display the contour numbers to be the full
height of the 3D Viewer.
10.3.2.1.2. Text Font

The Text Font setting specifies a font from the list.
10.3.2.1.3. Color Mode

The Color Mode setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Default
Displays the text as gray.
User Specified
Enables you to specify a custom color.
184
Streamline Command
10.3.2.1.4. Text Color

The Text Color setting selects a custom color. You can select a predefined color by clicking the color
bar.
Tip
icon to open the Select color dialog box, which displays the
complete range of available colors.
10.3.3. Contour: Render

The Render tab for a contour does not contain an Apply Texture section, but does contain the other
sections described in Render Details Tab (p. 21).
10.3.4. Contour: View

10.4. Streamline Command

A streamline is the path that a particle of zero mass would take through the fluid domain. The path is
calculated using a Runge-Kutta method of vector variable integration with variable timestep control.
Streamlines start at each node on a given locator.
The assumption of steady state flow is assumed when a streamline is created, even with a transient
simulation. Although the CFD-Post streamline algorithm is efficient, the calculation of large numbers
of streamlines in a large domain can still take a long period of time. Therefore, when calculating
streamlines for a solution for the first time, start by plotting a small number of streamlines and then
increase the number of streamlines until the best generation time vs. detail ratio is found.
Note
In multi-domain turbo cases, streamlines may not always cross from one domain to next.
This can happen when there is no overlap between the two domains, or when the domain
interface is not modeled as an interface, but rather as outlet/inlet pair (for example, in FLUENT).
If you want to view streamlines in both domains in such cases, you can start the streamlines
from both "inlets", or from the inlet and the outlet, setting the Direction to be Forward and
Backward.
The following characteristics of streamlines will be discussed:
Streamline: Geometry (p. 186)
Streamline: Color (p. 188)
Streamline: Symbol (p. 188)
Streamline: Limits (p. 189)
185

Streamline: Render (p. 190)
Streamline: View (p. 190)
Note
There are several ways to insert a streamline:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Streamline.
From the toolbar, click the Streamline
icon.
10.4.1. Streamline: Geometry

10.4.1.1. Type
Option
Description
3D Streamline
Plots the streamline inside a specified domain from a location.
Surface
Streamline
Plots the streamline on a surface from a location. A Surface Streamline is defined

as a line everywhere tangent to the surface variable component at a given instant
of time.
10.4.1.2.1. Domains
Domains is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. For details, see Domains (p. 143).
10.4.1.2.2. Start From (3D Streamline)

Start From is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. The Start From setting selects
a location or locations to start from. For details, see Locations (p. 146).
If you are starting your streamlines from an inlet, outlet, or slice plane, you are advised to use the Factor
text box to reduce the number of streamlines. If your solution is likely to contain recirculation areas, or
regions of high vorticity, you are advised to reduce the Max Segments number to a few hundred
streamlines. If the streamlines stop part of the way through the domain, increase the Max Segments
value until you receive good results.
10.4.1.2.3. Surfaces
Surfaces is available only if the Surface Streamline option is selected. The Surfaces setting selects
a location or locations to plot on. For details, see Locations (p. 146).
186
Streamline Command
10.4.1.2.4. Start From (Surface Streamline)

Start From is available only if the Surface Streamline option is selected. This setting is similar
to the Sampling setting for a Point Cloud object. For details, see Sampling (p. 146). The differences
between the settings are that you cannot select the Random option for this setting and that the Start
From setting also has the Locations option.
Locations is available only if the Locations option is selected. For details, see Locations (p. 146).
10.4.1.2.6. Sampling
Sampling is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. The Sampling setting is
identical to the Sampling setting for a Point Cloud object, except that you cannot select the Random
option for this setting. For details, see Sampling (p. 146).
10.4.1.2.7. Preview Seeds Button

Click the Preview Seeds button to display in the Viewer where the streamlines will originate from.
10.4.1.2.8. Variable
Use Variable to select a variable to plot. Using the Velocity variable is recommended. For details,
see Variable (p. 181).
10.4.1.2.9. Hybrid/Conservative Options

For help on which field to select, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
10.4.1.2.10. Direction
The Direction setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Forward
Specifies that the streamline goes only in the positive direction from the start
point.
Backward
Specifies that the streamline goes only in the negative direction from the start
point.
Forward and
Backward
Specifies that the streamline goes in both the positive and negative directions
from the start point.
10.4.1.3. Cross Periodics Check Box

Cross Periodics is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. Select the Cross Periodics
check box to have the streamline cross from one periodic interface to the opposite boundary. A periodic
interface can be defined by selecting a periodic option for a domain interface.
Domain interfaces are used for multiple purposes:
Connecting domains or assemblies
187

Domain Interfaces are required to connect multiple unmatched meshes within a domain (for example,
when there is a hexahedral mesh volume and a tetrahedral mesh volume within a single domain)
and to connect separate domains.
Modeling changes in reference frame between domains
This occurs when you have a stationary and a rotating domain or domains rotating at different rates.
Creating periodic interfaces between regions
This occurs when you are reducing the size of the computational domain by assuming periodicity in
the simulation.
10.4.1.4. Simplify Streamline Geometry Check Box

Simplify Streamline Geometry is available only if the Surface Streamline option is selected.
Select the Simplify Streamline Geometry check box to interpolate a linear line in between points if
the streamline is almost linear. This will have negative effects if you plot a variable on the streamline
because the linearly interpolated line will omit the points in between the points that create the line.
10.4.2. Streamline: Color

There are two additional options for coloring streamlines not available on other objects. These are Time
and Unique. The Time option colors the streamline by the amount of time a massless particle would
take to get to each point of the streamline, starting at the location. The Unique option gives each
streamline a different color along its whole length, and can be used to track individual streamlines
through a domain. For details on how to use the rest of the Color tab, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
10.4.3. Streamline: Symbol

The Symbol tab adds markers to each streamline at given time intervals.
10.4.3.1. Show Symbols Check Box

Select the Show Symbols check box to draw symbols at a user-specified time interval along the
streamline.
10.4.3.1.1. Min Time

The Min Time setting specifies a minimum time to start plotting the symbols. The time value can also
be an expression. To create an expression, click the Expression
icon and enter the expression.
10.4.3.1.2. Max Time

The Max Time setting specifies a maximum time to stop plotting the symbols. The time value may also
be an expression. To create an expression, click the Expression
icon and enter the expression.
10.4.3.1.3. Interval
The Interval setting specifies the time interval at which you want to plot the symbols.
188
Streamline Command
10.4.3.1.4. Symbol
The same options are available for the Symbol setting for the vector object. For details, see Symbol (p. 182). The symbols are drawn along the vector for the streamline at the given point.
10.4.3.1.5. Symbol Size

This setting is identical to the Symbol Size setting for the vector object. For details, see Symbol
Size (p. 182).
10.4.3.2. Show Streams Check Box

Select the Show Streams check box to display the streamline or streamlines.
10.4.3.2.1. Stream Type

The Stream Type setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Line
Plots the streamline as a line.
Tube
Plots the streamline in tube shape.
Ribbon
Plots the streamline in a flat tube shape. Ribbons also displays axial rotation
of the fluid as it passes through the domain.
10.4.3.2.2. Line Width/Tube Width/Ribbon Width

These settings control the width of the streamline.
10.4.3.2.3. # of Sides
# of Sides is available only if the Tube option is selected. The # of Sides setting specifies the number
of sides to the tube. The minimum number of sides is 3 and the maximum is 20.
10.4.3.2.4. Initial Direction

Initial Direction is available only if the Ribbon option is selected. The Initial Direction setting specifies
the initial direction of the ribbon streamline.
10.4.4. Streamline: Limits

The Limits tab enables modification of the tolerance, segments, and maximum time settings.
10.4.4.1. Step Tolerance

The values for the streamline (location and direction) are calculated at points determined by the step
tolerance mode. You can choose to have streamline elements calculated relative to the mesh (grid) or
at absolute increments as shown in the table that follows:
10.4.4.1.1. Mode
189

Option
Description
Grid Relative
Specifies that the streamline must lie within the specified fraction of the local
grid cell size. Selecting Grid Relative means that the Tolerance is directly
proportional to the mesh spacing. In areas where the mesh has been refined
(such as areas where the flow pattern changes quickly), the Tolerance setting
reduces the distance between streamline points proportionately. This in turn
produces more accurate streamlines in these areas.
Absolute
Specifies that the calculation points for streamline elements must lie within
the Tolerance distance specified.
10.4.4.1.2. Tolerance
The Tolerance setting specifies the accuracy of the path. As the Tolerance setting becomes finer, the
accuracy increases but the calculation time increases.
10.4.4.2. Upper Limits

10.4.4.2.1. Max Segments
The Max Segments setting specifies the maximum number of segments allowed for a streamline before
it ends.
10.4.4.2.2. Max Time

The Max Time setting specifies the maximum time allowed to pass before the streamline ends. A time
of zero, in this case, represents infinite time (because zero would actually plot nothing).
10.4.4.2.3. Max Periods

The Max Periods setting is available only if the Cross Periodics check box is selected in the Geometry
tab. This setting sets the number of times a streamline is able to pass through a periodic boundary.
10.4.5. Streamline: Render

The render settings can be changed by clicking the Render tab. For details, see Render Details Tab (p. 21).
10.4.6. Streamline: View

10.5. Particle Track Command

In complex flows, it is often useful to track the flow of discrete particles through the flow field. These
particles interact with the fluid, following a path that is determined by the particle properties, as well
as by the mean and turbulent flow behavior. The tracking is useful in two ways:
Particle tracking can trace the mean flow behavior in and around complex geometries.
The injection of several particles from a point can help to display the turbulence properties of the flow.
190
Particle Track Command

In ANSYS FLUENT, particle tracking information is contained in a Fluent Particle Track XML file. For details
on creating a particle track file in ANSYS FLUENT, see Exporting Steady-State Particle History Data in
the FLUENT User's Guide. To learn how to import such a file into a case loaded in CFD-Post, see Import
FLUENT Particle Track File (p. 95). Once the FLUENT Particle Track file has been loaded, a Reread button
appears in the Particle Track details view. Clicking that button causes the particle track file to be reread
and automatically updates any object that has a dependency on that file.
In ANSYS CFX, particle tracking information is written to the results file. The parameters are set in the
pre-processor. CFD-Post also provides support for track files created in CFX by allowing the import of
particle tracking data from a separate file. If a CFX results file contains particle tracking data, an object
will exist in the tree view of type Res Particle Track.
The following characteristics of particle tracks will be discussed:
Particle Track: Geometry (p. 191)
Particle Track: Color (p. 194)
Particle Track: Symbol (p. 194)
Particle Track: Render (p. 195)
Particle Track: View (p. 195)
Particle Track: Info (p. 195)
Note
There are several ways to insert a particle track:
To insert a FLUENT particle track, select File > Import > Import FLUENT Particle Track File.
From the menu bar, select Insert > Particle Track.
From the toolbar, click the Particle Track
icon.
the tree view.
10.5.1. Particle Track: Geometry

10.5.1.1. Method
For ANSYS CFX cases, the Method setting has the following options:
Option
Description
From Res
Creates the particle track from the current .res file. This option is available only with a vali
results file.
191

Option
Description
CFX-4
Tracks From
File
Creates the particle track data from the selected file.
Note
You cannot load FLUENT Particle Track Files using this option; such files can be
loaded only via File > Import > Import FLUENT Particle Track File.
10.5.1.1.1. Domains
Domains is available only if the From Res option is selected. For details, see Domains (p. 143).
10.5.1.1.2. Material
Material is available only if the From Res option is selected. The Material setting selects a material
to emulate with the particle track.
10.5.1.2. File
File is available only for ANSYS CFX cases. The File setting specifies the filename of a file to load. You
may type in the filename or click Browse
and search for the file.
to open the Select CFX-4 Particle Track File dialog box,
10.5.1.3. Injections
For ANSYS FLUENT cases, the Injections setting enables you to filter by injection region.
10.5.1.4. Reduction Type

The Reduction Type setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Maximum
Number of
Tracks
Enables you to set the maximum number of tracks to be

plotted.
Reduction
Factor
Enables you to specify a reduction factor to decrease the

number of tracks to be plotted.
10.5.1.4.1. Reduction
Reduction is available only if the Reduction Factor option is selected. This setting is the same as
Factor for the Point Cloud object. For details, see Factor (p. 147).
10.5.1.4.2. Max Tracks

Max Tracks is available only if the Maximum Number of Tracks option is selected. The Max Tracks
setting specifies the maximum number of tracks to be plotted.
192
10.5.1.5. Limits Option

The Limits Option setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Up to Current
Timestep
Plots the track values up to the current timestep only.
Since Last
Timestep
Plots the track values from the previous timestep to the

current timestep.
User Specified.
Enables you to specify a beginning and ending time/distance.
Note
For transient cases, CFD-Post uses transient timesteps (as shown in the timestep selector) to
determine Since Last Timestep values; CFD-Post does not limit timesteps by solver
timesteps, or by what is written in the particle tracking XML file as separate times. Therefore,
if Since Last Timestep is selected, the tracks will be limited to the values between
the previous timestep (from that selected in the Timestep Selector) and the currently selected
timestep. If this is a steady-state case, this option will not limit the tracks in any way.
10.5.1.5.1. Limit Type and Start/End <variable>

Limit Type and Start/End <variable> are available only if the User Specified option is selected.
The Limit Type setting specifies the limiting variable for the plot, and Start/End <limiter> specify a
start and end value for the selected limiter.
For CFX cases, Limit Type can be either Time or Distance.
For FLUENT cases, Limit Type can be either Time or Diameter.
10.5.1.6. Filter Check Box

Select the Filter check box to specify filters. The settings included are Start Region, End Region, Diameter, Track, and the Match ALL/Match ANY options.
10.5.1.6.1. Start/End Region Check Boxes

These settings are available only if the From Res option is selected. Select the Start/End Region
check boxes to filter out the tracks that do not start or end in the selected region.
10.5.1.6.2. Diameter Check Box

Select the Diameter check box and set the corresponding text and list boxes to place restrictions on
particles at the injection location.
193
10.5.1.6.3. Track Check Box

Select the Track check box and enter numbers corresponding to tracks to display indicated tracks by
entering a comma-delimited list of track numbers. You may also enter a range of track numbers. For
example:
-5 specifies tracks 1 to 5
40- specifies track numbers above 40
10-100 specifies tracks 10 to 100.
You may view the Info tab to view the Total Tracks and Tracks Shown. For details, see Particle Track:
Info (p. 195).
10.5.1.6.4. Match ALL/Match ANY Options

Select Match All to display only the tracks that meet all of the specified Filter conditions. Selecting
Match Any draws all tracks that meet one or more of the selected conditions.
10.5.2. Particle Track: Color

10.5.3. Particle Track: Symbol

10.5.3.1. Show Symbols Check Box
This setting and its options are similar to those for the Show Symbols check box for the streamline
object, as described in Show Symbols Check Box (p. 188). The differences are that a particle track has a
Max Time is setting and different symbol size options.
The Size Option choices are Constant and Particle Diameter:
When Size Option is Constant, the symbol size is constant for all particles. The particle size displayed is
a mean particle diameter size multiplied by the value you set with the Scale setting.
When Size Option is Particle Diameter, the Scale Type can be Absolute or Relative.
When Scale Type is Absolute, the particle size displayed is a mean particle diameter size multiplied
by the value you set with the Scale setting.
When Scale Type is Relative, symbol sizes are scaled by the domain.
Note
Enabling symbols for single-point tracks will cause CFD-Post to show symbols for each point
that exists between the Min. Time and Max. Time. The interval setting has no effect because
there is no interval to show. This behavior is different than for tracks that have segments,
because tracks without segments are not visible unless a symbol is drawn on them.
For particle tracks that have no lines for the given set of tracks, CFD-Post evaluates each
point for the tracks against the Min. Time and Max. Time and, if the time on that vertex
194

falls between those times, a symbol is drawn. Therefore, track symbols will exist on track
vertices that have differing times (that is, it will not just be a symbol at 1.0 s for all tracks;
rather, it will be a symbol for all track points with a time between 0.5 s and 1.0 s).
10.5.3.1.1. Max Time is

The Max Time is setting has the following options:
Option
Description
User Specified
Enables you to enter a custom value for the maximum time

value. This is the default for steady-state simulations.
Current
Time
Uses the current timestep as the maximum time value. This

is the default for transient simulations.
10.5.3.2. Show Tracks Check Box

The settings for this check box are the same as for the Show Streams check box for the streamline
object. For details, see Show Streams Check Box (p. 189).
10.5.3.3. Show Track Numbers Check Box

Select the Show Track Numbers check box to display and edit the appearance of track numbers. The
track numbers will be displayed at the beginning of each numbered track. This setting and its options
are similar to the Show Numbers check box for the contour object. For details, see Show Numbers
Check Box (p. 184).
10.5.4. Particle Track: Render

The render settings can be changed by clicking the Render tab. For details, see Render Details Tab (p. 21).
10.5.5. Particle Track: View

10.5.6. Particle Track: Info

The Info tab displays information about the current state of the particle tracks. Note that the File field
is read-only for FLUENT particle track cases.
Note that CFD-Post shows the tracks displayed after reduction and filtering. Track Limiting is just a
way to show parts of a track that are displayed (after reduction and filtering); if a track happens not to
be visible during the Track Limiting range, then nothing will be shown for that track, but the number
of tracks and the track index range is always reported for all tracks.
Tip
If you want to see the track numbers for that particle tracks that are visible within the limits,
you can turn on Show Track Numbers in the Symbol tab.
195

If you have changed settings on another tab menu, you must click Apply before the information is
updated.
10.6. Volume Rendering Command

The Volume Rendering feature enables you to visualize field variables throughout the entire domain
by varying the transparency and color of the plot as a function of the variable value. For example, you
can make realistic images of smoke and analyze how it spreads and how the smoke affects visibility.
Tip
A gradient background in the viewer can interfere with the interpretation of volume rendering
results. You may find it useful to set the viewer background to solid white so that the
gradients of the solution itself are easier to see. You can set the viewer background with the
Tools > Options > CFD-Post > Viewer > Background: Color Type option.
The following characteristics of volume rendering will be discussed:

Volume Rendering: Geometry (p. 197)
Volume Rendering: Color (p. 197)
Volume Rendering: Render (p. 198)
Volume Rendering: View (p. 198)
196
Volume Rendering Command
10.6.1. Volume Rendering: Geometry

The Geometry tab has the following settings:
Domains
Where the Volume Rendering will be calculated.
Variable
The name of the variable to be used in determining the transparency of the object.
Range
Range enables you to plot using the Global, Local or User Specified range of a variable. This affects the
variation of transparency used when plotting the object in the Viewer.
The Global range option uses the variable values from the results in all domains (regardless of the
domains selected on the Geometry tab) and all timesteps (when applicable) to determine the minimum
and maximum values.
The Local range option uses only the variable values on the current object at the current timestep to
set the maximum and minimum range values. This option is useful to use the full transparency range
on an object.
Boundary Data
You can specify the use of Hybrid or Conservative values. For help on the use of Hybrid or Conservative
values, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values in the CFX Reference Guide.
Transparency Scale
Sets calculation of the object transparency with either a Linear or Logarithmic scale. By default, the scale
is Linear.
Transparency Map
The name of the color map to use when rendering the transparency of the object.
Note
You can create your own transparency map by clicking the map editor icon
. It is
possible to invert the transparency gradient (making larger data values more transparent),
but using an inverted transparency gradient with a user-specified range of values may
cause holes to appear in the plot.
Resolution
The number of plane cuts per axis. The larger the number of plane cuts, the finer the resolution in the
volume rendering.
Transparency Factor
The factor applied to the overall transparency of the plot. Values can range from 0 (fully opaque) to 1
(fully transparent).
10.6.2. Volume Rendering: Color

Note that the transparency of the selected color map is disregarded; only the colors of the selected
color map are used.
197
10.6.3. Volume Rendering: Render

Tab (p. 21).
10.6.4. Volume Rendering: View

Important
Volume rendering data displays properly for translational and reflective instances, but not
for rotational instances.
10.7. Text Command

Text can be added to the viewer for titles, annotations, or comments in CFD-Post.
The following characteristics of text will be discussed:
Text: Definition (p. 198)
Text: Location (p. 199)
Text: Appearance (p. 200)
Note
There are several ways to insert a text object:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Object >Text.
From the toolbar, click the Text
icon.
the tree view.
10.7.1. Text: Definition

10.7.1.1. Text String
The Text String setting enters text for the object. When <aa> appears, auto-annotation will be embedded there.
10.7.1.2. Embed Auto Annotation Check Box

Select the Embed Auto Annotation check box to insert auto-annotation into the text string.
198
Text Command
10.7.1.2.1. Type
Option
Description
Expression
Adds an expression, selected from a list, to the text string.
Timestep
Adds the current timestep to the text string.
Time Value
Adds the current time value to the text string.
Filename
Adds the filename or the entire pathname to the text string.
File Date
Adds the date that the file was created to the text string.
File Time
Adds the time that the file was created to the text string.
10.7.1.2.2. Expression
Expression is available only if the Expression option is selected. The Expression setting specifies
an expression to enter into the text string.
10.7.1.2.3. Format (for Filename option)

Format is available only if the Filename option is selected. The Format setting selects either Entire
Path or Filename Only to insert into the text string.
10.7.1.2.4. Format (for the File Date and File Time options)
Format is available if either the File Date or File Time options are selected. The Format setting
selects a time format to enter into the text string.
10.7.1.3. More/Fewer Buttons

Click the More button to create another line of text. Click the Fewer button to remove these added
lines of text.
10.7.2. Text: Location

10.7.2.1. Location
10.7.2.1.1. Position Mode
The Position Mode setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Two Coords
Specifies the text to sit in the Viewer in the 2D plane.
Three Coords
Specifies the text to be fixed to one point in the Viewer

and rotate with that point when the view is rotated.
10.7.2.1.2. X Justification
This setting is available only if the Two Coords option is selected and is the same for the Legend
object. For details, see X Justification (p. 204).
199
10.7.2.1.3. Y Justification
This setting is available only if the Two Coords option is selected and is the same for the Legend
object. For details, see Y Justification (p. 204).
10.7.2.1.4. Position (for Two Coords option)

Position is available only if the Two Coords option is selected. The Position setting specifies a fixed
2D point at which the text will be displayed.
10.7.2.1.5. Position (for Three Coords option)

Position is available only if the Three Coords option is selected. The Position setting specifies a 3D
point at which the text will be displayed.
10.7.2.1.6. Rotation
The Rotation setting specifies a rotation for the text about the bottom-left corner of text in a counterclockwise direction. When the X/Y Justification is set to Center, the object rotates about the center
point of the text.
10.7.3. Text: Appearance

10.7.3.1. Height
The Height setting specifies a text height. The value is equivalent to a fraction of the Viewer size.
10.7.3.2. Color Mode

This setting and its corresponding settings are the same for the Contour object. For details, see Color
Mode (p. 184).
10.7.3.3. Font
The Font setting specifies a font type for the text from a list.
10.8. Coordinate Frame Command

In CFD-Post it may be necessary to define a new coordinate frame for certain quantitative operations,
which are described in Function Calculator (p. 248).
Note
There are several ways to insert a coordinate frame:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Coordinate Frame.
From the toolbar, click the Coordinate Frame
icon.
Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu
in the tree view.
200
Coordinate Frame Command

You cannot use a user-defined coordinate frame as part of a general CEL expression. For example,
radius = sqrt(x_myAxis^2 + y_myAxis^2) is not valid.
,
For information on how to define a coordinate frame, see Coordinate Frame Details (p. 201).
10.8.1. Coordinate Frame: Definition

10.8.1.1. Type
The Type setting is always set to Cartesian.
10.8.1.2. Origin
The Origin setting specifies 3D coordinates corresponding to the location of the new Coordinate Frame.
10.8.1.3. Z Axis Point

The Z Axis Point setting specifies a point on the Z axis from the origin.
10.8.1.4. X-Z Plane Pt

The X-Z Plane Pt setting specifies a point in the XZ plane used to define the positive X axis direction.
10.8.1.5. Symbol Size

The Symbol Size setting scales the size of the coordinate frame being edited.
10.8.1.6. Coordinate Frame Details

A coordinate frame is created by specifying three points. It is important to understand how these three
points are used to create a coordinate frame.
The first point is the origin for the new coordinate frame (labelled Origin in the Definition tab). The
second point is used to create a Z axis in the new frame. A vector is calculated from the Origin to the
point defined in the Z Axis Point box and used as the third axis of the new coordinate frame. The plane
normal to the Z axis is now set and contains both the X and Y axes.
A third point entered into the X-Z Plane Pt box is needed to define the location of the X and Y axis in
the plane normal to the Z axis. The X-Z Plane Pt point, along with the two points already specified,
define a plane that lies in the X-Z plane (see diagram below). Because the X axis must now lie in both
201

the X-Z plane and the plane normal to the Z axis, its location must be the line of intersection between
the two planes. The positive direction for the X axis is the same side as the X-Z Plane Pt point lies with
respect to the Z axis.
Finally, because the Y axis must be perpendicular to both the X Axis and the Z Axis, its positive direction
is determined by the right-hand rule.
If X-Z Plane Pt is specified such that it lies on Axis 3, an error is displayed. The projection of the XZ Plane Pt onto the plane normal to the Z axis would be on the origin and does not give enough information to define the X axis.
10.9. Legend Command

Default and user-defined legends can be plotted in the viewer to show the mapping between colors
and quantities for plots that are colored by variable values.
The following characteristics of legends will be discussed:
Default Legends (p. 203)
User-defined Legends (p. 203)
Legend: Definition Tab (p. 203)
Legend: Appearance Tab (p. 205)
Note
There are several ways to insert a legend:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Legend.
From the toolbar, click the Legend
202
icon.
Legend Command
the tree view.
10.9.1. Default Legends

Each view/figure has a Default Legend object that appears whenever an eligible plot is created or
updated. As further objects are added to, or updated in, a viewport, the Default Legend updates
to show the variable values for the latest plot.
Only the default legend for the selected view/figure is shown in the tree view. The other default legends
continue to exist, even when not displayed in the tree view.
10.9.2. User-defined Legends

To create a user-defined legend, select Insert > Legend.
10.9.3. Legend: Definition Tab

10.9.3.1. Plot
The Plot setting is available only when creating or modifying a user-defined legend (not the default
legends). Select from a list of objects for the legend to act on.
10.9.3.2. Title Mode

The Title Mode setting has the following options:
Option
Description
No Title
Omits the title.
Variable
Sets the title to the name of the variable mapped by

the legend.
Variable
and Location
Variable and Location is the same as Variable except that the name of the locator is appended
to the title.
User Specified
Enables you to specify a custom title.
10.9.3.3. Title
The Title text box is available only after the User Specified option has been selected. This setting
enters a custom title.
203
10.9.3.4. Show Legend Units Check Box

Clearing the Show Legend Units check box will hide the legend units. By default, the check box is selected, and so units are displayed.
Note
The legend will always display Temperature in absolute units: if C or K are selected as temperature units, the legend's data will be displayed in K; if F or R are selected, the legend's
data will be displayed in R. For details, see Function Calculator (p. 248).
10.9.3.5. Vertical / Horizontal Options

Selecting Vertical or Horizontal will display the legend vertically or horizontally in the Viewer.
10.9.3.6. Location
10.9.3.6.1. X Justification
The X Justification setting has the following options:
Option
Description
None
Enables you to specify a custom X location using the

Position text boxes.
Left
Places the legend on the left side of the viewer.
Center
Places the legend in the center of the viewer.
Right
Places the legend on the right side of the viewer.
10.9.3.6.2. Y Justification
The Y Justification setting has the following options:
Option
Description
None
Enables you to specify a custom Y location using the

Position text boxes.
Top
Places the legend at the top of the viewer.
Center
Places the legend in the center of the viewer.
Bottom
Places the legend at the bottom of the viewer.
10.9.3.6.3. Position
The Position text boxes specify a custom point at which to position the legend. This setting is available
after the None option is selected for the X and/or Y Justification settings. The values entered are
fractions of the screen width/height for x and y respectively. For example, 0.2 for the X value would
place the legend 1/5 across the screen from the left. A value of 0.2 for the Y direction would place the
legend 1/5 up from the bottom of the Viewer. The placement uses the bottom left corner of the legend
as a reference.
204
Legend Command
10.9.4. Legend: Appearance Tab

10.9.4.1. Sizing Parameters
10.9.4.1.1. Size
The Size setting scales the legend height to a fraction of the Viewer height.
10.9.4.1.2. Aspect
The Aspect setting specifies the width of the color range bar.
10.9.4.2. Text Parameters

10.9.4.2.1. Precision
The Precision setting specifies the number of significant digits after the decimal place that the legend
can hold. You may also choose to display the numbers in a Fixed or Scientific format.
10.9.4.2.2. Value Ticks

The Value Ticks text box holds the number of intervals that you want shown by the legend.
10.9.4.2.3. Font
The Font setting specifies a font for the interval labels.
10.9.4.2.4. Color Mode

The Color Mode setting specifies whether to use a User Specified color or the Default color.
10.9.4.2.5. Color
The Color setting specifies a color for the title and interval labels. You can click the color bar to browse
through predefined colors, or click the Color Selector
dialog box.
icon and select a color from the Select color
10.9.4.2.6. Text Rotation

The Text Rotation setting specifies a value in degrees to rotate the text at (in a counterclockwise direction from horizontal).
10.9.4.2.7. Text Height

The Text Height setting specifies a value corresponding to the text height of the legend relative to the
Viewer size. You may enter a value between 0.005 and 0.1.
Note
When using a legend as the basis for quantitative analysis, you should ensure that lighting
is turned off for any objects colored by a variable. This will give you exact matches between
object colors and legend colors.
205
10.10. Instance Transform Command

Instance Transforms are used to specify how an object should be drawn multiple times. CFD-Post can
create Instance Transforms using rotation, translation, and reflection. For example, if you have a mesh
that contains one blade from a blade row that contains 51 blades, you would set Number of Passages
to 51. You could then choose to display any number of blades by setting Number of Graphical Instances.
To apply an Instance Transform to an object, select the Apply Instancing Transform check box on the
View tab for the object and select the transform from a list.
The following characteristics of instance transforms will be discussed:
Default Transform Object (p. 206)
Instance Transform: Definition Tab (p. 206)
Instance Transform: Example (p. 208)
Note
There are several ways to insert an instance transform:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Instance Transform.
From the toolbar, click the Instance Transform
icon.
10.10.1. Default Transform Object

By default, an Instance Transform called Default Transform (which is set to apply no instancing
by default) is applied to all objects where Instance Transforms are possible. As a result, editing the
definition of Default Transform will cause all plots and objects to be transformed (unless you
modify the View properties for a particular object). An example is available for applying Instance
Transforms. For details, see Instance Transform: Example (p. 208). Note that instancing is purely geometric
(in the Viewer). This means that quantitative calculations are carried out for the original geometry.
10.10.2. Instance Transform: Definition Tab

10.10.2.1. Instancing Info From Domain Check Box
Clear the Instancing Info From Domain check box to enable creating a custom Instance Transform
object. Selecting Instancing Info From Domain will ignore the application of the Instance Transform
inside the domain.
10.10.2.2. Number of Graphical Instances

The Number of Graphical Instances setting specifies the number of copies to be made of the object
when it is transformed.
206
Instance Transform Command

If the Instance Transform object is using more than one of the following check boxes, (Apply Rotation,
Apply Translation, and Apply Reflection/Mirroring) the order in which each segments are applied
are rotation, translation, then reflection.
10.10.2.3. Apply Rotation Check Box

Select the Apply Rotation check box if you want to apply a rotation.
10.10.2.3.1. Method
Option
Description
Principal
Axis
Rotates about a principal axis.
Rotation
Axis
Rotates about a user-specified axis.
10.10.2.3.2. Axis
Axis is available only if the Principal Axis option is selected. The Axis setting specifies a principal
axis to rotate about.
10.10.2.3.3. From/To Text Boxes

These settings are available only if the Rotation Axis option is selected. These settings create an
axis of rotation.
10.10.2.3.4. Full Circle Check Box

Select the Full Circle check box to uniformly distribute the copies around 360 degrees of rotation.
10.10.2.3.5. Angle From

The Angle From setting has the following options:
Option
Description
Instances
in 360
Splits 360 degrees into the amount of passages entered

and places a copy at each passage, if possible.
Value
Evenly distributes copies from zero to the specified angle.
10.10.2.3.6. Number of Passages

Number of Passages is available only if the Instances in 360 option is selected. The Number of
Passages setting specifies a value for the number of passages in 360 degrees.
10.10.2.3.7. Passages per Component

Passages per Component is available only if the Instances in 360 option is selected. The Passages
per Component setting specifies a value for the number of passages per component.
207
10.10.2.3.8. Angle
Angle is available only if the Value option is selected. The Angle setting specifies the rotational angle.
10.10.2.4. Apply Translation Check Box

Select the Apply Translation check box if you want to specify a translation.
10.10.2.4.1. Translation
The Translation setting specifies a 3D translation.
10.10.2.5. Apply Reflection/Mirroring Check Box

Select the Apply Reflection/Mirroring check box to select a reflection method and direction.
Tip
A quick way to define a reflection for your case is to right-click on the Wireframe near the
reflection plane and select Reflect/Mirror.
10.10.2.5.1. Method
Option
Description
YZ Plane
Specifies a reflection about the YZ plane.
ZX Plane
Specifies a reflection about the ZX plane.
XY Plane
Specifies a reflection about the XY plane.
From Plane
Specifies a reflection about a user-specified plane.
10.10.2.5.2. X/Y/Z
These settings are available only if one of the principal plane options are selected. These settings specify
the distance along the normal axis to the plane to reflect by.
10.10.2.5.3. Plane
Plane is available only if the From Plane option is selected. The Plane setting specifies a plane from
the list.
10.10.3. Instance Transform: Example

The following example shows how coupling of rotation and reflection instancing can be used to simulate
reflection in two planes using a random geometry.
208
Instance Transform Command
The axis of rotation is defined using the Rotation Axis feature on the Rotation section of the Instance
Transform tab. An axis parallel to the z-axis was set. Rotation only was applied initially. An angle of
180 degrees was implemented.
The next step involves creating an XY plane (called Plane 1) at X= -1 and Z=1. For details, see Plane
Command (p. 150). After clicking to expand the Reflection/Mirroring submenu, reflection is applied on
Plane 1.
209
10.11. Clip Plane Command

A clip plane enables you to define a plane that hides all objects displayed in the Viewer that lie to one
side of the plane. For example, you could use an XY plane and clip it at Z=1 so that objects are visible
only where Z is less than or equal to 1 (or greater than or equal to 1 if the Flip Normal check box is
selected).
A clip plane will act on all objects in the Viewer, including the Wireframe, but will not affect other
functions such as calculations (that is, a calculation will still use the entire location, whether visible or
not).
Note
There are several ways to insert a clip plane:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Clip Plane.
From the toolbar, click the Clip Plane
icon.
the tree view.
Important
When a clip plane is coincident with regions, boundaries, or interfaces that are planes, the
results of a Save Picture command may not match what you see in the 3D Viewer (depending
on the orientation of the case). In this situation, set the Use Screen Capture check box.
210
Color Map Command
10.11.1. Clip Plane: Geometry

10.11.1.1.1. Method
Method has the same options and settings as for the Plane object, except for the From Slice
Plane option. For details, see Method (p. 150). From Slice Plane enables you to select a predefined
slice plane.
10.11.1.1.2. Slice Plane

Slice Plane is available only if the From Slice Plane option is selected. The Slice Plane setting
selects a plane to clip by.
10.11.1.2. Flip Normal Check Box

Select the Flip Normal check box to cut all objects in the negative normal direction. If the check box
is cleared, the Clip Plane cuts all objects in the positive normal direction.
Note
To enable/disable Clip Planes, you must use a Viewer shortcut menu command. For details,
see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 75).
10.12. Color Map Command

To access the Color Map editor, from the menu bar select Insert > Color Map.
Note
The Transparency editor is similar to the Color Map editor, except that it controls the density
of a color, rather than the color itself. It is currently used only in conjunction with Volume
Rendering objects.
You can apply a color to the opaque color point to better visualize the transparency gradient
in the Preview area of the Transparency editor, but the color will not be used in the Viewer.
To access the Transparency editor, click the icon on the Volume Rendering editor.
The color map editor has the following controls:
Color Map Style
The Color Map Style controls whether the Color Map is a Gradient, which forms continuous bands of
colors between any number of color points that you set, or Zebra, which forms bands between only
two color points, using a number of divisions that you set with the divisions counter.
In gradient mode, all Color Map controls other than divisions are enabled; in zebra mode, Insert,
Delete, and Distribute are all disabled and the Position indicator is read-only (and reflects the
setting in the divisions indicator).
211

Preview
The Preview both shows the results of your edits and enables you to modify your color points. One
color point will always be longer than the others; this indicates the color point that you can drag with
the mouse or modify with the controls in the Color Point Properties area: the Color definition bar, the
Transparency slider, and (in gradient mode) the Position indicator.
You can navigate from one color point to the next by:
Clicking a color point
Clicking Next or Previous.
In gradient mode, you can insert a new color point by:
Clicking Insert to add a color point mid way between the current color point and its neighbor.
Clicking on the Preview bar to insert the color point and, if necessary, adjusting its location by typing
a value in the Position field.
Color
The Color control enables you to change the color of the active color point. When you click the color
field, it cycles through ten preset colors. To define any color, click the Color selector
of the Color option and select one of the available colors.
icon to the right
Transparency
The Transparency slider enables you to control how opaque each color is.
Insert, Delete, Next, Previous, Distribute
The color point buttons control the number of color points, which color point is active, and the distribution
of color points. In Zebra mode, only the buttons that control the active color point are enabled.
Symbol
Option
Description
Insert
Add a color point mid way between the

current color point and its neighbor
Delete
Delete the selected color point
Previous
Select the previous color point
Next
Select the next color point
Distribute
Evenly distribute the defined color points
Make available in other cases, Set as default

These settings control where the color map is stored; unless you specify otherwise, the color map you
define will be available only with the current file.
If you select Make available in other cases, the color map will be stored in your preferences file
when you click Apply.
212
Table Command
If you select Set as default, when you click Apply the color map will be stored in your preferences
file and will be the default color map for all future objects in all future files. For this reason Make
available in other cases will also be enabled automatically.
Note
The default CFD-Post color map is not the same as the default FLUENT color map. To use
the default FLUENT color map for a particular locator (such as a contour):
1.
Select File > Load Results and double-click the desired file.
2.
Select the locator from the Insert menu.

a.
On the General tab for the locator, set Color Map to Fluent Rainbow.
b.
On the Render tab, clear the Lighting check box.
c.
Make any other changes desired and click OK.
10.13. Variable Command

There are several ways to insert a variable:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Variable.
From the toolbar, click the Variable
icon.
In the CFD-Post workspace, click the Variables tab.

Each of these methods inserts a new variable and opens the Variables workspace. For details, see
Variables Workspace (p. 45).
10.14. Expression Command

There are several ways to insert an expression:
From the menu bar, select Insert > Expression.
From the toolbar, click the Expression
icon.
In the CFD-Post workspace, click the Expressions tab.

Each of these methods inserts a new expression and opens the Expression workspace. For details, see
Expressions Workspace (p. 51).
10.15. Table Command

The Insert > Table command opens a table for editing in the Table Viewer tab. In addition to that
method, you can also create a table as follows:
213

From the toolbar, click the Create Table
icon.
In the Table Viewer tab, click the New Table
icon.
Each of these methods inserts a new table under the Report object. To see the table in the report,
you must generate the report. For details, see Report (p. 29).
To learn how to work with tables, see Editing in the Table Viewer (p. 214).
10.15.1. Editing in the Table Viewer

Note
When multiple cases are loaded, the Default Case field enables you to specify which case
the table values apply to. If the cases are in case-comparison mode, you have the option of
creating a table that uses values from the differences in values between cases 1 and 2.
Changing the Default Case field removes all unsaved values and definitions from the table.
To enter data into a cell, select a cell and type in the information you want. To edit the current contents
of a cell in the cell itself (rather than in the cell definition field), double-click the cell.
The cell contents can be formatted with bold, italic, and underline fonts; left, center, and right justification;
word wrapping; font sizes; and text and background colors. Multiple cells can be merged into a single
larger cell to allow large items (for example, titles) to span multiple cells. For details, see Table 10.2: Table
Viewer Tools Toolbar (p. 216).
To perform a formatting operation on multiple cells, click in the upper-left cell of the group and, while
pressing Shift, click in the lower-right cell of the group. While the group is highlighted, tool bar operations are applied to all cells in the group.
Numeric data, (that is, numbers alone, numbers with units, and expression results), can be formatted
to display in scientific or fixed notation with a specified number of significant digits.
Table contents can be cut (Ctrl+C) and pasted (Ctrl+V) into Microsoft Excel documents and vice versa.
10.15.1.1. Shortcut Menu

To access the shortcut menu for a table, type = into a cell and right-click the cell, or right-click the text
box for the selected cell above the table. The shortcut menu has all of the commands listed in
Table 10.1: Shortcut Menus Toolbar (p. 215), plus an Edit submenu that has the standard editing commands.
For faster expression entry, there is also a Shortcut Menus toolbar above the table with the following
items. Type = into the cell and click the given menu to display a variety of items that can be inserted
214
Table Command
automatically at the current cursor location. All, except Annotation, are also available in details view
for expressions.
Table 10.1: Shortcut Menus Toolbar
Type of Item to
Insert
Description
Select from the following submenus:
CFD-Post
Select from a list of predefined and user-defined functions from CFD-Post to insert into the cell. For details,
see CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post (p. 307).
CEL
Select from a list of predefined CEL functions. For details,
see CEL Mathematical Functions in the CFX Reference
Guide.
Enables you to specify CFD-Post expressions or expressions
that you have created with the Expressions workspace. For an
example of using the Expressions workspace, see Expressions
Workspace: Example (p. 53).
Select from a list of existing variables to insert into the cell.
Select from a list of existing locations to insert into the cell.
Select from a list of mathematical constants to insert into the
cell.
Select from the following menu items/submenus:
Time Step
Inserts the value of the current timestep.
Time Value
Inserts the value of the current time value.
File Name submenu
Name
Inserts the name of the current results file, including
the extension.
Path
Inserts the file path of the current results file.
File Date submenu
215

Type of Item to
Insert
Description
Select from a list of different date formats to insert into
the cell. The inserted value represents the date that the
file was created.
File Time submenu
Select from a list of different time formats to insert into
the cell. The inserted value represents the time of day
that the file was created.
10.15.1.2. Expressions
Tables in CFD-Post have the ability to evaluate and display expression results and update those results
when variables and/or locations they depend on change.
To enter an expression, edit a cell and prefix a valid CFD-Post expression with an equals sign (=). For
example, you may enter the following into a cell:
=2*areaAve(Pressure)@inlet
When the focus leaves the cell, the table displays the evaluated result of that equation in the cell. When
selecting a cell containing an expression, the expression is displayed in the cell editor box immediately
above the table. You can edit the expression in the cell editor box. Alternatively, you can double-click
the cell and edit the equation from the cell itself. For details on how to enter common expressions and
functions quickly, see Shortcut Menu (p. 214).
If there is an error in evaluating the expression contained in a table cell, the cell will be colored red.
The toolbar above the Table Viewer contains the following icons:
Table 10.2: Table Viewer Tools Toolbar
Icon
Description
Creates a new table.
Opens the Load Table from file dialog box.
Tables can be loaded from files in two different formats:
CFD-Post State Files (*.cst) - Loads the table CCL from the given state
file. If the file contains tables with names that already exist, numbers
will be added to the end of the names of the imported tables to differentiate them from existing tables.
Comma Separated Values Files (*.csv) - Loads the values in the CSV
file into a new table. You can specify the table name in the Load Table
dialog box.
Opens the Save Table to file dialog box.
Tables can be saved to several formats:
216
Table Command
Icon
Description
CFD-Post State (*.cst) - Saves the current table to a state file.
Tables saved in state files will maintain expressions and formatting and,
when reloaded, will exactly reproduce the original table.
HTML (*.htm, *.html) - Saves the current table to an HTML file. Note
that the saved HTML table will contain expression results, and not the
expressions. All formatting will be converted to the HTML equivalent.
Word-wrapping is always on. The Save Table dialog box contains additional formatting options including table title, caption, borders, margins,
spacing, and gridline visibility.
Comma Separated Values (*.csv) - Saves the current table to a
CSV file. Note that the saved table will contain expression results, not
the expressions. No formatting information is saved to the file. The Save
Table dialog box provides the option to clear the output of trailing
separators for table rows that have fewer columns than other rows. If
this option is on, extra commas will appear on some lines so that all
rows in the CSV file will contain the same number of columns. This format
can be directly imported to Microsoft Excel.
Text (*.txt) - Behaves identically to the CSV option, except that you
can specify the separator.
Edit operations for contents of cells: Cut, Copy, and Paste.
To select a rectangle of cells for an operation, click in the cell in the
upper-left corner, then Shift-click the cell in the lower-right corner.
The cells become highlighted and can be operated upon as a unit.
Font operations for text in cells: Bold, Italic, and Underline.
Text-alignment operations: Left, Center, and Right.
Makes all cells in the table wrap text.
Launches the Cell Formatting dialog box, where you can specify scientific or fixed notation, the precision, and whether to show the value
or the units (at least one of the value or units must appear).
Changes the size of the font used in the cell.
Opens the Select color dialog box for setting the background color.
Opens the Select color dialog box for setting the text color.
Causes a cell to span rows or columns (Merge Cells) or reverses that
operation (Unmerge Cells).
Here is an example of formatting applied to a table:
217

Figure 10.1: Sample Table Formatting
To format the table shown above:

1. Cells A1-D1: Applied bold font, background color, and text centering. Manually resized cell widths individually.
2. Cell A1: Applied text wrapping and resized cell height manually.
3. Cells A2-D6: Right-justified text.
4. Cells A2-A3: Manually changed the font color.
Note
To perform a formatting operation on multiple cells, click in the upper-left cell of the group
and, while pressing Shift, click in the lower-right cell of the group. While the group is highlighted, tool bar operations are applied to all cells in the group.
10.16. Chart Command

Charts are graphs that use lines and/or symbols to display data. You can create charts that can be used
on their own or in reports.
The following characteristics of charts will be discussed:
Creating a Chart Object (p. 218)
Viewing a Chart (p. 231)
Example: Charting a Velocity Profile (p. 231)
Note
When using the Turbo workspace to post-process a turbo-machinery case, several "Turbo
Charts" are created by default. For details, refer to Turbo Charts (p. 288).
10.16.1. Creating a Chart Object

To create and view a chart object:
218
Chart Command
1.
Click Create Chart
or select Insert > Chart.
The Insert Chart dialog box appears.

2.
Enter a name for the new chart object.
3.
Click OK.
The chart object appears under the Report heading in the tree view. A Details view appears for
the new chart object and the Chart Viewer takes focus.
4.
Edit the chart settings as appropriate for each tab:

Chart Details: General Tab (p. 219)
Chart Details: Data Series Tab (p. 223)
Chart Details: X Axis Tab (p. 225)
Chart Details: Y Axis Tab (p. 228)
Chart Details: Line Display Tab (p. 229)
Chart Details: Chart Display Tab (p. 230)
5.
Click Apply to see the results of your changes displayed in the Chart Viewer.
6.
Optionally, on the Data Series tab click the Get Information on the Item icon
for the current series.
7.
Optionally, click Export to save the chart data in a comma-separated values (CSV) file. You can load the
values in the CSV file into external programs such as Microsoft Excel.
to view summary data
To see the chart in the report, you must generate the report as described in Report (p. 29).
10.16.1.1. Chart Details: General Tab

The General tab is used to define the chart type, the main title, and the report caption.
10.16.1.1.1. Type
Option
Description
XY
Plots X axis variable vs. the Y axis variable. XY charts use

polyline or line locators to plot values that vary in space.
Transient
or Sequence
Plots an Expression (typically time) on the X axis and enables you to specify a variable to plot on the Y axis. Transient or Sequence charts use expressions or a point locator
to plot the variation of a scalar value vs. time or multiconfiguration runs.
219

Option
Description
Histogram
Plots the number of values or the proportion of values that

fall into each specified category.
10.16.1.1.2. Display Title: Title

The Title setting specifies a title for the Chart object. Clear the Display Title check box if you dont
require a chart title.
10.16.1.1.3. Report: Caption

The Caption is the description of the Chart object that appears in the report.
10.16.1.1.4. Fast Fourier Transform

The Fast Fourier Transform check box can be selected only for Transient or Sequence charts. When
the Fast Fourier Transform check box is selected, the following options are available:
Modify Input Signal Filter
Enables you to select the signal filter to be Hanning (default), Barlett, Blackman, Hamming, or
None. For details, see Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Theory (p. 220).
Subtract mean
Causes the mean to be subtracted from each value to better show the amplitude of the noise.
Note
This feature applies to all loaded files.
Full range of input data vs. Setting Min/Max Limits
You can choose to analyze the Full range of input data or to set Min and Max values. To get the range
for the Min and Max values, click Get range from FFT output
Reference Values
Click Reference Values to display the Reference Values dialog box. There you can set the following
values (which will apply to all Fast Fourier Transform charts): Reference Acoustic Pressure, Length,
Velocity, and whether to Save as default.
10.16.1.1.4.1. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Theory

When interpreting time-sequence data from a transient solution, it is often useful to look at the data's
frequency attributes. For instance, you may want to determine the major vortex-shedding frequency
from the time-history of the drag force on a body recorded during a simulation, or you may want to
compute the frequency distribution of static pressure data recorded at a particular location on a body
surface. Similarly, you may need to compute the frequency distribution of turbulent kinetic energy using
data for fluctuating velocity components.
To interpret some of these time-dependent data, you need to perform Fourier transform analysis. The
Fourier transform enables you to take any time-dependent data and resolve it into an equivalent summation of sine and cosine waves.
220
Chart Command
The CFD-Post FFT module assumes that the input data have been sampled at equal intervals and are
consecutive (in the order of increasing time).
The lowest frequency that the FFT module can pick up is given by
, where t is the total sampling
time. If the sampled sequence contains frequencies lower than this, these frequencies will be aliased
into higher frequencies.
, where
The highest frequency that the FFT module can pick up is

(or time step).
is the sampling interval
10.16.1.1.4.1.1. Windowing in Fast Fourier Transforms

The discrete FFT algorithm is based on the assumption that the time-sequence data passed to the FFT
corresponds to a single period of a periodically repeating signal. Because in most situations the first
and the last data points will not coincide, the repeating signal implied in the assumption can have a
large discontinuity. The large discontinuity produces high-frequency components in the resulting
Fourier modes, causing an aliasing error. You can condition the input signal before the transform by
"windowing" it, in order to avoid this problem.
(10.43)
Windowing is done by multiplying the original input data (

) by a window function

consecutive discrete (time-sequence) data that are sampled with a constant interval

Suppose there are

:
:
(10.44)
There are four different window functions:

Hamming's window:
(10.45)
< <
#"
$
%!
Hanning's window:
(
(10.46)
< <
('
)
0&
Barlett's window:
221
(10.47)
< <
Blackman's window:
(10.48)
< <
These window functions preserve 3/4 of the original data, affecting only 1/4 of the data the ends.
10.16.1.1.4.1.2. Using Fast Fourier Transforms
'&
"
% ! $

#
, a real-
is defined by:

The discrete Fourier transform of
The Fourier transform utility enables you to compute the Fourier transform of a signal,
valued function, from a finite number of its sampled points.
(10.49)
where
are the discrete Fourier coefficients, which can be obtained from:
7 3
2 ) 2(
1
4 @ 23659 0 (
8 4
=
(10.50)
The previous two equations form a Fourier transform pair that enables you to determine one from the
other.
Note that when you vary from 0 to
in Equation 10.49 (p. 222) or Equation 10.50 (p. 222) instead
corresponds to positive frequencies,
of from
to
, the range of index
and the range of index
+ corresponds to negative frequencies. = still corresponds
to zero frequency.
F E
G H
B
For the actual calculation of the transforms, the CFD-Post adopts the Fast Fourier transform (FFT) algorithm, which significantly reduces operation counts in comparison to the direct transform. Furthermore,
unlike most FFT algorithms in which the number of data should be a power of 2, the FFT utility in CFDPost employs a prime-factor algorithm. The number of data points permissible in the prime-factor FFT
algorithm is any products of mutually prime factors from the set 2,3,4,5,7,8,9,11,13,16, with a maximum
value of 720720=5x7x9x11x13x16. Therefore, the prime-factor FFT preserves the original data better
than the conventional FFT.
222
Chart Command
Just prior to computing the transform, CFD-Post determines the largest permissible number of data
points based on the prime factors, discarding the rest of the data.
10.16.1.1.5. Refresh Settings

Performing a refresh means re-reading files; therefore refreshing data from a series of files (such as
transient files for a transient case) is potentially a time-consuming operation. If necessary, CFD-Post
automatically performs a refresh of all charts when printing a chart and when generating or refreshing
a report. At other times, you have control over when to perform a "refresh" of the data. When the
General tab is set to create an XY transient or sequence chart, settings appear that control how charts
are refreshed:
Refresh chart on Apply
Causes only the currently displayed chart to be refreshed when you click Apply.
Refresh all charts on Apply
Causes all loaded charts to be refreshed when you click Apply. This is provided as a convenience; it
enables you to work on a series of charts, refreshing all of them when you are done your editing (rather
than clicking Apply on each chart individually).
10.16.1.2. Chart Details: Data Series Tab

The Data Series tab is used to specify the data series to be plotted and to define the lines and fills
used on the chart.
10.16.1.2.1. Name Controls

to
The Name list is where you add and delete data series on the chart. You can also click Statistics
display a dialog box that shows statistics about the data set. You perform all of these tasks by clicking
the icons beside the list area (New, Delete, Statistics). All the icons become enabled after you create an
initial series; in addition, all functions are available when you right-click a data series name.
223
10.16.1.2.2. Data Source

The fields in the Data Source area become enabled after you create an initial series.
For a General > XY chart or a General > Histogram chart, choose either Location or File to define the
source of the data for the series you are creating. A typical location would be a line or a streamline; a
typical data file would be a .csv file.
For a General > XY - Transient or Sequence chart, a typical Location would be a point. However, such
a chart will also accept a File or an Expression as the data source. For example, you could use an expression
to plot areaAve(Temperature)@Outlet as a function of time.
10.16.1.2.2.1. Data Source File Format

The data delimiter in a Data Source file is usually a comma.1
For files in which the data delimiter is a comma, the data file must include a [Data] line, after which
it is expected that the file's variable names will be listed with their units. For example:
[Data]
Z [ m ],Velocity [ m s^-1 ]
-0.10000000,4.53693390
1
There are two exceptions to this: if the extension of the file is .xy, then the delimiter is a tab character; If the extension of the file
is .out, then the delimiter is a space character.
224
Chart Command
-0.09797980,4.54303789
-0.09595960,4.54667473
-0.09393939,4.54347515
-0.09191919,4.54762697
...
This is the same format as CFD-Post's export file, so data exported from CFD-Post can directly be imported
back into CFD-Post in a chart line. Note, however, that if you export chart data for multiple chart
lines/series, resulting in multiple [Data] sections in the file (one for each line), and then try to import
them again into CFD-Post, only the data for the very first line will be imported; all other line data in the
file will be ignored.
Currently, CFD-Post uses only the first two columns of the file data, so any other columns will be ignored
completely. The first column will be used as the chart's X axis data, and the second column as the chart's
Y axis data.
For Histograms, the second column is used as the variable data, and will end up on the X Axis of the
chart as the Y Axis will be the "Count" or "Percentage" (whichever you have chosen).
Generally, if there is no [Data] part that defines the variable names, then "Loaded X Values" and
"Loaded Y Values" will be used as the default variable names. However, the .xy and .out files will
have no [Data] section (as that is a CFD-Post convention), so the default variable names will be used
in these cases.
Note
When exporting histogram data, the Y Axis data (that is, the counts) will be stored in the
CSV file with the variable name "Count(Histogram Data)". The "(Histogram Data)" suffix is
required if this information is imported into CFD-Post as it tells CFD-Post that this variable
must be interpreted as histogram data, and not as regular chart line data.
10.16.1.2.3. Custom Data Selection Controls

When enabled (which occurs when you have multiple lines to compare and when General > Fast
Fourier Transform is disabled), the Custom Data Selection controls enable you to override the settings
on the X Axis and Y Axis tabs for each series individually. See Chart Details: X Axis Tab (p. 225) and Chart
Details: Y Axis Tab (p. 228) for more details on what each setting means.
You can also specify the use of Hybrid or Conservative values or to use the absolute value of data
points. For help on the use of Hybrid or Conservative values, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable
Values.
Other available settings depend on the chart type; see X Axis Data Selection (p. 225) for details.
10.16.1.3. Chart Details: X Axis Tab

The X Axis tab is used to set properties for all data series that do not have custom data selection (which
is set on the Series tab). The options available on the X Axis tab vary according to the General tab's
Type setting.
10.16.1.3.1. X Axis Data Selection

The Data Selection settings control which variable is used as the data source and how the data is
processed:
225

When General > Type is XY or Histogram, the Variable field can be set to any variable. Hybrid vs.
Conservative sets how conservation equations for the boundary control volumes are solved. See Hybrid
and Conservative Variable Values for details. Take absolute value of data points controls whether the
values of data points are always positive.
When General > Type is XY Transient or Sequence, the Expression field can be set to expressions provided in CFD-Post or to expressions that you have defined. For example, you could use
this option to plot areaAve(Temperature)@Outlet as a function of time.
When General > Type is XY Transient or Sequence and Fast Fourier Transform in enabled,
you can define an X Function.
10.16.1.3.1.1. Specifying an X Function

The options for the X Function are related to the discrete frequencies at which the Fourier coefficients
are computed. You can apply the following specific analytic functions:
Frequency is defined as:
(10.51)
where N is the number of data points used in the FFT.

Strouhal Number is the nondimensionalized version of the frequency defined in the equation for
Frequency:

(10.52)

!

9
4
1 0
6 B 5 487A
%$ # "
Fourier Mode is the index in
and
)( ' &
where
and
are the reference length and velocity scales. Note that you can set
by clicking Reference Values on the General tab.
(10.53)
4
0
and/or
F
H
E C
(10.54)
I U G HQPT
I
H
D
G
C
which represents the nth or kth term in the Fourier transform of the signal.
Octave Band Full is a range of discrete frequency bands for different octaves within the threshold of
hearing. The range of each octave band is double to that of the previous band (see Table 10.3: Octave
Band Frequencies and Weightings (p. 227)).
226
Chart Command
One Third Full is a range of discrete frequency bands within the threshold of hearing. Here the range
of each band is one-third of an octave, meaning that there are three times as many bands for the same
frequency range.
Table 10.3: Octave Band Frequencies and Weightings
Lower Freq.
(Hz)
Center Freq.
(Hz)
Upper Freq.
(Hz)
dB
A
dB
B
dB
C
11
16
22
-56.7 28.5 -8.5
22
31.5
45
-39.4 -17.1 -3.0
45
63
90
-26.2 -9.3
-0.8
90
125
180
-16.1 -4.2
-0.2
180
250
355
-8.6 -1.3
0.0
355
500
710
-3.2 -0.3
0.0
710
1000
1400
0.0
0.0
0.0
1400
2000
2800
1.2
-0.1
-0.2
2800
4000
5600
1.0
-0.7
-0.8
5600
8000
11200
-1.1 -2.9
-3.0
11200
16000
22400
-6.6 -8.4
-8.5
10.16.1.3.2. Category Divisions

These controls are enabled when the chart type is Histogram.
If Category Divisions are set to Automatic, you are able to specify the Number of Divisions. If Category
Divisions are set to User Defined, you are able to specify the Division Values.
The Division Values field enables you to type points where you want to create histogram boundaries.
You can either enter user-defined category divisions by typing a comma-separated ordered list directly
into the Division Values text box, or click More
to open up an editor for the division values (which
includes the ability to set the values in a particular unit). If you use the editor, then the values do not
need to be entered in order as you will be offered the chance to sort the values when you close the
editor.
10.16.1.3.3. Axis Range

You can choose to Determine ranges automatically or to set Min and Max values. To get the range
for the Min and Max values, click Get range from existing chart
The default X-axis scale is linear but can be set to be a Logarithmic scale. Select Invert Axis to reverse
the direction of the scale.
10.16.1.3.4. Axis Number Formatting

You can have axis numbers set automatically or choose the format yourself:
If you select Determine the number formatting automatically, CFD-Post will change the formatting to
the one that best suits the data being plotted.
227

If you clear Determine the number formatting automatically, you can choose between scientific notation
and fixed notation, and set the amount of precision.
10.16.1.3.5. Axis Labels

You can choose to Use data for axis labels, or to use a Custom Label.
10.16.1.4. Chart Details: Y Axis Tab

The Y Axis tab is used to define the characteristics of the Y axis of the chart you are going to produce.
For descriptions of many of the fields on this tab, see Chart Details: X Axis Tab (p. 225). Fields unique to
this tab are described below.
10.16.1.4.1. Y Axis: Data Selection

When the General tab is set to create an XY or an XY transient or sequence chart, the Data Selection
includes a Variable that you can set; you can also control whether the boundary data is Hybrid or
Conservative, and whether or not to take the absolute value of data points.
When the General tab is set to create a histogram, the Y axis Value can be Count (which displays the
number of times a set of values occurs for a given range) or Percentage (where the sum of the histogram values = 100). The Weighting can be None, Geometrical, or Mass Flow. The weighting
setting changes the shape of the histogram by removing mesh dependencies (for example, if mesh
density varies along a line, counts are biased towards areas of higher density; the Geometrical setting
removes that bias).
When the General tab is set to Fast Fourier Transform, a Y Function field appears where you
can choose one of the following settings:
A Weighted | B Weighted | C Weighted
These options are available only when the X-Axis tab's X Function is set to Octave Band Full or One
Third Full.
Weighted scales characterize the loudness of a noise source and are designed to quantify sounds
by one single value in dB(Y) where Y is the weighted scale used. Four weighted scales are used in
industry: A, B, C and D; the A weighted scale is used almost exclusively in measurements.
Power Spectral Density
The distribution of signal power in the frequency domain. It has units of the signal magnitude squared
(Pa^2) and is defined as:
(10.55)
(10.56)
Sound Amplitude
Sound Amplitude (dB) is exactly one-half of the sound pressure level in the equation for Sound Pressure
Level. This quantity is also applicable for acoustics analysis.
!
"

228
(10.57)
Chart Command
Sound Pressure Level
Sound Pressure Level (dB) is the decibel level. For either general or acoustic data, when the sampled
data is pressure (for example, static pressure or sound pressure), you can compute the power in decibel
units using

is the acoustic pressure and
(10.58)
is the reference acoustic pressure. Note that you

!

can set
where
by clicking Reference Values on the General tab.
Magnitude
The square root of the power spectral density.
(10.59)
&
'# $
'# "
10.16.1.5. Chart Details: Line Display Tab

On the Line Display tab you can set the Line Style to a variety of settings, including Automatic,
Solid, Dash, Dot, and so on.
You can select the Use series name for legend name check box to derive the name of the line (as it
appears in the legend) from the series' name (as defined on the Data Series tab and, if more than one
case is loaded, from the case name). Alternatively, you can clear that check box and type in a new Legend
Name.
You can have CFD-Post Automatically generate Line Color or you can click the bar beside Line Color
to cycle through 10 basic colors. (Click the right-mouse button to cycle backwards.) Alternatively, you
can choose any color by clicking Color Selector
to the right of the Line Color option.
Use the Symbols drop-down menu to place a graphic at every data point of the series. Use the Symbol
Color control to set a color for the graphic the same way you did for the Line Color.
Note
Line width and symbol size can be set on the Chart Display tab for the chart as a whole,
but cannot be set for each line individually.
10.16.1.5.1. Fill Area Controls

When Fill Area is enabled, you can choose to have a fill color generated automatically or at all times
(Always On). The Automatic setting generates a fill when the chart's General tab's Type is set to
Histogram.
Note
Plotting fill areas for graphs that have multiple y values for a given x (such as streamlines)
does not produce useful results.
229
10.16.1.6. Chart Details: Chart Display Tab

The following sections describe the Chart Display tab.
10.16.1.6.1. Display Legend Area

The legend is the text that you entered in the Name field on the Data Series tab displayed beside the
line color that represents its data source.
When Display Legend is enabled, the chart's legend appears, either Outside Chart or Inside Chart.
When Outside Chart is selected, set the Location and Justification of the legend:
Location is Below or Above, Justification can be Left, Center, or Right.
Location is Right or Left, Justification can be Top, Center, or Bottom.
When Inside Chart is selected, the legend is displayed in a box that appears on the chart. Use the X
Justification and Y Justification controls to locate a fixed-size box at standard locations, optionally
using Width/Height to change the size of the box. Alternatively, set X Justification and Y Justification
to None so that you can use Position and Width/Height to control the size and position of the box
exactly.
10.16.1.6.2. Sizes Area

Here you set the width of the line and the size of the symbol (if any) that you defined on the Line
Display tab. These sizes apply to all lines and all symbols (you cannot set sizes for individual lines or
symbols).
10.16.1.6.3. Fonts Area

Here is where you control the font type and size of the Title (which you defined on the General tab),
the Axes Titles, the Axes values, and the Legend.
Note
By default, the titles of the axes are derived from the variables used in the line definition
(not necessarily from the X Axis and Y Axis tabs because a transient chart that uses an expression and any chart that uses custom data selection will set the variables used directly).
You can override these default titles by going to the X Axis and Y Axis tabs, clearing the
Use data for axis labels check box, and typing in a Custom Label name.
The legend text is defined by default as a combination of the series definitions on the Series
tab and, when more than one case is loaded, the case names, but can be specified on a lineby-line basis directly on the Line Display tab by clearing the Use series name for legend
name check box and typing in a Legend Name.
10.16.1.6.4. Grid Area

Here is where you configure the background grid (if any) and the thickness of its major and minor lines.
230
Chart Command
10.16.2. Viewing a Chart

After a chart object has been created, you can view it in the Chart Viewer tab after selecting it in the
tree view, or by including the chart in a report and viewing the report. For details, see Viewing the Report (p. 44).
Time charts, which depict transient runs, have a Refresh button at the top of the page. When CFD-Post
determines that the chart requires updates, a note appears beside the Refresh button. Refreshes are
generally not automatic in order to ensure that you can make a series of changes without having to
wait through the update required by each change. However, time charts are updated automatically
when you print the chart, when a report is previewed, or when a report is generated (HTML/text).
Note
As time charts are compute-intensive, they are generated only after user action. And because
time chart data is not included in a state file, loading a state file will show an empty chart
until you click Apply in the chart details view or Refresh in the Chart Viewer.
10.16.3. Example: Charting a Velocity Profile

This example demonstrates how a polyline locator can be used to create a chart of a velocity profile.
1.
Load the following results file, which is provided with your installation: <CFXROOT>/examples/StaticMixer_001.res.
2.
Insert a plane (Insert > Location > Plane) and define its location using the point and normal method.
Define the point to be (0,0,0) and the normal to be (0,1,0) so that the plane is normal to the Y axis;
click Apply when you are done. For details, see Plane: Geometry (p. 150).
3.
Insert a polyline (Insert > Location > Polyline) and define its location using the Boundary Intersection method.
Set Boundary List to out and Intersect With to the plane you just created; click Apply when you
are done. For details, see Polyline: Geometry (p. 172).
4.
Create a new chart by clicking Create chart
5.
In the Insert Chart dialog box, enter a name for the chart, and then click OK.
The details view for the chart appears.

6.
On the General tab, set Title to Velocity Profile at Outlet.
7.
Click the Data Series tab.
8.
Set data source Location to the name of the polyline you just created.
9.
Click the X Axis tab.
10. Set the x-axis Variable to X.
231

The x-coordinate direction is parallel to the polyline in this example so the plot shows a variable
profile across the outlet.
11. Click the Y Axis tab.
12. Set the y-axis Variable to Velocity.
13. Click Apply.
A chart showing Velocity versus X is displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.
10.16.4. Example: Comparing Differences Between Two Files

You can use Case Comparison mode with the Chart Viewer to automatically see the differences in
values between the two files:
1.
Load the following results files, which are provided with your installation: <CFXROOT>/examples/elbow1.cdat and <CFXROOT>/examples/elbow3.cdat. (Press the Ctrl key while selecting the two
files, then click Open.)
Two viewports open, one with elbow1 and the other with elbow2 loaded.
2.
Insert a line (Insert > Location > Line). Accept the default values for Geometry > Method, but set
Line Type to Cut. On the Color tab, set Mode to Variable and Variable to Temperature. Set the
Range to Local.
Click Apply when you are done.
3.
In the Outline view, double-click Case Comparison. The Case Comparison details view appears. Select
Case Comparison Active and click Apply.
A third viewport opens that displays the temperature difference between the two cases.
.
4.
Click Create chart
5.
In the Insert Chart dialog box, enter a name for the chart, and then click OK.
The details view for the chart appears.
6.
On the General tab, set Title to Comparison of Temperatures in the Elbow.
7.
Click the Data Series tab.
8.
Set data source Location to the name of the line you just created.
9.
Click the X Axis tab.
10. Set the x-axis Variable to X.

The x-coordinate direction is parallel to the polyline in this example so the plot shows a variable
profile across the outlet.
11. Click the Y Axis tab.
12. Set the y-axis Variable to Temperature.
232
Figure Command
13. Click Apply.
A chart showing Temperature versus X is displayed on the Chart Viewer tab. Three lines are there:
one for each of the sets of temperature values, and a third line that shows the difference between
those values.
Note
You can change some of the properties of each line individually (including turning them on
and off ) by using the Line Display tab.
The Difference line plots only the variable difference on the y-axis. For example, if you defined
a chart of Velocity (y-axis) against Pressure (x-axis), then the difference line will plot Velocity
Difference against Pressure, not Velocity Difference against Pressure Difference.
10.17. Comment Command

You can create comment objects to include in the report. Comments are used to add text to a report
in the form of titles and paragraphs.
To define a comment object:
1.
From the toolbar, click the Comment
icon or select Insert > Comment.
The Insert Comment dialog box appears.

2.
Enter a name for the comment object.
3.
Click OK.
The Comment Viewer tab is displayed.
The comment object appears in the tree view, under the Report object.
4.
Enter a heading and/or a paragraph of text.

A heading is entered into the Heading box. The Level setting controls the level of the heading
text in the report.
Paragraph text is entered into the large text box below the Heading box. Some Rich Text features
are supported using toolbar icons that appear at the top of the Comment Viewer tab. Pictures
can be inserted in the paragraph text area. External hyperlinks can be included in the paragraph
text, but will not work in the Report Viewer tab of CFD-Post. External hyperlinks will work when
the report is viewed in a web browser.
To see the comment in the report, you must generate the report. For details, see Report (p. 29).
10.18. Figure Command

You can create a figure (an image of the objects in the 3D Viewer) to include in the report. There are
two ways to create a figure:
233

From the menu bar, select Insert > Figure.
From the toolbar, click the Figure
icon.
To see the new figure, you must open the Report Viewer and refresh or publish the report. For details,
see Report (p. 29).
234
Chapter 11: CFD-Post Tools Menu

The Tools menu offers access to quantitative analysis utilities, the animation editor, and the timestep
selector. The Command Editor dialog box is also available so that you can enter CFX Command Language
(CCL) directly.
11.1.Timestep Selector
11.2. Animation
11.3. Quick Editor
11.4. Probe
11.5. Function Calculator
11.6. Macro Calculator
11.7. Mesh Calculator
11.8. Case Comparison
11.9. Command Editor
11.1. Timestep Selector

For a transient results file, the Timestep Selector dialog box enables you to load the results for different
timesteps by selecting the timestep and clicking Apply.
When reading transient cases, CFD-Post re-reads and re-imports the mesh, if the transient file contains
them. This feature enables CFD-Post to support transient rotor/stator problems, as well as moving-mesh
cases.
When CFD-Post reads a Transient Blade Row results file, the variables are reconstructed automatically
and the flow solution time is taken to the last time step. By default, the Simulation Timestep option
is used in the Timestep Selector, and includes the timesteps used in the CFX-Solver. It is possible to
recreate this timestep list by selecting a different Timestep Sampling option, and the solution will be
accordingly reconstructed for these new time location.
Note
All variables will always appear in the variables list for all transient files, even if the transient
file does not contain some of the variables. If you have the Load missing variables from
nearest FULL timestep option selected (Edit > Options > Files > Transient Cases), then
the missing variable data will be loaded from the nearest full timestep. Otherwise, the data
will be colored with the undefined color in these cases.
The following list describes the column headings in the list box. Some of these columns also appear in
the Case Comparison editor in CFD-Post.
The Configuration column indicates the configuration name as set in CFX-Pre. This column appears when
you have a multi-configuration (.mres) file loaded.
235
CFD-Post Tools Menu

The # column displays the index number for the timestep. These values always begin at 1 and increase
by 1.
The Step column displays the timestep number, which is used for synchronization by time step. These
values always increase; because they are unique, they can be used in scripts.
For most cases, the values in the Step column are the same as those in the Solver Step column.
However, if you have a multi-configuration case or a case with run history, loaded using the Load
complete history as: A single case option (described in Load Results Command (p. 89)), then the
Step is calculated to give a unique, increasing value through all the configurations. It differs from
index because it can maintain a consistent value even though (for example) some transient files (.trn)
that were present when the run completed are no longer available. (For example, suppose that a
case has transient files at three timesteps and these appear in CFD-Post as steps 1, 2, and 3. If you
delete the middle transient file, CFD-Post will show entries in the timestep selector at steps 1 and 3,
but not 2. If a script was loading step 3, it will load the same results as previously.) Note, however,
that if an entire results file (.res) that is referenced by the multi-configuration results file (or the run
history) is no longer available, Step cannot maintain a consistent value for the remaining entries in
the timestep selector. For example, if you load just Step 10, you will not necessarily get the same
results loaded at the same timestep as you would have if you had loaded Step 10 before you deleted
the .res file.
The Solver Step column displays the solver timestep or outer iteration number. In multi-configuration
cases, the solver step may not always increase across different cases and may not be unique.
Solver Step can be used in expressions. Timestep-related expressions such as Current Time Step and
Accumulated Time Step refer to the Solver Step.
The Time [s] column shows the real time duration corresponding to the timestep. The units are always
seconds.
The Type list displays the Partial or Full results file corresponding to that timestep.
The Phase column appears for transient blade row cases. For details, see Using the Timestep Selector
with Transient Blade Row Cases (p. 237).
The following icons/commands appear on the right side of the dialog box and/or the shortcut menu
accessible by right-clicking on a timestep in the list box.
Icon/Command
Description
Switch To
Selects the timestep. Same as double-clicking the timestep.
Add timesteps
Delete
Only applies when there are added timesteps. This command enables you to delete added timesteps from the
timestep selector.
Animate
236
Opens the Add Timestep Files window, which enables you

to select one or more results files and load them into the
memory.
Automatically animates the timesteps using Quick Animation mode. For details, see Animating Timesteps (p. 241).
Timestep Selector
11.1.1. Adding Timesteps

After you load a results file, the Timestep Selector dialog box shows the set of timesteps from that
file. You can add to the set by clicking Add Timesteps
or a directory containing files of type trn.
and selecting a file of type res, bak, or trn,
Select Ignore duplicate timesteps to avoid loading duplicate timesteps when loading a new file or
directory. If this option is not selected, duplicate timesteps will appear at the end of the list, and will
be given a unique timestep number.
Note
Adding timesteps to steady-state runs that contain particle tracks causes particles to be displayed up to the current time (which is zero for steady-state runs). To see the full particle
track:
1.
Open the particle track in question for editing.
2.
On the Geometry tab, set Limits Option to User Specified and End Time to the maximum time value for the simulation.
11.1.2. Using the Timestep Selector with Transient Blade Row Cases
The Timestep Selector shows discrete timesteps based on the Timestep Sampling option selected.
Unlike traditional transient simulations, these discrete timesteps do not represent transient files but
time locations where the compressed data is evaluated using Fourier Coefficients from the results file
(For more information, see CFX-Solver Output File (Transient Blade Row Runs) in the CFX-Solver Manager
User's Guide). These evaluated solutions do not attempt to reproduce the transient iterative process
towards a steady periodic behavior. However, they are evaluated from the start of the transient run to
facilitate comparisons to traditional transient calculations.
237
CFD-Post Tools Menu
For transient blade row cases, the Timestep Selector has an extra column, Phase, and a new sampling
control (Timestep Sampling):
The Phase values are based on the common period.
The Timestep Sampling options are:
Simulation Timestep
The timestep list is obtained from the results file. (Default)
Uniform
You can specify the Number of Samples and the timestep list will show the appropriate number of
divisions between Phases 0 and 1.
Value List
You can create a custom timestep list based on a set of Phase Positions between 0 and 1.
The listing of timesteps changes as the Timestep Sampling options are changed. When you click Apply,
these changes are set appropriately. The selected timestep will be automatically updated to the closest
phase position in the new timestep list.
Tip
For an overview of working with transient blade row cases, see Transient Blade Row Postprocessing (p. 111).
238
Animation
11.1.3. Multiple Files

When multiple files are loaded, they appear on separate tabs on the top of the Timestep Selector
dialog box. The Sync Cases setting is available to synchronize the cases in the following ways:
Off
The Off option causes each set of results to be independent in terms of the selected timestep.
By Time Step
The By Time Step option causes each set of results to switch to match the timestep you select
for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by timestep. The Match setting
controls the matching criterion. The Same Step option causes results with identical timesteps to
be synchronized, and results without identical timesteps to remain at their current timestep. The
Nearest Available option causes the closest timestep to be selected for each set of results if
there is not an exact match.
By Time Value
The By Time Value option causes each set of results to switch to "match" the time value you select
for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by time value. The Match setting
controls the matching criterion. The Same Value option causes results with identical time values
to be synchronized, and results without identical time values to remain at their current time value.
The Nearest Available option causes the closest time value to be selected for each set of results
if there is not an exact match. The remaining Match options allow different degrees of matching;
they are: Within 1%, Within 5%, and Within 10%.
By Index
The By Index option causes each set of results to switch to "match", as closely as possible, the index
number you select for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by index.
Note
For Transient Blade Row cases, Timestep and Index are the same. Hence, timestep sync By
Time Step and By Index are identical options.
11.2. Animation
There are the following types of animation:
Quick Animation (p. 240), which is a means to automatically sweep objects across their defined range
Keyframe Animation (p. 242), in which you define the start and end points of each section of animation
using keyframes, then link these end points together by having CFD-Post create a number of intermediate
frames.
Selecting Tools > Animation produces the Animation dialog box, where you can choose the type of
animation you want. The animation options are described in the following sections.
239
CFD-Post Tools Menu
11.2.1. Quick Animation

The Quick Animation option in CFD-Post provides a means to automatically sweep objects across their
defined range to visualize the data throughout the domain. Planes, isosurfaces, turbo surfaces, streamlines,
and particle tracks can all be animated with the Quick Animator.
To activate the Quick Animator, right-click on an object in the 3D Viewer and select Animate, or open
Tools > Animation and select Quick Animation.
Use the slider to select the number of frames per animation loop. The more frames you add, the more
positions the animating object will go through. The number of frames increases logarithmically as you
move the slider toward the Slow end.
You can animate as many objects, of any type, as you want. Just select the objects in the list and click
Play
; all selected objects will animate.
To stop an animation in progress, click Stop

the animation began.
. The objects will return to the state they were in before
By default, the animation will repeat infinitely until you click Stop. You can also specify a number of
repetitions (raise the Repeat forever
button to enable the Repeat field).
You can create an animation in any of a variety of formats by selecting the Save Movie option, specifying
the Format, and providing a filename. Select the Options button to select video creation and quality
options, just as for keyframe animations.
Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 encoding,
so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those formats.
Depending on the player and operating system, you may also need to install an additional
codec, such as FFDSHOW MPEG-4 Video Decoder, to view an animation. You can download
this from http://www.free-codecs.com/ffdshow_download.htm. Install the 32-bit version (not
x64). This is known to be required for AVI format animations with Windows Media Player on
Windows XP and Vista (however, it should not be required with Windows Media Player on
Windows 7).
11.2.1.1. Animating Planes

An animated plane will be shifted in a direction normal to its surface.
If the Bounce option is selected (default), the plane will move to the positive limit, and then in reverse
to the negative limit, and then repeat, moving to the positive limit again. If the Loop option is selected,
the plane will move to the positive limit, and then jump to the negative limit (in one frame), and then
start moving to the positive limit again.
Depending on the shape of the domain relative to its bounding box and the plane orientation, the
animating plane may disappear for a number of frames at the ends of its ranges.
240
Animation
11.2.1.2. Animating Isosurfaces

Isosurface value is modified to traverse through the entire variable range.
If the Bounce option is selected (default), the isosurface value is increased to its maximum value, and
then decreased to its minimum value, and repeated. If the Loop option is selected, the isosurface value
is increased to its maximum value, then set to its minimum value (in one frame), and then increased
to its maximum value again.
11.2.1.3. Animating Turbo Surfaces

Depending on the surface type, Span, Streamwise Location or Theta value will be modified
to sweep through its respective range.
Note
Quick animation will not work if a Turbo Surface is defined using the Cone option.
11.2.1.4. Animating Streamlines and Particle Tracks

Streamlines and Particle Tracks symbols are shifted along the lines.
By default, the symbol shape, interval, and size are overridden by the animation routines. If you want
to change these settings, click the Options button. To use symbol settings from the original object,
clear the Override Symbol Settings check box.
The Spacing option specifies the interval at which to start a new batch of symbols. For example, with
a spacing of 0.6, the symbols animating on the object will move 60% of the way along the lines, at
which point another group of symbols will start at the beginning of the line. With a spacing of 1.0, all
symbols will travel to the end of their lines before a new group of symbols starts at the beginning.
11.2.1.5. Animating Timesteps

Timestep animations play from the first to the last, and then repeat from the beginning.
Unlike other quick animations, Timestep animation does not automatically start when selected from
the Timestep Selector, you need to click Play. This gives you an opportunity to configure the animation,
which takes longer to load than other types of quick animations.
Note that the Bounce setting and the Frame Count (fast/slow) setting have no effect on Timestep animations.
11.2.1.6. Animating Mesh Deformation Scaling

The Deformation scaling factor is animated from Undeformed to the current scaling factor. If the current
scaling is set to Undeformed, the animation goes from Undeformed to True Scale.
241
CFD-Post Tools Menu
11.2.2. Keyframe Animation

Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 encoding,
so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those formats.
Depending on the player and operating system, you may also need to install an additional
codec, such as FFDSHOW MPEG-4 Video Decoder, to view an animation. You can download
this from http://www.free-codecs.com/ffdshow_download.htm. Install the 32-bit version (not
x64). This is known to be required for AVI format animations with Windows Media Player on
Windows XP and Vista (however, it should not be required with Windows Media Player on
Windows 7).
In CFD-Post, you can make animations based on keyframes. Keyframes define the start and end points
of each section of animation. Keyframes are linked together by drawing a number of intermediate
frames, the number of which is set by the # of Frames field in the Animation dialog box.
The basic approach to creating an animation sequence is to configure the problem in a particular state
and then save this state as a keyframe. Next, change one or more aspects of the problem state. For
example, change the viewer orientation by rotating the viewer object. You can then save this state as
a second keyframe.
Animations are created by linearly interpolating the change in state of the viewer position between
keyframe states. By default, 10 frames are created between keyframe states, but this is easily adjustable.
If the camera position changes between keyframes, the view is interpolated between the two positions
at each frame.
Every option and button that is accessible when Animation is active will increment by one linearly for
each of the frames between the two states. For example, if one keyframe has 10 contour levels, and
the next has 20 contour levels, then the number of contour levels will increment by one for each of
the ten frames between the two states. Objects that are binary in state are toggled at the end of the
keyframe sequence (for example, the visibility of an object). Animations can also be created using the
different timesteps in a transient run.
Note
If you have 2 keyframes with 10 frames between them, there are a total of 11 steps from
one keyframe to the next.
11.2.2.1. Creating an Animation

The basic steps to creating an animation are as follows:
to set the
1.
Once you have manipulated the user interface into a chosen start position, click New
current state as Keyframe 1.
2.
The keyframe becomes visible in the Keyframe Creation and Editing window.
3.
Change the viewer and/or object parameters to obtain the second required state and click New
create Keyframe 2.
242
to
Animation
4.
When you click a keyframe to highlight it, the other options to the right of the keyframe list become
active.
5.
To display the highlighted keyframe in the viewer, click Edit Keyframe
or double-click on the keyframe
. If more than
itself. To apply changes in the viewer to the highlighted keyframe, click Set Keyframe
2 keyframes exist and you want to change their order, you can move a Keyframe up and down by
clicking on the blue arrows. To delete a keyframe, click Delete
6.
To set the number of intermediate interpolated frames, click on a keyframe and set the value in the #
of Frames box.
After a second keyframe has been created, additional playback options are made available.
7.
The looping option enables you to specify whether you want the animation to play in one direction
during each repeat or play forwards and backwards. For example, selecting Repeat of 3 on the Loop
setting will play the animation three times, jumping from the last Keyframe back to the first at the end
of the first two cycles. Selecting Bounce for the same number of repeats will cause the animation to
play forwards, and then backwards before playing forwards once more.
With the Repeat option, you specify how often the animation repeats before stopping. By default
the Repeat forever
Stop
8.
button is selected, so the animation will repeat continuously until you click
The Animate Camera feature toggles whether the camera position is moved (interpolated) with the
animation.
If it is switched off, all objects, except for the camera positions, are animated.
11.2.2.2. Animating Expressions

There is a limitation with respect to the animating of expressions. If the value of a parameter of an object
is set to an expression, that expression is evaluated at the keyframes, but those values are not interpolated
to obtain values at the frames between the keyframes. Thus, after the value of the parameter is determined for the first keyframe, that value does not change for the intermediate frames until it is recalculated
at the next keyframe, which causes the animation to be unexpectedly discontinuous.
11.2.3. Animation Dialog Box

The following is a general explanation of the icons in the Animation dialog box:
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Create a new keyframe
Go to beginning
Edit a keyframe
Go to previous keyframe
Set the keyframe
Go to previous frame
Move the keyframe up
Go to next frame
243
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Move the keyframe down
Go to next keyframe
Delete the keyframe
Go to end
Load animation state
Play forward
Save animation state
Stop the animation
More animation options
Repeat forever
11.2.3.1. Animation Options Dialog Box

The Animation Options dialog box is opened by expanding More animation options
of the Animation dialog box, then clicking Options.
at the bottom
11.2.3.1.1. Animation Speed

The Animation Speed settings enable you to scale the animation to speed it up or slow it down without
having to manually adjust the number of frames between keyframes in the animation.
The Approximate Animation Time is calculated with the following information: total number of frames
in the animation, the number of repetitions, the frame rate (regardless of whether you are saving to a
movie or not), and any animation speed adjustments.
Selecting an animation speed of Normal does not scale the animation by any factor.
Selecting an animation speed of Slower slows down the animation by adding sufficient additional
frames to achieve the specified factor. Selecting Generate more frames, spread evenly
automatically and transparently adds additional frames between keyframes. You will see the effect of
this the next time you play the animation. This results in higher quality animations, but will take longer
to compute because of the additional frames to interpolate. Selecting Duplicate frames when
saving movie duplicates existing frames when generating the final movie output. The effect of this
will be visible only when playing back the movie; you will see no effect when playing the animation in
CFD-Post. This option is faster, but the quality of the movie may suffer: it may look a little jerky.
Selecting an animation speed of Faster speeds up the animation by removing sufficient frames to
achieve the specified factor. Selecting Generate fewer frames, spread evenly automatically
and transparently removes some of the frames between keyframes. You will see the effect of this next
time you play the animation. The fewer frames between keyframes will be interpolated smoothly, as if
you had reduced the number of frames manually. Selecting Skip frames when saving movie
skips existing frames only when generating the final movie output. The effect of this will only be visible
when playing back the movie file; you will see no effect when playing the animation in CFD-Post. This
option is slower because all frames will be played in CFD-Post, but only some of the frames will be used
to generate the movie.
11.2.3.1.2. Transient Case

The Transient Case setting is effective only for transient simulations and controls the way in which
timesteps are selected. A particular frame is calculated. Sequential Interpolation evenly distributes frames over each transient output file. Timestep Interpolation evenly distributes frames
244
Animation
based on the timestep number associated with each transient output file. TimeValue Interpolation
evenly distributes frames based on the time value associated with each transient output file.
11.2.3.1.3. Print Options

11.2.3.1.3.1. Image Format
Select either a JPEG or PPM format for creation of the movie.
11.2.3.1.3.2. Use Screen Capture

By default, all image files are created using an internal (software-based) rendering engine. In some
situations, it is desirable to create an exact copy of the screen image, as rendered by the graphics
hardware on the computer. This is possible by selecting the Use Screen Capture toggle. For very
complex images, this option can be significantly faster. It is important to note that this is a true screen
capture, and on some machines and graphics cards, it will be important to make sure that there are no
other undesired windows or screen objects overlapping the viewer window at the time that the image
file is created. These unwanted windows can, in some cases, become part of the movie.
11.2.3.1.3.3. White Background

Toggles between a white/black background.
11.2.3.1.3.4. Enhanced Output (Smooth Edges)

Enables you to select higher quality output for the generated images.
11.2.3.1.3.5. Image Size

Enables you to specify the resolution of the resulting movie. By default, 640 x 480 is selected, but
you can select any of the values in the drop-down list, including NTSC or PAL standard resolutions, or
HD resolutions. You can also select Custom to specify the pixel resolution in the Width and Height
fields, or select Use Screen Size and specify a scale factor in the Scale (%) field.
11.2.3.1.3.6. Tolerance
Controls the amount of depth calculated for the creation of an image, where smaller values represent
more accurate images. The benefit of relatively high values is that less processing is required. However,
if the Tolerance value is too high (for instance, a value of 1), the back faces in an image may be displayed
on top of near faces.
11.2.3.1.4. Advanced Tab

11.2.3.1.4.1. Save Frames As Image Files
If you have enabled Save Movie (see Quick Animation (p. 240)), selecting Save Frames As Image Files
will prevent the deletion of the animation frame files from the temporary directory, where they are
stored by default.
11.2.3.1.4.2. Output To User Directory

Selecting this option enables you to specify where you want the animation files to be saved by entering
a path in the Directory field.
245
CFD-Post Tools Menu
11.2.3.1.4.3. Frame Rate

The rate (in frames per second) at which the movie will be generated. The movie viewer may also dictate
the playback rate.
11.2.3.1.4.4. Quality
Select a Quality from: Highest, High, Medium, Low, or Custom.
With the Custom setting, you may specify the Variable Bit Rate by clearing the Variable Bit Rate
toggle and entering a bit rate. Reduce the Bit Rate value to lower the file size (and the file playback
quality).
11.2.3.1.4.5. Don't Encode Last MPEG Frame

A single cycle of an animation loop starts and ends at the same frame. If you repeat a loop, that frame
is encoded twice at the end of each cycle, leading to a brief pause at that point in the animation. Enable
this setting to smooth the playback of repeated loop animations.
11.2.3.2. Saving an Animation

When Save Movie is selected and a filename is specified, the animation is saved to a file when the
animation is played.
and browse to a convenient location.
1.
To select a file, click Browse
2.
Enter the name of the file; the extension is taken from the setting of the Format field.
Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 encoding, so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those
formats.
Depending on the player and operating system, you may also need to install an additional codec, such as FFDSHOW MPEG-4 Video Decoder, to view an animation. You can
download this from http://www.free-codecs.com/ffdshow_download.htm. Install the 32bit version (not x64). This is known to be required for AVI format animations with Windows Media Player on Windows XP and Vista (however, it should not be required with
Windows Media Player on Windows 7).
3.
Click Save to save the file.
11.2.3.3. Saving the Animation State (*.can file)

You can load or save your animation state as a .can (CFX Animation) file. It saves the current status
of all of the animation settings.
To open:
1.
246
Browse to the correct directory to load the file.
Probe
2.
Enter the name of the file or select it by using the mouse.
3.
Click Open.
To save:
1.
Browse to a convenient directory to save the file.
2.
Enter or select the name of the file.
3.
You should save the file as a .can (CFX Animation) type.
11.3. Quick Editor

The Quick Editor in CFD-Post lets you easily perform repetitious modifications to certain objects. You
can move planes along their normals to a specified location, set the value of isosurfaces, and set turbo
surface locations.
To specify a value, you can enter a number in the value editor, move the slider, or click left/right mouse
buttons to increment/decrement the value by a portion of the range. All changes are applied immediately;
there is no need to click Apply.
11.4. Probe
Probe in CFD-Post enables you to determine exact variable values at specified points within a domain.
1.
Select Tools > Probe or click Probe

Variable.
, or right-click on an object in the viewer and select Probe
The Probe tool appears at the bottom of the viewer.

2.
You can manually input the probe coordinates in the Probe At boxes or select a point in the viewer.
is not selected, the probe variable will be automatically chosen. (For
If Probe only this variable
example, Temperature will be selected if you select a point on a plane that is colored by Temperature).
3.
The probe variable can also be selected manually from the variable list.
4.
If the desired variable does not appear in the list, select Other... and choose the variable from the
Variable Selector.
5.
If Probe only this variable

coordinates are entered.
6.
Select Hide Probe tool
is selected, the probe variable will not change automatically when new
to close the Probe tool.
The probed value appears in the box adjacent to the variable list and automatically updates every
time a new coordinate or probe variable is selected.
If you probe on a Point object, the probe position will use the position coordinates of the Point
object, not necessarily exactly where you chose.
247
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Limitation:
Probe locations will be more accurate when you zoom in tight on the probe location when picking in
the viewer. The smaller the object in the viewer is, the less accurate the picked location will be. A consequence is that you may get an undefined value on an outer boundary because the point location will
be slightly outside the domain. This problem may disappear if you zoom in on the boundary and probe
again. Note that you can also adjust the probe location by typing in the coordinates.
To increase the extent of the virtual layer, modify the Interpolation Tolerance setting under Edit >
Options > CFD-Post.
11.5. Function Calculator

The function calculator is used to provide quantitative information about the results. To use the function
calculator:
1.
Select the function to evaluate from this list.
2.
Choose the location for the calculation.

Only locations valid for the selected function will be available.
3.
If multiple cases are open, choose which cases the function calculator should act upon.
4.
If applicable to the function, choose a variable from the list.

For most functions, you can click in the Variable box and enter an expression. The expression can
include variables and any valid CEL (CFX Expression Language) function. For example, abs(Velocity u) could be entered so that the calculation is performed using the absolute values of the
variable Velocity u. For details, see CEL Operators, Constants, and Expressions and CFX Expression
Language (CEL).
User variables are also available. For details, see Variables Workspace (p. 45).
5.
Select the direction if applicable to the function.

For some functions None is available.
For details, see Quantitative Function List.
6.
If applicable to the function, select the appropriate fluid.

For multiphase results, you can select which fluids to use in your calculation for selected functions.
The All Fluids option can be selected to perform the calculation using all of the fluids in the results.
Note
When calculating mass flow rate for a FLUENT file, the option Mixture gives the same
results as All Fluids. These two options appear because have different origins (FLUENT
and CFD-Post respectively); you may choose either for your calculations.
248
Function Calculator
Click Calculate to calculate the result. Choose whether to base the calculation on hybrid or conservative
values. Most quantitative calculations are best performed using conservative variable values. For details,
Note
If the function result is a temperature, and if C or K are selected as temperature units, the
results units will be K. If F or R are selected, the temperature will be returned in R.
This has an implication for calculations of temperature differences measured in C or F. Expressions are always evaluated in absolute temperature units (K or R) and then, if necessary,
the result is converted to the user-selected units. For example, if you evaluate 1[C] - 1[C],
internally it is evaluated as 274[K] - 274[K], which is 0[K] and is reported as such (with the
units forced to be in an absolute scale). In plots (where CFD-Post cannot force the units to
be K), the software cannot tell whether the result is a temperature difference or just the
temperature, so the result is converted to user-selected units (in this case, -273[C]) and a
value of -273 is reported in the plot legend. Thus when analyzing temperature differences,
set the preferred temperature units to be in an absolute scale (K or R) in the Edit > Options
> Units dialog box.
Important
There are some important limitations concerning calculations performed on CFX-4 results
files. For details, see CFX-4 Dump Files (p. 114).
For additional information on the function calculator see Quantitative Calculations in the Command
Editor Dialog Box.
11.5.1. Function Selection

The quantitative functions available from the function calculator in CFD-Post are integrated into CEL
and can be used in any expression.
The available quantitative functions are outlined in the table below.
Function Name
Operation
area
Area of location
areaAve
Area-weighted average
Note
Projected areaAve (for example,
areaAve_x) works as expected only for
surfaces that do not fold in the selected
direction. In extreme case, if the surface
is fully closed, the projected average
will result in a randomly large number,
as the projected area will be zero.
249
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Function Name
Operation
areaInt
Area-weighted integral (can be projected to a direction)
ave
Arithmetic average
count
Number of Nodes
countTrue
Number of nodes at which the logical expression

evaluates to true.
force
Force on a surface in the specified direction
forceNorm
Length normalized force on a curve in the specified

direction
length
Length of a line
lengthAve
Length-weighted average
lengthInt
Length-weighted integration
massFlow
Total mass flow
massFlowAve
Mass Flow-weighted average
massFlowAveAbs
Mass Flow-weighted average with absolute values

of mass flow used in numerator and denominator
of formula for averaging
massFlowInt
Mass Flow-weighted integral
maxVal
Maximum Value
minVal
Minimum Value
probe
Value at a point
sum
Sum over the calculation points
torque
Torque on a surface about the specified axis
volume
Volume of a 3D location
volumeAve
Volume-weighted average
volumeInt
Volume-weighted integral
For details on each of the functions listed in the table above, see Quantitative Function List in the CFX
Reference Guide.
11.6. Macro Calculator

A macro is a set of Perl and Power Syntax1 commands that are stored in a session file. The commands
create an extension to the user interface in the Macro Calculator that prompts you for the arguments
that are required. For example, for the macro that calculates the noise generated by a low-speed fan,
you need to specify the number of blades, the number of harmonics, the position of the observer, and
so on.
You can run one of the pre-defined macros provided with CFD-Post or run one of your own:
Predefined Macros (p. 251)
User-defined Macros (p. 256)
1
For details on power syntax, see Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
250
Macro Calculator
To run a macro (assuming that a case is already loaded):
1.
From the menu bar, select Tools > Macro Calculator.
2.
Select an appropriate macro function from the list or open a file that contains a user-defined macro
definition. (In the latter case, opening the file both loads the macro into the Macro Calculator and
adds that macro to the macro list.)
3.
Fill in the fields that appear in the Macro Calculator. The values that you must specify vary for each
macro.
4.
Click Calculate to perform the calculations defined in the macro.
5.
Click View Report to open the Report Viewer.

This displays results and charts of the calculations performed.
11.6.1. Predefined Macros

Some predefined macros are provided as CFD-Post. These are session files that contain a subroutine.
The options available in the Macro Calculator are simply the arguments with which the subroutine is
called.
The predefined macros are:
11.6.1.1. Comfort Factors Macro
11.6.1.2. Cp Polar Plot Macro
11.6.1.3. Gas Compressor Performance Macro
11.6.1.4. Gas Turbine Performance Macro
11.6.1.5. Liquid Pump Performance Macro
11.6.1.6. Liquid Turbine Performance Macro
11.6.1.7. Fan Noise Macro
You execute a macro by clicking the Calculate button. Any objects, user variables, and expressions
defined in the macro are created. A report is also generated in HTML format and can be viewed by
clicking on View Report. The Report Viewer window displays the results; you must close this window
by clicking OK before you can continue using CFD-Post.
Note
You can view the macro definitions in a text editor: they are located in <CFDPOSTROOT>/etc/ and have a .cse file extension. For details on the input parameters and
output expressions for any given macro, you can view the details on the Expressions tab in
CFD-Post once the macro has been executed.
11.6.1.1. Comfort Factors Macro

This macro can be used to calculate values for Mean Radiant Temperature and Resultant
Temperature in HVAC simulations.
In order to use the macro, the radiation intensity, velocity, and temperature are required. The created
expressions are visible on the Expressions tab. The variables Mean Radiant Temperature (evaluated
using the expression meanTemp) and Resultant Temperature (evaluated using the expression
resultTemp) are created.
251
CFD-Post Tools Menu

As an alternative to calculating comfort factors in CFD-Post, the comfort factors may be calculated
during the solution process; this would be required, for example, when the model simulates a ventilation
system in which the control system depends dynamically on derived comfort factors.
11.6.1.2. Cp Polar Plot Macro

The Cp Polar macro produces a polar plot of the pressure coefficient (Cp) along a polyline. The macro
creates the polyline using the Boundary Intersection method. For details, see Polyline Command (p. 172).
The boundary and intersecting slice plane are defined in the macro calculator and passed to the subroutine as arguments. The boundaries selected as the Boundary List in the macro calculator make up
one surface for the intersection. The second surface is a slice plane created using the X, Y, or Z normal
axis to the plane (Slice Normal) and a point on that axis (Slice Position).
The cp user variable is created by the macro from the cp expression. The cp expression can be defined
as:
(Pressure - $pref [Pa])/dynHead
where $pref is the Ref. Pressure set in the macro calculator and dynHead is a reference dynamic
head (evaluated at the inlet) that can be defined as:
0.5 * areaAve(Density)@inlet * areaAve(Velocity)@inlet^2
The Inlet Region selected in the macro calculator is used as the inlet location in the calculation of
dynHead.
Next, a Chart line of the cp variable versus the Plot X Axis value is created. The generated report contains
the chart and the settings from the macro calculator.
The following information must be specified:
Boundary List: A list of boundaries used in the simulation.
Slice Normal: The axis that will be normal to the slice plane.
Slice Position: The offset of the slice plane in the direction specified by the normal axis.
Inlet Region: The locator used to calculate inlet quantities.
Ref. Pressure: The reference pressure for the simulation.
Plot Axis: The axis on which the results will be plotted.
11.6.1.3. Gas Compressor Performance Macro

The Compressor Performance macro performs a series of calculations using the data set in the macro
calculator. The following information must be specified:
Outlet Region: The locator used to calculate outlet quantities.
Rotor Blade(s): The locator used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
Machine Axis: The axis of rotation of the compressor.
252
Macro Calculator
Rot. Speed: The rotational speed of the compressor.
Num. Blade Rows: Some quantities calculated for a single blade row are multiplied by the number of
blades to produce total (all blade) values.
Ref Pressure: The reference pressure for the simulation.
Ref Radius: A reference radius between the hub and tip.
Fluid Gamma: The ratio of specific heat capacity at constant pressure to specific heat capacity at constant
volume (Cp / Cv).
11.6.1.4. Gas Turbine Performance Macro

Outlet Region: The locator used to calculate outlet quantities.
Rotor Blade(s): The locator used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
Machine Axis: The axis or rotation of the turbine.
Rot. Speed: The rotational speed of the turbine.
Num Blade Rows: Some quantities calculated for a single blade row are multiplied by the number of blades
to produce total (all blade) values.
Ref Radius: Reference radius between the hub and tip.
Fluid Gamma: The ratio of specific heat capacity at constant pressure to specific heat capacity at constant
volume (Cp / Cv).
11.6.1.5. Liquid Pump Performance Macro

Inlet: The locator used to calculate inlet quantities.
Outlet: The locator used to calculate outlet quantities.
Rotor Blade(s): The locator(s) used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
Machine Axis: The axis or rotation of the pump.
Rot. Speed: The rotational speed of the pump.
Num Blade Rows: Some quantities calculated for a single blade row are multiplied by the number of blades
Ref Radius: Reference radius between the hub and tip.
253
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Ref Height: Cross-section height (that is, the height of the outlet region, or the height of the blade at the
trailing edge).
Ref Density: The reference density for the simulation.
Gravity Accel.: The acceleration due to gravity.
11.6.1.6. Liquid Turbine Performance Macro

Inlet: the locator used to calculate inlet quantities.
Outlet: the locator used to calculate outlet quantities.
Rotor Blade(s): the locators used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
Machine Axis: the axis or rotation of the turbine.
Rot. Speed: the rotational speed of the turbine.
Num Blade Rows: some quantities calculated for a single blade row are multiplied by the number of blades
Ref Radius: reference radius between the hub and tip.
Ref Height: Cross-section height (that is, the height of the outlet region, or the height of the blade at the
trailing edge).
Flow Rate: The volume flow rate.
Head Rise: The pressure head at the inlet.
Ref Density: The reference density for the simulation.
Gravity Accel.: The acceleration due to gravity.
11.6.1.7. Fan Noise Macro

This macro calculates the noise levels of the turbomachinery as observed at a specific location. The
following information must be specified:
Domain: The domain in which the blade is located.
Blade Selection: Set to Automatic for a single blade passage or Custom for a multiple blade passage. If
this is set to Custom, you will need to specify the 2D region for the blade (Custom Blade) as well as the
number of blades (Custom # Blades).
# of Harmonics: The number of harmonics used in the calculation.
Observer (r) and Observer (theta): The distance and location of the observer, relative to the blade.
254
Macro Calculator
Theta Sectors: The number of sampling points (sectors) equally spaced over 360 at a given radius around
the fan, used to calculate the noise values. A higher number leads to a more accurate solution, but takes
more time to calculate.
Directivity Harm. #: The harmonic level at which the sound pressure levels will be calculated.
Loading Coeff.: A coefficient between 2 and 2.5.
The loading coefficient parameter defines the decay (or decrease) of the sound-pressure level vs the
frequency. In general, the sound-pressure level decreases when the frequency increases. In his experiments, Lowson replaced the unsteady loading by a steady one multiplied by a decay function. Based
on these experiments, this decay follows an exponential law with a negative slope. Lowson found
that a loading coefficient between 2 and 2.5 gives a sound-pressure level close to the experimental
data. In other words, the loading coefficient defines the slope of the exponential law.
In general and for highly loaded blades, the decay of the sound-pressure level is very quick (one or
two peaks in the sound-pressure level spectrum) and therefore a higher value of the loading coefficient
will be appropriate.
Acou. Ref. Pressure: Acoustic reference pressure (

audible sound of 2.10-5 [Pa].
) is the international standard for the minimum
The acoustic reference pressure is used to convert the acoustic pressure into Sound Pressure in dB
using the following equation:

(11.1)
is the acoustic reference pressure. The reference pressure depends on the fluid.
Acou. Ref. Power: Acoustic reference power (
0 )(
$#"!
of
to units of dB.
) is used to convert the sound power
'&%

where
from units
The equation used is:
CBA2 @9
827 6 51
(11.2)
43 821
where:
is the value of the acoustic reference power
PIH
is the sound power and is defined by:
(11.3)
For air, the acoustic reference power is:
q i h pp g
XY X
d eV U
`
bT S R Q
a c
=
`
f W
GFED
Sound Speed: The speed of the sound in the fluid at rest.
255
CFD-Post Tools Menu

For details on completing this dialog box, see Using the Fan Noise Macro (p. 258).
11.6.2. User-defined Macros

You can load macros from a file and have them available in the Calculators workspace. To add your
own macros to the list, set the CFXPOST_USER_MACROS environment variable to a comma-separated
list of the path of each macro you want to add. You can also view the existing macros in <CFDPOSTROOT>/etc/*.cse and study the definitions in order to understand how to create your own macro.
The macro file must contain at least one power syntax subroutine. For details on power syntax, see
Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
The following is an example of a short subroutine:
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
sub Hello1 {
print "Hello !\n";
}
sub Hello2 {
($title, $name) = @_;
print "Hello $title $name\n";
}
Loading the file containing the subroutines makes each subroutine available for execution. An example
of the Comfort Factors subroutine is shown.
Use quotation marks for string entries, and separate each argument with a comma.
You can also embed user interface controls into the macro using lines with special comments. In the
following example, the name of the macro, the types of options and the subroutine to call are all specified. This is done by adding macro GUI parameters between # Macro GUI begin and # Macro
GUI end lines.
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
!
!
!
256
Macro GUI begin

macro name = A simple macro
macro subroutine = mySub
macro parameter = Var
type = variable
default = Y
macro parameter = Location
type = location
location type = plane
Macro GUI end
sub mySub {
($variable, $plane) = @_;
Macro Calculator
! print "variable = $variable, plane = $plane\n";
!}
where the macro controls are as described in the following table:

Value
Definition
# macro name =
<name>
The macro identifier to appear in the macro combo
# macro subroutine
= <subname>
The subroutine to call
# macro report file

= <filename>
The file generated by the macro (if any). This enables the View
Report button, which attempts to load the file in a text/html
browser.
# macro related
files = <file1>,
<file2>
Other related files to load when loading this macro. This is useful
when your macro uses subroutines from other files.
# macro parameter
= <name>
Specifies a user interface option for a subroutine parameter. The

type of widget for the option is determined by the type of parameter. For each type there can be several possible options, as
described in the table below.
#type = <type>
#<option1> = <val>
The order of the user interface options must match the order of
the arguments for the subroutine.
#<option2> = <val>
#..
Type
Option
Example
string
default
My String
integer
default
10
range
1, 100
default
0.1 [s]
units are optional
range
0.1 [s], 0.4 [s]
controls unitsa
quantity type
Time
default
0.5[m], 0[m],
1[m]
float
triplet
range
quantity type
-1[m], 1[m]
Notes
units are optional

controls units*
Length
location
Inlet
location type
Boundary
location category
list
default
point
default
orange
either type or category can be specifiedbc
257
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Type
Option
Example
list
apple, orange,
fig
variable
default
Pressure
domain
default
Notes
Stator
A full list of quantity types can be found in <CFDPOSTROOT>/etc/<version>/common_units.cfx

Full list of types and categories include: Types: any valid object type; Categories: point, line, surface, plane, volume, variable, geometry,
viewer-viewable, selectable.
c
Returns the object's path. To get the object's name, use getObjectName(Object Path). Note that object path is returned only for
surfaces that are not read from the file. For file surfaces (boundaries, regions), this will be only the name. CFD-Post normally refers to
boundaries in other objects by name, not path (for example, a contour plot on a boundary), so that the object can be re-used in
other files or for file comparisons. For example, a contour in "inlet" will automatically turn into two separate objects when two files
are loaded and both have "inlet".
b
Loading this macro adds an entry A simple macro in the macro combo, with two options:
Variable - A combo with all loaded variables listed, defaulting to Y
Location - A combo with all objects of type plane listed
When it is executed, it just prints what is selected in the combos.
11.6.2.1. Macro Example: Output Path

This is an example macro that explicitly defines the output path using the Perl Print command output
redirection.
!
!
!
!
!
open(FH,">myOut.txt");
$val = ave("Pressure", "Point 1");
$time = getValue( "DATA READER", "Current Timevalue");
print FH "$time $val\n";
close(FH);
11.6.3. Using the Fan Noise Macro

The Fan Noise macro calculates the tonal noise levels generated by a low-speed fan (primarily axial-flow
fans). Tonal noise, or discrete-frequency noise, is due mainly to periodic forces exerted on fluid passing
a fan. The Fan Noise macro can be applied to low speed fans having a tip Mach number less than 0.45.
For a higher tip Mach number, the accuracy of the results is questionable. The fan must radiate in the
free field where the observer can see the fan blades (the Fan Noise macro does not take into account
the reflection effect). Thus, the Fan Noise macro cannot be applied to ducted fans.
11.6.3.1. Fan Noise Theory in Brief

Several methods have been developed to predict tonal noise; the Lowson Model is described here.
In the low-speed regime, the main noise component is a dipolar source. Lowson [Lowson, M. V., 1970,
Theoretical analysis of compressor noise The Journal of Acoustics So. Am., Vol. 47 (1), 1970, pp. 371,
385.] showed that the noise generated by a fan is directly related to the aerodynamic forces exerted
on the fixed and rotating blades. First, in a semi-empirical way, he calculated these forces; then he took
into account the distance between the source and the observer. In this case, the fan is considered as
a noise source for which the frequency depends on the rotational speed and other parameters. In 1962,
Lighthill established the acoustic pressure expression produced by a punctual force, , in rectilinear
motion.
258
Macro Calculator

(11.4)

where:

$" &!
#"
76
'
42
As shown in Figure 11.1: Relative position of the source and the observer (p. 260),
and
98
52 2
52 3

10
)

are the co-
is the convective comordinates of the Observer O (r, , ) and of the Source S(R, , t), respectively.
and
are respectively the thrust and the
ponent of the rotational Mach number in the direction.
QP
DC
GF
B
IH
A@
drag (torque) forces exerted on the blade. According to Equation 11.4 (p. 259), when the force
constant, the acoustic pressure is equal to zero.
is
Lowson extended Equation 11.4 (p. 259) to create a more general equation:
bX
aT
`
aY
bX
aY
c
dW V U
aS
`
bX
(11.5)
aT a S R
This relation describes the contribution of the convective phenomenon due to the term
. Note
that Equation 11.5 (p. 259) must be evaluated at retarded time . This equation can be used to find an
expression for the sound from a point force in arbitrary harmonic motion.
ge
259
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Figure 11.1: Relative position of the source and the observer
The Lowson model enables the calculation, at the observer position, of the acoustic pressure generated
by steady and unsteady efforts. The latter are considered as punctual sources and correspond to the
loads exerting by the z blades of the rotor. Lowson integrated Equation 11.5 (p. 259) in time and space
to get the mth harmonic of the acoustic pressure generated by a periodic rotating loading:

"

!
"

(11.6)

using the following equation:
(11.7)
&# '%
$#
and integrating Equation 11.6 (p. 260) by parts gives:
P1
F7
F8
1
F6
E6
F4
9 )3 2
I5
1
I5
E4 ) 3 2
(11.8)
A@
D
CH
G 1
P0
)
B(
=
as shown in Figure 11.1: Relative position of the source and the observer (p. 260) with x being the axis
of rotation and the fluctuating loading and observer position being defined as:
260
Macro Calculator

In

$

#
('
and
(11.9)
"
are respectively the thrust and drag (torque) components of the aerodynamic unsteady force
&%
represented by a global force exerted on the blade.
10
and
are important only in the acoustic near field. Thus, in the acoustic far field,
The terms in
Equation 11.8 (p. 260) becomes:
@ 37 6
I9
5
I9
F8 3 7 6
E
DH
(11.10)
BA
G 5
P4
3
C2
Taking into account of the thrust and drag periodicities, Lowson proposed the following formulation:
(11.11)
UTRS
WQ
VQ
WQ
VQ
where
R
R
is the effort harmonic order or the mode.
Substituting the results obtained from Equation 11.9 (p. 261) and Equation 11.11 (p. 261) into Equation 11.10 (p. 261) gives:
e
ba q i b a
rp
t`
where the rotational Mach number is
(11.12)
qs q
v y f e d
cb a
e
i wh g
=

=
e
i xh p
The integrals in Equation 11.12 (p. 261) can be identified as Bessel functions, and, using the expressions:
261
CFD-Post Tools Menu
(11.13)
Equation 11.12 (p. 261) can be evaluated directly to give the sound level radiated from z rotor blades:
(11.14)
&
"
' %#
"
&
'%
&

%

& 1 0

where:
is a first Bessel Function of order
87
5 43
z is the number of blades
DB
The interest of this relation is the knowledge of the components of the fluctuating efforts
and
GE
Following the experimental work done on helicopter blades by Scheiman [Scheiman, J., 1964, Sources
of noise in axial flow fans Journal of Sound and Vibration, Vol. 1, (3), 1964, pp. 302-322.], Lowson exten,
ded Equation 11.14 (p. 262) to an equation that relates the steady-state components of the force to the
acoustic pressure.
11.6.3.2. Fan Noise Macro Input

The Fan Noise macro calculates the tonal noise levels generated by a fan as heard at a specific location.
To access the Fan Noise macro:
1.
Load the .res file into CFD-Post.
2.
Click the Calculators tab.
3.
In the Macro field, select Fan Noise.
4.
In the Macro Calculator, specify the information described in Fan Noise Macro (p. 254).
5.
When the Macro Calculator fields are filled in, click Calculate.
11.6.3.3. Fan Noise Output (Reports)

The Fan Noise macro outputs a report; to view it, click View Report. The report displays the input values,
the sound pressure levels, the sound power levels, the directivity of harmonic 1, and the overall results.
Here is a partial sample:
262
Macro Calculator
The turbo noise report will be created in your working directory as turboNoise_report.html along
with the tables (turboNoise_*.csv) and graphics (turboNoise_*.png) included in the report.
This enables you to reuse these elements in other documents, if required.
11.6.3.4. Fan Noise Examples

There are two ways to perform turbo noise calculations; you can have:
A case with a single blade passage (the Lowson model is based on this)
A case with a multiple blade passage, including a 360 case.
As the following examples show, the only necessary differences in the two cases are the settings for
Blade Selection and the custom blade fields.
Fan Noise Macro Values
Single Blade Passage
Multiple Blade Passage
Domain
Fan Block
Fan Block
Blade Selection
Automatic
Custom
> Custom Blade
Blade
> Custom # of Blades
# of Harmonics
Observer (r)
Observer (theta)
Theta Sectors
36
36
Directivity Harm. #
Loading Coeff.
2.2
2.2
263
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Fan Noise Macro Values
Single Blade Passage
Multiple Blade Passage
Acou. Ref. Pressure
2e-005
2e-005
Acou. Ref. Power
1e-011
1e-011
Sound Speed
340
340
To view the report, click Calculate and then View Report. The report will contain graphs and charts
similar to the following:
Figure 11.2: Example Table and Chart of Sound Pressure Levels Created by the Fan Noise Macro
264
Mesh Calculator
Figure 11.3: Example Table and Chart of Sound Power Levels Created by the Fan Noise Macro
11.7. Mesh Calculator

The Mesh Calculator (Tools > Mesh Calculator) offers a variety of tools to check the quality of your
mesh. The results of each calculation are performed over all domains2 and printed to the output window.
Each calculated variable is also added to the list of available variables, which enables you to use them
as a basis for creating new plots. It is important to note that these variables are evaluated on nodes
rather than elements, based on the criteria described below.
You can select the following functions to calculate:
Maximum Face Angle
This calculates the largest face angle for all faces that touch a node. For each face, the angle between
the two edges of the face that touch the node is calculated and the largest angle from all faces is returned
for each node. Therefore, there is one maximum value for each node. The values that are reported are
the smallest and largest of these maximums.
The maximum face angle can be considered to be a measure of skewness. For details, see Mesh
Visualization Advice (p. 266).
Minimum Face Angle
This calculates the smallest face angle for all faces that touch a node. For each face, the angle between
the two edges of the face that touch the node is calculated and the smallest angle from all faces is returned for each node. Therefore, there is one minimum value for each node. The values that are reported
are the smallest and largest of these minimums. For details, see Mesh Visualization Advice (p. 266).
2
If multiple cases are loaded, the results of each calculation are performed over all domains in the specified cases.
265
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Edge Length Ratio
This is a ratio of the longest edge of a face divided by the shortest edge of the face. For each face:

(11.15)
is calculated for the two edges of the face that touch the node. The largest ratio is returned.
Connectivity Number
Connectivity number is the number of elements that touch a node.
Element Volume Ratio
Element Volume Ratio is defined as the ratio of the maximum volume of an element that touches
a node, to the minimum volume of an element that touches a node. The value returned can be used as
a measure of the local expansion factor.
Mesh Information
The Mesh Information option returns the number of nodes and elements in your volume mesh. It
also lists the number of elements of each element type. As an example, the mesh for the following
output contains two domains: one using hexahedral elements and the other containing tetrahedral
elements. The domains were connected using a domain interface:
Number of Nodes: 71680
Number of Elements: 139862
Tetrahedra: 75265
Wedges: 31395
Pyramids: 0
Hexahedra: 33202
When you click Calculate, the result window displays the results of the specified calculation. If the calculated variable does not already exist, it will be created. This enables you to create plots of the calculated
variable.
Note
When you compare the mesh information for a FLUENT file in FLUENT and in CFD-Post, the
reported number of nodes (FLUENT's "cells" ) will differ. In FLUENT, each domain can have
nodes at its boundaries that are not acknowledged as being shared with other domains. This
causes FLUENT mesh reports to contain duplicated nodes; however, the actual number of
cells is the same as reported by CFD-Post.
11.7.1. Mesh Visualization Advice

The following table gives some guidelines for checking mesh quality. If there are elements which have
mesh quality parameters greater or less than those listed, you may find problems with using the mesh
in the CFX-Solver.
Element Type
Elements may be a problem if they have any

of:
Tetrahedrons (4 nodes)
Edge Length Ratio > 100

Max Face Angle > 170
Min Face Angle < 10
266
Case Comparison
Element Type
Elements may be a problem if they have any

of:
Element Volume Ratio > 30
Connectivity Number > 50
Pyramids (5 nodes)

Min Face Angle < 10
Prisms (6 nodes)

Min Face Angle < 10
Hexahedrons (8 nodes)

Max/Min Edge Length > 100
Min Face Angle < 10
In many cases, the robustness of the CFX-Solver will not be adversely affected by high element volume
ratios. However, you should be aware that accuracy will decrease as the element volume ratio increases.
For optimal accuracy, you should try to keep the element volume ratio less than the value suggested
in the above table.
11.8. Case Comparison

The Compare Cases command enables you to compare results from two distinct cases, or between
two steps of a single case. The Compare Cases command is available in the Tools menu in any of the
following situations:
You have loaded two or more cases using the Load Results File dialog box option Keep current cases
loaded
You have loaded a single transient case (with results available for at least two time steps)
You have loaded a multi-configuration case, or a case with run history, using the Load Results File dialog
box option Load complete history as (either as a single case or as separate cases), so that results for two
or more steps are available through the timestep selector.
Selecting Compare Cases displays the Case Comparison details view.
The following options are available:
267
CFD-Post Tools Menu

Case Comparison Active
Enables the Case Comparison function; the comparison occurs when you click Apply.
In Case Comparison mode:
Difference variables are computed as the variable values from Case 1 minus the variable values from
Case 2. The latter are interpolated onto the mesh from Case 1 before the subtraction. As a result, the
difference variables are located on the mesh from Case 1.
To reverse the order of subtraction, swap the specifications for Case 1 and Case 2 in the Case
Comparison details view.
Note
CFD-Post does not support comparison of the following variables:
Connectivity Number
Edge Length Ratio
Element Volume Ratio
Force
Length
Mass Flow
Maximum Face Angle
Minimum Face Angle
When comparing variables on interior walls in cases where meshes are not identical, you
may see unexpected differences in difference plots. This can happen because during
mesh interpolation, variable values may get picked up from one or the other side of the
interior boundary. If the two sides do not have the same values, the interpolated values
could randomly oscillate between values of the two sides, producing additional difference
in the plot.
A Difference view is shown in a new view (in addition to the Case 1 (<case_name>) view and the
Case 2 (<case_name>) view). In that view, differences are shown on the mesh from Case 1.
Each difference variable is named by appending .Difference to the end of the variable name
from which it was derived. For example, the difference variable for the variable Pressure is Pressure.Difference.
The difference variables can be used anywhere that variables can normally be used. The function calculator and Table Viewer have special support for the difference variables, enabling you to easily see
functions and tables (respectively) of difference values. In addition, a chart that is based on locators
which exist in both Case 1 and Case 2 will have a "Difference" chart line. See Example: Comparing
Differences Between Two Files (p. 232).
268
Case Comparison
CFD-Post refers to the cases as Case 1 and Case 2 rather than as the original case names (which
are usually based on the results file name).
Case 1 and Case 2
Enables you to select the cases to be compared. If you want to compare two steps from within the same
case (that is, two time steps from a transient case) then you should select the same case for both Case
1 and Case 2. The timestep selector that is embedded into the Case Comparison details view then enables
you to select which steps you want to compare. In this circumstance, CFD-Post needs to load the results
from the selected case a second time, so you will see a second case appearing in the tree view. After
the comparison has been initialized, the steps used for the comparison can be changed either by using
the embedded timestep selector on the Case Comparison details view, or by using the usual timestep
selector (which now has separate entries for each of the two copies of the case being compared).
Tip
When comparing two 2D cases, set the case that is extruded less as Case 1. This enables
CFD-Post to match nodes between the two cases for one of the symmetry boundaries
and to define difference plots.
Options: Synchronize camera in displayed views
Causes changes in orientation of one view to be duplicated in the other. If the views are initially in different orientations, the first movement of any view will align all views to the same orientation.
Options: Use absolute value of Difference
Causes all values to be reported as positive numbers.
Note
Absolute difference works only for scalars, not vectors.
Mesh Detection
Enables you to control whether or not CFD-Post needs to determine whether the meshes in the two
cases are identical. If you know beforehand that the meshes are the same or different, you can save
processing time by enabling the appropriate mesh detection setting. Your options are:
Auto-detect same mesh causes CFD-Post to analyze the two meshes to determine whether they are
the same or different before performing any interpolation.
Meshes are identical and Meshes are different enable CFD-Post to perform interpolation immediately,
which saves processing time when cases are large.
Note
When you know meshes to be topologically identical but the node numbering may
be different, use Meshes are identical. This setting causes CFD-Post to ignore node
numbering and just use the topology of the mesh. In such cases do not use the Autodetect same mesh setting because this fails when node numbering is not the same.
269
CFD-Post Tools Menu

For example, when comparing a case from ANSYS CFX with a case from FLUENT, the
node numbering may differ even between apparently identical meshes, so the Meshes
are identical setting is required.
Note
If you run a case comparison on a file that contains solver-generated difference variables (such
as Volume Porosity.Difference), these variables will become unviewable when you
enter case comparison mode. However, the variables will be viewable again if you reload the
results file.
Global ranges of difference variables are updated as domains are used. For example, if a multidomain case is loaded and a difference variable colors a locator that is in a single domain, the
range displayed will reflect the range of the difference variable only in that domain. If the locator is moved to another domain (or a new locator colored by the same variable is added), the
global range for that difference variable is updated to reflect both domains.
When using expressions in case-comparison situations, the expression syntax is:
function()@CASE:[1|2].location
For example, area()@CASE:2.myplane
Case comparison is supported only for General mode. As a result, case comparison initiated
from the Turbo tab will revert to General mode.
When using Variable Minimum or Variable Maximum option on a point in multi-file or
comparison mode, the point is placed at the location of the overall minimum/maximum. If you
want to place the point at the minimum/maximum value for the individual cases, select the
appropriate case in the point's Domain List selector.
11.8.1. Calculating Difference Variables

There are two ways of creating difference variables:
You can use the CFX Interpolator.
You can use CFD-Post in comparison mode.
In each case you can then view variables such as "<vector variable>.Difference" (such as Velocity.Difference) and "<scalar variable>.Difference" (such as Temperature.Difference). For a description of the
general variable syntax, see Quantitative CEL Functions in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.
Difference variables are computed on the mesh of the first case by first interpolating the variable from
the second mesh to the first mesh, and then subtracting the two variables.
The magnitude of a difference variable "<vector variable>.Difference is always calculated as:
270
Command Editor
>
+ <
>
+ <
>
<
(11.16)
This is not the difference of the vector magnitudes between file 1 and file 2.
If you plot a vector plot such as Velocity.Difference, it is obvious that a real vector is being plotted.
However, if you plot "<vector variable>.Difference" in plots that use a scalar variable, how the difference
variable is calculated is an issue. For example, suppose in one file you have a velocity vector (1, 0, 0),
so the velocity magnitude is 1 [m/s], and in the second file you have a velocity vector of (-1, 0, 0), so
the velocity magnitude is also 1 [m/s]. The vector variable Velocity.Difference variable is (2, 0, 0), and
the scalar variable that CFD-Post calls "Velocity.Difference" is equal to the magnitude of this vector
variable (that is, it is 2 [m/s]). You might expect Velocity.Difference to be equal to "velocity magnitude
in file 2" - "velocity magnitude in file 1", which would give a value of 0 [m/s], but this is incorrect.
11.9. Command Editor

To start the Command Editor:
1.
Select Tools > Command Editor. Alternatively, right-click any object that can be modified using the
Command Editor and select Edit in Command Editor.
If you select Tools > Command Editor, the Command Editor opens and displays the current state
regardless of any selection.
If the Command Editor dialog box has not been used previously, it will be blank.
If the Command Editor dialog box has been used previously, it will contain CCL commands. If you
do not want to edit the CCL that appears, click Clear to erase all content.
If you right-click an object and select Edit in Command Editor, the CCL definition of the specific
object populates the Command Editor automatically. Modify or add parameters as required, then
process the new object definition to apply the changes.
2.
Click in the Command Editor.
3.
Prepare the content of the Command Editor by adding new content, modifying the existing content,
or both.
The types of content that may be prepared are CCL, action commands, and power syntax. Combinations of these types of content are allowed. For details, see:
CFX Command Language (CCL) Syntax in the CFX Reference Guide
Command Actions in the CFD-Post User's Guide
Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.
Right-click in the Command Editor to access basic editing functions. These functions include Find,
which makes a search tool appear at the bottom of the Command Editor dialog box. Enter a search
271
CFD-Post Tools Menu

term and click either Next or Previous to search upwards or downwards from the insertion point
or text selection. To hide the search tool, press Esc.
4.
Click Process.
The contents are processed: CCL changes will affect CCL object definitions, actions will be carried
out, and power syntax will be executed.
272
Chapter 12: Turbo Workspace

The Turbo workspace improves and speeds up post-processing for turbomachinery simulations. To access
the Turbo workspace, click the Turbo tab. The two main parts of the Turbo workspace interface are
the Turbo tree view and the Turbo details view.

12.1. Visual Representation of Initialization Status
12.2. Define/Modify Global Rotation Axis
12.3.Turbo Initialization
12.4.Turbo View Shortcuts
273
Turbo Workspace
12.5.Turbo Surface
12.6.Turbo Line
12.7.Turbo Plots
12.8.Turbo Macros
12.9. Calculate Velocity Components
12.1. Visual Representation of Initialization Status

Tip
You can copy the sample file AxialIni_001.res from the installation directory for your
software (<CFXROOT>/examples/) to your working directory, then load that file into CFDPost so that the descriptions in this chapter are easier to follow.
When in the Turbo workspace, a wireframe representation of each component appears in the viewer.
The currently selected turbo component appears as a green wireframe. If it also happens to be initialized,
it will be accompanied by a visual depiction of the background mesh, shown as a transparent green
surface with white mesh lines.
The Turbo tree view also indicates which components are initialized and which are not; if the component
is uninitialized, the symbol next to a component name is greyed out.
After entering the Turbo workspace and initializing the turbo components, you are ready to start using
the turbo-specific features offered in the Turbo workspace.
12.2. Define/Modify Global Rotation Axis

The Define/Modify Global Rotation Axis button is found on the Turbo workspace's Initialization view.
When you click that button, the Define/Modify Global Rotation Axis dialog box appears.
Exactly one axis of rotation method must be specified. The axis definition can come from the results
file, or it can be specified manually as either a Rotation Axis (six Cartesian coordinates) or a Principal
Axis (X, Y, or Z). Upon changing the axis definition, the axial, radial, and Theta coordinates (and their
dependent objects and expressions) are automatically updated. For details, see Theta (p. 285).
12.3. Turbo Initialization

Before using the Turbo workspace features, the components of the loaded case (such as rotor, stator,
, a (axial) and r (radial)
etc.1) need to be initialized. Initialization causes, among other things, span,

and Theta coordinates to be generated for each component.
The topics in this section include:
Requirements for Initialization (p. 275)
Initialize All Components (p. 275)
Uninitializing Components (p. 276)
Individual Component Initialization (Advanced Feature) (p. 276)
1
Available components depend on the turbo setup in the pre-processor. There is a minimum of one component available for each
domain.
274
Turbo Initialization
Details View for Individual Component Initialization (p. 276)
Important
Transient Blade Row cases that use the Fourier Transformation method will have two domains
in CFD-Post, but only one domain will have data. Do not initialize Turbo Post for the nondata domain because this will cause some Turbo-related features to fail.
12.3.1. Requirements for Initialization

Initialization of a turbo component requires the following:
Input for calculating a background mesh. For details, see Purpose of Background Mesh (p. 277).
Specification of the number of instances of each turbo component (such as stator, rotor, etc.) required to
represent the full geometry around the rotation axis.
Note
CFD-Post can initialize turbo space only for domains that are enclosed with inlet, outlet, hub,
and shroud regions. For more complex geometries, you must set up the problem to isolate
the region of interest into a separate domain that has these regions.
12.3.2. Initialize All Components

To access the initialization options, double-click Initialization in the Turbo tree view. The Initialize All
Components button that appears is used to set the region and instancing information for each of the
domains contained in your results file.
Correctly defined turbo spaces, as described in Requirements for Initialization (p. 275), can be automatically initialized. To automatically initialize all components using the default (best guess) region assignment, you can do one of the following:
Choose to auto-initialize all components when a message prompts you upon entering the Turbo workspace
for the first time (after loading a case).
Right-click a component in the Turbo tree view and select Initialize All.
Use a CCL instruction; for details, see Initializing all Turbo Components.
Tip
For automatic 360 initialization, CFD-Post uses cut planes and then looks for intersections
between these and the turbo regions. However, if gaps within the slice (due to the blade
region) are large relative to complexity of the topology and curvature of the passage is high,
automatic 360 initialization might fail as CFD-Post cannot reconstruct the passage curves.
If your case has regions, you should be able to manually initialize by setting the turbo regions
from any one of the passages. See Individual Component Initialization (Advanced Feature) (p. 276) for details.
275
Turbo Workspace
12.3.3. Uninitializing Components

After a turbo component has been initialized, it is possible to change or even remove its initialization
settings. An uninitialized component still has axial, radial and Theta coordinates generated for it, as
long as the rotation axis is defined.
The Uninitialize All Components button is accessible in the Turbo details view after double-clicking
Initialization in the Turbo workspace. A right-click menu associated with a turbo component in the
Turbo tree view enables uninitialization for that component, or for all components.
Uninitializing all turbo components can be followed by initializing only the components that will be
studied. Keeping the number of initialized components to a minimum saves computer memory. It also
saves computational effort when generating plots that span multiple components. For example, having
only one component initialized in a domain with many components restricts calculations and plots to
just the initialized component.
Uninitialization does not cause graphic objects to be deleted. A graphic object that disappears due to
the uninitialization of a turbo component reappears if the component is initialized.
12.3.4. Individual Component Initialization (Advanced Feature)

To manually initialize or modify the initialization of a turbo component, double-click the component in
the Turbo tree view. A details view for the component appears with two tabs: Definition and Instancing.
1.
Select the boundary names that correspond to the required turbo regions. To select multiple regions,
click the icon to the right of the drop-down list and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the regions.
2.
In the Background Mesh frame for each of the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves, choose to specify
each to be From Turbo Region or From Line (that is, from a predefined line). If From Line is chosen,
choose the line locator.
3.
Set the mesh Method to either Linear or Quasi Orthogonal.
4.
Click Apply (or Initialize, for subsequent initializations).
Additional information on Individual Component Initialization is available in the Details View for Individual Component Initialization (p. 276) section; for details, see:
Turbo Regions Frame (p. 277)
Background Mesh Frame (p. 277).
12.3.5. Details View for Individual Component Initialization

The Individual Component Initialization view contains the following tabs:
Definition Tab (p. 276)
Instancing Tab (p. 279)
12.3.5.1. Definition Tab

The Definition tab is used to specify:
276
The hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves and other regions for a turbo component (such as a rotor or
stator). For details, see Turbo Regions Frame (p. 277).
The parameters controlling the components associated background mesh.
The background mesh is a mesh generated on a constant-Theta projection of the passage, used to
define spanwise and meridional coordinates for the 3D geometry. For details, see Background Mesh
Frame (p. 277).
12.3.5.1.1. Turbo Regions Frame

The Turbo Regions frame is used to assign 2D regions to the Hub, Shroud, Blade, Inlet, Outlet,
and Periodic regions of a turbo component. These regions are not always required, but when provided,
may be used in the following ways:
The Blade region specification is used to enable macros and plots that deal with blades (for example, a
blade loading macro).
The intersections of the Hub, Shroud, Inlet and Outlet regions with Periodic 1 may be used in
order to generate internal polylines that are then collapsed in the Theta direction to form the boundaries
of the background mesh. Alternatively, or if any of these intersections are not possible, polylines/lines
may be specified explicitly in the Background Mesh frame. For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 277).
In the special case of a turbo component that wraps 360 degrees around the rotation axis, there may
be no periodic regions available. In this case, you may do one of the following:
1.
Select the 360 Case Without Periodics check box.
2.
Specify the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet regions. Create a rectangularly-bounded slice plane, using the
point-and-normal method, such that it intersects the turbo component on only one side of the rotation
axis. In this case, it may be helpful to temporarily set the plane type to Sample so that you can see
the entire plane. After the plane is in the correct position, set the type to Slice. Finally, specify this
slice plane as Periodic 1. You do not need to set Periodic 2.
3.
Specify polylines for the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet in the Background Mesh frame (described next).
12.3.5.1.2. Background Mesh Frame

12.3.5.1.2.1. Purpose of Background Mesh
In order to calculate Streamwise Location ( ) and Span coordinates for a turbo component, a separate
2D mesh is created as an intermediate step. The mesh, here referred to as a background mesh, is formed
by taking the 3D passage boundaries (hub, shroud, inlet, outlet) and collapsing them in the Theta direction, forming a 2D passage outline on an axial-radial plane. The outline is then filled in with a mesh
consisting of lines of constant span and meridional coordinate. The resulting mesh is then used to associate Streamwise Location and Span coordinates with any 3D position in the passage.
12.3.5.1.2.2. Requirements for Setting Up a Background Mesh

The background mesh frame requires you to specify how the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves will
be obtained. The two available options are:
From Turbo Region
277
Turbo Workspace
When From Turbo Region is specified for a particular curve, that curve is automatically extracted
by intersecting the corresponding turbo region (specified in the Turbo Regions frame) with the
specified Periodic 1 region (also specified in the Turbo Regions frame).
From Line
When From Line is specified for a particular curve, you must provide a polyline/line locator for
that curve. You must use the latter method for every curve that cannot be derived by the first
method (for example, because one or more Turbo Regions are not specified).
A line or polyline used to generate a background mesh must follow the entire surface it represents
(along the component). One way in which a polyline can be created is by using the intersection between
a bounded plane (such as a slice plane or a turbo surface of constant Theta) and the appropriate surface
(for example, the hub surface). Before the polyline is used for initialization, is transformed by adjusting
all Theta coordinates to the same value. The Theta coordinates of the polyline, therefore, have no effect;
polylines obtained by intersection with a plane need not use a constant-Theta plane. If you cannot form
the polyline easily, you can save pieces of the polyline to a series of files, use an editor to consolidate
the parts, and then reload the edited file. For details, see:
Line Command (p. 148)
Polyline Command (p. 172).
12.3.5.1.2.3. Types of Background Mesh

Two methods are offered for creation of the background mesh:
Linear
Quasi Orthogonal
278
The figure on the left shows a background mesh (for clarity, Density was set to 200) using the Linear
method, while the figure on the right shows the mesh using the Orthogonal (default) method. As can
be seen from pictures, the Quasi Orthogonal method offers a higher-quality meridional space representation, especially in highly curved passages.
12.3.5.1.2.4. Density of the Background Mesh

The density of the background mesh influences the accuracy of the representation of the meridional
space and, therefore, the accuracy of the nonlinear coordinate transformations. The default offered for
Density should be sufficient in most cases.
12.3.5.2. Instancing Tab

The Instancing tab for a turbo component is shown below:
1.
Set the Number of Graphical Instances.
2.
Apply Rotation should be used when the number of copies is more than 1, otherwise, all copies will
be drawn in the same location.
3.
Axis Definition: By default, the Axis Definition can be automatically determined From Results file.
To set your own, select Custom, then set Principal Axis or Rotation Axis (specified using a From/To
Line).
4.
For Angle From, set the rotation angle using one of two methods: Instances in 360 degrees or a specified
value.
5.
Between Number of Passages and number of passages per component (Passages per Component),
the number of components per 360 degrees is determined.
6.
Translation is set by entering three vector components.
7.
By selecting Apply Reflection/Mirroring, a reflection is set using an existing plane. You may need to
create a plane before you apply the reflection.
The instancing information is used to display multiple instances of the geometry. For example, if there
are two components, with the instancing information for component 1 specifying one copy, and component 2 specifying ten copies, a turbo surface of constant span that covers both components will
show, by default, one copy of the portion generated for component 1, and ten copies of the portion
generated for component 2.
The instancing specified for a component applies to objects (or parts thereof ) generated over the
component, in order for this instancing information to apply to a graphic object:
1.
At least part of the graphic object must be generated using data from the component (that is, there
must be an association between the graphic object and the component).
2.
The graphic object must have Apply Instancing Transform selected and Transform set to an Instancing
Transform that has Instancing Info From Domain selected.
This is because, in the current version of CFD-Post, the instancing information for a component is
actually the instancing information for the components domain. Consequently, changes to the
domain instancing, or instancing for any other component in the domain, also alters the instancing
information for the component.
279
Turbo Workspace
Additional information on instance transforms is available in Instance Transform Command (p. 206).
12.4. Turbo View Shortcuts

The following table shows commands that are specific to the Turbo tree view. To access these commands,
right-click the appropriate elements in the Turbo tree view.
For a list of the other commands that appear in the Turbo tree view (and in most tree views), see
Common Outline View Shortcuts (p. 16).
Command
Description
Initialize
Initializes the selected turbo components. For details, see Individual Component
Initialization (Advanced Feature) (p. 276).
Uninitialize
Uninitializes the selected turbo components. For details, see Uninitializing Components (p. 276).
Initialize All
Initializes all turbo components. For details, see Initialize All Components (p. 275).
Uninitialize All
Uninitializes all turbo components. For details, see Uninitializing Components (p. 276).
Show in Separate
Window
Displays the selected plot or chart in its own window.
Promote to General Mode
Copies the selected plot object and any required supporting objects (for example,
a line locator) to the Outline workspace. This would allow, for example, the selected
plot to be included in a report.
12.5. Turbo Surface

Turbo surfaces are graphic objects that can be viewed and used as locators, just like other graphic objects.
To create a turbo surface, select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface from the menu bar. After you enter
a name in the new Turbo Surface dialog box and click OK, the details view for the turbo surface will
appear.
Note
Blade Aligned Turbo Surfaces can fail due to the following limitations:
The extraction of leading and trailing edges of the blade is sensitive to tip clearance and to
the curvature of the edges.
The normalization of coordinates is sensitive to blade extend comparing to inlet and outlet
extend (that is, when the edges are too close to inlet/outlet).
You can always use the Streamwise Location coordinate when the quality of the blade aligned
coordinates are in doubt.
12.5.1. Turbo Surface: Geometry

Options available for Definition are:
Constant Span
280
Turbo Surface
Constant Streamwise Location
Constant Blade Aligned
Constant Blade Aligned Linear
Constant Theta
Cone
The Constant Span, Constant Streamwise Location, and Constant Theta options are
similar to planes in that they can be bounded and have Slice or Sample types. For details, see
Type (p. 282).
12.5.1.1. Domains
See Selecting Domains (p. 19).
Constant Span creates a surface at a fractional span value between the hub and shroud. For details,
see Span Normalized (p. 285).
Constant Streamwise Location creates a surface at a fractional streamwise distance between the
inlet and outlet. For details, see Streamwise Location (p. 285).
Constant Blade Aligned create surfaces that is aligned with the leading and trailing edges of the
blade. If the blade is curved, the surfaces will also be curved.
Constant Blade Aligned Linear create surfaces that is aligned with the leading and trailing
edges of the blade. If the blade is curved, the surfaces will be flat and aligned to run through the middle
of the curves.
Constant Theta creates a surface at a specific Theta value. For details, see Theta (p. 285).
Cone uses the two supplied points to create a line. The cone is created where the user-defined line intersects the axis of rotation and Point 2:
281
Turbo Workspace
The user-defined line is then rotated about the axis of origin to create the cone. If the line is parallel
to the axis of rotation, a cylinder is created. If the line is normal to the axis of rotation, a disc is created.
The line can be described by Cartesian or cylindrical components. When entering cylindrical coordinates,
only the axial distance and radius are required. The points can be entered or picked directly from the
viewer.
Note
Constant Theta and Cone methods are available even before turbo initialization has
been performed because these methods do not depend on span or streamwise coordinates.
12.5.1.3. Bounds
The available types of Bounds for the Turbo Surface to be created can be seen by clicking
the Type box.
next to
When None is selected, the Turbo Surface cuts through a complete cross-section of each domain specified
in the Domains list. The Turbo Surface is bounded only by the limits of the domain.
Using Rectangular, you can enter the maximum and minimum value for the two dimensions on the
Turbo Surface. The Turbo Surface is undefined in areas where the rectangle extends outside of the domains specified in the Domains list.
The Invert Surface Bounds check box reverses the effect of the surface bound. The surface is defined
only in regions outside the bounding constraints.
12.5.1.4. Type
You can set the Type to either Slice or Sample.
282
Turbo Line
Slice extends the Turbo Surface in all directions until it reaches the edge of the domain. Points on
the Turbo Surface correspond to points where the Turbo Surface intersects an edge of the mesh. As
a result, the number of points in a slice Turbo Surface is indirectly proportional to the mesh spacing.
Sample creates the Turbo Surface with rectangular bounds. The density of points on the Turbo Surface
corresponds to the size of the bounds for your Turbo Surface in each of the Turbo Surface directions,
and the value in the Samples box for each of the two directions that describe the Turbo Surface. You
can type in the value in the Samples box, increase or decrease the value by 1 by clicking or respectively, or use the embedded slider (which has a maximum value of 998 and a minimum value of
2). A sample Turbo Surface is a set of evenly-spaced points which are independent of the mesh spacing.
12.5.2. Turbo Surface: Common Tabs

You can adjust the other Turbo Surface settings on tabs that are common to other features in CFD-Post:
12.5.2.1. Turbo Surface: Color

To change the color settings, click the Color tab. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
12.5.2.2. Turbo Surface: Render

12.5.2.3. Turbo Surface: View

To change the view settings, click the View tab. For details, see View Details Tab (p. 26).
12.6. Turbo Line

Turbo lines are graphic objects that can be viewed and used as locators, just like other graphic objects.
To create a turbo line, select Insert > Location > Turbo Line from the menu bar. After entering a name
in the new Turbo Line dialog box, the details view for the turbo line will appear.
12.6.1. Turbo Line: Geometry

Set the following:
1. Set the applicable Domains as described in Selecting Domains (p. 19).
2. Define the line. The options available for the Method are:
Inlet to Outlet, which creates a line at specific Span Normalized (p. 285) and Theta (p. 285) value, over
a range of streamwise values.
Select the number of points along the line per component with the value you enter in the
Samples/Comp box. The sample line is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points that are independent
of the mesh spacing.
283
Turbo Workspace
Hub to Shroud, which creates a line of a specific Mode at a specific Theta (p. 285) value. The method
for creating a line in this way is the same as for the locator line in a hub-to-shroud turbo chart. For
details on the possible Mode settings, see Hub to Shroud (p. 289).
Tip
If you set a mesh-density based turbo line and want to be able to see the points of
analysis so that you can set an appropriate amount of reduction, you can create a
vector (Insert > Vector) and define its Location to be the turbo line.
Circumferential, which creates a line at specific streamwise and span values, over a range of Theta
values. The number of samples is required. The number of points along the line will correspond to the
value you enter in the Samples box. The sample line is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points which
are independent of the mesh spacing. For details, see:
Streamwise Location (p. 285)
Span Normalized (p. 285).
3. For Inlet to Outlet and Circumferential, set the Bounds.
When None is selected, the Turbo Line is restricted to only the parameters specified in the Definition
section of the form. The Turbo Line is not bounded by the limits of the domain if the conditions you
specify describe locations outside of the domain.
When End Points is selected, you can define the ends of the Turbo Line by entering the maximum
and minimum for the dimension making up the line. The Turbo Line is visible but will be colored with
an undefined color in areas where the line extends outside of the domains specified in the Domains
list.
12.6.2. Turbo Line: Common Tabs

You can adjust the other Turbo Surface settings on tabs that are common to other features in CFD-Post:
12.6.2.1. Turbo Line: Color

To change the color settings, click the Color tab. For details, see Color Details Tab (p. 19).
12.6.2.2. Turbo Line: Render

12.6.2.3. Turbo Line: View

To change the view settings, click the View tab. For details, see View Details Tab (p. 26).
12.7. Turbo Plots

Introduction to Turbo Plots (p. 285)
284
Turbo Plots
Initialization Three Views (p. 286)
Blade-to-Blade Object (p. 286)
Meridional Object (p. 287)
3D View Object (p. 288)
Turbo Charts (p. 288)
12.7.1. Introduction to Turbo Plots

Each turbo plot appears in the Turbo tree view under Plots, and can be edited.
12.7.1.1. Show Faces/Show Mesh Lines

Double-click 3D View and choose to view the faces (Show Faces) or the edges of the mesh elements
(Show Mesh Lines) by enabling the appropriate toggles.
12.7.1.2. Instancing
The instancing information has already been entered during the initialization phase. You can opt to
show instancing for the plots in each domain by changing the # of Copies. For details, see Instancing
Tab (p. 279).
12.7.1.3. Turbo Measurements

12.7.1.3.1. Span
Span is the distance from hub region in length units.
12.7.1.3.2. Span Direction

Span Direction is a unit vector pointing along the direction of span coordinate for each mesh node,
based on the background mesh.
12.7.1.3.3. Span Normalized

Span Normalized defines the dimensionless distance (between 0 and 1) from the hub to the shroud.
For example, if the distance between the hub and shroud in a straight duct is 0.1 m, a span of 0.9 would
describe a location 0.09 m from the hub and 0.01 m away from the shroud.
12.7.1.3.4. Streamwise Location

Streamwise location is the dimensionless distance from the inlet to the outlet. It ranges from 0 to 1 for
the first component, 1 to 2 for the second, and so on. For example, in a single domain case, if the distance
between the inlet and the outlet in a straight duct is 1 m, a streamwise location of 0.4 would describe
a location 0.4 m from the inlet and 0.6 m away from the outlet. If the same duct were the second
component in a multi-component case, the same location would then be expressed as a streamwise
location of 1.4.
12.7.1.3.5. Theta
Theta is the angular coordinate measured about the axis of rotation following the right-hand rule.
285
Turbo Workspace
The Theta variable is intentionally generated by CFD-Post to have the following two properties:
A minimum Theta value of zero (at the inlet).
Continuously increasing values of Theta independent of the total blade wrap. This is particularly useful
for high-wrap blades.
Because of these properties, the Theta variable generated in CFD-Post is most likely different than that
of a user-defined expression based on the Cartesian coordinates.
12.7.1.3.6. Advanced: Position of Zero Theta

The position of zero Theta (Theta = 0) relative to the global coordinate system depends on the loaded
case. For geometries that define a partial machine (not full 360), zero Theta is at the geometry point
with the lowest angle following the right-hand rule. For full 360 geometries, zero Theta is generally at
an arbitrary position. You can specify zero Theta via an environment variable. For details, see Setting
CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables (p. 6).
12.7.2. Initialization Three Views

If you double-click Initialization in the Turbo tree view, the Initialization editor appears and a Three
Views toggle will be available. Selecting this toggle causes the viewer to show three viewports that
have the following views:
A 3D View. This is the same as the standard viewer, with 3D manipulation available using the rotate,
translate and zoom functions.
A Blade-to-Blade 2D view, which is described in Blade-to-Blade Object (p. 286). The horizontal axis shows
streamwise location and the vertical axis shows Theta. The 2D view enables translation, zoom, and rotation
around the axis normal to the blade-to-blade view. Other rotations are not possible.
A Meridional 2D view, which is described in Meridional Object (p. 287). The horizontal axis shows axial
distance and the vertical axis shows the radius. The view will allow the same transformations as the bladeto-blade view, with rotation possible around the axis normal to the meridional view.
The three views listed above are also listed in the Turbo tree view under Plots.
These default objects can be edited in the same way as other objects created in CFD-Post. For details,
see Turbo Surface (p. 280).
You can copy these two objects into the Object tree view by right-clicking each one and selecting
Promote to General Mode.
12.7.3. Blade-to-Blade Object

The Blade-to-Blade object is used to view plots on a surface of constant span. The surface is displayed
in the Cartesian (X-Y-Z) and Blade to Blade views.
1.
Select the Domain(s).

To select more than one domain, click the multiple select icon and pick the entities.
2.
Choose the fractional Span (0 to 1) where the plot is located. The Plot Type can be one of the following:
Color (p. 287)
286
Turbo Plots
Contour (p. 287)
Vector (p. 287)
Stream (p. 287)
3.
Select a color if Color By Variable is not chosen as the Plot Type.

For details, see Instancing (p. 285).
12.7.3.1. Span
Set the fractional distance between the hub and shroud. For details, see Span Normalized (p. 285).
12.7.3.2. Angular Shift

The Angular Shift parameter moves the blade-to-blade plot along the Theta coordinate. This is useful
to control the point of splitting in high wrap turbo cases. It does not affect the data; this is purely a
rendering feature.
12.7.3.3. Plot Type

12.7.3.3.1. Color
The Color option displays variable values using a color legend. It requires the specification of a variable,
range and the option of using hybrid or conservative values. For details, see:
Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable (p. 20)
Instancing (p. 285).
12.7.3.3.2. Contour
Contour lines are drawn on the location described by the surface plot. Additional information on the
option is available in Contour Command (p. 183).
12.7.3.3.3. Vector
A vector plot is created on the location described by the surface plot. For details, see Vector Command (p. 180).
12.7.3.3.4. Stream
A plot of streamlines are drawn on the location described by the surface plot. For details, see Streamline
Command (p. 185).
12.7.4. Meridional Object

The Meridional object is used to view plots on an axial-radial plane. A surface of constant Theta at 0
degrees is created. The surface is displayed in the Cartesian (X-Y-Z) and Meridional (A-R) viewports.
1.
Select the Domain(s).
287
Turbo Workspace
To select more than one domain, click the multiple select icon and pick the entities.
2.
Choose the number of Stream Samples and Span Samples.
3.
Choose from: Outline, Color, Contour, or Vector plot types.
In order to obtain values for variables on the meridional surface, circumferential averaging is used. The
types of circumferential averaging are:
Length
For details, see Circumferential Averaging by Length (p. 294).
Area
For details, see Circumferential Averaging by Area: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart (p. 295).
Mass
For details, see Circumferential Averaging by Mass Flow: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart (p. 295).
Area averaging is default.
Toggles are available to show the following:
Blade wireframe
Sample mesh
Chart location lines
12.7.5. 3D View Object

3D View is used to draw regions of the turbo assembly for visualization purposes. It is not intended to
be the basis for quantitative calculations. Select the regions that you want to draw.
After creating the blade-to-blade object (select the Three Views toggle in the Initialization object), you
can view the blade-to-blade object in the 3D View object by setting the appropriate option in the 3D
View object.
Note that you can view chart location lines in the 3D View object by setting the appropriate option in
the 3D View object.
12.7.6. Turbo Charts

The following turbo charts are created by default:
Hub to Shroud (p. 289)
Inlet to Outlet (p. 296)
Blade Loading (p. 297)
Circumferential (p. 298)
To see a chart, double-click it in the Turbo tree view.
288
Turbo Plots
12.7.6.1. Type
12.7.6.1.1. Hub to Shroud
Hub to Shroud has the following options:
12.7.6.1.1.1. Single Line vs.Two Lines
12.7.6.1.1.2. Display
12.7.6.1.1.3. Mode
12.7.6.1.1.4. Point Type
12.7.6.1.1.5.Theta
12.7.6.1.1.6. Samples
12.7.6.1.1.7. Streamwise
12.7.6.1.1.8. Distribution
12.7.6.1.1.9. X/Y Variable
12.7.6.1.1.10. Circumferential Averaging by Length
12.7.6.1.1.11. Circumferential Averaging by Area: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart
12.7.6.1.1.12. Circumferential Averaging by Mass Flow: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart
12.7.6.1.1.13. Linear BA Streamwise Location Coordinates
12.7.6.1.1.14. BA Streamwise Location Coordinates
12.7.6.1.1.1. Single Line vs. Two Lines

Select either Single Line or, to perform a comparison between two streamwise locations on a hubto-shroud plot, to Two Lines.
12.7.6.1.1.2. Display
If you have selected Two Lines, you can set Display to:
Separate Lines
Displays the two lines without performing any comparisons.
Difference (S2S1)
Displays the difference in the circumferentially averaged variable between the two locations, relative
to the first lines location.
Ratio (S2/S1)
Displays the ratio of the difference in the circumferentially averaged variable between the two locations,
relative to the first lines location.
When Display is set to Difference (S2S1) or Ratio (S2/S1), you can set the Compare option
to X Values or to Y Values. The selected values will be compared between the two lines.
12.7.6.1.1.3. Mode
Set Mode to one of the following options:
Two Points Linear
289
Turbo Workspace
The Two Points Linear option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be a straight line, specified by
two points: one on the hub and one on the shroud. The Point Type setting (described below) specifies
the coordinate system for interpreting the specified points.
Blade Aligned Linear
The Blade Aligned Linear option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of
constant Linear BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see Linear BA Streamwise Location
Coordinates (p. 295).
Blade Aligned
The Blade Aligned option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of constant
BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see BA Streamwise Location Coordinates (p. 296).
Streamwise Location
The Streamwise Location option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of
constant streamwise coordinate. Here, the streamwise coordinate system is derived from a background
mesh For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 277).
.
Note
Blade Aligned coordinates may not always be available, depending on the case geometry. In
particular, if the blade tip clearance is large or uneven between the leading and trailing edges,
CFD-Post may not be able to detect the blade edge lines. In this case you will not be able to
use Blade Aligned coordinates in turbo surface or turbo chart specification.
In turbo line, turbo surface, and related editors, the Blade Aligned coordinate values that you
enter in the input fields (and the related CCL parameters) are normalized to the blade's leading
and trailing edge locations with predefined constant references: 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be
the blades leading and trailing edges, respectively. The normalization of the input values is to
enable a consistent reference to the leading and trailing edges regardless of specific cases.
These values are conventions, not real blade aligned coordinated values; the normalized values
are translated by the engine to create the real Blade Aligned coordinate values before constructing turbo lines and turbo surfaces.
12.7.6.1.1.4. Point Type

The Point Type setting is applicable when Mode is set to Two Points Linear. It controls the coordinate system for defining the specified hub and shroud point coordinates. The options for Point
Type are:
AR
When the AR option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified in AR (axial, radial) coordinates.
XYZ
When the XYZ option is selected, you specify the x, y, and z coordinates of the line's end points.
Blade Aligned Linear
290
Turbo Plots
When the Blade Aligned Linear option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified,
each by a single Linear BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see Linear BA Streamwise
Location Coordinates (p. 295).
Streamwise Location
When the Streamwise Location option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified,
each by a single streamwise coordinate. Here, the streamwise coordinate system is derived from a
background mesh For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 277).
.
12.7.6.1.1.5. Theta
The Theta (p. 285) setting is available with the Hub to Shroud methods.
12.7.6.1.1.6. Samples
The Samples setting controls the number of sampling points between the hub and shroud.
12.7.6.1.1.7. Streamwise
The Streamwise fields enable you to set the locations to compare when Display is set to Difference
or Ratio.
12.7.6.1.1.8. Distribution
The Distribution setting controls the method used to distribute sampling points from hub to shroud
(at the same streamwise coordinate).
Set Distribution to one of:
Equal Distance
The Equal Distance option (default) causes the sampling points to be distributed at uniform
distances along a hub-to-shroud path. For circumferential averaging purposes, contiguous circular
bands are internally constructed, one for each sampling point, concentric about the rotation axis,
291
Turbo Workspace
width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling point, each band having the same
width or spanwise extent.
Equal Mass Flow
The Equal Mass Flow option causes the sampling points to be distributed along a hub-to-shroud
path such that contiguous circular bands can be internally constructed, one for each sampling point,
concentric about the rotation axis, width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling
point, with an equal mass flow through each band (except possibly the first and last bands). See Include
Boundary Points, below.
Note
CFD-Post cannot create an Equal Mass Flow point distribution for some cases:
When there is a cross-section recirculation and the total mass flow on the section is near
zero, the point distribution will fail.
When there is a mass flow 'spike' on the section (usually this is caused by an ill-defined
solution), the equal mass distribution will be impractical
When too many sample points are requested over a small area.
Equal Area
292
Turbo Plots
The Equal Area option causes the sampling points to be distributed along a hub-to-shroud path
such that contiguous circular bands can be internally constructed, one for each sampling point,
concentric about the rotation axis, width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling
point, with an equal area for each band (except possibly the first and last bands). See Include
Boundary Points, below.
Mesh Density Based
The Mesh Density Based option looks at the mesh density on a line that intersects the periodic
surface from the inlet to the outlet and bases the number of points on whichever section is more
dense. The resulting turbo line will not have the exact distribution of the inlet-outlet/periodic intersection, but it will be similar.
With this option you can reduce the amount of computation time by setting a Reduction value:
293
Turbo Workspace
Max. Number of Points > Max. Points
The Max. Points setting controls the number of points of analysis.
Reduction Factor > Factor
The Factor setting specifies the value by which to decrease the total number of points. A value of
1 causes all points to be used.
Note
Note that for Two-Line Hub to Shroud plots, you may not be able to create Difference
and Ratio plots using Reduction Factor if the two lines are in different domains.
When either Equal Mass Flow or Equal Area is set, there is a check box, Include Boundary
Points, which, if selected, will shift all bands (and consequently the sampling points) by half the band
width (in the spanwise direction) so that sampling points appear on the hub and shroud (see Figure 12.1: Sampling Point Distribution with Include Boundary Nodes Option (p. 294)). The first and last
bands are then half the size of the other bands in terms of the particular measure used in the initial
construction: distance, mass flow, or area.
Figure 12.1: Sampling Point Distribution with Include Boundary Nodes Option
12.7.6.1.1.9. X/Y Variable

Choose X and Y variables for the chart axes from the list.
12.7.6.1.1.10. Circumferential Averaging by Length

When the Circ. Average setting is set to Length, circumferential averaging of values at a sampling
point is carried out internally by forming a circular arc, centered about the rotation axis, passing through
the sampling point. Values are interpolated to n equally-spaced locations along the arc, using values
294
Turbo Plots
from nearby nodes, where n is a number that is inversely proportional to the mesh length scale, and
limited by the Max. Samples setting. The n values are then averaged in order to obtain a single, circumferentially-averaged value for the sampling point.
Figure 12.2: Circumferential Averaging by Length
12.7.6.1.1.11. Circumferential Averaging by Area: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart

When the Circ. Average setting is set to Area, a variable value at each sampling point is calculated
as an area average over the corresponding circular band that was internally constructed as part of the
process of distributing the sampling points. For details, see Distribution (p. 291).
12.7.6.1.1.12. Circumferential Averaging by Mass Flow: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart

When the Circ. Average setting is set to Mass, a variable value at each sampling point is calculated
as a mass flow average over the corresponding circular band that was internally constructed as part of
the process of distributing the sampling points. For details, see Distribution (p. 291).
12.7.6.1.1.13. Linear BA Streamwise Location Coordinates

The Linear BA Streamwise Linear coordinates are defined as 0 (zero) at the inlet, 0.25 at a straight
line that approximates the blade leading edge, 0.75 at a similar line for the trailing edge, and 1.0 at the
outlet, adding 1.0 for each successive turbomachinery component downstream of the first. Dashed lines
in Figure 12.3: Blade Aligned Linear Coordinates (p. 296) show constant values of Linear BA Streamwise
Linear coordinate.
For more details on the convention that 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be the blades leading and trailing
edges, see Mode (p. 289).
295
Turbo Workspace
Figure 12.3: Blade Aligned Linear Coordinates
12.7.6.1.1.14. BA Streamwise Location Coordinates

The BA Streamwise Location coordinates are defined as 0 (zero) at the inlet, 0.25 at the blade leading
edge, 0.75 at the trailing edge, and 1.0 at the outlet, adding 1.0 for each successive turbomachinery
component downstream of the first.
For more details on the convention that 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be the blades leading and trailing
edges, see Mode (p. 289).
Figure 12.4: Blade Aligned Coordinates
12.7.6.1.2. Inlet to Outlet

The distance between sampling points between the inlet and outlet is controlled by the number you
enter in the Samples box. Choose X and Y variables for the chart axes from the list.
296
Turbo Plots
12.7.6.1.2.1. Circumferential Averaging by Length: Inlet to Outlet Turbo Chart

When the Circ. Average setting is set to Length, circumferential averaging of values is carried out
internally by creating arcs through sampling about the rotation axis. Values are interpolated to n equallyspaced locations along the arc, using values from nearby nodes, where n is a number that is inversely
proportional to the mesh length scale, and limited by the Max. Samples setting. The n values are then
averaged in order to obtain a single, circumferentially-averaged value for the sampling point.
12.7.6.1.2.2. Circumferential Averaging by Area or Mass: Inlet to Outlet Turbo Chart

When performing area average or mass-flow average calculations, surfaces of constant-streamwise coordinate are used to carry out the averaging. Each surface passes through its associated sampling point,
as shown in Figure 12.5: Inlet to Outlet Sample Points (p. 297).
Figure 12.5: Inlet to Outlet Sample Points
12.7.6.1.3. Theta
The Theta (p. 285) setting is available with the Inlet to Outlet methods.
12.7.6.1.4. Blade Loading

The Blade Loading feature plots pressure (or another chosen variable) on the blade at a given spanwise
location. A polyline is created at the given spanwise location.
A special variable, Streamwise (0-1) is available as the X Variable used in blade loading plots.
This is a streamwise coordinate that follows the blade surface; it can be used as a substitute for the
axial coordinate (for example, X) or the variable Chart Count. The streamwise coordinate is based
on the meridional coordinate, and is normalized so that it ranges from 0 at the leading edge to 1 at
the trailing edge of the blade.
297
Turbo Workspace
12.7.6.1.5. Circumferential
Select a streamwise and spanwise location and a number of sampling points.
Note
The Theta extents of the chart line are set to the Theta extents of the domain. For this reason,
some of the sample points may fall outside the domain. To see the circumferential chart line,
edit the Plots > 3D View object and turn on Show chart location lines.
12.8. Turbo Macros

Select the macro of choice from the Turbo tree view.
Note
Turbo initialization automatically sets up the performance macros in such a way that you
have to define only a limited number of parameters. For details, see:
Gas Compressor Performance Macro (p. 252).
Gas Turbine Performance Macro (p. 253)
Liquid Pump Performance Macro (p. 253)
Liquid Turbine Performance Macro (p. 254)
Fan Noise Macro (p. 254).
12.9. Calculate Velocity Components

The Calculate Velocity Components button on the Initialization object can be used to calculate
velocity component (and other) variables pertinent to turbo simulations. These variables are listed in
Table 12.1: Generated Variables (p. 299) and illustrated in Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial, Circumferential, and
Meridional Velocity Components (p. 300), Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional Plane (p. 301),
Figure 12.8: Streamwise, Spanwise, Circumferential, and Blade-to-Blade Velocity Components (p. 302),
Figure 12.9: Velocity Components in Blade-To-Blade Plane (p. 303), and Figure 12.10: Velocity Flow Angle
Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane (p. 304). The relationship between the velocity
components is described in Equation 12.1 (p. 300), Equation 12.2 (p. 302), and Equation 12.3 (p. 303).
Note
To get velocity units for tip speed derived from R and Omega quantities, you can divide the
expression by 1 [rad] to eliminate the angle units from the expression. For example, use:
298
Calculate Velocity Components

tipVel = Radius * omega / 1 [rad]
Table 12.1: Generated Variables

Variable
Name
Type
Description
Velocity Axial
Scalar
The velocity component in the axial direction. It is positive when the

velocity is in the direction of increasing axial coordinate. For details,
see Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial, Circumferential, and Meridional Velocity
Components (p. 300) and Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional Plane (p. 301).
Velocity Radial
Scalar
The velocity component in the radial direction. It is positive when the

velocity is in the direction of increasing radial coordinate. For details,
see Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial, Circumferential, and Meridional Velocity
Components (p. 300) and Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional Plane (p. 301).
Scalar
The velocity component in the Theta direction. It is positive when the

velocity is in the direction of increasing Theta (for details, see
Theta (p. 285)). For details, see Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial, Circumferential,
and Meridional Velocity Components (p. 300).
Velocity Spanwise
Scalar
The velocity component in the spanwise direction. It is positive when

the velocity is in the direction of increasing spanwise coordinate. For
details, see Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional
Plane (p. 301) and Figure 12.8: Streamwise, Spanwise, Circumferential,
and Blade-to-Blade Velocity Components (p. 302).
Velocity
Streamwise
Scalar
The velocity component in the streamwise direction. It is positive

when the velocity is in the direction of increasing streamwise coordinate. For details, see Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional
Plane (p. 301), Figure 12.8: Streamwise, Spanwise, Circumferential, and
Blade-to-Blade Velocity Components (p. 302), and Figure 12.9: Velocity
Components in Blade-To-Blade Plane (p. 303).
Velocity Meridional
Vector
The vector sum of the axial and radial vector components of velocity.
It lies in the meridional plane. For details, see Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial,
Circumferential, and Meridional Velocity Components (p. 300), Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional Plane (p. 301), and Equation 12.1 (p. 300).
Velocity
Blade-toBlade
Vector
The vector sum of the circumferential and streamwise vector components of velocity. It lies in the blade-to-blade plane. For details, see
Figure 12.8: Streamwise, Spanwise, Circumferential, and Blade-to-Blade
Velocity Components (p. 302), Figure 12.9: Velocity Components in
Blade-To-Blade Plane (p. 303), Figure 12.10: Velocity Flow Angle Sign
in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane (p. 304), and Equation 12.2 (p. 302).
Velocity Flow
Angle
Scalar
The angle between the blade-to-blade and circumferential velocity

vector components. For details, see Figure 12.10: Velocity Flow Angle
Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane (p. 304).
299
Turbo Workspace
Figure 12.6: Axial, Radial, Circumferential, and Meridional Velocity Components
The velocity in the meridional plane can be represented by axial and radial components or streamwise
and spanwise components:
+
+
300
=
=
(12.1)

Figure 12.7: Velocity Components in Meridional Plane
301
Turbo Workspace
Figure 12.8: Streamwise, Spanwise, Circumferential, and Blade-to-Blade Velocity Components
The velocity in the blade-to-blade plane can be represented by streamwise and circumferential components:
= +
(12.2)
302

Figure 12.9: Velocity Components in Blade-To-Blade Plane
The velocity components are related as follows:
= + +
= + +
=
+
=
+
(12.3)
Axial, radial and meridional velocities are not calculated for Velocity in Stn. Frame because these
components are not different from the regular Velocity components.
Information on calculating velocity components using CCL is available. For details, see Calculating Velocity
Components.
The range of Velocity Flow Angle is from -180 to +180. Four examples are shown in Figure 12.10: Velocity Flow Angle Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane (p. 304).
303
Turbo Workspace
Figure 12.10: Velocity Flow Angle Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane
12.9.1. Calculating Cylindrical Velocity Components for Non-turbo Cases

If you want to calculate cylindrical velocity components for non-turbo cases, such as for swirling flows
in axisymmetric geometries and mixing tank calculations, you can use the Calculate Velocity Components button on the Turbo workspace:
1.
Load a results file for an axisymmetric simulation. (You can load a copy of <CFXROOT>/examples/StaticMixer_001.res to work through this example.)
2.
Select the Turbo tab to open the Turbo workspace. A dialog box asks if you want to auto-initialize all
components, but as this is unnecessary click No.
3.
On the Turbo workspace's Initialization area, click Define Global Rotational Axis.
4.
In the Define Global Rotational Axis dialog box, select the appropriate axis and click OK. (For the
static mixer example, set Axis to Z.)
5.
In the Initialization area, click Calculate Velocity Components. New variables such as Velocity Circumferential become available. (You can see these new variables in the Variables workspace.)
6.
Create a plane so that you can display a cylindrical velocity component:

a.
304
From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane. In the dialog box that appears, accept the
default name and click OK.

b.
In the details view for Plane 1 on the Geometry tab, ensure that Method is YZ Plane.
c.
On the Color tab, set Mode to Variable and Variable to Velocity Circumferential.
d.
Click Apply. The plane is colored to show the velocity at each point.
e.
Right-click the viewer background and select Predefined Camera > View From +X so that the
plane is easier to see.
Important
Not all axisymmetric cases can have velocity components calculated in this way. In particular,
cases that involve particles (such as smoke) will fail.
305
306
Chapter 13: CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post

CFX Expression Language (CEL) is an interpreted, declarative language that has been developed to enable
CFX users to enhance their simulations without recourse to writing and linking separate external Fortran
routines. You can use CEL expressions anywhere a value is required for input in ANSYS CFX.
The CFX Command Language (CCL) is the internal communication and command language of CFD-Post.
It is a simple language that can be used to create objects or perform actions in the post-processor. All
CCL statements can be classified into one of three categories:
Object and parameter definitions, which are described in Object Creation and Deletion (p. 307).
CCL actions, which are commands that perform a specific task (such as reading a session file), and which
are described in Command Actions.
Power Syntax programming, which uses the Perl programming language to allow loops, logic, and custom
macros (subroutines). Power Syntax enables you to embed Perl commands into CCL to achieve powerful
quantitative post-processing. For details, see Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
State files and session files contain object definitions in CCL. In addition, session files can also contain
CCL action commands. You can view and modify the CCL in these files by using a text editor, and you
can use CCL to create your own session and state files to read into CFD-Post.
Tip
Advanced users can interact with CFD-Post directly by entering CCL in the Command Editor
dialog box (see Command Editor (p. 271)), or by running CFD-Post in Line Interface mode
(see Line Interface Mode).
For more information, see:
CFX Command Language (CCL) Syntax
Object Creation and Deletion (p. 307)
13.1. Object Creation and Deletion

You can create objects in CFD-Post by entering the CCL definition of the object into the Command
Editor dialog box, or by reading the object definition from a session or state file. The object will be
created and any associated graphics shown in the viewer.
You can modify an existing object by entering the object definition with the modified parameter settings
into the Command Editor dialog box. Only those parameters that are to be changed need to be entered.
All other parameters will remain unchanged.
There may be a significant degree of interaction between objects in CFD-Post. For example, a vector
plot may depend on the location of an underlying plane, or an isosurface may depend on the definition
307
CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post

of a CEL expression. If changes to one object affect other objects, the other objects will be updated
automatically.
To delete an object, type >delete <ObjectName>. If you delete an object that is used by other
objects, warnings will result, but the object will still be deleted.
308
Chapter 14: CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post

This chapter provides information that is specific to CFX Expression Language (CEL) use in CFD-Post.
For details on the CFX Expression Language, see CFX Expression Language (CEL). A list of variables
available for use in CEL expression is available in Variables and Predefined Expressions Available in CEL
Expressions.
CEL Variables In CFD-Post

Within CFD-Post, you can:
Create new expressions.
Set any numeric parameter in a CFD-Post object based on an expression (and the object will update if
the expression result changes).
Create user-defined variables from expressions.
Directly use the post-processor quantitative functions in an expression.
Specify units as part of an expression.
Use the variables x, y, and z in general CEL expressions. Additionally, you can use user-defined coordinate
frames with the CEL functions. For details, see Quantitative CEL Functions in ANSYS CFX.
However, you cannot use CEL to solve systems of equations in CFD-PostCEL expressions are purely
algebraic operations.
All expressions in the post-processor are defined in the EXPRESSIONS singleton object (which is also
a sub-object of LIBRARY:CEL). Each expression is a simple name = expression statement within
that object. New expressions are added by defining new parameters within the expressions object (the
EXPRESSIONS object is special in that it does not have a predefined list of valid parameters).
Important
Because Power Syntax uses Perl mathematical operators, you should exercise caution when
combining CEL with Power Syntax expressions. For example, in CEL, 22 is represented as
2^2, but in Perl, would be written 2**2. If you are unsure about the validity of an operator
in Perl, consult a Perl reference guide.
309
CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post
14.1. Variables Created by CFD-Post

CFD-Post derives the following variables from the results file; you can use them in expressions or as
plot variables:
Table 14.1: Variables Created by CFD-Post
Name
Description
Area
This is meaningful only for surface locators (user surface, plane, isosurface,
boundary). The value at each node is equal to the sum of sector areas associated with the node (a sector area is the portion of area of a face touching
a node that can be associated with that node). There is a function to sum
this variable over a 2D locator to obtain the area of the locator; for details,
see area in the CFX Reference Guide.
Force
There is a function for calculating force; for details, see force in the CFX Reference Guide.
Length
This is meaningful only for polyline and line objects. The value on each line
node is equal to the sum of halfs of the two line segments joined at the
node. There is a function to sum this variable over a line locator to obtain
the length of the locator; for details, see length in the CFX Reference Guide.
Mass Flow
There is a function for calculating mass flow; for details, see massFlow in
the CFX Reference Guide.
Normal
This is meaningful only for surface locators (user surface, plane, isosurface,
boundary). It is a vector variable defining the surface unit normal at each
node in the locator.
Volume
This is defined only on volume locators (volume, domain, subdomain). The

value at each node is equal to the sum of the sector volumes associated
with the node (a sector volume is the portion of volume of an element
touching a node that can be associated with that node). There is a function
to sum this variable over a 3D locator to obtain the volume of the locator;
for details, see volume in the CFX Reference Guide.
310
Chapter 15: Command Actions

You can use command actions to edit or create graphic objects and to perform some typical actions
(such as reading or creating session and state files).
15.1. Overview of Command Actions
15.2. File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box
15.3. Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor Dialog Box
15.4. Other Commands
15.1. Overview of Command Actions

Command action statements are used to force CFD-Post to undertake a specific task, usually related to
the input and output of data from the system. You can use command action statements in a variety of
areas:
You can enter command action statements into the Tools > Command Editor dialog box. All such actions
must be preceded with the > symbol.
For details on the Command Editor dialog box, see Command Editor. Additional information on
editing and creating graphics objects using the CFX Command Language in the Command Editor
dialog box is available in CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post.
Command actions also appear in session files (where they are also preceded by the > character).
When running CFD-Post in Line Interface mode, the CFX> command prompt is shown in a DOS window
or UNIX shell. All the actions described in this section along with some additional commands can be
entered at the command prompt. You do not have to precede commands with the > symbol when running
in Line Interface mode. Additional information on using Line Interface mode is available in Line Interface
Mode (p. 321).
Note
In addition to command action statements, CCL takes advantage of the full range of capabilities and resources from an existing programming language, Perl. Perl statements can be
embedded in between lines of simple syntax, providing capabilities such as loops, logic, and
much, much more with any CCL input file. These Power Syntax commands are preceded by
the ! symbol. Additional information on using Power Syntax in the Command Editor dialog
box is available in Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.
Many actions require additional information to perform their task (such as the name of a file to load or
the type of file to create). By default, these actions get the necessary information from a specific associated CCL singleton object. For convenience, some actions accept a few arguments that are used to
optionally override the commonly changed object settings. If multiple arguments for an action are
specified, they must be separated by a comma (,). Lines starting with the # character are not interpreted
and can be used for comments.
311
Command Actions
For example, all the settings for >print are read from the HARDCOPY: object. However, if you desire,
you can specify the name of the hardcopy file as an argument to >print. The following CCL example
demonstrates this behavior of actions:
# Define settings for printing
HARDCOPY:
Hardcopy Format= jpg
Hardcopy Filename = default.jpg
Image Scale = 70
White Background = Off
END
#Create an output file based on the settings in HARDCOPY
>print
#Create an identical output file with a different filename.
>print another_file.jpg
15.2. File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box

You can enter command action statements into the Tools > Command Editor dialog box. This section
discusses the following actions:
Loading a Results File (p. 312)
Reading Session Files (p. 313)
Saving State Files (p. 313)
Reading State Files (p. 314)
Creating a Hardcopy (p. 317)
Importing External File Formats (p. 317)
Exporting Data (p. 318)
Controlling the Viewer (p. 318)
15.2.1. Loading a Results File

You load a results file by using the >load command. The parameter settings for loading the file are
read from the DATA READER object. For simplicity, some parameters may be set via optional parameters
as part of the load command.
>load [filename=<filename>][timestep=<timestep>]
If a timestep is not specified, a value of -1 is assumed (this corresponds to the Final state).
When a results file is loaded, all Domain, Boundary, and Variable objects associated with the results
file are created or updated. Variable objects are created, but the associated data is not actually read
into the post-processor until the variables are used (load-on-demand). Variables will be pre-loaded if
specified in the DATA READER.
15.2.1.1. load Command Examples

The following are example >load commands with the expected results.
>load filename=c:/CFX/tutorials/Buoyancy2DVMI_002.res, timestep=3
312
File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box

This command loads the specified results file at timestep 3.
Tip
If going from a transient to steady state results file, you should specify the timestep to be 1 (if this is not the current setting). If you do not explicitly set this, you will get a warning
message stating that the existing timestep does not exist. The -1 timestep will then be loaded.
>load timestep=4
This command loads timestep 4 in the existing results file.
15.2.2. Reading Session Files

>readsession [filename=<filename>]
Performs session file reading and executing. The following option is available:
filename = <filename>
Specifies the filename and path to the file that should be read and executed. If no filename is specified,
the SESSION singleton object indicates the file to use. If no SESSION singleton exists, an error will
be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
15.2.2.1. readsession Command Examples

The following are example >readsession commands, and the expected results. If a SESSION singleton
exists, the values of the parameters listed after the session command replaces the values stored in the
SESSION singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value replaces the
session filename parameter value in the SESSION singleton.
>readsession
Reads the session file specified in the SESSION singleton, and execute its contents. If the SESSION
object does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readsession filename=mysession.cse
Reads and execute the contents of the mysession.cse file.
15.2.3. Saving State Files

>savestate [mode=<none | overwrite>][filename=<filename>]
State files can be used to quickly load a previous state into CFD-Post. State files can be generated
manually using a text editor, or from within CFD-Post by saving a state file. The commands required to
save to these files from the Command Editor dialog box are described below.
The >savestate command is used to write the current CFD-Post state to a file. The >savestate
action supports the following options:
mode = <none | overwrite>
If mode is none, the executor creates a new state file, and if the specified file exists, an error will be
raised. If mode is overwrite, the executor creates a new state file, and if the file exists, it will be
deleted and replaced with the latest state information.
313
Command Actions
Specifies the path and name of the file that the state is to be written to. If no filename is specified,
the STATE singleton object will be queried for the filename. If the STATE singleton does not exist,
then an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
15.2.3.1. savestate Command Examples

The following are example >savestate commands, and the expected results. If a STATE singleton
exists, the values of the parameters listed after the >savestate command replaces the values stored
in the STATE singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value replaces
the state filename parameter value in the STATE singleton, and the mode command parameter
value replaces the savestate mode parameter value in the STATE singleton.
>savestate
Writes the current state information to the filename specified in the STATE singleton. If the mode in
the STATE singleton is none, and the filename exists, an error will be returned. If the mode in the
STATE singleton is overwrite, and the filename exists, the existing file will be deleted, and the state
information will be written to the file. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>savestate mode=none
Writes the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists,
an error will be raised. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a
filename must be specified.
>savestate mode=overwrite
Writes the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists,
it will be deleted, and the current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton
does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>savestate filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the STATE singleton exists, and the
savestate mode is set to none, and the file already exists, the command causes an error. If the
savestate mode is set to overwrite, and the file already exists, the file will be deleted, and the
current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton does not exist, then the
system assumes a savestate mode of none, and behave as described above.
>savestate mode=none, filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists, the command
causes an error.
>savestate mode=overwrite, filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists, it will be deleted,
and the current state information will be saved in its place.
15.2.4. Reading State Files

>readstate [mode=<overwrite | append>][filename=<filename>, load=<true | false>]
The >readstate command loads a CFD-Post state from a specified file.
314

If a DATA READER singleton has been stored in the state file, the load action will be invoked to load
the contents of the results file.
If a state file contains BOUNDARY objects, and the state file is appended to the current state (with no
new DATA READER object), some boundaries defined may not be valid for the loaded results.
BOUNDARY objects that are not valid for the currently loaded results file will be culled.
>readstate supports the following options:
mode = <overwrite | append>
If mode is set to overwrite, the executor deletes all the objects that currently exist in the system,
and load the objects saved in the state file. Overwrite mode is the default mode if none is explicitly
specified. If mode is set to append, the executor adds the objects saved in the state file to the objects
that already exist in the system. If the mode is set to append and the state file contains objects that
already exist in the system, the following logic will determine the final result:
If the system has an equivalent object (the name and type), then the object already in the system
will be modified with the parameters saved in the state file. If the system has an equivalent object
in name only, then the object that already exists in the system will be deleted, and replaced with
that in the state file.
The path to the state file.
load = <true | false>
If load is set to true and a DATA READER object is defined in the state file, then the results file will
be loaded when the state file is read. If load is set to false, the results file will not be loaded, and
the DATA READER object that currently is in the object database (if any) will not be updated.
15.2.4.1. readstate Option Actions

The following table describes the options, and what will happen based on the combination of options
that are selected.
Mode
Selection
Load
Data
Selection
What happens to the objects?
What happens to the

Data Reader
Overwrite
True
All user objects (planes, and so on) get deleted.

The loading of the new results file changes the
default objects (boundaries, wireframe, and so on)
including deletion of objects that are no longer
relevant to the new results. Default objects that
are not explicitly modified by object definitions
in the state file will have all user modifiable values
reset to default values.
It gets deleted and

replaced.
Overwrite
False
All user objects get deleted. All default objects

that exist in the state file updates the same objects in the current system state if they exist. Default objects in the state file that do not exist in
If it exists, it
remains unchanged regardless of
315
Command Actions
Mode
Selection
True
What happens to the objects?
What happens to the

Data Reader
the current state will not be created. All user objects in the state file will be created.
Append
Load
Data
Selection
what is in
the state
file.
No objects are initially deleted. The default objects

in the state file replaces the existing default objects. User objects will:
It is modified with
new value
from the
state file.
Be created if they have a unique name.

Replace existing objects if they have the same name
but different type.
Update existing objects if they have the same name
and type.
Append
False
No objects are initially deleted. Default objects in

the state file will only overwrite those in the system if they already exist. User objects have the
same behavior as the Append/True option above.
If it exists, it
remains unchanged regardless of
what is in
the state
file.
15.2.4.2. readstate Command Examples

The following are example >readstate commands and their expected results. If a STATE singleton
exists, the values of the parameters listed after the >readstate command replace the values stored
in the STATE singleton object. For this command, the filename command parameter value replaces
the state filename parameter value in the STATE singleton, and the mode command parameter
value replaces the readstate mode parameter value in the STATE singleton.
>readstate filename=mystate.cst
The readstate mode parameter in the STATE singleton determines if the current objects in the
system are deleted before the objects defined in the mystate.cst file are loaded into the system. If
the STATE singleton does not exist, then the system objects are deleted before loading the new state
information.
>readstate mode=overwrite, filename=mystate.cst
Deletes all objects currently in the system, opens the mystate.cst file if it exists, and creates the
objects as stored in the state file.
>readstate mode=append, filename=mystate.cst
Opens the mystate.cst file, if it exists, and adds the objects defined in the file to those already in
the system following the rules specified in the previous table.
>readstate
316

Overwrites or appends to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by
the state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an
error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readstate mode=overwrite
Overwrites the objects in the system STATE using the objects defined in the file referenced by the
state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error
will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readstate mode=append
Appends to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by the state
filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be
raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
15.2.5. Creating a Hardcopy

>print [<filename>]
Creates a file of the current viewer contents. Settings for output format, quality, and so on, are read
from the HARDCOPY singleton object.
The optional argument <filename> can be used to specify the name of the output file to override
that stored in HARDCOPY. HARDCOPY must exist before print is executed.
15.2.6. Importing External File Formats

Data import is controlled using the >import command. There are two file types that can be imported:
ANSYS (*.cdb) and Generic (*.csv). The CCL options associated with the >import command are:
>import type=<Ansys | Generic>,
filename=<filename>,
object name=<name of object>,
boundary=<associated boundary>,
conserve flux=<true | false>
type
Indicates whether to import the file as an Ansys file or Generic file.
filename
The name of the file to import.
object name
The name to give the USER SURFACE object that is created as a result of importing the file.
boundary
The name of the CFD-Post boundary/region to associate with the imported ANSYS surface. This association
is used during an ANSYS file import to project data from the ANSYS surface onto the CFD-Post boundary/region. The same association is used during an ANSYS file export, when data from the CFD-Post
boundary/region is projected back onto the ANSYS surface.
conserve flux
Boolean to indicate whether or not to ensure that the heat fluxes associated with the imported ANSYS
geometry remain conservative relative to the fluxes on the associated CFD-Post Boundary.
317
Command Actions
15.2.7. Exporting Data

Data export is controlled using the >export command. The names of variables to export, locations to
export, filenames, and so on, are defined in the EXPORT singleton object.
15.2.8. Controlling the Viewer

This section describes how multiple viewports can be accessed using Command Language, and how
they are ordered and named.
The first (top-left) viewport is represented by the VIEWER singleton, while others are VIEWPORT objects.
For example, to modify filtering in the first viewport, changes should be made to the VIEWER singleton.
For all other viewports, changes are made to the VIEWPORT objects, which are numbered from 1-3 in
a clockwise direction.
For example, to filter the top-left viewport:
VIEWER
Draw All Objects=false
Object Name List=Wireframe
END
To filter the bottom-right viewport when all four viewports are active:
VIEWPORT:Viewport 2
Draw All Objects=false
Object Name List=Wireframe
END
The following are examples of viewport layouts:
318
Other Commands
15.3. Quantitative Calculations in the Command Editor Dialog Box

When executing a calculation from the Command Editor dialog box, the result is displayed in the
Calculator Window.
The >calculate command is used to perform function calculations in the Command Editor dialog
box. Typing >calculate alone performs the calculation using the parameters stored in the CALCULATOR singleton object. Entering >calculate <function name> will not work if required arguments are needed by the function.
15.4. Other Commands

Deleting Objects (p. 319)
Viewing a Chart (p. 319)
Turbo Post CCL Command Actions (p. 320)
15.4.1. Deleting Objects

>delete <objectnamelist>
The >delete command can be used in the Command Editor dialog box to delete objects. The command
must be supplied with a list of object names separated by commas. An error message will be displayed
if the list contains any invalid object names, but the deletion of valid objects in the list will still be
processed.
15.4.2. Viewing a Chart

>chart <objectname>
Invokes the Chart Viewer and displays the specified Chart object. Chart objects and Chart Lines are
created like other CCL objects.
319
Command Actions
15.4.3. Turbo Post CCL Command Actions

15.4.3.1. Calculating Velocity Components
>turbo more vars
Issuing the >turbo more vars command is equivalent to selecting the Calculate Velocity
Components in the Turbo workspace. For details, see Calculate Velocity Components.
15.4.3.2. Initializing all Turbo Components

>turbo init
Issuing the >turbo init command is equivalent to selecting Initialize All Components from the
Turbo menu. For details, see Initialize All Components.
320
Chapter 16: Line Interface Mode

This chapter contains information on how to perform typical user actions (loading, printing, and so on),
create graphical objects, and perform quantitative calculations when running CFD-Post in Line Interface
mode.
All of the functionality of CFD-Post can be accessed when running in Line Interface mode. In Line Interface
mode, you are simply entering the commands that would otherwise be issued by the user interface. A
viewer is provided in a separate window that will show the geometry and the objects that are created
on the command line.
To run in Line Interface mode:
Windows: Execute the command <CFXROOT>\bin\cfdpost -line (or <CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost -line) at the DOS command prompt (omitting the -line option will start the user interface
mode).
You may want to change the size of the MS-DOS window to view the output from commands such
as getstate. This can be done by entering mode con lines=X at the command prompt before
entering CFD-Post, where X is the number of lines to display in the window. You may choose a large
number of lines if you want to be able to see all the output from a session (a scroll bar will appear
in the DOS window). Note that once inside CFD-Post, file paths should contain a forward slash / (and
not the backslash that is required in MS-DOS).
UNIX: Execute the command <CFXROOT>/bin/cfdpost -line (or <CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -line) at the command prompt (omitting the -line option will start the user interface mode).
In CFD-Post Line Interface mode, all commands are assumed to be actions, the > symbol required in
the Command Editor dialog box is not needed. To call up a list of valid commands, type help at the
command prompt.
All of the functionality available from the Command Editor dialog box in the user interface is available
in Line Interface mode by typing enterccl or e at the command prompt. When in e mode, you can
enter any set of valid CCL commands. The commands are not processed until you leave e mode by
typing .e. You can cancel e mode without processing the commands by typing .c. For details, see
Command Editor.
An explanation and list of command actions are available. For details, see Overview of Command Actions (p. 311). (The action commands shown in this link are preceded by a > symbol. This should be
omitted when entering action commands at the command prompt.)
You can create objects by entering the CCL definition of the object when in e mode, or by reading the
object definition from a session or state file. For details, see File Operations from the Command Editor
Dialog Box (p. 312).
In summary, Line Interface mode differs from the Command Editor dialog box because Line Interface
action commands are not preceded by a > symbol. In the same way, when entering lines of CCL or
Power Syntax, e must be typed (whereas this is not required in the Command Editor dialog box). It
321
Line Interface Mode

should be noted that these are the only principal differences, and all commands that work for the
Command Editor dialog box will also work in Line Interface mode, providing the correct syntax is used.
16.1. Features Available in Line Interface Mode

The following features are available in line interface mode:
Viewer Hotkeys
The zoom, rotate, pan and other mouse actions available for manipulating the Viewer in the user interface
perform identical functions in the Viewer in Line Interface mode. In addition to this, hotkeys can be
used to manipulate other aspects of the Viewer. For a full list of all the hotkeys available, click in the
Viewer to make it the active window and select the ? icon. To execute a hotkey command, click once
in the Viewer (or on the object, as some functions are object-specific) and type the command.
Calculator
When functions are evaluated from the command line, the result is simply printed to standard output.
For a list of valid calculator functions and required parameters, type calculate help at the
command prompt. Additional information is available; for details, see Quantitative Calculations in
the Command Editor Dialog Box (p. 319).
Viewing All Currently Defined Objects (getstate Command)
The list of all currently defined objects can be obtained using the getstate command. To get details
on a specific object, type getstate <ObjectName>.
Viewing a Chart
You can view a chart object in the Chart Viewer using the chart <ChartObjectName> command.
Repeating CCL Commands
If you want to repeat the most recent CCL command, type: =
Executing a UNIX Shell Command
If you want to carry out a UNIX shell command, type % directly before your command. For example, %ls
will list all the files in your current directory.
Quitting a Command Line Interface Session
To end you CFD-Post command line interface session from the command prompt, enter: quit
Example The following example provides a set of commands that you could enter at the CFX>
command prompt. The output written to the screen when executing these commands is not shown.
CFX> load filename=c:/MyFiles/StaticMixer.res
CFX> getstate StaticMixer Default
CFX> e
BOUNDARY:StaticMixer Default
Visibility = On
Transparency = 0.5
END
.e
CFX> quit
322
Chapter 17: FLUENT Field Variables Listed by Category

By default, CFD-Post does not modify the variable names in the FLUENT file. If you want to use all of
the embedded CFD-Post macros and calculation options, you need to convert variable names to CFX
types. You can convert the variable names to CFX variable names by selecting the Translate variable
names to CFX-Solver style names check box in the Edit > Options > Files menu. Translation is carried
out according to the tables that follow, which list the FLUENT field variables and gives the equivalent
ANSYS CFX variable, where one exists. The variables are defined in Alphabetical Listing of Field Variables
and Their Definitions in the FLUENT User's Guide.
The following restrictions apply to marked variables:
2d
available only for 2D flows
2da
available only for 2D axisymmetric flows (with or without swirl)
2dasw available only for 2D axisymmetric swirl flows

3d
available only for 3D flows
bns
available only for broadband noise source models
bnv
node values available at boundaries
cpl
available only in the density-based solvers
cv
available only for cell values (Node Values option turned off )
des
available only when the DES turbulence model is used
dil
not available with full multicomponent diffusion
do
available only when the discrete ordinates radiation model is used
dpm
available only for coupled discrete phase calculations
dtrm
available only when the discrete transfer radiation model is used
fwh
available only with the Ffowcs Williams and Hawkings acoustics model
available only for energy calculations
edc
available only with the EDC model for turbulence-chemistry interaction
emm
available also when the Eulerian multiphase model is used
ewt
available only with the enhanced wall treatment
gran
available only if a granular phase is present
h2o
available only when the mixture contains water
id
available only when the ideal gas law is enabled for density
ke
available only when one of the k-epsilon turbulence models is used
kw
available only when one of the k-omega turbulence models is used
les
available only when the LES turbulence model is used
melt
available only when the melting and solidification model is used
mix
available only when the multiphase mixture model is used
323
FLUENT Field Variables Listed by Category

mp
available only for multiphase models
nox
available only for NOx calculations
np
not available in parallel solvers
nv
uses explicit node value function
available only in parallel solvers
p1
available only when the P-1 radiation model is used
pdf
available only for non-premixed combustion calculations
pmx
available only for premixed combustion calculations
ppmx available only for partially premixed combustion calculations

r
available only when the Rosseland radiation model is used
rad
available only for radiation heat transfer calculations
rc
available only for finite-rate reactions
rsm
available only when the Reynolds stress turbulence model is used
s2s
available only when the surface-to-surface radiation model is used
sa
available only when the Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model is used
seg
available only in the pressure-based solver
sp
available only for species calculations
sr
available only for surface reactions
sol
available only when the solar model is used
soot
available only for soot calculations
stat
available only with data sampling for unsteady statistics
stcm
available only for stiff chemistry calculations
available only for turbulent flows
turbo
available only when a turbomachinery topology has been defined
udm
available only when a user-defined memory is used
uds
available only when a user-defined scalar is used
available only for viscous flows
Table 17.1: Pressure and Density Categories

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Pressure...
Static Pressure (bnv)
Pressure
Pressure Coefficient
Pressure Coefficient
Dynamic Pressure
Dynamic Pressure
Absolute Pressure (bnv)
Absolute Pressure
Total Pressure (bnv)
Total Pressure
Relative Total Pressure
Relative Total Pressure
324
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Density...
Density
Density
Density All
Table 17.2: Velocity Category
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Velocity...
Velocity Magnitude (bnv)
Velocity
Relative Velocity Magnitude (bnv)

X Velocity (bnv)
Velocity u
Relative X Velocity (bnv)

Y Velocity (bnv)
Velocity v
Relative Y Velocity (bnv)

Z Velocity (3d, bnv)
Velocity w
Relative Z Velocity (bnv)

Swirl Velocity (2dasw, bnv)
Tangential Velocity
Axial Velocity (2da or 3d)
Velocity Axial
Radial Velocity
Velocity Radial
Stream Function (2d)
Stream Function
Tangential Velocity
Mach Number (id)
Mach Number
Relative Velocity Magnitude
Velocity Magnitude
Relative Axial Velocity (2da)
Velocity Axial
Relative Radial Velocity (2da)
Velocity Radial
Relative Swirl Velocity (2dasw, bnv)
Relative Tangential Velocity

Relative Mach Number (id)
Mach Number
Mach Number
Mesh X-Velocity (nv)
Mesh Velocity u
Mesh Y-Velocity (nv)
Mesh Velocity v
Mesh Z-Velocity (3d, nv)
Mesh Velocity w
Velocity Angle
Velocity Angle
Relative Velocity Angle

Vorticity Magnitude (v)
Vorticity
Helicity
Helicity
X-Vorticity (v, 3d)
Vorticity in Stn Frame X
325

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Y-Vorticity (v, 3d)
Vorticity in Stn Frame Y
Z-Vorticity (v, 3d)
Vorticity in Stn Frame Z
Preconditioning Reference Velocity (cpl)
Reference Velocity (Preconditioning)
Table 17.3: Temperature, Radiation, and Solidification/Melting Categories

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Temperature...
Static Temperature (e, bnv, nv)
Temperature
Total Temperature (e, nv)
Total Temperature
Enthalpy (e, nv)
Static Enthalpy
Relative Total Temperature (e)
Total Temperature
Rothalpy (e, nv)
Rothalpy
Fine Scale Temperature (edc, nv, e)
Fine Scale Temperature
Wall Temperature (Outer Surface) (e, v)
Wall Temperature Outer Surface
Wall Temperature (Inner Surface) (e, v)
Wall Temperature Inner Surface
Inner Wall Temperature
Inner Wall Temperature
Total Enthalpy (e)
Total Enthalpy
Total Enthalpy Deviation (e)
Total Enthalpy Deviation
Entropy (e)
Static Entropy
Total Energy (e)
Total Energya
Internal Energy (e)
Internal Energy
Absorption Coefficient (r, p1, do, or dtrm)
Absorption Coefficient
Scattering Coefficient (r, p1, or do)
Scattering Coefficient
Refractive Index (do)
Refractive Index
Radiation Temperature (p1 or do)
Radiation Temperature
Incident Radiation (p1 or do)
Incident Radiation
Radiation...
Incident Radiation (Band n) (do (non-gray)) <Band n>.Incident Radiation

Surface Cluster ID (s2s)
Mass Fraction
Contact Resistivity (melt)
Contact Resistivity
Pull Velocity ua
Y Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated))
Pull Velocity va
Z Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated), 3d)
Pull Velocity wa
Axial Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated), 2da)
Pull Velocity Axiala
Radial Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated),

2da)
326
Liquid Fraction (melt)

X Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated))
Solidification/
Melting...
Surface Cluster ID
Pull Velocity Radiala
Category
CFX Variable
Swirl Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated),

2dasw)
a
FLUENT Variable
Pull Velocity Circumferentiala
CFD-Post naming convention
Table 17.4: Turbulence Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Turbulence...
Turbulent Kinetic Energy (k) (ke, kw, or rsm;

bnv, nv, or emm)
Turbulence Kinetic Energy
Turbulent Kinetic Energy

UU Reynolds Stress (rsm; emm)
Reynolds Stress uu
VV Reynolds Stress (rsm; emm)
Reynolds Stress vv
WW Reynolds Stress (rsm; emm)
Reynolds Stress ww
UV Reynolds Stress (rsm; emm)
Reynolds Stress uv
UW Reynolds Stress (rsm, 3d; emm)
Reynolds Stress uw
VW Reynolds Stress (rsm, 3d; emm)
Reynolds Stress vw
Turbulence Intensity (ke, kw, or rsm)
Turbulence Intensity
Turbulent Dissipation Rate (Epsilon) (ke or

rsm; bnv, nv, or emm)
Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
Turbulent Dissipation Rate

Specific Dissipation Rate (Omega) (kw)
Turbulence Eddy Frequency
Specific Dissipation Rate

Production of k (ke, kw, or rsm; emm)
k Productiona
Modified Turbulent Viscosity (sa)
Eddy Viscosity (modified)
Turbulent Viscosity (sa, ke, kw, rsm, or des)
Eddy Viscosity
Effective Viscosity (sa, ke, kw, rsm, or des;

emm)
Effective Viscosity
Turbulent Viscosity Ratio (ke, kw, rsm, sa,

or des; emm)
Eddy Viscosity Ratio
Subgrid Kinetic Energy (les)
Kinetic Energy (subgrid)
Subgrid Turbulent Viscosity (les)
Eddy Viscosity (subgrid)
Subgrid Turbulent Viscosity Ratio (les)
Eddy Viscosity Ratio (subgrid)
Effective Thermal Conductivity (t, e)
Effective Thermal Conductivity
Effective Prandtl Number (t, e)
Effective Prandtl Number
Wall Ystar (ke, kw, or rsm)
Ystar
Wall Yplus (t)
Yplus
Turbulent Reynolds Number (Re_y) (ke or

rsm; ewt)
Turbulent Reynolds Number
327

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Relative Length Scale (DES) (des)
Relative Length Scale (DES)
Table 17.5: Species, Reactions, Pdf, and Premixed Combustion Categories

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Species...
Mass fraction of species-n (sp, pdf, or ppmx; <Species-n>.Mass Fraction

nv)
Mole fraction of species-n (sp, pdf, or ppmx) <Species-n>.Mole Fraction
Molar Concentration of species-n (sp, pdf,
or ppmx)
Lam Diff Coef of species-n (sp, dil)
<Species-n>.Effective Diffusion Diffusivity
Thermal Diff Coef of species-n (sp)
<Species-n>.Thermal Diffusion Coefficient
Enthalpy of species-n (sp)
<Species-n>.Static Enthalpy
species-n Source Term (rc, cpl)
<Species-n>.Source Terma
Surface Deposition Rate of species-n (sr)
<Species-n>.Surface Deposition Rate
Surface Coverage of species-n (sr)
<Species-n>.Surface Coveragea
Relative Humidity (sp, pdf, or ppmx; h2o)
Relative Humidity
Time Step Scale (sp, stcm)
Time Step Scale
Fine Scale Mass fraction of species-n (edc)
<Species-n>.Fine Scale Mass Fraction
Fine Scale Transfer Rate (edc)
Fine Scale Transfer Rate
1-Fine Scale Volume Fraction (edc)
1-Fine Scale Volume Fraction
Rate of Reaction-n (rc)
<Reaction-n>.Molar Reaction Rate
Net Reaction Rate of Species-n
<Species-n>.Net Molar Reaction Rate
Kinetic Rate of Reaction-n
<Reaction-n>.Kinetic Rate of Reaction
Kinetic Rate of Reaction-n(Porous)
<Reaction-n>.Kinetic Rate of Reaction(Porous)
Arrhenius Rate of Reaction-n (rc)
<Reaction-n>.Arrhenius Rate of Reactiona
Turbulent Rate of Reaction-n (rc, t)
<Reaction-n>.Turbulent Rate of Reactiona
Heat of Reaction
Heat of Reaction
Mean Mixture Fraction (pdf or ppmx; nv)
Mixture Fraction
Secondary Mean Mixture Fraction (pdf or

ppmx; nv)
PDF...
<Species-n>.Laminar Diffusion Coefficient
Eff Diff Coef of species-n (t, sp, dil)
Reactions...
<Species-n>.Molar Concentration
Secondary Mixture Fractiona
Mixture Fraction Variance (pdf or ppmx; nv) Mixture Fraction Variance

Secondary Mixture Fraction Variance (pdf
or ppmx; nv)
Fvar Prod (pdf or ppmx)
Fvar Prod
Scalar Dissipation (pdf or ppmx)
Scalar Dissipation
PDF Table Adiabatic Enthalpy
Adiabatic Enthalpy (PDF Table)
PDF Table Heat Loss/Gain
328
Secondary Mixture Fraction Variancea
Heat Loss/Gain}, (PDF Table)
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Premixed
Combustion...
Progress Variable (pmx or ppmx; nv)
Reaction Progress
Damkohler Number (pmx or ppmx)
Damkohler Numbera
Stretch Factor (pmx or ppmx)
Stretch Factora
Turbulent Flame Speed (pmx or ppmx)
Turbulent Flame Speeda
Static Temperature (pmx or ppmx)
Temperature
Product Formation Rate (pmx or ppmx)
Product Formation Ratea
Laminar Flame Speed (pmx or ppmx)
Laminar Flame Speeda
Critical Strain Rate (pmx or ppmx)
Critical Strain Ratea
Adiabatic Flame Temperature (pmx or

ppmx)
Adiabatic Flame Temperature
Unburnt Fuel Mass Fraction (pmx or ppmx)
Unburnt Fuel Mass Fractiona
Table 17.6: NOx, Soot, and Unsteady Statistics Categories

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
NOx...
Mass fraction of NO (nox)
No.Mass Fraction
Mass fraction of HCN (nox)
Hcn.Mass Fraction
Mass fraction of NH3 (nox)
Nh3.Mass Fraction
Mass fraction of N2O (nox)
N2o.Mass Fraction
Mole fraction of NO (nox)
No.Molar Fraction
Mole fraction of HCN (nox)
Hcn.Molar Fraction
Mole fraction of NH3 (nox)
Nh3.Molar Fraction
Mole fraction of N2O (nox)
N2o.Molar Fraction
NO Density (nox)
No.Density
HCN Density (nox)
Hcn.Density
NH3 Density (nox)
Nh3.Density
N2O Density (nox)
N2o.Density
Variance of Temperature (nox)
Variance of Temperature
Variance of Species-n (nox)
<Species-n>.Variancea
Rate of NO
No.Source
Rate of HCN
Hcn.Source
Rate of NH3
Nh3.Source
Rate of N2O (nox)
N2o Source
Rate of Thermal NO (nox)
Thermal No.Molar Reaction Rate
Rate of Prompt NO (nox)
Prompt No.Molar Reaction Ratea
Rate of Fuel NO (nox)
Fuel No.Molar Reaction Rate
Rate of N2OPath NO (nox)
N2oPath.Molar Reaction Rate
Rate of Reburn NO (nox)
Reburn No.Molar Reaction Ratea
Rate of SNCR NO (nox)
SNCR No.Molar Reaction Ratea
Rate of USER NO (nox)
User No.Molar Reaction Rate
a
a
329

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Soot...
Mass fraction of soot (soot)
Soot Mass Fraction
Mass fraction of Nuclei (soot)
Soot Nuclei Specific Concentration
Mole fraction of soot (soot)
Soot Molar Fractiona
Soot Density (soot)
Soot.Density
Rate of Soot (soot)
Soot Mass Sourcea
Rate of Nuclei (soot)
Soot Nuclei Sourcea
Heterogeneous Reaction Rate n
Heterogeneous Reaction Rate n
Mean quantity-n (stat)
<variable>.Trnavg
RMS quantity-n (stat)
<variable>.Trnrms
Unsteady Statistics...
Table 17.7: Phases, Discrete Phase Model, Granular Pressure, and Granular Temperature Categories
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Phases...
Volume fraction (mp)
<phase>.Volume Fraction
Discrete Phase
Model...
DPM Mass Source (dpm)
<particle>.Particle Mass Source
DPM Erosion (dpm, cv)
<particle>.Particle Erosion Rate Density
DPM Accretion (dpm, cv)
<particle>.Particle Wall Mass Flow Densitya
DPM X Momentum Source (dpm)
<particle>.Particle Momentum Source X
DPM Y Momentum Source (dpm)
<particle>.Particle Momentum Source Y
DPM Z Momentum Source (dpm, 3d)
<particle>.Particle Momentum Source Z
DPM Swirl Momentum Source (dpm, 2dasw) <particle>.Particle Swirl Momentum Source
DPM Sensible Enthalpy Source (dpm, e)
<particle>.Particle Sensible Enthalpy Source
DPM Enthalpy Source (dpm, e)
<particle>.Particle Energy Source
DPM Absorption Coefficient (dpm, rad)
<particle>.Particle Absorption Coefficient
DPM Emission (dpm, rad)
<particle>.Particle Radiative Emission
DPM Scattering (dpm, rad)
<particle>.Particle Radiative Scattering
DPM Burnout (dpm, sp, e)
Particle Burnout
DPM Evaporation/Devolatilization (dpm, sp, Particle Evaporation-Devolatilization

e)
DPM Concentration (dpm)
DPM Mass Source
Particle Mass Source
DPM Erosion
Particle Erosion Rate Density
DPM Accretion
Particle Wall Mass Flow Density
DPM X Momentum Source
Particle Momentum Source X
DPM Y Momentum Source
Particle Momentum Source Y
DPM Z Momentum Source
Particle Momentum Source Z
DPM Swirl Momentum Source
Particle Swirl Momentum Source
DPM Sensible Enthalpy Source
Particle Sensible Enthalpy Source
DPM Enthalpy Source
Particle Enthalpy Source
DPM Absorption Coefficient
330
<particle>.Volume Fraction
Particle Absorption Coefficient
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
DPM Emission
Particle Radiative Emission
DPM Scattering
Particle Radiative Scattering
DPM Burnout
Particle Burnout
DPM Evaporation/Devolatilization
Particle Evaporation-Devolatilization
DPM Concentration
Particle Mass Concentration
DPM Turbulent Kinetic Energy Source
Particle Turbulent Kinetic Energy Source
DPM Turbulent Dissipation Source
Particle Turbulent Dissipation Source
DPM Species-n Concentration
<Species-n>.Particle Mass Concentration
DPM Species-n Source (dpm, sp, e)
<Species-n>.Particle Mass Source
Granular Pressure...
Granular Pressure (emm, gran)
<phase>.Granular Pressurea
Granular Temperature...
Granular Temperature (emm, gran)
<phase>.Granular Temperature
Table 17.8: Properties, Wall Fluxes, User Defined Scalars, and User Defined Memory Categories
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Properties...
Molecular Viscosity (v)
Dynamic Viscosity
Diameter(mix, emm)
Mean Particle Diameter
Granular Conductivity (mix, emm, gran)
Granular Conductivity
Thermal Conductivity (e, v)
Thermal Conductivity
Specific Heat (Cp) (e)
Specific Heat Ratio (gamma) (id)
Specific Heat Ratioa
Gas Constant (R) (id)
R Gas Constant
Molecular Prandtl Number (e, v)
Prandtl Numbera
Mean Molecular Weight (seg, pdf)
Molar Massa
Compressibility Factor
Compressibility Factor
Reduced Temperature
Reduced Temperature
Reduced Pressure
Reduced Pressure
Critical Temperature
Critical Temperature
Critical Pressure
Critical Pressure
Acentric Factor
Acentric Factor
Critical Specific Volume
Critical Specific Volume
Sound Speed (id)
Local Speed of Sound
Wall Shear Stress (v, cv, emm)
Wall Shear
X-Wall Shear Stress (v, cv, emm)
Wall Shear X
Y-Wall Shear Stress (v, cv, emm)
Wall Shear Y
Z-Wall Shear Stress (v, 3d, cv, emm)
Wall Shear Z
Axial-Wall Shear Stress (2da, cv)
Wall Shear Axial
Radial-Wall Shear Stress (2da, cv)
Wall Shear Radial
Wall Fluxes...
331

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Swirl-Wall Shear Stress (2dasw, cv)
Wall Shear Circumferential
Skin Friction Coefficient (v, cv, emm)
Skin Friction Coefficient
Total Surface Heat Flux (e, v, cv)
Wall Heat Flux
Radiation Heat Flux (rad, cv)
Wall Radiative Heat Flux
Solar Heat Flux (sol, cv)
Solar Heat Flux
Absorbed Radiation Flux (Band-n) (do,cv)
Absorbed Radiation Flux (Band-n)
Absorbed Visible Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Absorbed Visible Solar Flux
Absorbed IR Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Absorbed IR Solar Flux
Reflected Radiation Flux (Band-n) (do, cv)
Reflected Radiation Flux
Reflected Visible Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Reflected Visible Solar Flux
Reflected IR Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Reflected IR Solar Flux
Transmitted Visible Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Transmitted Visible Solar Flux
Transmitted IR Solar Flux (sol, cv)
Transmitted IR Solar Flux
Beam Irradiation Flux (Band-n) (do, cv)
<Band-n>.Beam Irradiation Flux
Surface Incident Radiation (do, dtrm, or s2s; Surface Incident Radiation

cv)
Surface Heat Transfer Coef. (e, v, cv)
Surface Heat Transfer Coefficient
Wall Func. Heat Tran. Coef. (e, v, cv)
Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient
Surface Nusselt Number (e, v, cv)
Surface Nusselt Number
Surface Stanton Number (e, v, cv)
Surface Stanton Number
User-Defined
Scalars...
Scalar-n (uds)
<Scalar-n>
Diffusion Coef. of Scalar-n (uds)
<Scalar-n>.Diffusion Coefficient
User-Defined
Memory...
User Memory n (udm)
User Defined Memory <n>
Table 17.9: Cell Info, Grid, and Adaption Categories

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Cell Info...
Cell Partition (np)
Cell Partition
Active Cell Partition (p)
Active Cell Partition
Stored Cell Partition (p)
Stored Cell Partition
Cell Id (p)
Cell Id
Cell Element Type
Cell Element Type
Cell Zone Type
Cell Zone Type
Cell Zone Index
Cell Zone Index
Partition Neighbors
Partition Neighbors
X-Coordinate (nv)
Y-Coordinate (nv)
Z-Coordinate (3d, nv)
Axial Coordinate (nv)
Axial Coordinate
Grid...
332
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Angular Coordinate (3d, nv)
Angular Coordinate
Abs. Angular Coordinate (3d, nv)
Absolute Angular Coordinate
Radial Coordinate (nv)
Radial Angular Coordinate
Face Area Magnitude
Face Area Magnitude
X Face Area
Face Area X
Y Face Area
Face Area Y
Z Face Area (3d)
Face Area Z
Cell Equiangle Skew
Cell Equiangle Skew
Cell Equivolume Skew
Cell Equivolume Skew
Cell Volume
Cell Volume
2D Cell Volume (2da)
2d Cell Volume
Cell Wall Distance
Cell Wall Distance
Face Handedness
Face Handedness
Face Squish Index
Face Squish Index
Cell Squish Index
Cell Squish Index
Table 17.10: Grid Category (Turbomachinery-Specific Variables) and Adaption Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Grid...
Meridional Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Meridional Coordinate
Abs Meridional Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Abs Meridional Coordinate
Spanwise Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Spanwise Coordinate
Abs (H-C) Spanwise Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Abs (H-C) Spanwise Coordinate
Abs (C-H) Spanwise Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Abs (C-H) Spanwise Coordinate
Pitchwise Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Pitchwise Coordinate
Abs Pitchwise Coordinate (nv, turbo)
Abs Pitchwise Coordinate
Adaption Function
Adaption Function
Adaption Curvature
Adaption Curvature
Adaption Space Gradient
Adaption Space Gradient
Adaption Iso-Value
Adaption Iso-Value
Existing Value
Existing Value
Boundary Cell Distance
Boundary Cell Distance
Boundary Normal Distance
Boundary Normal Distance
Boundary Volume Distance (np)
Boundary Volume Distance
Cell Volume Change
Cell Volume Change
Cell Surface Area
Cell Surface Area
Cell Warpage
Cell Warpage
Cell Children
Cell Children
Adaption...
333

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Cell Refine Level
Cell Refine Level
Table 17.11: Residuals Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Residuals...
Mass Imbalance (seg)
Mass Imbalance
Pressure Residual (cpl)
Residual Pressure
X-Velocity Residual (cpl)
Residual u Velocity
Y-Velocity Residual (cpl)
Residual v Velocity
Z-Velocity Residual (cpl, 3d)
Residual w Velocity
Axial-Velocity Residual (cpl, 2da)
Residual Velocity Axial
Radial-Velocity Residual (cpl, 2da)
Residual Velocity Radial
Swirl-Velocity Residual (cpl, 2dasw)
Residual Velocity Circumferential
Temperature Residual (cpl, e)
Residual Temperature
Species-n Residual (cpl, sp)
<Species-n>.Residual
Time Step (cpl)
Time Step
Pressure Correction (cpl)
Pressure Correction
X-Velocity Correction (cpl)
Velocity Correction u
Y-Velocity Correction (cpl)
Velocity Correction v
Z-Velocity Correction (cpl, 3d)
Velocity Correction w
Axial-Velocity Correction (cpl, 2da)
Velocity Correction Axial
Radial-Velocity Correction (cpl, 2da)
Velocity Correction Radial
Swirl-Velocity Correction (cpl, 2dasw)
Velocity Correction Circumferential
Temperature Correction (cpl, e)
Temperature Correction
Species-n Correction (cpl, sp)
<Species-n>.Correction
Table 17.12: Derivatives Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Derivatives...
Strain Rate (v)
Strain Rate
dX-Velocity/dx
du-Velocity-dx
dY-Velocity/dx
dv-Velocity-dx
dZ-Velocity/dx (3d)
dw-Velocity-dx
dAxial-Velocity/dx (2da)
dAxial-Velocity-dx
dRadial-Velocity/dx (2da)
dRadial-Velocity-dx
dSwirl-Velocity/dx (2dasw)
dCircumferential-Velocity-dx
d species-n/dx (cpl, sp)
d<Species-n>-dx
dX-Velocity/dy
du-Velocity-dy
dY-Velocity/dy
dv-Velocity-dy
dZ-Velocity/dy (3d)
dw-Velocity-dy
dAxial-Velocity/dy (2da)
dAxial-Velocity-dy
334
Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
dRadial-Velocity/dy (2da)
dRadial-Velocity-dy
dSwirl-Velocity/dy (2dasw)
dCircumferential-Velocity-dy
d species-n/dy (cpl, sp)
d<Species-n>-dy
dX-Velocity/dz (3d)
du-Velocity-dz
dY-Velocity/dz (3d)
dv-Velocity-dz
dZ-Velocity/dz (3d)
dw-Velocity-dz
d species-n/dz (cpl, sp, 3d)
d<Species-n>-dz
dOmega/dx (2dasw)
dOmega-dx
dOmega/dy (2dasw)
dOmega-dy
dT/dx
dT/dx
dT/dy
dT/dy
dT/dz
dT/dz
dp-dX (seg)
dp-dX
dp-dY (seg)
dp-dY
dp-dZ (seg, 3d)
dp-dZ
Table 17.13: Acoustics Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Acoustics...
Surface dpdt RMS (fwh)
Surface dpdt RMS
Acoustic Power Level (dB) (bns)
Acoustic Power Level (dB)
Acoustic Power (bns)
Acoustic Power
Jet Acoustic Power Level (dB) (bns, 2da)
Jet Acoustic Power Level (dB)
Jet Acoustic Power (bns, 2da)
Jet Acoustic Power
Surface Acoustic Power Level (dB) (bns)

Surface Acoustic Power (bns)
Lilley's Self-Noise Source (bns)
Lilley's Self-Noise Source
Lilley's Shear-Noise Source (bns)
Lilley's Shear-Noise Source
Lilley's Total Noise Source (bns)
Lilley's Total Noise Source
LEE Self-Noise X-Source (bns)
LEE Self-Noise X-Source
LEE Shear-Noise X-Source (bns)
LEE Shear-Noise X-Source
LEE Total Noise X-Source (bns)
LEE Total Noise X-Source
LEE Self-Noise Y-Source (bns)
LEE Self-Noise Y-Source
LEE Shear-Noise Y-Source (bns)
LEE Shear-Noise Y-Source
LEE Total Noise Y-Source (bns)
LEE Total Noise Y-Source
LEE Self-Noise Z-Source (bns, 3d)
LEE Self-Noise Z-Source
LEE Shear-Noise Z-Source (bns, 3d)
LEE Shear-Noise Z-Source
335

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
LEE Total Noise Z-Source (bns, 3d)
LEE Total Noise Z-Source
Table 17.14: Sensitivities Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Body Force...
Sensitivity to Body Force X-Component
Sensitivity to Body Force X
Sensitivity to Body Force Y-Component
Sensitivity to Body Force Y
Sensitivity to Body Force Z-Component
Sensitivity to Body Force Z
Sensitivity to Mass Sources
Sensitivity to Mass Sources
Table 17.15: Film Category

Category
FLUENT Variable
CFX Variable
Film...
Film Thickness
Film Thickness
Film X Velocity
Film Velocity u
Film Y Velocity
Film Velocity v
Film Z Velocity
Film Velocity w
Film Temperature
Film Temperature
Film Weber Number
Film Weber Number
Film Surface X Velocity
Film Surface Velocity u
Film Surface Y Velocity
Film Surface Velocity v
Film Surface Z Velocity
Film Surface Velocity w
Film DPM Mass Source
Film DPM Mass Source
Film DPM x-mom Source
Film DPM mom Source X
Film DPM y-mom Source
Film DPM mom Source Y
Film DPM z-mom Source
Film DPM mom Source Z
Film DPM Energy Source
Film DPM Energy Source
Film DPM Shed Mass
Film DPM Shed Mass
Film DPM Stripped Mass
Film DPM Stripped Mass
Film DPM Stripped Diameter
Film DPM Stripped Diameter
Note
The FLUENT variable XF_RF_REACTING_CHANNEL_DATA will not be read by CFD-Post.
336
Index
Symbols
.bak (backup) files, 113
.def files, 112
.err files, 113
.gtm (mesh) files, 112
.mdef files, 112
3D Viewer, 71
displaying a custom logo in, 7
shortcut menus, 75
toolbar, 73
A
animation
keyframe, 242
limitations in expressions, 243
quick, 240
animation editor, 243
icons, 243
options panel, 244
annotation, 198
ANSYS CFX files
in CFD-Post, 112
ANSYS files
in CFD-Post, 117
limitations with, 117
ANSYS logo
controlling the display in reports, 41
ANSYS Meshing files
in CFD-Post, 114
ANSYS Workbench
Files view, 61
Project Schematic , 59
Properties view, 60
shortcuts, 62
Sidebar Help, 62
tips on using, 68
Toolbox, 58
view bar, 60
workflow, 63
append
when loading state files, 92
auto annotation, 198
auto-initialise, xxiii
(see also auto-initialize)
axisymmetric geometries
calculating cylindrical velocity, 304
axisymmetric object, 168
backup (.bak) file, 113

BAK (backup) files, 113
batch mode
in CFD-Post, 9
bitmap (bmp), 109
boundary
object, 27
value-only variables, 48
C
Calculators workspace, 54
camera, 80
case branch, 26
case comparison tool, 267
case file, 112
CCL (CFX command language)
object creation, 307
object deletion, 307
overview, 307
CEL (CFX expression language)
in CFD-Post, 309
cell properties, 60
CFD-Post
command line arguments, 4
environment variables, 6
overview, 1
running in batch mode, 9
starting, 3
workspaces, 13
cfdpost command, 4
CFX command language (CCL)
object creation, 307
object deletion, 307
overview, 307
CFX-4 files
in CFD-Post, 114
CFX-Solver input file, 112
CFX-TASCflow files
in CFD-Post, 115
CGNS files
in CFD-Post, 120
chart
creating, 218
viewing using the command line, 319
clipping plane, 210
cmdb files
require ANSYS Workbench to be installed, 114
color
by variable, 19
337
Index
cycling through, 19
line, 24
object, 19
panel, 19
scale, 20
textures, 24
undefined, 21
color map, 20
color map editor
controls, 211
color map pane
defines color maps, 21
colour map, xxiii
(see also color map)
colour mode, xxiii
(see also color mode)
colour scale, xxiii
(see also color scale)
colour tab, xxiii
(see also color tab)
comfort factors macro, 251
comma vs. period
not valid as a decimal separator, 4
command editor, 271
action commands, 311
exporting data, 318
file operations, 312
importing data from, 317
loading a results file, 312
printing from, 317
reading session files, 313
reading state files, 314
readstate option actions, 315
saving state file, 313
command line
mode, 321
object creation and deletion, 307
commands
Point Cloud, 145
compare cases tool, 267
cone, 168
contour plot
creating, 183
coordinate frame
creating, 200
cp polar macro, 252
create
plane, 150
point, 142
polyline, 172
surface, 174
surface group, 178
338
surface of revolution, 168

turbo line, 179
turbo surface, 179
user surface, 174
volume, 154
vortex core region, 161
creating
object using the command line, 307
custom logo
controlling the display in reports, 41
cylinder, 168
cylindrical velocity
calculating, 304
D
Data Source file
data delimiter, 224
decimal separator
only a period is allowed, 4
DEF files, 112
default
objects, 27
deleting objects using the command line, 307
Details views
overview, 16
difference variables
calculating, 270
documentation, xxi
domain
in CFD-Post, 27
Domain Selector dialog box, 91
double buffering, 136
dsdb files
require ANSYS Workbench to be installed, 114
E
edge
length ratio, 266
element volume ratio
mesh calculator evaluates, 266
encapsulated PostScript (eps), 110
ERR files, 113
error results file, 113
examples
load command, 312
readsession command, 313
readstate command, 316
savestate command, 314
export
ANSYS load file, 106
polyline data, 100
variables on a locator, 96
exporting, 96
data using the command editor, 318
expressions
evaluating on slice planes, 51
example, 53
Expressions workspace, 51
F
face angle
face culling, 22
fan noise macro, 254
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
for Transient or Sequence charts, 220
settings, 220
theory, 220
windowing in, 221
FFT
for Transient or Sequence charts, 220
settings, 220
theory, 220
windowing in, 221
figure
changing the definition of, 81
deleting, 81
switching to, 81
figures, 80
creating, 81
file
export, 96
import, 94
load results, 89
load state, 92
quit, 111
save picture, 109
save project, 93
save state, 93
file menu, 89
file operations
from the command editor, 312
file types
displayed by CFD-Post, 111
FLUENT field variables, 323
FLUENT files
in CFD-Post, 120
font effects
in charts, 230
font size
in charts, 230
font type
in charts, 230
FSI
manual one-way mapping with Mechanical APDL
and CFX, 107
function calculator, 248
G
gas compressor performance macro, 252
gas turbine performance macro, 253
geometry, 19
global range, 20
graphical objects
for post-processing plots, 14
graphs
creating, 218
greyscale, 20
grid area
in charts, 230
GTM (mesh) files, 112
H
heat transfer coefficient, 48
help, xxi
accessing, xxiv
highlight type, 133
I
importing, 94
data from the command editor, 317
experimental data, 94
initialise all components, xxiv
(see also initialize all components)
Insert
menu, 141
instancing transformation
creating, 206
Interpolation Tolerance
option, 131
iso clip
creating, 160
isosurface
creating, 158
J
jpeg (jpg), 109
L
legend
colors, 20
creating, 202
legends, 83
light
moving, 79
339
Index
line interface mode, 321
liquid pump performance macro, 253
liquid turbine performance macro, 254
load command examples, 312
loading
results file, 89
results file from the command editor, 312
state file, 92
local range, 20
locator names
when importing files, 94
locator objects
for post-processing plots, 14
locators
definition, 141
limitations in Transient Blade Row cases, 112
M
macro calculator, 250
comfort factors, 251
cp polar, 252
fan noise, 254
gas compressor performance, 252
gas turbine performance, 253
liquid pump performance, 253
liquid turbine performance, 254
Mechanical import/export example, 106
menu
Insert, 141
tools, 235
mesh calculator, 265
connectivity number, 266
edge length ratio, 266
face angle, 265
mesh deformation scaling
animating, 241
mesh information
mesh statistics
mouse button
mapping, 78
move light, 79
O
object editor
render, 21
object visibility
controlling, 15
objects
copying for figures, 81
deleting using the command line, 319
340
moving, 80
selecting, 80
visibility of, 72, 82
one-way FSI
manual mapping with Mechanical APDL and CFX,
107
online help, xxi
accessing, xxiv
options
Angular Shift for Transient Rotating Domains, 131
Axis/Ruler Visibility, 135
background of Viewer, 134
CFD-Post Solution Units, 133
common, 135
Hide ANSYS Logo, 135
Image for Viewer background, 134
Interpolation Tolerance, 131
Object Highlighting, 134
setting for ANSYS CFD-Post, 130
Text/Edge Color, 134
Turbo, 133
outline editor
geometry, 19
view, 26
Outline workspace, 17
shortcuts, 18
overwrite
when loading state files, 92
P
particle track file
importing from FLUENT, 95
PDF files
downloading, xxiv
picking mode, 79
plane
creating, 150
sample, 283
slice, 283
png (portable network graphics), 109
point
creating, 142
Point Cloud command, 145
polyline
creating, 172
data, 100
exporting data from, 100
portable network graphics (png), 109
portable pixel map (ppm), 109
PostScript (ps), 110
ppm (portable pixel map), 109
printing
(saving a picture), 109

from the command editor, 317
probe tool, 247
ps (PostScript), 110
Q
quantitative calculations
using the command editor, 319
quantitative functions
functions calculator, 248
quick editor, 247
quitting
from the file menu, 111
R
range
global, 20
local, 20
user-specified, 20
reading state files using the command editor, 314
readsession command examples, 313
readstate
examples, 316
option actions, 315
recording
start and stop commands, 140
render, 21
texture, 24
report templates, 34
reports
controlling the display of, 40
generating, 29
publishing, 40
results file
loading, 89
loading from the command editor, 312
revolved surface, 168
rotate, 79
S
sample
plane, 283
savestate command examples, 314
saving
save project, 93
save state, 93
seeds in, 180
session
recording a new, 139
session files
in CFD-Post, 139
reading, 313
set
pivot, 79
shortcuts
common Outline view, 16
Outline tree view, 18
Turbo view, 280
Sidebar Help, 62
slice plane, 283
solution and geometry units, 92, 133
solution units, 92, 133
Solution Units dialog box, 91
spherevolume, 155
state file
append option, 92
load results file option, 89
loading, 92
overwrite option, 92
reading, 314
saving using the command editor, 313
saving using the save state dialog box, 93
stereo viewer
enabling, 83
streamlines
creating, 185
subdomain
object, 27
surface
creating, 174
surface data
format, 101
surface group
creating, 178
surface of revolution
creating, 168
symbol size
in charts, 230
synchronise camera, xxiv
(see also synchronize camera)
syntax
for named objects, 4
T
table viewer
formatting multiple cells in, 214
temperature differences
use absolute scales for, 249
temperature units
use absolute scales for temperature differences, 249
text
creating, 198
texture, 24
341
Index
timestep selector, 235
Timestep Selector
using with transient blade row cases, 237
timesteps
adding, 237
animating, 241
tools
animation, 239
Calculators workspace, 54
case comparison, 267
command editor, 271
compare cases, 267
Expressions workspace, 51
function calculator, 248
menu, 235
mesh calculator, 265
Outline workspace, 17
probe, 247
quick editor, 247
timestep selector, 235
Turbo workspace, 55
Variables workspace, 45
transient blade row
variables created, 45
Transient Blade Row
postprocessing, 111
transient flow variables
limitations in Transient Blade Row cases, 112
translate (viewer control), 79
transparency editor
controls, 211
Turbo initialisation, xxiii
(see also Turbo initialization)
turbo line
creating, 179
Turbo Line, 283
Turbo macros, 298
Turbo Plots, 284
Turbo Post
calculating velocity components, 298, 320
CCL command actions, 320
initializing all turbo components, 275, 320
Turbo Report templates, 35
Turbo reports
choosing, 38
turbo surface, 280
creating, 179
Turbo workspace, 55, 273
U
undefined
342
color, 21
values, 21
undefined colour, xxiv
(see also undefined color)
undefined nodes
affected by Interpolation Tolerance option, 131
uninitialise, xxiii
(see also uninitialize)
units, 92, 133
user specified range, 20
user surface
creating, 174
user vector variable, 48
V
Variable editor
example, 50
variables
acoustics, 335
adaption, 333
body force, 336
boundary value only, 48
calculating cylindrical velocity, 304
calculating differences, 270
cell, 332
density, 325
derivatives, 334
film, 336
FLUENT field, 323
granular pressure, 331
granular temperature, 331
grid, 332
grid (turbo), 333
NOx, 329
pdf, 328
phase model, 330
phases, 330
premixed combustion, 329
pressure, 324
properties, 331
radiation, 326
reactions, 328
residuals, 334
soot, 330
species, 328
temperature, 326
turbulence, 327
unsteady statistics, 330
user scalar, 48
user vector, 48
user-defined memory, 332
user-defined scalars, 332
velocity, 325
wall fluxes, 331
variables editor, 45
Variables tab, 45
Variables workspace, 45
vector plots, 180
vectors
creating, 180
view
changing the definition of, 81
switching to, 81
View tab, 26
viewer
accessing, 71
highlight type, 133
hotkeys, 77
shortcut menus, 75
toolbar, 73
views, 80
and backwards compatibility, 82
virtual reality modelling language (vrml), 110
volume
creating, 154
vortex core region
creating, 161
vrml (virtual reality modelling language), 110
VRML viewer
Cortona viewer is supported, 110
W
wall heat flux, 48
wall shear, 48
wireframe
object, 28
Workbench
introduction, 57
workflows, 85
working directory
setting in Workbench, 63
workspaces
CFD-Post, 13
wrl (vrml file extension), 110
Y
Yplus, 48
Z
zoom (viewer control), 78
zoom box (viewer control), 79
343
344

ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS CFD-Post User's Guide

Copyright and Trademark Information

U.S. Government Rights

1. About this Manual

2.1. Spelling Conventions

Color Map (or try Color Map Command (p. 211))

Color Mode (or try Color Mode (p. 184))

Color Scale (or try Color Scale (p. 20))

Color Tab (or try Color Details Tab (p. 19))

Turbo Initialization (or try Turbo Initialization (p. 274))

Auto-initialize (or try Requirements for Initialization (p. 275))

Uninitialize (or try Uninitializing Components (p. 276))

Initialise All Components

Undefined Color (or try Undefined Color (p. 21))

Synchronize Camera (or try Case Comparison (p. 267))

A set of tutorials that demonstrate the workflow

ANSYS CFD-Post Users

How to post-process a results file

Best-practices guides and complete details for APIs,

Chapter 1: Overview of CFD-Post

1.1. CFD-Post Features and Functionality

1.2. Advanced Features

1.3. Next Steps...

Chapter 2: Starting CFD-Post

2.1. Starting CFD-Post with the ANSYS CFX Launcher

2.1.1. Valid Syntax in CFD-Post

2.2. Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line

2.2.1. Optional Command Line Arguments

Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line

Starts CFD-Post in graphical user interface (GUI) mode (the default).

Starts CFD-Post in line interface (CFD-Post command line) mode. This

-remote specifies a remote host to run on.

-report <template> [-name

Specify the file path of the CFD-Post installation.

Start CFD-Post and load the state file <file.cst>.

Start CFD-Post and load the results file <file.res>.

Start CFD-Post and load the session file <file.cse>.

Display a summary of the currently set environment variables.

2.3. Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables

Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables

Allows user-defined macros to load at start-up.

CFXEnables adjusting the zero-theta location in single-domain cases.

Enables you to display a custom logo image in the viewer.

filepath: path to the image file

Allows placing the viewer camera to left/right eye position.

Applicable to spherical backgrounds only.

Running in Batch Mode

2.4. Running in Batch Mode

<CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost -batch <filename.cse>

<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch <filename.cse>

<CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res>

<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch <filename.cse> <filename.res>

2.4.1. Example: Pressure Calculation on Multiple Files using Batch Mode

Create a session file based on a results file.

Select Session > New Session from the main menu.

Enter batchtest.cse as the session file name and click Save.

Click Apply to create the point at location 0, 0, 0.

Select Tools > Command Editor.

Enter the following into the command window:

Click Process to process the commands.